Paper 2

PMT
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2006 question paper
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2, maximum raw mark 80
These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements
of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks.
They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

IGCSE – May/June 2006 0625 02
TARGET
GRADE MARK
1 (a) larger area F B1
smaller pressure F B1
(b) (i) get larger OR get firmer F B1
(ii) molecules move faster )

more collisions (per second) ) any 2 2C B1 + B1
pressure increased )
(c) (i) increases F B1
(ii) smaller volume F B1

more collisions (per second) C B1
anywhere in (b)(ii) or (c)(ii), collisions with walls C B1
9
2 (a) 6.0 ± 0.1 )

2.4 ± 0.1 ) -1 each error or omission 2F B2
3.1 ± 0.1 )
(b) AB x BC x CD OR l x b x h OR his figures shown multiplied F B1
(c) cm3 OR cu.cm OR cubic cm F B1

4
3 (a) P and Q F B1
(b) R and S F B1
(c) (i) D = M/V in any form, including our figures F B1
(ii) 57.5/25 C C1
2.3 C A1
g/cm3 C B1
6
4 (a) chemical, gravitational, internal, kinetic 2F,2C B1 x 4

(if more than 4 ticked, use + = 0 )
(b) kinetic NOT internal F B1
(c) potential F B1
(d) chemical C B1
7
5 (a) idea of greater speed F B1

idea of molecules further apart C B1
(b) (i) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

e.g. thermometer, thermostat, bimetal strip, rivets, fitting steel tyres F B1
(ii) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

e.g. expansion gaps in bridges etc, overhead cables, cracking glass C B1
4
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006

PMT

6 (a) (i) wavelength labelled clearly ± 3mm F C1

wavelength labelled clearly ± 1mm C A1
(ii) horizontal line F M1

anywhere between top & bottom of wave pattern C A1
(b) (measure time for) (count number of) (measure time)

(a number of ) OR (waves passing ) OR (for 1 wave ) F M1
(waves to pass ) ( ) (to pass )
f = no. of waves OR in 1 second OR f = 1/T F A1
time 6
7 (a) ray bent down at first surface F M1

not below normal F A1
ray bent down at second surface C B1
(b) (i) dispersion ticked F B1
(ii) red C B1
(iii) violet C B1
(allow B1,B0 if red and violet both written but interchanged) 6
8 (a) end/point on magnet C B1

idea of pointing N (when freely suspended) F B1
(b) repulsive F B1
(c) (i) S at top and N at bottom F B1
(ii) disappears F B1
5
9 (a) strontium-90 F M1
decays most slowly OR longest half-life F A1
(b) (i) points correctly plotted ± ½ small square -1 each error or omission 3F B3
(ii) reasonable curve F B1
(iii) 8 (days) ± 0.5 OR his correct value ± 0.5 C B1

correct working shown on graph (minimum: dot on line) C B1
8
10 (a) (i) A and B (both) OR A and C (both) C B1
(ii) filament F B1
(iii) electrons ticked F B1
(iv) line along axis (by eye) OR conical beam along axis F B1
(v) light or glow indicated somehow F B1
(b) beam deflection shown F C1

beam deflected upwards C A1
indication of curve (condone curve outside electric field) C B1
(c) idea of no obstruction for cathode rays/electrons C B1

9

PMT

11 (a) (i) 10 x 2.5 F C1

25 (m) F A1
(ii) speed = distance/time in any form F C1

500/10 F M1
50 (s) F A1
(b) 75/2.5 C C1
30 (m/s) C A1
(c) accelerated F B1
(d) total distance = 3000 (m) F C1

total time = 150 (s) F C1
average speed = total distance/total time C C1
3000/150 C C1
20 (m/s) C A1
13
12 L1 joined to R3 or R1 F B1
L2 joined to R4 F B1
L4 joined to R1 F B1
3

PMT
Centre Number Candidate Number Name

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Answer all questions.

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use
This document consists of 16 printed pages.

MML 10757 3/05 S99216/2
© UCLES 2006 [Turn over
PMT
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 (a) For a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes
by. Unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put the
chair on a large flat board, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
chair
board
soft
ground
Fig. 1.1
Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
3 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) A pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). A valve in the pump becomes blocked,
as shown in Fig. 1.3.
air
blocked piston
valve
direction of motion of piston
Fig. 1.3
(i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air
trapped in the pump.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06 [Turn over

PMT
4 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block.
C
B
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your
values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures.
length of AB = ......................... cm
length of BC = ......................... cm
length of CD = ........................ cm [2]
(b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not
attempt a calculation.
[1]
(c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block?
unit of volume = ........................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
5 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance.
Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water.
measuring
cylinder reading Q
reading P
water
stone
balance
reading R reading S
(a) (b)
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(c) In a certain experiment,
mass of stone = 57.5 g,
volume of stone = 25 cm3.

(i) Write down the equation linking density, mass and volume.
[1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the stone.
density of stone = ........................ [3]

PMT
6 For
Examiner's
Use
4 A piece of fruit is falling from a tree.
Fig. 4.1
(a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy.
Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit.
chemical
electrical
gravitational (PE)
internal (thermal)
kinetic (KE)
light
sound
strain [4]
(b) Which form of energy increases as the fruit falls?
.................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls?
.................................................................... [1]
(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?
.................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06
PMT
7 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is
heated.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Most substances expand when they are heated.

(i) State one example where such expansion is useful.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water.
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully mark and label

(i) the wavelength of the waves, [2]
(ii) the level of the flat, still water surface after the waves have passed. [2]
(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism.
screen
air air
no
rm
al
of
ray ht
lig
blue
Fig. 7.1
With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and
into the air until it reaches the screen. [3]
(b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of
colours that can be seen on the screen.
(i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box.
convergence
diffraction
dispersion
reflection [1]
(ii) Which colour is deviated least by the prism? ..................................................... [1]
(iii) Which colour is deviated most by the prism? ..................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) State what is meant by the north pole of a magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together.
What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.
magnet
iron
bar
Fig. 8.1
(i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the
iron bar.
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the
iron bar. [1]
(ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is
taken away.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

PMT
10 For
Examiner's
Use
9 (a) The table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances.
substance half-life
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
strontium-90 28 years
Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample
will have the greatest activity in 1 year’s time? Explain your answer.
substance with greatest activity after 1 year ....................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive
substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.
Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cow’s milk.
The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks.
The results are shown below.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
activity
––––––– 1000 547 294 162 88
counts / s
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) On Fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table.
1000
800
activity
_______
counts / s
600
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 9.1
(ii) Draw the best-fit curve through your points.

(iii) Use your graph to find the half-life of iodine-131, showing clearly on your graph
how you obtained your value.
half-life of iodine-131 = ....................... days

[6]

PMT
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced.
fluorescent
filament anode screen
C D
Fig. 10.1
(i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission.
Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected?
between point .................. and point .................... [1]

(ii) Where does the thermionic emission occur?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons [1]
(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the
electrical connections are correctly made. [1]
(v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
13 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in Fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube.
A high p.d. is connected between the plates.
+V
–V
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw the path of the cathode rays. [3]
(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it.
State why this vacuum is necessary.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
14 For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car.
500 m 1000 m 1500 m
start end
of oil drops tree pylon
of
town town on road
Fig. 11.1
The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road.
(a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town.
(i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.
distance between oil drops = ................... m [2]

(ii) The town is 500 m across. Show that it takes the car 50 s to travel through the
town.
[3]
(b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of
1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all
75 m apart.
Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.
speed of car = ................ m/s [2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) What has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree?
Tick one box.
The car has accelerated.
The car has decelerated.
The car has travelled at constant speed. [1]
(d) Each of the three parts of the journey takes 50 s.
Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of
the town and the pylon.
average speed = ................ m/s [5]

PMT
16 For
Examiner's
Use
12 In the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. In the boxes of the right
column are means of protecting against those hazards.
From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an
example.
electrical hazard means of protection
loose live wire touches fuse or circuit-breaker

metal case of appliance in the circuit
worn insulation on cable use of switches with

to an appliance a nylon pull-cord
steam in a washroom earth wire connected to the

condenses inside a switch metal case of the appliance
wires get hot because visual check of cables

current is too high before connecting appliance
[3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT

NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate
fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer
are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that
they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not
write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the
ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means "correct answer only".
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing
in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for
a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o. means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify
the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the unit
is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark scheme.
Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
© UCLES 2007
PMT

TARGET MARK
GRADE
1 (a) seconds hand at 35 s F B1

minutes hand at or just to R of 60 (up to ½ division) C B1
(b) seconds hand at 55 s F B1

minutes hand between 4 and 5 C B1
(c) 4 minutes 20 s F B1
[Total: 5]
2 (a) speed = distance/time in any form OR 4800/12 F C1

400 (s) F A1
(b) straight line up to 12 m/s, 20s ± ½ small square F B1

horizontal line for 400 s (e.c.f. for start point and from (a)) F B1
straight line down to 0 m/s at 500 s F B1
(c) distance = ½ base x height

OR area under graph OR equation of motion F C1
accel. distance = 120 m C A1
decel. distance = 480 m C A1
NOTE: NO MARKS for using (d) and then going back to (c)
total distance = 120 + 4800 + 480 stated C A1
(d) average speed = total distance/total time

OR 5400/500 OR 5400/920 F C1
10.8 (m/s) OR 11 (m/s) c.a.o. F A1
[Total: 11]
3 (a) (i) indication of force at A F M1

upward vertical force OR upward force at rt. angles to card C A1
(ii) largest distance from hinge F B1
(b) when C of M lies outside base (idea of) F C1

when vertical through C of M lies outside base (idea of) C A1
(c) (i) less than F B1
(ii) idea of C of M of box raised OR matchbox less stable C B1

NOT matchbox is taller
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

4 (a) (i) large (bird) F M1
(ii) greater weight/mass/force of gravity/heavier F A1
(b) greater F B1
the same F B1
(c) small (bird) F B1
(d) lost/turned into/decreased (accept turned into KE) F M1

as heat ignore mention of sound C A1
[Total: 7]
5 (a) solid: 2, 3 and 6 ticked -1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras) F, C B2

gas: 1, 4 and 5 ticked -1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras) F, C B2
(b) molecules breaking free (of surface) NOT turns into a gas F M1
mention of higher energy/faster/mols near surface C A1
[Total: 6]
6 (a) [mark in pairs, use + = 0]

temp. decreasing F B1
volume increasing F B1
(b) (i) moved out/backwards/to the R F M1
(ii) idea of raised temp increases pressure,

therefore move piston out to decrease pressure C A1
[Total: 4]
7 (a) (i) (good) conductor OR equiv. NOT conductor of electricity F B1
(ii) poor conductor OR (good) insulator (allow electrical)

OR to stop your hand getting burned/prevent shock F B1
(b) (i) conduction F B1
(ii) any 2 of conduction, convection, radiation ticked F, C B1+B1

(-1 if evaporation ticked)
(c) equal to 40W C B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

8 (a) 50 F B1
(b) his (a) x 4 F C1

200 (Hz) e.c.f. F A1
(c) Yes, because it is between 20 – 20,000 Hz or more than 20 Hz C B1

allow e.c.f. from (b) answer must tally with (b)
[Total: 4]
9 (a) (i) series OR potential divider F B1
(ii) 12 (Ω) F B1
(iii) I = V/R in any form F C1

6/his (ii) F C1
0.5 e.c.f. F A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR a F B1
(iv) his (iii) x 10 F C1

5 (V) e.c.f. F A1
(v) his (iv) C B1
(b) (i) 1. 6 (V) C B1

2. 0 (V) C B1
(ii) C or clear mark positioned below A but not lower than bottom of C B1
the word contact”
allow e.c.f. only if 6 and 0 in (i) are reversed
[Total: 12]
10 (a) connect wire across/to millivoltmeter F B1

(any mention of connecting to electricity/battery gets B0 here)
move wire across magnetic field OR move magnet past wire

OR dip magnet into coil made of the wire
(condone connect to battery/electricity here) F B1
(b) millivoltmeter deflects F B1
(c) generator OR transformer OR induction coil

OR coil on a car OR microphone
NOT relay/motor/power station etc F B1
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

11 (a) dot to right of S: horiz. line from end/pole, to right (must not curve) F B1
dot to left of N: horiz. line from end/pole, to left (must not curve) F B1
dot by top LH corner: smooth curve from end/pole, above magnet,
to equivalent point at south end F B1
dot below magnet: smooth curve between N and S F M1
curve leaving & entering side of magnet, not ends C A1
(b) arrow clearly indicating N to S F B1
[Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) 2, 2, 0 (accept blank for 0) F B1
(ii) 0, 0, 1 (accept blank for 0) F B1
(b) protons: 11 F B1
neutrons: 13 C B1
electrons: same as his protons F B1
(c) (i) 0 C B1
(ii) -1 C B1
(iii) β OR electron OR e OR B OR beta C B1

NOT b
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

*8187295232*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions. 1
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 2
3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.
SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25803/4

PMT
1 The mechanical stop-clock shown in Fig. 1.1 has For

Examiner’s
a seconds hand, which rotates once every minute Use
and a minutes hand, which rotates once every hour.
start reset stop

60
55 5
50 10
minutes hand
45 15
seconds hand
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway
past his school.
He sets the clock to zero (both hands vertical).
As train 1 passes, he starts the clock and leaves it running.
After 35 s, train 2 passes.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2
passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
(b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started. For
Examiner’s
On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3 Use
passes. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.3
(c) Calculate the time interval between train 2 and train 3.
time interval = ............... min ............... s [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
2 In a training session, a racing cyclist’s journey is in three stages. For

Examiner’s
Stage 1 He accelerates uniformly from rest to 12 m/s in 20 s. Use
Stage 2 He cycles at 12 m/s for a distance of 4800 m.
Stage 3 He decelerates uniformly to rest.
The whole journey takes 500 s.
(a) Calculate the time taken for stage 2.
time = ............... s [2]
(b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclist’s ride. [3]
14
12
speed /
m/s 10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
(c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m. For
Examiner’s
Use
[4]
(d) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist.
average speed = ............... m/s [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
3 A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape “hinges”. For
This is shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
A plank of
B wood
C
Fig. 3.1
(a) The cardboard is lifted as shown, using a force applied either at A or B or C.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as
possible.
[2]
(ii) Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The
cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
stiff
cardboard
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.2
State the condition for the box of matches to fall over.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
(c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated. For
Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.3
(i) Complete the sentence below, using either the words “greater than” or “the same
as” or “less than”.
In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before
the box of matches falls is …………………………………………… the angle
before the box of matches falls in Fig. 3.2. [1]
(ii) Give a reason for your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
4 In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree.
(a) (i) Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1]
(ii) Explain your answer to (a)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height
as the birds.
How does the increase in the squirrel’s gravitational potential energy compare with that
of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below.
Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
energy is ................................................................. .
Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
energy is ................................................................. . [2]
(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of
the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The small bird flies back down to the ground.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07
PMT
5 (a) Here is a list of descriptions of molecules in matter. For

Examiner’s
Use
description solid gas
free to move around from place to place
can only vibrate about a fixed position
closely packed
relatively far apart
almost no force between molecules
strong forces are involved between molecules
In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the
molecules in
(i) a solid,
(ii) a gas. [4]
(b) The water in a puddle of rainwater is evaporating.
Describe what happens to the molecules when the water evaporates.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period For
of time. Examiner’s
Use
pressure
time
Fig. 6.1
Which of the following statements could explain this variation of pressure?
Tick two statements.
The temperature of the gas is increasing.
The temperature of the gas is decreasing.
The volume of the container is increasing.
The volume of the container is decreasing. [2]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
11
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston. For
Examiner’s
Use
cylinder piston
gas
Fig. 6.2
The temperature of the gas is raised.
(i) State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of
the gas constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State your reasons for your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
12
7 An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A For
soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
metal cylinder plastic handle

with heater coil
copper tip
inside
lead to
electricity
supply
Fig. 7.1
Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the
copper tip.
(a) (i) Suggest why the tip is made of copper.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Suggest why the handle is made of plastic.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the
heat is used to melt the solder.
(i) State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?
Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think
are correct).
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation [2]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
13
(c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even For
though the heater coil is constantly generating heat. Examiner’s
Use
The soldering iron is rated at 40 W.
What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box.
greater than 40 W
equal to 40 W
less than 40 W [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
14
8 A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses For
against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening. Examiner’s
Use
3000 rotations / minute
springy
metal strip
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.
number of rotations per second = ....................... [1]
(b) Calculate the frequency of the sound caused by this arrangement.
frequency = ................ Hz [2]
(c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason
for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
15
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected to a 6 V battery. For

Examiner’s
Use
2Ω
6V X
10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(i) What name do we use to describe this way of connecting resistors?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
combined resistance = .................. [1]
(iii) Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ...................... [4]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10
resistor.
potential difference = .................. V [2]
(v) State the potential difference between terminals X and Y.
.................. V [1]

PMT
16
(b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a For
sliding contact. Examiner’s
Use
A
sliding
contact
6V X
B
Y
Fig. 9.2
(i) State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at
1. end A of the resistor, .............. V
2. end B of the resistor. .............. V [2]
(ii) The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference
between X and Y is 5 V.
On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact. [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
17
10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You For
are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Describe what you would do.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Name a device which makes use of electromagnetic induction.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the For
surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the Examiner’s
north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots. Use
N S
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the
four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge
of the board. [5]
(b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
19
12 Three particles you have learned about are For

Examiner’s
protons, neutrons and electrons. Use
(a) How many of each of these particles
(i) are found in an -particle,
number of protons = ...................
number of neutrons = ...................
number of electrons = ................... [1]
(ii) are found in a -particle?
number of protons = ...................
number of neutrons = ...................
number of electrons = ................... [1]
(b) Sodium-24 can be represented as 24

11Na.
How many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 24

11Na?
number of protons = .....................
number of neutrons = .....................
number of electrons = ..................... [3]
(c) A nucleus of sodium-24 decays to become magnesium-24, by the emission of one

particle. The equation below describes this change.
The symbol yx represents the emitted particle.
24Na 24 Mg + yx
11 12
(i) State the value of x. .................... [1]
(ii) State the value of y. .................... [1]
(iii) What type of particle is ? .................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/07
PMT

0625 PHYSICS
demonstrated.
examination.
PMT

NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS AND OTHER MATTERS

scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate’s answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in Questions 1, 3 and 12.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
© UCLES 2008
PMT

1 (a) (i) 9.2 ± 0.2 (cm) [B1]
(ii) Centre of mass at centre of rod anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘i’
and the and a line vertically above the left hand ‘1’ in ‘Fig. 1.1’, anywhere across
diameter including the surface but NOT outside the surface [B1]
(b) Centre of mass clearly to left of centre, inside the rod [M1]
anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘t’ in ‘to’ and a line vertically above the ‘t’
in the first ‘the’ AND on axis (by eye) [A1]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) (i) suitable scale, probably 5 small squares = 10 s, no awkward ratios [B1]
(ii) (if no scale written on graph, assume our scale)

straight line from origin [B1]
reaching 25 m/s after 10 s NOT horizontal from (0,25) – (10,25) [B1]
horizontal from 10 – 50 s [B1]
straight line down from end of his horizontal line [B1]
reaching axis at 70 s [B1]
(b) average speed = total distance/total time [C1]

1375/his 70 [C1]
19.64… e.c.f. any number of sig. figs [C1]
20 (m/s) e.c.f. [A1]
[Total: 10]
3 (a) clockwise: F3 [B1]
anticlockwise: F1 [B1]
F2 [B1]
(b) c [M1]
clockwise moment (accept moment on RH side) was too big [A1]
reduce moment by reducing distance [A1]
note: moment must be mentioned in both of the last 2 marks; accept turning effect,
torque and leverage as alternatives to moment
(c) any value bigger than 29 g and less than 30 g, but NOT 29 g or 30 g [B1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

4 (a) (i) P.E. (however expressed)

(e.g. GPE, gravitational, gravity, potential, positional) [B1]
(ii) chemical [B1]
(b) electrician AND because he is heavier/greater force/greater weight/greater gravity

force/ greater mass [B1]
(c) time AND either work done OR energy used OR equivalent

OR weight AND velocity/speed [B1]
[Total: 4]
5 (a) nucleus OR nuclei OR α-particle NOT nucleon or nuclide [B1]
(b) electron(s) OR e allow β-particle [B1]
(c) neutron(s) OR n [B1]

proton(s) OR p [B1]
(d) alpha OR α NOT a or A [B1]
(e) electron(s) OR e allow β-particles [B1]
[Total: 6]
6 (condone rays not drawn with a ruler, if reasonably straight)
(a) straight ray through centre of lens (±1 mm on axis by eye) (ignore any arrows) [B1]
(b) (i) ray correct, either through pole or

reasonably parallel to axis and then through F1 (±1 mm in either case)
NOTE: any refraction must be at centre line or at both surfaces [B1]
(ii) (condone image not labelled if it is clear where it is; condone image labelled as
‘object’ if image line clearly drawn)
image located at his intersection, even if intersection of incorrect rays [C1]
image drawn between axis and his intersection, and not beyond either [A1]
(c) clear indication of screen at candidate’s image, using vertical line [B1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

7 (a) gas )
solid ) any 1 correct [B1]
liquid ) remaining 2 both correct [B1]
i.e. gas, solid, liquid: 2 marks gas, liquid, solid: 1 mark liquid, solid, gas: 1 mark
liquid, gas, solid: 0 marks solid, liquid, gas: 0 marks solid, gas, liquid: 1 mark
(b) (i) liquid [B1]
(ii) idea that molecules/particles gain energy OR move faster (condone ‘vibrating’) [B1]
idea of molecules/particles becoming gaseous/breaking free [B1]
(iii) boiling, at one temperature only AND evaporation at any temperature [B1]
boiling throughout liquid AND evaporation at surface only [B1]
(c) (i) solid [B1]
(ii) 660 (°C) allow 659 (°C) NOT –660 (°C) [B1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) (i) 1 ice point OR freezing point of water OR melting point of ice NOT just ‘freezing
point’ [B1]
2 ice OR freezing water [B1]
pure or melting or ice-water mix [B1]
3 0 (°C) OR 273 K OR 273 °K [B1]
(ii) 1 steam point OR boiling point of water

NOT just ‘boiling point’ [B1]
2 steam [B1]
boiling (water) OR standard pressure [B1]
3 100 (°C) OR 373 K OR 373 °K [B1]
°C OR K OR °K used in either of the parts 3 [B1]
(b) thermal capacity OR heat capacity, allow specific heat capacity [B1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

9 (a) correct symbol [B1]
(b) D A C B all 4 in correct order (allow B1 for any 2 in correct place) [B2]
(c) (note: mark 1 and 2 together) (1 mark max from any one line below)
too great a current might flow )
fuse might not melt NOT fuse won’t work ) any 2 [B1,B1]
fuse won’t protect OR appliance might be damaged )
wiring might overheat/melt or equivalent )
fire might be caused )
NOT circuit broken, NOT short circuit, NOT electric shock
[Total: 5]
10 (a) R1 + R2 in symbols or figures [C1]

60 (Ω) [A1]
(b) voltmeter correctly shown between X and Y (or equivalent), must be correct symbol [B1]
(c) (i) I = V/R [C1]

1.5/60 e.c.f from (a) [C1]
0.025 [A1]
A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR mA etc. [B1]
(ii) 1.5 (V) [B1]
(d) (i) decreases [B1]
(ii) decreases [B1]
(iii) 60 (Ω) e.c.f from (a) [B1]
[Total: 11]
11 (a) (i) no current in circuit OR no voltage in circuit [B1]

e.m.f. induced in AB is cancelled by e.m.f. induced in BC [B1]
(ii) idea of straightening out ABC OR rotate ABC (on its axis)
OR connect G across AB or CB [B1]
(b) any valid answer

e.g. transformer, induction coil, generator, dynamo, microphone, alternator, computer
NOT motor, relay
(use right + wrong = 0 for incorrect extras) [B1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

12 (a) anything less than, or equal to, 30 min [C1]

between 22 and 27 min, inclusive [A1]
(b) (i) iodine(-128) OR the second one [B1]
(ii) radon-220 OR the first one [M1]

NOTE: NOT radon-222
NOT just radon, unless mention of 55 s in ‘why’ section
shortest half-life OR decays most rapidly OR takes least time to decay

NOT ‘because it only has a half-life of 55 s’ [A1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

*3498617057*
PHYSICS 0625/02
1 hour 15 minutes
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6
PMT
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a uniform rod. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 1.1
(i) Use your rule to find the length of the rod.
length = ...........................................cm [1]
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C.
[1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker
at one end.
Fig. 1.2
Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass
of this rod will be.
[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
2 A motorcyclist is travelling along a country road, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
1375 m
Fig. 2.1
The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B.
1. The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to
25 m/s in 10 s.
2. It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.
3. It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A.
35
30
speed
m/s 25
20
15
10
0
0
time/s
Fig. 2.2
(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2,
(i) a suitable time scale, [1]

(ii) the graph of the motion of the motorcycle. [5]
(b) The distance from A to B is 1375 m.
Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to
the nearest m/s.
average speed = ..........................................m/s [4]

[Total: 10]
PMT
3 A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in For
Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
b c
a
F1 F2 F3
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which of the forces exert(s)
a clockwise moment, ...................
an anticlockwise moment? ................... [3]
(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.
Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the
beam? Explain your answer.
Which distance? ..............................................................................................................
Explanation
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.
?
Fig. 3.2
The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.
He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he
cannot exactly balance the beam.
His best attempts are
masses used effect

10 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g, 2 g beam tips down slightly on the left-hand side
20 g, 10 g beam tips down slightly on the right-hand side
Estimate the mass of the object.

mass = ............................................. g [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08
PMT
4 For
(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform Examiner’s
of a special tower, in order to reach a Use
high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Which form of energy, possessed by the

electrician’s body,
(i) is greater at the top of the tower than

it was at the bottom,
..................................................... [1]
(ii) is less at the top of the tower than it

was at the bottom?
..................................................... [1]
(b) One of the electrician’s assistants also

climbs up to the platform. The assistant
weighs less than the electrician.
Which of the two people does the most

work climbing up to the platform, and
why?
Which person? ........................................
Why? .......................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
............................................................. [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.
Which quantities does he need to know in order to do this?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
5 In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central For
mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
central
mass
orbiting
particles
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the name given to the central mass.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the orbiting particles.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made.
........................................................... and .................................................................... [2]
(d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in
radioactive decay.
Which particle is this? ................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens. For
Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is
known. [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.2,
(i) copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image
formed by the lens, [1]
(ii) mark and label the image. [2]
(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the
focused image. [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
7 (a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the For
three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas. Examiner’s
Use
In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the left-
hand column.
state in which the

condition of the molecules
substance exists
The molecules are a great distance apart, moving
very rapidly, with negligible interaction. The
substance occupies all the space available.
The molecules are only able to vibrate rapidly about
fixed positions. The substance does not need a
container to maintain its shape.
The molecules move about amongst each other,
with attractive forces between them. The substance
does not necessarily fill its container.
[2]
(b) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance boils?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Describe what happens to the molecules during boiling.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) State two differences between boiling and evaporating.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance melts?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Aluminium melts at 660 °C. At what temperature does it freeze?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
8 (a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between For
these is divided into equal divisions. Examiner’s
Use
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 8.1
A thermometer is being calibrated with the Celsius scale.
(i) 1. Write down another name for the lower fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. How is this temperature achieved?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
3. What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [1]
(ii) 1. Write down another name for the upper fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. How is this temperature achieved?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
3. What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [2]
(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at
room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped,
the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.
Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.
The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the
aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block. [1]
[Total: 10]

PMT
10
9 Fuses are often included in circuits. For

Examiner’s
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse. Use
[1]
(b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how
a fuse protects a circuit.
A
fuse wire heats up
B
circuit is broken,
so current stops
C
fuse wire melts
D
current becomes
too high
On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.
State two possible outcomes of this mistake.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
11
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit. For

Examiner’s
Use
R1 R2
X Y
Fig. 10.1
Resistance R1 = 25 Ω and resistance R2 = 35 Ω. The cell has zero resistance.
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2.
resistance = ........................................... Ω [2]
(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure
the potential difference between X and Y. [1]
(c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
(i) Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = .................................................. [4]
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the cell.
potential difference = ............................................ V [1]

PMT
12
(d) The resistance of the variable resistor is increased. For

Examiner’s
(i) What happens to the current in the circuit? Tick one box. Use
increases
stays the same
decreases [1]
(ii) What happens to the voltmeter reading? Tick one box.
increases
stays the same
decreases [1]
(iii) State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V.
resistance = ............................................Ω [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
13
11 (a) An experimenter uses a length of wire ABC in an attempt to demonstrate For

electromagnetic induction. The wire is connected to a sensitive millivoltmeter G. Examiner’s
Use
B
N
A
S G
C
Fig. 11.1
Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the
expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic
field.
(i) Explain why there is no deflection shown on G.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) What change should be made in order to observe a deflection on G?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Name one device that makes use of electromagnetic induction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
14
12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes For
with time. Examiner’s
Use
activity
time/minutes
counts/s
0 128
30 58
60 25
90 11
120 5
Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.
half-life = .........................................min [2]
(b) The half-lives of various substances are given below.
radon-220 55 seconds
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
(i) If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) A sample of each of these substances is obtained.
Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one
year, and why?
Which? .....................................................................................................................
Why? ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/M/J/08

PMT
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
PMT


for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
examination.
PMT
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper

Notes about Mark Scheme Symbols and Other Matters
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate’s answer.
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate’s answer. If a
scored.
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
© UCLES 2009
PMT

1 (a) 35 B1
(b) vehicles/time in any form, letters words or numbers C1

700/35 e.c.f. (a) C1
20 e.c.f. (a) A1 [4]
2 work force of gravity on a body
how big the body is
mass power of a given force
weight ÷ mass
weight amount of matter in a body
force × distance moved
density mass ÷ volume
the acceleration due to gravity B1×3 [3]
3 (a) 1500 B1
(b) second box ticked (use + = 0 for extras) B1
(c) constant speed B1
(d) award B1 from each of any 2 lines:
increased wind/air resistance OR headwind OR roof rack )

rough(er) ground OR flat tyre OR increased road resistance/friction ) B1 + B1
brakes applied )
IGNORE increased speed/changed car shape/increased load

IGNORE driver decided to stop [5]
4 (a) 88 – 92 B1
(b) his (a) B1
(c) 840 e.c.f. (b) B1
(d) left level up and right level down B1

L at 80 and R at 150 B1 [5]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

5 (a) (i) rapid/rapid heat transfer/gain OR rapid reading/response

NOT sensitivity/temperature transfer B1
(ii) strength OR reduce chance of breaking OR to magnify the thread

ignore any mention of safety B1
(iii) sensitivity or equiv. (e.g. idea of large movement of thread) B1
(b) mercury OR alcohol B1
(c) 0 and 100 B1

°C on at least 1 temperature B1 [6]
6 (a) (i) decreasing OR getting lower/quieter/softer M1
(ii) amplitude/length of wave decreased OR waves got smaller

NOT wavelength decreased A1
(b) (i) nothing OR constant M1
(ii) waves equally spaced OR wavelength/period/T constant A1
(c) (i) 12 – 14 B1
(ii) 1. 300 (waves, oscillations, vibrations) every second B1

2. 1/300 (s) OR 0.0033 OR 0.003 with indication of recurring 3 B1
3. 1/his300 × his 12 OR his (1/300) C1
0.04 (s) e.c.f. A1
(d) (i) yes/ )

)
(ii) yes/ ) –1 e.e.o.o. B2

)
(iii) no/ ) [11]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

7 (a) (i) 1. normal correct, by eye B1

2. i correctly labelled B1
(ii) i = r in any recognisable form accept incidence = refraction

NOT sin i = sin r B0 for refraction, refrection, reflaction B1
(iii) V B1
(iv) none B1
(b) be reasonably generous:

correct inversion M1
stem approx. parallel to card edge A1 [7]
8 (a) (i) iron (rod) B1
(ii) plastic (rod) B1
(b) S S N B1
(c) – somewhere on or near rod D, near end C

condone extra + or – signs unless contradict B1
(d) one needle pointing N, by eye C1

both needles pointing N, by eye A1 [6]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

9 Apply max 1 un. pen. in (a) and (b) together. Apply at first instance of unit penalty.
(a) (i) 6 V B1
(ii) 50 mA OR 0.05 A B1
(b) R = V/I in any form, letters, words, numbers OR V/I C1

6/50 OR 6/0.05 e.c.f. (a) OR 0.12 Ω (0.12 Ω gets 2, 0.12 gets 1) C1
120 Ω c.a.o. accept V/A instead of Ω A1
(c) (i) increase resistance/ohms OR add another resistor

OR decrease e.m.f./voltage/p.d. C1
double resistance/ohms OR add another R (in series)
OR halve e.m.f./voltage/p.d. OR use 3 V cell/battery
OR remove one cell/battery OR use only 1 cell/battery A1
(ii) idea of breaking the circuit OR removing battery

OR make voltage zero OR switch off B1
(d) (i) infinite OR very large (if figure quoted, must be [25 A)
NOT just “higher” B1
(ii) idea of damage but NOT “blows up” C1

ammeter – coil burnt out OR pointer bent )
battery – overheats OR runs flat quickly ) any 1 A1
circuit – overheat/burn out/insulation melts )
NOT it trips out [11]
10 (a) XY would move up/anticlockwise/motion reversed/pan moves down B1
(b) (i) 1. sensible choice of F scale ) B1

) both lost if scales reversed
sensible choice of I scale ) B1
2. 4 points correctly plotted (± ½ small square) –1 e.e.o.o. B2
– B0 if ridiculous scale on either axis (e.g. non-linear, 3, 7, 9 etc.)
– can award both marks if scales interchanged but otherwise O.K.
– if any blob clearly >1 square diameter, then –1 for each (max 2)
3. reasonable straight line through his points, including 0,0 B1
(ii) 0.036 – 0.038 OR his correct value ± 0.0005 (B0 if ridiculous scale) B1
(c) (electric) motor OR ammeter OR galvanometer OR voltmeter

NOT generator/electronic balance B1 [8]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

11 For (a), (b) and (c), mark the names, not the box
(a) CATHODE in bottom left box B1
(b) UP & DOWN in top middle box B1
(c) GLOWS in bottom right box B1
(d) battery shown connected across heater filament, any recognisable symbol
ignore extra wires if it would work B1
(e) electrons NOT beta particles NOT positive electron B1
(f) vacuum ticked (use + = 0 for extras) B1 [6]
12 (1) electron(s) electromagnetic radiation/waves/rays B1 + B1

OR e (ignore any prefix or suffix) NOT just rays etc.
~ 8000 units OR very large zero/nothing B1 + B1

NOT small/almost nothing
NOT – (dash)
negative allow – (dash) no charge OR zero/neutral B1 + B1

NOT negligible
NOT – (dash)
idea of not very (penetrating) idea of extremely (penetrating) B1 + B1

OR stopped (but if a substance is OR not stopped (but if a substance is
mentioned, it must be appropriate, mentioned, it must be appropriate)
not air)
NOT “not penetrating” NOT very/strongly/highly penetrating
NOT slowly penetrating NOT very fast penetrating [8]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

*4743961177*
PHYSICS 0625/02
1 hour 15 minutes
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use
1
appropriate units.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 5
10
11
12
Total
SPA SHW 00151 2/08 T76303/3

PMT
1 A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy For
road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles Examiner’s
per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings. Use
12
11 1
10 2
appearance of clock at beginning of investigation 9 3
8 4
7 5
6
12
11 1
10 2
appearance of clock at end of investigation 9 3
8 4
7 5
6
vehicles counted travelling left to right = 472
vehicles counted travelling right to left = 228
(a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.
counting time = ......................................... min [1]
(b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.
vehicles per minute = ................................................ [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
2 In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the For
Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions Examiner’s
of the quantities in the left-hand column. Use
Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you.
There is only one definition for each quantity.
work force of gravity on a body
how big the body is
mass power of a given force
weight ÷ mass
weight amount of matter in a body
force × distance moved
density mass ÷ volume
the acceleration due to gravity

[3]
[Total: 3]

PMT
3 The car in Fig. 3.1 is on a level road. For

Examiner’s
Use
500 N 2000 N force
frictional forces propelling car forwards
Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.
resultant force = ............................................. N [1]
(b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.
travels forward at constant speed
travels forward with increasing speed
travels forward with decreasing speed
travels backward at constant speed
travels backward with increasing speed
travels backward with decreasing speed
remains at rest
[1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
(c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the For
car? Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a For
gas supply. Examiner’s
Use
mm
300
250
from a
gas supply 200
150
100
50
mercury
0
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.
difference = ......................................... mm [1]
(b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of
mercury?
excess pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is 750 mm of mercury.
Calculate the actual pressure of the gas supply.
actual pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]
(d) The gas pressure now decreases by 20 mm of mercury.
On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a typical laboratory thermometer. For

Examiner’s
Use
°C –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the thermometer has
(i) thin walls on its bulb,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) thick walls on its stem,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) a narrow capillary tube along which the liquid expands.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Suggest a liquid which the thermometer might contain.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put
on between these two marks.
State the values of
(i) the ice point, ......................................
(ii) the steam point. .................................

[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take For
measurements. Examiner’s
Use
time
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State how you deduced your answer to (a)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State how you deduced your answer to (b)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
(c) (i) How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half For
its initial value? Examiner’s
Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The wave has a frequency of 300 Hz.
1. What is meant by a frequency of 300 Hz ?
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [1]
2. How long does 1 cycle of the wave take?
..................................................................................................................... [1]
3. How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were
longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and
then further apart.
(i) Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................
(ii) Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules? .................
(iii) The student gives light as another example of longitudinal waves.
Is this correct? .................

[2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
10
7 Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from For
a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block. Examiner’s
Use
beam of light
H Z
G Y
F X
E W
D V
C U
B T
apartment apartment
A S
block block
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 7.1,
1. draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H, [1]
2. label the angle of incidence of the beam of light on window H. [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
11
(ii) State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection. For
Examiner’s
................................................. [1] Use
(iii) Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H?
................................................. [1]
(iv) Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?
................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.
mirror
card
Fig. 7.2
The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the reflection of the letter P. [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
8 (a) Four rods are shown in Fig. 8.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
plastic rod iron rod wooden rod brass rod
Fig. 8.1
State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be
(i) magnetised by stroking it with a magnet,
................................................. [1]
(ii) charged by stroking it with a dry cloth.
................................................. [1]
(b) Magnets A and B in Fig. 8.2 are repelling each other.
N
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 8.2
The north pole has been labelled on magnet A.
On Fig. 8.2, label the other three poles. [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
13
(c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other. For
Examiner’s
Use
+
rod C rod D
Fig. 8.3
On Fig. 8.3, show the charge on rod D. [1]
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north.
Fig. 8.4
A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction. A plotting compass is put at each

end of the brass rod, as shown in Fig. 8.5.
brass rod N
plotting
compass
Fig. 8.5
On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit. For

Examiner’s
Use
6V
reading
A
50 mA
Fig. 9.1
(a) What is the value of
(i) the e.m.f. of the battery,
................................................. [1]
(ii) the current in the circuit?
................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the resistance R of the resistor.
R = ................................................ [3]
(c) State how the circuit could be changed to
(i) halve the current in the circuit,
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) reduce the current to zero.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
15
(d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown For
in Fig. 9.2. Examiner’s
Use
6V
student’s
A incorrect
connection
R
Fig. 9.2
(i) Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) What effect would this current have on the circuit?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
16
10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric For
current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by Examiner’s
putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position. Use
pan
current
out
current
in
Y
N X
I
Fig. 10.1
(a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I.
His results are given below.
I/A 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
F/N 0 0.012 0.023 0.035 0.047
(i) On the grid of Fig. 10.2,
1. mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values, [2]
2. plot the points on your grid, [2]
3. draw the best straight line through your points. [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
17
For
F/N Examiner’s
Use
0
0 I/A
Fig. 10.2
(ii) From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A.
force = ............................................. N [1]
(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor
balance.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
18
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are For
empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this Examiner’s
question. Not all of the boxes will be used. Use
heater filament
cathode rays
anode
grid
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box. [1]
(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.
Write UP AND DOWN in the appropriate box. [1]
(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it.
Write GLOWS in the appropriate box. [1]
(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated. [1]
(e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays. ................................................ [1]
(f) What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box.
air
alpha particles
hydrogen
steam
vacuum
[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09
PMT
19
12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations. For
Examiner’s
Complete the table by filling in the missing properties. Use
alpha beta gamma
2 protons +
nature [2]
2 neutrons
approximate mass 1 unit [2]
charge positive [2]
ability to penetrate
very penetrating [2]
solids
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/09
PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
PMT

Notes about Mark Scheme Symbols and Other Matters
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
scored.
NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in questions.
brackets.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if

figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT

1 (a) distance tape measure, trundle wheel, metre wheel B1, B1

OR laser measure NOT (metre) rule
time stopwatch/clock IGNORE just watch/clock

IGNORE just chronometer B1, B1
(b) speed = distance/time any arrangement, words or symbols B1

OR just distance/time IGNORE magic triangles
(c) (i) idea of acceleration/deceleration

OR some distance at lower speed/lorry stops B1
(ii) distance = speed × time in this form only, words, letters or numbers C1
66 × 20 OR 66 × ⅓ OR 66 × 20/60 C1
22 (km) c.a.o. condone 0.33 used to give appropriate answer A1

[9]
2 (a) 62.8 – 29.8 C1

33.0 (cm) OR 33 (cm) A1
(b) (i) 5.5 = constant × 33 e.c.f. C1
0.166 recurring e.c.f. ignore units

accept 1/6 or 0.16 or 0.166 or 0.167 or 0.17 or 0.2 NOT 0.20 A1
(ii) N/cm OR N/m OR n/cm OR n/m seen in (ii)

nothing else – mark independently of (i) B1
[5]
3 (a) I = U + W accept words or mixture of words/symbols B1
(b) (i) 850 (N) B1
(ii) force needed to accelerate load/get it started

OR if forces equal, then no movement B1
(iii) height OR distance (use + = 0 for extras) B1
(iv) time (use + = 0 for extras) B1
(c) greater than OR > OR stronger accept “double” etc B1

[6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

4 (a) (i) 1 nothing OR no change B1

2 quieter/softer OR loudness less/decreases B1
(ii) frequency control: none OR no adjustment no e.c.f. B1

amplitude control: increase (amplitude) no e.c.f.
allow turn clockwise/to right B1
(b) (i) echo OR reflection (of sound) OR bounced (back) B1
(ii) idea of sound taking a finite time to travel

OR idea of sound doesn’t travel infinitely fast
IGNORE sound has to travel to rock face and back B1
[6]
5 (a) X marked anywhere, above or below, on vertical anywhere through rod B1
(b) Y marked anywhere to right of X, but not beyond R.H. tip of parrot B1
(c) idea of topples/falls/loses balance C1

topples clockwise/to the right/to the front/forwards A1
[4]
6 (a) (i) radiation

evaporation any 2 B1, B1
convection
(ii) cardboard/it is a poor conductor/(good) insulator

air is trapped OR air is a poor conductor/(good) insulator any 2 B1, B1
reduced surface in contact with fingers
(b) (i) heat/energy to raise/lower/change temperature of a body

OR heat/energy to heat up a body B1
by 1 °C OR by 1K OR unit temp B1
(ii) low thermal capacity M1

less heat needed to raise temperature OR absorbs less heat A1
[8]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

7 (a) (i) idea of heat concentrated in a small space

OR lots of wire in small space
OR to get required resistance in a small place B1
(ii) radiation B1
(b) (i) mark 1 and 2 together

240 and 100 in correct order B1
V and W in correct order B1
(ii) I = V/R OR I = W/V in any form, symbols or numbers C1

240/576 OR 100/240 C1
0.416 recurring,
accept 0.4 or 0.416 or 0.417 or 0.41 or 0.42 NOT 0.40 C1
A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) A1
[8]
8 (a) 10 (cm) B1
(b) gets smaller NOT gets lower B1

gets closer to lens/moves to left/moves closer to F1 B1
(c) (i) principal focus/foci OR focal/focus point(s)

NOT focal length NOT focus B1
(d) (ii) (ignore any arrows)
ray drawn from top of object, through F2, to lens

must pass through the stroke indicating F2 B1
single refraction clearly at centre line
OR two appropriate refractions at surfaces B1
travels parallel to axis after lens, by eye must be drawn with ruler B1
reaches top of image B1
[8]
9 (a) (i) water conducts/water lowers resistance B1

could get a shock (however expressed) B1
(ii) idea of cord insulating you from electricity OR cord not a conductor
OR idea of separates you from the electrics/live parts B1
(b) 10A ticked B1
(c) (i) large(r) current NOT more electricity B1
(ii) it/insulation/cable would overheat/melt OR cause fire

NOT blow up/damaged NOT fuse blows B1
[6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

10 (a) V1/V2 or N1/N2 or V1/N1 or V2/N2 in any form Allow full credit for use C1
substitution correct and seen of 25 turns to give 12V, M1
25 turns with working seen
A1
Y and Z (either order) B1
(b) 240 (V) B1
(c) core B1
iron NOT steel B1
(d) good conductor OR low resistance OR to reduce heating

OR for high efficiency IGNORE good/bad conductor of heat B1
[8]
11 (a) refraction OR slows down OR changes speed/wavelength OR bends

NOT reflaction or refrection B1
dispersion OR divides/splits into colours/wavelengths/frequencies B1
(b) (i) red If red and violet interchanged, B1

allow B1 only
(ii) violet NOT blue NOT purple B1
(c) (i) X at or above top of visible spectrum M1

middle of X clearly above top of visible spectrum but no more than
twice height of the letter A from top of visible spectrum, by eye A1
(ii) infra-red OR IR OR ir OR heat/thermal (radiation) B1

[7]
12 (a) (i) beta, gamma –1 e.e.o.o. B2
(ii) idea that radiation (from watch) can enter the body B1
(b) (i) bottom left box ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B1
(ii) locked cupboard OR lock (it)

OR storage in lead/suitable containers
IGNORE protective clothing/tongs etc B1
[5]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

*2425863101*
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
DCA (SHW 00380 1/09) 20403/6

PMT
1 Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the For
vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road. Examiner’s
Use
You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.
(a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle,
and which instruments would you use to measure them?
quantity measured instrument used
[4]
(b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use
symbols, state what your symbols mean.
[1]
(c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of
90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.
(i) Why is the average speed less than the top speed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The journey between the towns takes 20 minutes.
Calculate the distance between the towns.
distance = .......................................... km [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
2 A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
bench top
0 0
29.8
cm pin spring
62.8
cm
metre rule
load = 5.5 N
100 100
Fig. 2.1
Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.
When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring.
extension = .......................................... cm [2]
(b) The law relating extension to load is given by the equation
load = constant × extension.
(i) Calculate the numerical value of the constant.
constant = ................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable unit for the constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine. For
Examiner’s
Use
useful output
input energy I energy U
wasted energy W
Fig. 3.1
Write down the equation linking I, U and W.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of
goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
motor pulley
cable
chains
packing case
pallet
ground
Fig. 3.2
The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N.
(i) State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a
steady speed.
tension force = ............................................. N [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
(ii) When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to For
(b)(i)? Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load
is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight,
does he need to measure?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the
power required to lift the load?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase
in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below.
The electrical energy supplied to the motor is ……………………………… the
increase in energy of the load. [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 (a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator. For
Examiner’s
A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
signal generator
amplitude frequency
Fig. 4.1
By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of
the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.
The person moves to a position further away from the loudspeaker.
(i) State what, if anything, happens to
1. the pitch of the sound heard,
...........................................................................................................................
2. the loudness of the sound heard.
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound
heard in the new position is the same as in the original position?
frequency control ......................................................................................................
amplitude control ................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her For
hand. Examiner’s
Use
rock face
Fig. 4.2
The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.
(i) Why did the sound return to her?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a child’s toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a For
metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium. Examiner’s
Use
metal rod
metal weight
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy.
[1]
(b) The metal weight falls off the tail.
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass.
[1]
(ii) What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk. For
Examiner’s
Use
section through
beaker
layer of corrugated
cardboard stuck to
a layer of smooth
cardboard, with air
trapped between them
Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2
The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It
has a thin plastic lid.
(i) State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the
person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State the meaning of the term thermal capacity.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same
internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low
thermal capacity.
When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always
drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.
State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least
fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why.
mug ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
PMT
10
7 The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has “240 V, 100 W” marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of For
fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 7.1 Fig. 7.2
(a) (i) To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.
Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can
feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.
By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box.
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
[1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
11
(b) (i) The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is For
operating normally. Examiner’s
Use
State the value of
1. the normal operating potential difference across the lamp,
...........................................................................................................................
2. the power of the lamp.
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When the lamp is working normally, its resistance is 576 .
Calculate the current in the lamp.
current = ................................................ [4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows how an image is formed by a converging lens. For

Examiner’s
Use
24 cm 10 cm 8cm
I
O F2 F1
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the value of the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .......................................... cm [1]
(b) The object O is moved a small distance to the left.
State two things that happen to the image I.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Points F1 and F2 are marked on Fig. 8.1.
(i) State the name we give to these two points.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2.
Continue your ray until it meets the image. [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
13
9 (a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads For
Examiner’s
Use
SAFETY WARNING
This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be
operated by pull-cord switches.
(i) Explain why it might be dangerous to use a push-button switch in a washroom.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Why is it safe to use a pull-cord switch in a washroom?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working
normally.
The cable fitted to the heater has a maximum safe current of 12 A.
Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable
of the heater? Tick one box.
5A
10 A
13 A
20 A
[1]
(c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table
lamp.
(i) Why do cookers need a much thicker cable?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
PMT
14
10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a For
240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and Examiner’s
Z on Fig. 10.1. Use
W
240 V X
Y
Z
primary coil secondary coil

500 turns 500 turns
Fig. 10.1
Between W and X there are 300 turns.
Between X and Y there are 175 turns.
Between Y and Z there are 25 turns.
(a) A person wishes to run a 12 V electric bell, using the transformer.
Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?
Show your working.
bell connected between terminal ............. and terminal ............ [4]
(b) State the voltage between terminals W and Z.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
15
(c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made. For
Examiner’s
name ................................................................................................................................ Use
material ...................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a For
lamp with a white-hot filament. Examiner’s
Use
glass screen
prism
glass
lens P
visible spe
ctrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 11.1
(a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the
prism.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) What colour light will be seen at
(i) edge A of the spectrum, ...........................................................................................
(ii) edge B of the spectrum? ..........................................................................................

[2]
(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross (×) the position where the thermometer will show
its largest reading. [2]
(ii) What type of radiation would cause this high reading?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
17
12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market. For
The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is Examiner’s
radioactive. Use
In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets
of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
radiation
detector
watch
counter
sheet
Fig. 12.1
The results of his investigation are given in the following table.
material effect
sheet of paper no observable change in count rate
1 mm thick sheet of aluminium a noticeable decrease in the count rate
considerable decrease in the count rate

1 mm thick sheet of lead
but still above background
(i) From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the
watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) The back of the watch is made of steel 1 mm thick.
State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

PMT
18
(b) Radioactive materials are stored in a cupboard. For

Examiner’s
(i) Which of the symbols shown in Fig. 12.2 is used on the door of the cupboard to Use
warn of the radiation hazard? Tick one box.
Fig. 12.2
[1]
(ii) State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive
substances in the cupboard.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
PMT

NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS
scored. NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in questions
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT

1 (a) 16 – 4 C1
2.4 (cm) A1
(b) balance/spring balance/scales NOT weighing machine B1
(c) mass/volume OR M/V C1

72/9 C1
8 A1
g/cm3 B1 [7]
2 (a) no AND no arrow shown B1
(b) accelerates it M1
in same direction/opposite direction to exhaust gases A1
(c) slows it down )

makes it hot ) any 2 B1, B1
causes friction ) [5]
3 (a) oil B1
nuclear fission B1
(use + = 0 for extras)
(b) (i) gas lamp/fire B1
(ii) electric motor OR loudspeaker B1
(iii) microphone B1 [5]
4 (a) wall A AND bigger area B1

lower pressure (on soil) B1
(b) (i) depth/height of air/atmosphere )

density of air/atmosphere ) any 2 B1, B1
(acceleration due to) gravity )
OR weight/force of air B1
area B1
(ii) 1. same B1
2. greater C1
four times A1 [7]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

5 (a) (i) to the right B1
(ii) they open B1
(iii) current stops B1
(iv) screw in control screw/rotate screw clockwise B1
(b) (i) 29 (minutes) B1
(ii) E = Pt C1
2000 × his(i) × 60 C1
3.48 × 106 (J) c.a.o. A1 [8]
6 (a) (i) longitudinal movement clearly indicated B1
(ii) 8.7–8.9 B1
(iii) idea of more waves (in same distance)/shorter wavelength, however expressed
Accept shown on Fig. 6.1 B1
(b) (i) vertical movement clearly indicated B1
(ii) 2.5–2.7 B1
(iii) idea of taller waves, however expressed

Accept shown on Fig. 6.2 B1 [6]
7 (a) (i) hits surface at right angles OR angle of incidence zero B1
(ii) reflection shown at second surface M1

at 45° to second surface A1
correctly through third surface e.c.f. B1
(b) (i) i and r both correctly marked B1
(ii) i = r in symbols or words NOT sin i = sin r B1
(iii) upper prism correctly positioned, by eye B1

lower prism correctly positioned, by eye B1 [8]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

8 (a) close both S1 and S2 ticked B1
(b) any 1 ticked C1

all 3 ticked A1
(c) lamp would blow OR too much voltage/current B1
(d) (i) 10 (Ω) B1
(ii) I = V/R in any form, symbols or numbers C1

6/10 OR 12/20 e.c.f. from (i) C1
0.6 c.a.o. A1
A B1 [9]
9 free, potential difference, current, resistance

4 correct scores B3
2 or 3 correct scores B2
1 correct scores B1 [3]
10 (a) (i) magnet which operates when there is a current

OR coil wrapped round iron bar B1
(ii) can be switched on/off OR can be made very strong

OR can control its strength B1
(b) mention of magnetic field B1

change in flux linkage, however expressed OR field lines being cut etc B1
induced emf/current/electricity B1
(c) (i) magnetised B1
(ii) attracted OR magnetised B1
(iii) close B1
(d) armature becomes permanently magnetised )

wouldn’t release from core ) any 2 B1, B1
contacts always closed ) [10]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

11 (a) emission of electrons/charges/charged particles B1

by means of heat B1
(b) (i) electrons ticked B1
(ii) between plates

continuous upward deflection, any shape M1
smooth curve A1
after plates
straight line in direction of final direction between plates
(allow 1 cm of curve beyond plates, before becomes straight) B1 [6]
12 (a) student C OR the last one B1
(b) half-life ticked B1
(c) (i) 4 (hours) B1
(ii) 1 B1
(iii) 17 hours (gives 100 cpm) C1

13 (hours) A1 [6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

*9522988088*
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DCA (SHW 00379 1/09) 20865/5

PMT
1 Five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
wooden
block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to find the diameter of one ball.
diameter of ball = .......................................... cm [2]
(b) What instrument would be used to measure the mass of a ball?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Another ball has a volume of 9.0 cm3 and a mass of 72 g.
Calculate the density of this ball.
density = ................................................ [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. It is For
moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. Examiner’s
Use
rocket motors
Fig. 2.1
Is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? Tick one box.
yes
no
If your answer is “yes”, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired.
exhaust gases
Fig. 2.2
State what effect this has on the space probe.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PMT
(c) Later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the Earth’s atmosphere For
again, with no rockets working. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
3 (a) Here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity. For
Examiner’s
Put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed. Use
oil
hydroelectricity
nuclear fission
wind
waves
[2]
(b) Here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another.
battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone
Which of these is designed to convert
(i) chemical energy into light energy,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) electrical energy into mechanical energy,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) sound energy into electrical energy?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
soil
reinforced reinforced
concrete concrete
foundation foundation
Fig. 4.1
Which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows two horizontal squares P and Q.
P Q
Fig. 4.2
The atmosphere is pressing down on both P and Q.
(i) Name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the
atmospheric pressure on square P.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10
PMT
(ii) The area of P is four times that of Q. For

Examiner’s
Complete the following sentences. Use
1. The atmospheric pressure on P is ……………………………… the
atmospheric pressure on Q.
2. The force of the atmosphere on P is ……………………………… the
force of the atmosphere on Q. [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature For
of the air in a room. Examiner’s
Use
power
supply
heater
insulator
Y
temperature
control screw
brass strip contacts
Fig. 5.1
X and Y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. Together they
are called a bimetallic strip. X expands more than Y for the same temperature rise.
(a) The temperature rises and the bimetallic strip bends.
State
(i) which way the bimetallic strip bends,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) what happens to the contacts,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) what happens to the current in the circuit,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the
temperature at which the thermostat operates.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated For
continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 °C. Examiner’s
Use
80
70
temperature
/ °C 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
The thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current
when the temperature rises above 50 °C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat
operates.
time = ................................... minutes [1]

PMT
10
(ii) The heater supplies energy at the rate of 2000 W. For

Examiner’s
Calculate how much thermal energy is supplied to the water before the thermostat Use
switches off the heater.
energy = ............................................. J [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
11
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
wavelength = .......................................... cm [1]
(iii) The pitch of the sound wave is raised.
State how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a section through a series of waves on water.
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]
(ii) From Fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.
wavelength = .......................................... cm [1]
(iii) The amplitude of the water waves is increased.
State how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in
Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
7 (a) A ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface, For
as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
ray of
light
45° 45°
Fig. 7.1
(i) State why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass
at A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has
emerged again into the air. [3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors.
mirror A
mirror B
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at
mirror A. [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
13
(ii) State the equation linking i and r. For

Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(iii) In the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in
Fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at A and B.
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 V lamp, two switches and a 6 V motorcycle battery. For
The lamp has a resistance of 10 when it is glowing normally. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2
6V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.1
How can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? Tick the box alongside any
action which will do this.
close S1 only
close S2 only
close both S1 and S2

[1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel.
S1
S2
6V 6 V, 10 X
Fig. 8.2
close S1 only
close S2 only

[2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
15
(c) The lamp is now connected to a 12 V car battery, as shown in Fig. 8.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
12 V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.3
State why it would not be wise to close switch S.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Resistor R is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 8.4.
R
12 V
6 V, 10
Fig. 8.4
(i) State what value R must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 V across it
when S is closed.
resistance = ............................................ [1]
(ii) With this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................ [4]
[Total: 9]
PMT
16
9 Fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list. For
Do not use any word more than once. Examiner’s
Use
charge, current, few, many, potential difference, resistance
Insulators are materials which possess very ……………………………… free electrons.
Because of this, when a ……………………………… is applied across an
insulator, the electric ……………………………… in it is very small.
The ……………………………… of a piece of insulator is likely to be very high. [3]
[Total: 3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
17
10 (a) (i) What is an electromagnet? For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one very useful property of an electromagnet.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The wire is
connected to an alternating current supply.
low voltage
lamp
iron bar
flat coil
alternating
current
supply
Fig. 10.1
Some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. When
the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.
Explain why this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
PMT
18
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor M on and off. For
Examiner’s
Use
springy metal
M
contacts
A
B
pivot
insulator
iron armature
core
coil of
wire
S
Fig. 10.2
Switch S is closed. State what happens to
(i) the core,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the iron armature,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the contacts A and B.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of
steel instead of iron.
Explain why this is not a good idea.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
19
11 (a) State what is meant by thermionic emission. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In Fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal
plates.
cathode
rays
Fig. 11.1
(i) What sort of particles make up cathode rays? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they
travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
20
12 (a) Four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance. For
Examiner’s
Student A Half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero. Use
Student B Half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to
half its original value.
Student C Half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half
its original value.
Which student has given a correct definition? ........................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. The substance emits
-particles.
Fig. 12.1
Put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.
the half-life of the samples
the mass of the samples
the number of atoms decaying each second
the number of -particles emitted per second

[1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
21
(c) A quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory For
some distance away. Fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive Examiner’s
material. Use
2000
count rate
counts / minute
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / hours
Fig. 12.2
Just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000
counts / minute. When it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.
(i) How long did the journey take? ................................. hours [1]
(ii) How many half-lives elapsed during the journey? ........................................... [1]
(iii) The material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the
radioactive material.
useful life = ...................................... hours [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10

PMT

*2344733865*
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEO/SHW) 27132
PMT
1 Five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
wooden
block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to find the diameter of one ball.
diameter of ball = .......................................... cm [2]
(b) What instrument would be used to measure the mass of a ball?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Another ball has a volume of 9.0 cm3 and a mass of 72 g.
Calculate the density of this ball.
density = ................................................ [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. It is For
moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. Examiner’s
Use
rocket motors
Fig. 2.1
Is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? Tick one box.
yes
no
If your answer is “yes”, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired.
exhaust gases
Fig. 2.2
State what effect this has on the space probe.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PMT
(c) Later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the Earth’s atmosphere For
again, with no rockets working. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
3 (a) Here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity. For
Examiner’s
Put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed. Use
oil
hydroelectricity
nuclear fission
wind
waves
[2]
(b) Here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another.
battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone
Which of these is designed to convert
(i) chemical energy into light energy,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) electrical energy into mechanical energy,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) sound energy into electrical energy?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
soil
reinforced reinforced
concrete concrete
foundation foundation
Fig. 4.1
Which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows two horizontal squares P and Q.
P Q
Fig. 4.2
The atmosphere is pressing down on both P and Q.
(i) Name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the
atmospheric pressure on square P.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10
PMT
(ii) The area of P is four times that of Q. For

Examiner’s
Complete the following sentences. Use
1. The atmospheric pressure on P is ……………………………… the
atmospheric pressure on Q.
2. The force of the atmosphere on P is ……………………………… the
force of the atmosphere on Q. [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature For
of the air in a room. Examiner’s
Use
power
supply
heater
insulator
Y
temperature
control screw
brass strip contacts
Fig. 5.1
X and Y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. Together they
are called a bimetallic strip. X expands more than Y for the same temperature rise.
(a) The temperature rises and the bimetallic strip bends.
State
(i) which way the bimetallic strip bends,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) what happens to the contacts,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) what happens to the current in the circuit,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the
temperature at which the thermostat operates.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated For
continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 °C. Examiner’s
Use
80
70
temperature
/ °C 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
The thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current
when the temperature rises above 50 °C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat
operates.
time = ................................... minutes [1]

PMT
10
(ii) The heater supplies energy at the rate of 2000 W. For

Examiner’s
Calculate how much thermal energy is supplied to the water before the thermostat Use
switches off the heater.
energy = ............................................. J [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
11
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
wavelength = .......................................... cm [1]
(iii) The pitch of the sound wave is raised.
State how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a section through a series of waves on water.
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]
(ii) From Fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.
wavelength = .......................................... cm [1]
(iii) The amplitude of the water waves is increased.
State how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in
Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
7 (a) A ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface, For
as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
ray of
light
45° 45°
Fig. 7.1
(i) State why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass
at A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has
emerged again into the air. [3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors.
mirror A
mirror B
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at
mirror A. [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
13
(ii) State the equation linking i and r. For

Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(iii) In the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in
Fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at A and B.
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 V lamp, two switches and a 6 V motorcycle battery. For
The lamp has a resistance of 10 when it is glowing normally. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2
6V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.1
close S1 only
close S2 only

[1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel.
S1
S2
6V 6 V, 10 X
Fig. 8.2
close S1 only
close S2 only

[2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
15
(c) The lamp is now connected to a 12 V car battery, as shown in Fig. 8.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
12 V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.3
State why it would not be wise to close switch S.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Resistor R is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 8.4.
R
12 V
6 V, 10
Fig. 8.4
(i) State what value R must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 V across it
when S is closed.
resistance = ............................................ [1]
(ii) With this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................ [4]
[Total: 9]
PMT
16
9 Fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list. For
Do not use any word more than once. Examiner’s
Use
charge, current, few, many, potential difference, resistance
Insulators are materials which possess very ……………………………… free electrons.
Because of this, when a ……………………………… is applied across an
insulator, the electric ……………………………… in it is very small.
The ……………………………… of a piece of insulator is likely to be very high. [3]
[Total: 3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
17
10 (a) (i) What is an electromagnet? For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one very useful property of an electromagnet.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The wire is
connected to an alternating current supply.
low voltage
lamp
iron bar
flat coil
alternating
current
supply
Fig. 10.1
Some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. When
the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
PMT
18
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor M on and off. For
Examiner’s
Use
springy metal
M
contacts
A
B
pivot
insulator
iron armature
core
coil of
wire
S
Fig. 10.2
Switch S is closed. State what happens to
(i) the core,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the iron armature,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the contacts A and B.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of
steel instead of iron.
Explain why this is not a good idea.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
19
11 (a) State what is meant by thermionic emission. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In Fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal
plates.
cathode
rays
Fig. 11.1
(i) What sort of particles make up cathode rays? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they
travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
20
12 (a) Four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance. For
Examiner’s
Student A Half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero. Use
Student B Half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to
half its original value.
Student C Half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half
its original value.
Which student has given a correct definition? ........................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. The substance emits
-particles.
Fig. 12.1
Put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.
the half-life of the samples
the mass of the samples
the number of atoms decaying each second
the number of -particles emitted per second

[1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
21
(c) A quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory For
some distance away. Fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive Examiner’s
material. Use
2000
count rate
counts / minute
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / hours
Fig. 12.2
Just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000
counts / minute. When it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.
(i) How long did the journey take? ................................. hours [1]
(ii) How many half-lives elapsed during the journey? ........................................... [1]
(iii) The material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the
radioactive material.
useful life = ...................................... hours [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.

PMT

1 (a) 60.4 – 44.2 C1

16.2 (cm3) A1
(b) (density =) mass/volume in any form, letters, words, numbers C1

40.5/16.2 e.c.f. C1
2.5 e.c.f. A1
g / cm3 B1
(accept correct conversion kg / m3, with unit)
(c) 60.4 and 40.5 both ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B2 [8]
2 (a) molecules/particles/atoms moving (accept vibrating/oscillating) C1

molecules colliding (accept with each other) C1
molecules colliding with walls A1
(b) (i) LH graph – temperature/T/θ / °C/K on horizontal axis

RH graph – volume/V / m3/cm3 on horizontal axis M1
(ii) X on LH graph at intersection of line and vertical axis A1 [5]
3 (a) idea that non-renewable sources are finite / get used up B1
(b) (i) solar/sun/sunlight (ignore just light)

wind/éolienne accept windmill
waves (ignore sea)
tidal (ignore sea) any 1 M1
hydro(electric) (ignore water)
geothermal
biomass
(ii) high cost/low effectiveness

small output any 1 (ignore efficiency) A1
environmental impact
cannot be relied upon (wind/solar)

PMT

(c) (i) fossil fuel

coal
oil
petrol
(natural) gas any 1 M1
peat
nuclear
lignite
(ii) plentiful/regular/constant/reliable supply

cheap/cost effective any 1 A1
high output [5]
4 (a) cool air more dense OR cool air falls

OR warm air rises so it can be cooled B1
(b) energy/heat removed from store must be released outside store B1

heat developed by refrigeration unit B1
(c) reduce/prevent heat coming in from outside NOT cold getting out B1
reduce/prevent conduction NOT convection/radiation B1
(d) idea that heat gained from outside = heat removed by refrigeration unit B2
allow B1 for idea of thermostatic control [7]
5 (a) boxes 1 and 4 ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B2
(b) sound/wave reflected/bounces back (from surface) NOT just “returns” B1
(c) (i) cliff A B1
(ii) (s =) vt OR (s =) vt/2 in any form........... allow s = ut +½at2 C1

330 × 1.5 OR 495
OR 330 × 0.75 OR 247.5
OR 330 × 2.5 OR 825
OR 330 × 1.25 OR 412.5 C1
OR 330 × 4 OR 1320
OR 330 × 2
660 (m) A1
(iii) both echoes at the same time OR one echo OR louder B1

time value quoted between 1.5s and 2.5s B1 [9]

PMT

6 (a) ray bent down at 1st surface, but not beyond/along normal B1
ray bent down at 2nd surface, but not beyond/along surface B1
MAX 1 mark if any suggestion of a spectrum shown
(b) spot/dot/line AND of one colour accept a single named colour e.g. red B1
(c) spectrum/colours/light dispersed ignore rainbow C1

red at top and violet at bottom in words in space provided A1 [5]
7 (a) spheres closer together allow touching spheres B1
(b) (i) charging (of anything) by friction/rubbing B1

plastic/furniture (becomes) charged OR electron/charge transfer M1
plastic/furniture attracts dust/fluff A1
(ii) idea of charge leaking B1

water is a conductor B1 [6]
8 (a) (i) parallel B1
(ii) 4.2 (V) B1
(iii) V=IR in any form OR V/R C1

4.2 / 3 e.c.f. (ii) C1
1.4 e.c.f. (ii) A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
(iv) 1. bigger OR the sum of the two currents OR 2 (A) B1

2. same/equal B1
(b) clear series connection of all 3 across battery in one circuit B1

clear parallel connection of all 3 across battery in other circuit, and must not be
shorted out B1
allow B1 max in (b) if correct series/parallel circuits both shown, but with more or
less than 3 resistors in either/both [10]

PMT

9 (a) all 3 lamps in parallel across battery + switch B2

(–1 if any lamps in series, –1 if connections across battery only)
(b) (i) molecules vibrate over bigger distance OR molecules separate

OR bigger space between molecules
NOT just “molecules need more space”
ignore breaking bonds B1
(ii) 1. bends ignore expands B1

bends/moves to the right/away from contact/outwards/towards invar strip B1
2. idea that something gets hot M1
idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass bends/breaks circuit A1
idea that something cools (when no current) M1
idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass straightens/makes contact A1 [9]
10 (a) (i) Fig. 10.1 B1
(ii) Fig. 10.3 B1
(b) 2 complete cycles, any shape (if full-wave rectified, must be 4 humps) B1
cyclical and equal amplitude above & below axis B1
uniform spacing B1
intention of sinusoidal shape accept sinusoidal full-wave rectification B1 [6]
11 (a) thermionic emission B1
(b) (i) S2 OR 2
any 1 correct B1
(ii) S1 OR 1 ignore mention of S2 B2
all 3 correct B2
(iii) S3 OR 3 ignore mention of S1 and/or S2
(c) reverse polarity of plates (however expressed)/make upper plate positive

OR correct description of use of magnet B1 [4]
12 (a) (radio)activity OR count rate OR counts/s OR particles emitted/s

OR rate of decay OR number of undecayed atoms/nuclei
OR radiation OR original number of atoms/nuclei B1
NOT mass/substance/material, unless clearly specified
to decrease to half (original value) NOT half the time B1
(b) (i) 53 ± 1 (s) B1
(ii) 84 ± 1 (s) B1
(iii) candidate’s (ii) + candidate’s (i) C1

correct evaluation of candidate’s (ii) + candidate’s (i) A1 [6]

PMT

* 6 9 9 3 4 3 1 9 7 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

DC (NH/DJ) 28876/6
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.
Fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone A has been lowered into it on a fine
string.
60.4 cm3
44.2 cm3
water A
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the volume of stone A.
volume = .......................... cm3 [2]
(b) The mass of stone A is measured as 40.5 g.
Calculate the density of the rock from which stone A was formed.
density = ................................. [4]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
(c) Stone B, from the same rock as stone A, has a larger volume.
Stone A is removed from the water and replaced by stone B. The measurements are then
repeated.
Which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone B?
Tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed.
60.4 cm3
40.5 g
density
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 A fixed amount of dry gas is exerting a pressure on its container.
(a) In terms of molecules, explain what causes the pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) One of the sketch graphs in Fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume
at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at
constant volume.
The pressure axis has been labelled in each case.
pressure pressure
/ Pa / Pa
0 0
Fig. 2.1
(i) On the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis “ volume / m3 ” and the other horizontal
axis “ temperature / °C ”.
(ii) On one of the graphs, mark, with the letter X, the pressure of the gas at the ice point.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
3 Electricity can be generated from either renewable or non-renewable energy sources.
(a) Describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy
source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Name one renewable energy source.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating
electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) Name one non-renewable energy source.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating
electricity up until the present time.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 The main parts of a cold store are shown in Fig. 4.1.
cooling tubes cold store
refrigeration
unit
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The walls are made of thick thermally-insulating material.
Why is it important to have the walls made like this?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
(d) Even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the
temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 (a) The four words below can each be used to describe waves.
Put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves.
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[2]
(b) How does an echo occur?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. The river is in a wide gorge and there are high
cliffs on each side.
cliff cliff
A B
Fig. 5.1
The boat sounds its hooter once. Two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat.
The first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. The second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds.
(i) Which cliff caused the first echo? ...................................................................................[1]

(ii) Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.
Calculate the distance between the two cliffs.
distance = ....................................................... m [3]

© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11
PMT
(iii) Further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway
between the cliffs. The boat sounds its hooter again.
Without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is
heard.
what is heard .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
when ..................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
10
6 A laser is a device that gives a narrow parallel beam of monochromatic (single-colour)

light.
Fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism.
screen
prism
light from laser
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen. [2]
(b) What will be seen on the screen?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp.
State what is now seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
11
7 (a) Two light, identical spheres, A and B, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon
threads, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
nylon threads
A B
Fig. 7.1
A is given a positive charge and B is given a negative charge.
On Fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been
charged. [1]
(b) A cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth.
Unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering.
(i) Suggest why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was
very slightly damp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows two resistors forming part of a circuit.
3Ω
A B C D
7Ω
4.2 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between A and D.
The two resistors are connected in ..................................................... . [1]
(ii) The potential difference between A and D is 4.2 V.
State the value of the potential difference between B and C.
potential difference = ........................................................V [1]
(iii) Calculate the current in the 3 Ω resistor.
current = ............................................................[4]
(iv) State how the current in AB compares with
1. the current in each of the two resistors,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. the current in CD.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
13
(b) In the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical
resistors. Arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current.
Draw one circuit in each box.
[2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
9 (a) A car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 V battery, a switch, two 12 V headlamps and a 12 V
indicator lamp (inside the car).
Fig. 9.1 shows the symbols of these components.
left headlamp
right headlamp
indicator lamp
(inside car)
switch 12 V battery
Fig. 9.1
Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness
when the switch is closed. [2]
(b) (i) Explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
15
(ii) Brass expands when heated.
Invar is a metal that expands very little when heated.
The flasher lamp shown in Fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car.
lamp
contact
filament
brass strip invar strip
Fig. 9.2
The flasher lamp is designed to flash on and off repeatedly.
It contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along
their lengths.
1. State what happens to the bimetallic strip when it is heated.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. Explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an
appropriate battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

PMT
16
10 A rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed
between the poles of a permanent magnet.
Figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different
positions.
N S N S N S
Fig. 10.1 Fig. 10.2 Fig. 10.3
(a) Which diagram shows the coil in the position where
(i) the induced e.m.f. in the coil is at its maximum, .................................................
(ii) the induced e.m.f. in the coil is zero? .................................................................. [2]
(b) On Fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil.
e.m.f.
0
time
Fig. 10.4
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
17
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. The
terminals labelled H.T. are connected to a high voltage source.
S1 – +
H.T. horizontal metal
plates
screen
V1
C D
S2
cathode anode S3
V2
Fig. 11.1
(a) When the cathode becomes hot it releases electrons.
What name is used to describe the release of electrons by heating?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot?
switch = ...............................................................
(ii) Which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along CD?
switch = ...............................................................
(iii) Which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards?
switch = ...........................................................[2]
(c) What must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of
downwards?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
18
12 (a) Complete the following definition of radioactive half-life.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken for .....................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time.
30
count rate
counts / s
25
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
19
(i) Use Fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = ....................................................... s [1]
(ii) Use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to
10 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [1]
(iii) Use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease
from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/M/J/11

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT


scored.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) water B1
(b) volume (of water) OR water level B1
(c) (the) stone B1
(d) volume (of water) e.c.f. from 2. B1
(e) subtracting M1
1st volume from 2nd volume (however expressed) A1 [6]
2 (a) conduction B1
(b) conduction B1
convection B1
(c) radiation B1 [4]
3 energy OR heat OR radiation OR IR ignore light B1

from Sun B1
heats water OR generates electricity B1 [3]
4 (a) (i) 15 (m / s) B1
(ii) 0 (m / s) B1
(b) (i) increasing OR accelerating B1
(ii) constant OR nothing B1
(iii) decreasing OR decelerating (however expressed) B1
(c) area of triangle OR area under graph OR appropriate equation of motion C1

½ × 30 × 5 C1
75 (m) A1
(d) speed = distance/time in any form, letters, words, numbers C1

750/30 C1
25 (m / s) A1 [11]

PMT

5 (a) (i) X at correct distance behind mirror (by eye) B1

X at same height as girl’s eye (by eye) B1
(ii) line drawn from eye to bottom of mirror M1

line at same angle as above (by eye) drawn from mirror to girl A1
part from where line meets body down to floor, clearly indicated B1
(b) reflected portions of both first two waves starting where incoming portions
meet harbour wall B1
reflected portions parallel (by eye) B1
reflected portions both at correct angle to wall (by eye) B1
(if any extra waves shown –1 for each one incorrect) [8]
6 (a) (i) increases B1
(ii) increases B1
(iii) decreases B1
(b) to allow for expansion (of concrete)

OR to allow for contraction (of concrete) M1
OR to avoid concrete cracking
reference to temperature change/summer A1 [5]
7 (a) charge(s) OR electron(s) M1

moving/flowing A1
(b) (i) conductor(s) B1
(ii) metal or any named metal B1
(c) (i) insulator(s) ignore bad conductors B1
(ii) any sensible example of an insulating material B1 [6]

PMT

8 (a) series B1
(b) (i) anticlockwise current clearly indicated B1
(ii) voltmeter connected across R only B1
(c) (i) rheostat OR variable resistor M1
(ii) change resistance/current A1
(d) (i) 1.5 (A) B1
(ii) R = V/I in any form C1

6/1.5 e.c.f. (i) C1
4 e.c.f. (i) A1
Ω OR ohm(s) B1
(e) battery OR cell B1 [11]
9 (a) can be switched off B1

can be made (very) strong/variable B1
(b) 1000 turns AND iron core AND 3A –1 e.e.o.o. B2 [4]
10 (a) electromagnetic B1
short OR small B1
(b) film OR photograph OR charge coupled device (CCD) B1
(c) (highly) absorbed/stopped by bone NOT deflected/reflected B1

little/no absorption by flesh OR penetrates/passes through flesh B1
(d) photographic film badges

behind screen when operating X-ray machine any 1 B1
protective clothing
minimise exposure [6]

PMT

11 (a) S1 B1
(b) (i) current B1

filament hot B1
electrons gain energy C1
electrons gain enough energy to overcome forces/break free A1
(ii) thermionic emission B1
(c) anode becomes positive B1

anode attracts electrons B1
electrons travel/move across tube (to anode) B1 [9]
12 (a) would be stopped by carton/air B1
(b) would be unaffected/little affected (by carton/contents) B1
(c) strontium(-90) M1
idea of effectively constant strength
OR barium-139 would decay too quickly A1
(d) more B1
200 B1
more B1 [7]

PMT

* 7 3 9 3 9 4 3 4 6 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

DC (NF/SW) 28845/3
PMT
1 The volume of a stone is to be found using the equipment illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
stone measuring water

cylinder
Fig. 1.1
The following five steps are intended to describe how the volume of the stone is found.
Complete the sentences by adding appropriate words.
(a) Pour some ......................................... into the measuring cylinder. [1]
(b) Take the reading of the ....................................... from the scale on the measuring cylinder. [1]
(c) Carefully put .............................................. into the measuring cylinder. [1]
(d) Take the new reading of the ....................................... from the scale on the measuring cylinder.
[1]
(e) Calculate the volume of the stone by ........................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
2 Energy may be transferred from one place to another by means of conduction, convection or
radiation.
Which process is involved when energy is transferred through
(a) a solid, ................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) a liquid, ........................................................... and ............................................................ [2]
(c) a vacuum? ........................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
3 Solar panels are fitted to the roof of a house.
Describe briefly what they do.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows how the speed of an object varies during a period of 30 s.
40
speed
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30
time / s
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the speed of the object
(i) at the start of the 30 s,

speed = .............................. m / s
(ii) at the end of the 30 s.

speed = .............................. m / s
[2]
(b) Describe what is happening to the speed during the period
(i) 0 s – 10 s, ...........................................................................................................................
(ii) 10 s – 25 s, .........................................................................................................................
(iii) 25 s – 30 s. .........................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
(c) Determine the distance travelled in the last 5 s.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
(d) The total distance travelled in the 30 s is 750 m.
Calculate the average speed of the object during the 30 s.
average speed = .................................................. m / s [3]
[Total: 11]

PMT
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a girl looking at her reflection in a mirror on the wall. The reflecting surface of
the mirror is the surface in contact with the wall.
mirror
reflecting
surface
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1,
(i) put a small X where the image of the girl’s eye is positioned, [2]
(ii) carefully draw lines to find the lowest part of her body that she can see reflected in the
mirror. Mark clearly the portion of her body that she cannot see. [3]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
(b) A helicopter is hovering over a harbour. The pilot can see the waves arriving from out at sea.
The waves hit the harbour wall at an angle, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
incoming
water
waves
harbour
wall
(seen from
the air)
Fig. 5.2
The waves are reflected when they hit the harbour wall.
Carefully complete Fig. 5.2 to show the reflected parts of the first two waves to hit the wall.
[3]
[Total: 8]

PMT
6 (a) The temperature of a block of iron is increased.
State what happens to
(i) the energy of the atoms due to their vibrations,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the average separation of the atoms,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the density of the iron.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When concrete roads are made, the concrete is laid in sections, with gaps between the
sections. The gaps are then filled with a soft material, called pitch. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
concrete
pitch
Fig. 6.1
Suggest why the concrete is laid in sections like this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
7 (a) State what an electric current consists of.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) What name do we give to materials in which it is easy to create an electric current?
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) State one example of such a material.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) What name do we give to materials in which it is difficult to create an electric current?
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) State one example of such a material.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
8 The components in Fig. 8.1 are connected in a circuit.
A
P Q
Fig. 8.1
(a) Complete the following sentence.
The components in the circuit of Fig. 8.1 are connected in .................................... with each
other. [1]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, draw
(i) an arrow to show the direction of the conventional current in the circuit,
(ii) a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across R. [2]
(c) (i) State the name of the component represented by this symbol:
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the purpose of this component in the circuit?
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
11
(d) The top ammeter reads 1.5 A. The voltmeter reads 6.0 V.
(i) State the reading of the bottom ammeter. ................................ A [1]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of R.
resistance = .......................................................... [4]
(e) A piece of low resistance wire is carelessly allowed to connect P and Q.
State which component could be damaged when this happens.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
9 (a) State two advantages that electromagnets have, compared with permanent magnets.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Tick one box in each of the columns below, to indicate what should be used to give the
strongest electromagnet.
column 1 column 2 column 3

number of turns on type of core current
coil
1000 turns F air F 3.0 A F
500 turns F plastic F 2.0 A F
250 turns F iron F 1.0 A F
[2]
[Total: 4]

PMT
12
10 A sportsman is feared to have broken a leg, and is taken to hospital to have his leg X-rayed.
(a) Complete the following sentence about X-rays.
X-rays are a form of ..................................................... radiation that have
very ...................................... wavelengths. [2]
(b) In the hospital, what is used to detect the X-rays and produce an image of the bones of the
leg?
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Describe the properties of X-rays that enable an image to be produced, which distinguishes
between bones and flesh.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State one precaution taken by the technicians who operate the X-ray machines.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
13
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays, connected to two voltage supplies and
switches.
filament
cathode vacuum
anode
+
12 V
– S1
– +
1000 V S2
Fig. 11.1
(a) Which switch has to be closed in order to make the filament release electrons?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Explain why closing the switch in (a) makes the filament release electrons.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) What name do we give to this means of electron release?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State and explain what will happen to the released electrons when both switches are closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
12 A radioactive source, which emits beta-particles, is used as shown in Fig. 12.1 to detect whether
cartons on a conveyor belt have the required volume of pineapple juice in them.
narrow
beta-particle detecting
emitting source slit
fruit juice radiation

level detector
carton
SE
IGCPPLE
EA
PIN
ls
t rave
t y
bel is wa to counter
t h
conveyor
belt
Fig. 12.1
(a) State why an alpha-emitting source would not be suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State why a gamma-emitting source would not be suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The factory has a choice of two beta-emitting sources.
source half-life
barium-139 85 minutes
State, giving your reasons, which of these sources is the most suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11
PMT
15
(d) The equipment is set to give a reading of 200 counts / s when there is a carton with the correct
amount of pineapple juice between the source and the detector.
Tick the appropriate boxes to indicate what reading would be expected in each situation.
reading
more than less than
200 counts / s
200 counts / s 200 counts / s
carton containing
too little juice
carton containing
too much juice
no carton at all
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
scored.
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) speed = distance ÷ time in any form OR (distance =) speed × time C1

80 × ½ OR 80 × 0.5 C1
40 (km) A1
(b) (i) First section of line:

horizontal line starting at zero time, any speed M1
at 80 km/hour A1
from 0 to 0.5 hour, no further A1
(ii) Second section of line:

straight line sloping down B1
line starting at end of previous section and ending at 1 hour
(condone not straight) B1
line ending at 30 km/hour B1
Third section of line:

vertical/near vertical line down to 0 at 1 hour B1
ignore further sections of graph [Total: 10]
2 (a) 84 – 53 C1
31 (cm3) A1
(b) 238 – 205 C1

33 (g) A1
(c) density = mass ÷ volume, however arranged B1

33 ÷ 31 e.c.f. (a) and (b) C1
1.0645161 correct to any no of sf > 2 don’t accept fractions A1
g/cm3 accept kg/m3 if clear attempt to convert to kg and m3 B1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) 70 000 (N) arrow to right accept labelled “thrust” B1

25 000 (N) arrow to left accept labelled “friction” B1
(b) (i) to left OR backward OR opposing motion B1
(ii) 45 000 (N) B1
(iii) air friction/air resistance/drag NOT wind/wheels/weight

NOT if any incorrect extra e.g. weight B1
(c) (i) accelerates OR speed increases OR moves faster M1
(ii) idea of unbalanced force e.g. forward force > backward force
NOT just forward force is bigger A1
[Total: 7]

PMT

4 (a) they/molecules/particles/atoms moving/vibrating/have KE C1

they/molecules/particles/atoms collide (condone with each other) C1
they/molecules/particles/atoms collide with walls A1
extra relevant information e.g. exert force, change of momentum, bounce back/off,
lots over an area, random/Brownian motion B1
(b) (i) decreases B1
(ii) increases B1
[Total: 6]
5 (a) changed/converted/transferred to other forms B1
(b) (i) 24 (kJ) B1
(ii) idea of wasted/lost C1

heat ignore sound A1
(iii) 696 OR 720 – candidate’s (i), correctly evaluated B1
(iv) idea of not very good no e.c.f.

accept “there is a lot of energy lost”, accept calculation
ignore “not 100%” B1
[Total: 6]
6 (a) EITHER
ray from tip of object through optical centre of lens M1
straight on after lens A1
OR
ray from tip of object through F2 and on to lens M1
parallel to axis after lens A1
(b) image drawn between candidate’s intersection and the axis B1
(c) same size B1

inverted no e.c.f. use + = 0 for size and orientation B1
real B1
(d) smaller B1
closer to lens/to the left B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

7 (a) infra-red B1
(b) infra-red B1
(c) X-rays B1
(d) microwaves B1
[Total: 4]
8 (a) (i) charge(s) OR electron(s) NOT ions B1
(ii) (an) ammeter B1
(iii) (a) voltmeter B1
(b) (R =) V/I in any form C1

9.6/0.8 C1
12 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) OR volt/amp OR volts per amp B1
(c) (i) increases B1
(ii) decreases OR e.c.f. from (i) B1

[Total: 9]
9 (a) coil clearly and unambiguously indicated B1
(b) increase strength/power of magnet

ignore increase magnetism/ignore add core
ignore magnets closer/bigger
increase current/voltage/energy from battery any 2 B1 + B1

accept stronger/more powerful battery
increase number of turns (in coil)

ignore bigger coil ignore rotations
(c) reverse current OR reverse magnet/field however expressed B1

[Total: 4]

PMT

10 (a) any variation of allow and B1
(b) (i) plug switch M1
(ii) exposed metal or equivalent OR not insulated OR (easy to get) shock A1
(c) (i) pull-cord switch B1
(ii) idea that water/moisture conducts ignore shock B1

covering/plastic/nylon is an insulator OR no metal is exposed B1
(d) 3 lamps connected in parallel with each other

NOT if shorted out by switch or extra wire B1
lamp combination (e.c.f.) in series with switch (e.c.f.) and supply
accept any recognisable symbol, accept closed switch B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) any downward deflection and no upward deflection B1

curve, either all up or all down, from A to end of region between plates M1
straight on from end of region between plates, towards BC A1
(b) idea of deflection upwards/it goes upwards/it moves upwards no e.c.f.

ignore opposite direction/opposite path B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90 B1
(b) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43 B1
(c) barium OR Ba OR 139 OR 56 B1

silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47 any 2
thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90 B1
NOTE: technetium + anything scores 1 mark, “all of them” scores 1 mark
(d) silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47 B1
(e) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43 OR gamma

NOT any extras B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 4 8 0 8 1 1 0 5 3 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 2
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/JG) 43201/2
PMT
1 A car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. Fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in For
the car. A speedometer registers how fast the car is going. Examiner’s
Use
60 80
40 100
20 120
km / hour
0 140
Fig. 1.1
(a) How far, in km, does the car travel in ½ hour at the speed shown in Fig. 1.1?
distance = .......................................... km [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
(b) (i) On the axes shown in Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the For
½ hour mentioned in (a). Do not go beyond ½ hour. [3] Examiner’s
Use
100
speed
km / hour
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
(ii) At the end of the ½ hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up
into some mountains. The car climbs the mountains for a further ½ hour.
During the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. The driver then stops
the car so that he can admire the view.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car. [4]
[Total: 10]

PMT
2 A student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is For
slightly different from normal. In his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing Examiner’s
some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder. Use
His experiment is illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
measuring
cylinder reading 2
reading 1
water
balance
reading 3 reading 4
Fig. 2.1
The readings he obtains are as follows:
reading 1 53 cm3
reading 2 84 cm3
reading 3 205 g
reading 4 238 g
Calculate
(a) the volume of the added water,
volume = ......................................... cm3 [2]
(b) the mass of the added water,
mass = ............................................. g [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
(c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using. For
Examiner’s
Use
density = ................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
3 A train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The track is For
horizontal. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
The engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 N. There is a 25 000 N force opposing the
motion, due to friction in the wheels.
(a) Mark these forces on Fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 N and an arrow labelled
25 000 N. [2]
(b) The train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting
on it.
(i) State the direction of this force.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the size of this force.
size of force = ................................................... N
(iii) Suggest what might be causing this force.
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engine’s forward thrust.
All other forces stay the same.
(i) What happens to the train? ......................................................................................
(ii) Why does this happen? ............................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
4 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Complete the following two sentences.
(i) At constant temperature, the pressure of a gas increases as its volume
.............................................. .
(ii) At constant volume, the pressure of a gas increases as its temperature
.............................................. .
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
5 (a) The principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor For
destroyed. Examiner’s
Use
What, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a
television?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The television in Fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. During this time, 720 kJ
of electrical energy is supplied.
electrical energy
input = 720 kJ
light energy
output = 4 kJ sound energy
output = 20 kJ
Fig. 5.1
(i) From the information on Fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see
and hear the television during this programme.
energy = ............................................ kJ [1]
(ii) Suggest what happens to the rest of the energy supplied.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
(iii) Calculate how much energy is involved in (b)(ii). For

Examiner’s
Use
energy = ............................................ kJ [1]
(iv) Comment on the efficiency of the television.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
6 The ray diagram in Fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a For
converging lens. Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses
the ray printed on the diagram. [2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw the image of the object. [1]
(c) Which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? Tick 3 boxes.
much larger than the object
much smaller than the object
same size as the object
upright
inverted
real [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
11
(d) The object is moved to a position further from the lens. For
Examiner’s
What differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image? Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
7 (a) Remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the For
television. Examiner’s
Use
Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
(b) Modern warfare often uses heat-seeking missiles.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
(c) Injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
13
(d) Mobile phones communicate using electromagnetic radiation. For

Examiner’s
Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box. Use
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
14
8 (a) Complete the following sentences. For

Examiner’s
(i) An electric current exists in a wire when .................................................. are made Use
to flow in the wire. [1]
(ii) The current in a wire may be measured using an instrument called
.................................................... . [1]
(iii) The potential difference across a wire may be measured by connecting
................................................... across the wire. [1]
(b) A length of resistance wire is connected in a simple series circuit.
The current in it is 0.8 A. The potential difference across it is 9.6 V.
Calculate the resistance of the wire.
resistance = ................................................. [4]
(c) The resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel.
Without further calculation, state the effect this has on
(i) the resistance in the circuit,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 V across it, as
before.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
15
9 The coil in the d.c. motor in Fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown. For
Examiner’s
Use
rotation
magnet
– +
y
batter
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, clearly label the coil. [1]
(b) State two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1 in order to make
the coil rotate more rapidly.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows four different types of switch. For

Examiner’s
Use
wall-mounted
switch
ceiling-mounted
pull-cord
switch flush
wall-mounted
switch
nylon cord
plug
plug switch
metal
sections
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.
[1]
(b) (i) Which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
17
(c) A laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation. For
Examiner’s
(i) Which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the Use
laundry?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) The laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and
the three lamps.
mains
supply
Fig. 10.2
Complete Fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to
light at full brightness when the switch is on. [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point A, the electric field between two For
charged metal plates. Examiner’s
Use
electron
beam A
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between A and the line BC.
[3]
(b) The voltage across the plates is reversed. State what difference this makes to the path
of the electron beam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
19
12 The table below gives details about some radioactive substances. For
Examiner’s
Use
substance symbol type of radiation emitted half-life
barium-139 139 Ba beta (β) 85 minutes

56
silver-110 110 Ag beta (β) 24 seconds

47
technetium-99m 99 Tc gamma (γ) 6.0 hours

43
thorium-232 232 Th
90
alpha (α) 1.4 × 1010 years
(a) Which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its
atoms?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral
atom?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which of these substances are emitting particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Samples of each of these substances are decaying. Each sample starts with the same
number of atoms.
Which sample decays the most in one hour?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the investigation of a blood circulation problem, a patient is given an injection

containing one of these substances. The radiation needs to be detectable from outside
the body.
Which of the substances might be suitable for this use?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/M/J/12

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) BC OR 40 – 70 OR 2nd section B1
(ii) AB OR 0 – 40 OR 1st section B1
(b) (i) area under graph OR speed × time seen or used C1

70–40 OR 30 C1
8 × 30 e.c.f. C1
240 (m) A1
(ii) 7 × 10 OR average speed × time

OR area of triangle + area of rectangle C1
70 (m) A1
(c) line down from D to axis at 110s (need not be straight) B1

[Total: 9]
2 (a) 76 (cm Hg) B1
(b) 60 – 50 C1
candidate’s (a) + or – 10 e.c.f. C1
86 (cm Hg) c.a.o. A1
(c) L.H. goes up B1

R.H. goes down B1
[Total: 6]
3 (a) diagonal, top L to bottom R, drawn (accept any part of this diagonal) B1
(b) within range 23 – 27 (°) B1
(c) candidate’s (b) B1
(d) larger angle before toppling B1

[Total: 4]
4 (a) (i) gravitational/potential/GPE/PE B1

(ii) force/mass/weight AND height/distance C1
force/mass/weight of (basket) of rocks AND height/distance of cliff A1
(b) chemical/chemical PE NOT just PE B1
(c) time M1
to raise basket up cliff A1
[Total: 6]

PMT

5 (a) clear cross/dot at centre of waves B1
(b) wave approximating to a “sine” wave M1

equal spacing, by eye
amplitude greater at one end/centre than other any 1 A1
waves above and below equilibrium line
(c) (i) constant (in any direction) B1

same in all directions B1
(ii) concentric circle M1

same spacing as others, by eye (allow free-hand drawing) A1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) 0 and 100 B1
(b) (i) expands B1
(ii) moves along the tube/up/to the right B1

stops at/near 100 mark/100°C/100/temp of boiling water B1
(c) arrow pointing to somewhere between RH end of bulb & –10 mark B1
[Total: 5]
7 (a) any large surface, stated or example e.g. wall/cliff/mountain B1
(b) (i) when hears bang/sees flash B1
(ii) when hears echo B1
(c) (i) use of 2.25 (s) C1

speed = distance/time in any form OR 2×distance/time C1
720/2.25 OR 360/2.25
allow e.c.f. from time, if working shown C1
320 (m/s) c.a.o. A1
(ii) distance from firework

reaction time, however expressed any 1 B1
stretching tape
wind
[Total: 8]

PMT

8 (a) molecules/atoms/particles oscillating/vibrating B1

bigger vibrations/amplitude/spacing when heated B1
(b) (i) appropriate situation + problem

e.g. telegraph wires + contract in cold weather M1
description of solution e.g. allowed to sag between poles A1
(ii) appropriate example e.g. fitting metal tyres M1

description of procedure e.g. heat tyres before fitting A1
[Total: 6]
9 (a) moves/deflects M1
momentary (or equivalent) OR goes back to zero/centre A1
(b) moves/deflects in other direction B1
(c) e.m.f./electromagnetic force/current/voltage/p.d. B1

induced B1
(allow B1 for magnetic field is changed)
[Total: 5]
10 (a) line with negative slope throughout B1

negative intercept on I axis B1
(b) R = V/I in any form C1

2/5 C1
0.4 (A) A1
(c) (i) 20 (Ω) B1
(ii) 0.1 (A) B1
(d) idea of current halved, so resistance doubled C1

5 OR 5.0 (Ω) A1
(e) heating and magnetism ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B2

[Total: 11]

PMT

11 (a) diagram:
source, solid absorber, detector shown in line B1
method:
distance between source & detector small/<5cm B1
take reading with no absorber B1
insert sheet of paper/aluminium (ignore thickness) B1
take reading with absorber present B1
identification:
if no/background reading with paper absorber, then α
OR if still get a reading, then β
B1
(NOTE no mark for identification based on Al absorber)
(b) in range 15–20 (mins) B1

[Total: 7]
12 (a) (i) nucleus B1
(ii) electron(s) B1
(b) (i) proton(s) B1
(ii) 2 B1
(iii) 4 at top B1
2 at bottom B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 9 4 3 3 4 4 5 8 8 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes
appropriate units.
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/SW) 43195/3
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. For
Examiner’s
Use
10
B C
8
speed
m/s 6 D
2
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) In which section of the journey is the truck
(i) travelling at constant speed, .....................................................................................
(ii) increasing its speed? ...............................................................................................

[2]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the truck in
(i) the section BC,
distance = ............................................ m [4]
(ii) the section CD.
distance = ............................................ m [2]
(c) After point D, the truck takes 30 s to come to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains For
some trapped gas. Examiner’s
Use
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
Fig. 2.1
From Fig. 2.1 find
(a) the pressure of the atmosphere,
pressure of atmosphere = ......................... cm of mercury [1]
(b) the pressure of the trapped gas.
pressure of trapped gas = ......................... cm of mercury [3]
(c) The atmospheric pressure increases.
State what happens to the levels of mercury in the manometer.
left-hand level ...................................................................................................................
right-hand level ................................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. For
Examiner’s
Use
block of wood
pushed here
protractor
70 80 90 10
01
60 10
50 12
0
40 13
0
30
14
20
0
15
10
01
60 1
0
board
70 180
Fig. 3.1
The block is pushed at the top, as shown in Fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.
(a) On the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the
block topples over. [1]
(b) Use the protractor shown on Fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts
before it topples over.
angle = ................................................. [1]
(c) The block is put back on the board, as in Fig. 3.1. This time, instead of the block being
pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.
State the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples
over.
angle = ................................................. [1]
(d) State how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several
centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12
PMT
4 Two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. The rocks are loaded into a For
basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The basket of Examiner’s
rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. Use
(a) (i) Which form of energy that the basket

possesses is significantly greater at the
top of the cliff than when it is at the bottom
of the cliff?
............................................................. [1]
(ii) Which two measurements must be made

in order to calculate the increase in energy
in (i)?
cliff
1. ...............................................................
2. ...............................................................
[2]
(b) Which form of energy in his body has the man

at the top of the cliff used in order to raise the
basket of basket of rocks?
rocks
..................................................................... [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) State the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the
useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
5 The boy shown in Fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the For
other. Fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the Examiner’s
water. Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land.
air
surface
water
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown
in Fig. 5.1. [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
(c) Later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. Fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the For
position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. Examiner’s
Use
6s
4s
2s
Fig. 5.3
(i) From Fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
6 The liquid-in-glass thermometer in Fig. 6.1 has a scale from –10 °C to 110 °C. For
Examiner’s
Use
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
Fig. 6.1
(a) Two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.
State the values of these fixed points.
................ °C and ................ °C [1]
(b) The bulb of the thermometer shown in Fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.
(i) What happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the
boiling water?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) On a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is –12 °C.
On Fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be
at this temperature. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
7 A teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo For
method. Examiner’s
Use
She has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. She also has
a stopwatch and a tape measure.
(a) To obtain an echo, she needs a suitable reflector.
Suggest something that she could use as a reflector.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) She stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the
firework in a safe manner.
(i) When should she start the stopwatch?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) When should she stop the stopwatch?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) After she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(i) Using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.
speed of sound = ........................................ m / s [4]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.
Assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
PMT
10
8 (a) In terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.
Describe how this problem is solved. You may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify
your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
11
9 A solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as For
shown in Fig. 9.1. Examiner’s
Use
sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter
magnet
N
solenoid S
Fig. 9.1
(a) The N pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the
solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The N pole is then removed from the solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the following sentence.
When the N pole moves into the solenoid, ......................................................... is
........................................................ in the solenoid. [2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
10 A length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of Fig. 10.1. Contact C can For
be moved to any position along the resistance wire. Examiner’s
Use
resistance
wire
I
A
contact C
2.0 V
l
5.0 1
Fig. 10.1
(a) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current I in the circuit to the
length l of the resistance wire.
I /A
0
0 l / cm
Fig. 10.2 [2]
(b) Calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l is zero.
ammeter reading = ............................................. A [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
13
(c) Contact C is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 Ω. For
Examiner’s
Calculate Use
(i) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = .................................................... Ω
(ii) the new ammeter reading.
ammeter reading = .................................................... A

[2]
(d) When l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).
Calculate the resistance of 25 cm of the resistance wire.
resistance = .............................................. Ω [2]
(e) Which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?
Tick the boxes alongside two correct effects.
heating
light
sound
magnetism [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
14
11 (a) A particular radioactive source is known to emit either α-particles or β-particles. For
Examiner’s
Describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is Use
being emitted. Include a diagram of the experimental arrangement.
diagram
[1]
method
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
statement of how the results identify the particles
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of
80 minutes.
time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80
count-rate
400 228 128 80 44 16
counts / s
From this table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.
half-life = .................................. minutes [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
15
12 Fig. 12.1 represents a neutral atom. For

Examiner’s
Use
central
mass
orbiting
particle
Fig. 12.1
(a) What name do we give to
(i) the central mass, ......................................................................................................
(ii) the two orbiting particles? ........................................................................................

[2]
(b) The central mass contains two neutrons.
(i) What other type of particle does it contain? .............................................................
(ii) How many of these other particles are there? .........................................................

[2]
(iii) Use nuclide notation, AZ X, to describe the nuclide in Fig. 12.1, writing appropriate
numbers in place of A and Z.
............
............ X [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) BC OR 40 – 70 OR 2nd section B1
(ii) AB OR 0 – 40 OR 1st section B1
(b) (i) area under graph OR speed × time seen or used C1

70–40 OR 30 C1
8 × 30 e.c.f. C1
240 (m) A1
(ii) 7 × 10 OR average speed × time

OR area of triangle + area of rectangle C1
70 (m) A1
(c) line down from D to axis at 110s (need not be straight) B1

[Total: 9]
2 (a) 76 (cm Hg) B1
(b) 60 – 50 C1
candidate’s (a) + or – 10 e.c.f. C1
86 (cm Hg) c.a.o. A1
(c) L.H. goes up B1

R.H. goes down B1
[Total: 6]
3 (a) diagonal, top L to bottom R, drawn (accept any part of this diagonal) B1
(b) within range 23 – 27 (°) B1
(c) candidate’s (b) B1
(d) larger angle before toppling B1

[Total: 4]
4 (a) (i) gravitational/potential/GPE/PE B1

(ii) force/mass/weight AND height/distance C1
force/mass/weight of (basket) of rocks AND height/distance of cliff A1
(b) chemical/chemical PE NOT just PE B1
(c) time M1
to raise basket up cliff A1
[Total: 6]

PMT

5 (a) clear cross/dot at centre of waves B1
(b) wave approximating to a “sine” wave M1

equal spacing, by eye
amplitude greater at one end/centre than other any 1 A1
waves above and below equilibrium line
(c) (i) constant (in any direction) B1

same in all directions B1
(ii) concentric circle M1

same spacing as others, by eye (allow free-hand drawing) A1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) 0 and 100 B1
(b) (i) expands B1
(ii) moves along the tube/up/to the right B1

stops at/near 100 mark/100°C/100/temp of boiling water B1
(c) arrow pointing to somewhere between RH end of bulb & –10 mark B1
[Total: 5]
7 (a) any large surface, stated or example e.g. wall/cliff/mountain B1
(b) (i) when hears bang/sees flash B1
(ii) when hears echo B1
(c) (i) use of 2.25 (s) C1

speed = distance/time in any form OR 2×distance/time C1
720/2.25 OR 360/2.25
allow e.c.f. from time, if working shown C1
320 (m/s) c.a.o. A1
(ii) distance from firework

reaction time, however expressed any 1 B1
stretching tape
wind
[Total: 8]

PMT

8 (a) molecules/atoms/particles oscillating/vibrating B1

bigger vibrations/amplitude/spacing when heated B1
(b) (i) appropriate situation + problem

e.g. telegraph wires + contract in cold weather M1
description of solution e.g. allowed to sag between poles A1
(ii) appropriate example e.g. fitting metal tyres M1

description of procedure e.g. heat tyres before fitting A1
[Total: 6]
9 (a) moves/deflects M1
momentary (or equivalent) OR goes back to zero/centre A1
(b) moves/deflects in other direction B1
(c) e.m.f./electromagnetic force/current/voltage/p.d. B1

induced B1
(allow B1 for magnetic field is changed)
[Total: 5]
10 (a) line with negative slope throughout B1

negative intercept on I axis B1
(b) R = V/I in any form C1

2/5 C1
0.4 (A) A1
(c) (i) 20 (Ω) B1
(ii) 0.1 (A) B1
(d) idea of current halved, so resistance doubled C1

5 OR 5.0 (Ω) A1
(e) heating and magnetism ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B2

[Total: 11]

PMT

11 (a) diagram:
source, solid absorber, detector shown in line B1
method:
distance between source & detector small/<5cm B1
take reading with no absorber B1
insert sheet of paper/aluminium (ignore thickness) B1
take reading with absorber present B1
identification:
if no/background reading with paper absorber, then α
OR if still get a reading, then β
B1
(NOTE no mark for identification based on Al absorber)
(b) in range 15–20 (mins) B1

[Total: 7]
12 (a) (i) nucleus B1
(ii) electron(s) B1
(b) (i) proton(s) B1
(ii) 2 B1
(iii) 4 at top B1
2 at bottom B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 3 8 7 7 4 3 5 9 6 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes
appropriate units.
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 57150/1
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. For
Examiner’s
Use
10
B C
8
speed
m/s 6 D
2
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) In which section of the journey is the truck
(i) travelling at constant speed, .....................................................................................
(ii) increasing its speed? ...............................................................................................

[2]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the truck in
(i) the section BC,
distance = ............................................ m [4]
(ii) the section CD.
distance = ............................................ m [2]
(c) After point D, the truck takes 30 s to come to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains For
some trapped gas. Examiner’s
Use
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
Fig. 2.1
From Fig. 2.1 find
(a) the pressure of the atmosphere,
pressure of atmosphere = ......................... cm of mercury [1]
(b) the pressure of the trapped gas.
pressure of trapped gas = ......................... cm of mercury [3]
(c) The atmospheric pressure increases.
State what happens to the levels of mercury in the manometer.
left-hand level ...................................................................................................................
right-hand level ................................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. For
Examiner’s
Use
block of wood
pushed here
protractor
70 80 90 10
01
60 10
50 12
0
40 13
0
30
14
20
0
15
10
01
60 1
0
board
70 180
Fig. 3.1
The block is pushed at the top, as shown in Fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.
(a) On the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the
block topples over. [1]
(b) Use the protractor shown on Fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts
before it topples over.
angle = ................................................. [1]
(c) The block is put back on the board, as in Fig. 3.1. This time, instead of the block being
pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.
State the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples
over.
angle = ................................................. [1]
(d) State how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several
centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12
PMT
4 Two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. The rocks are loaded into a For
basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The basket of Examiner’s
rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. Use
(a) (i) Which form of energy that the basket

possesses is significantly greater at the
top of the cliff than when it is at the bottom
of the cliff?
............................................................. [1]
(ii) Which two measurements must be made

in order to calculate the increase in energy
in (i)?
cliff
1. ...............................................................
2. ...............................................................
[2]
(b) Which form of energy in his body has the man

at the top of the cliff used in order to raise the
basket of basket of rocks?
rocks
..................................................................... [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) State the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the
useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
5 The boy shown in Fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the For
other. Fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the Examiner’s
water. Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land.
air
surface
water
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown
in Fig. 5.1. [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
(c) Later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. Fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the For
position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. Examiner’s
Use
6s
4s
2s
Fig. 5.3
(i) From Fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
6 The liquid-in-glass thermometer in Fig. 6.1 has a scale from –10 °C to 110 °C. For
Examiner’s
Use
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
Fig. 6.1
(a) Two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.
State the values of these fixed points.
................ °C and ................ °C [1]
(b) The bulb of the thermometer shown in Fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.
(i) What happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the
boiling water?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) On a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is –12 °C.
On Fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be
at this temperature. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
7 A teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo For
method. Examiner’s
Use
She has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. She also has
a stopwatch and a tape measure.
(a) To obtain an echo, she needs a suitable reflector.
Suggest something that she could use as a reflector.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) She stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the
firework in a safe manner.
(i) When should she start the stopwatch?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) When should she stop the stopwatch?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) After she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(i) Using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.
speed of sound = ........................................ m / s [4]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.
Assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
PMT
10
8 (a) In terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.
Describe how this problem is solved. You may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify
your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
11
9 A solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as For
Use
millivoltmeter
magnet
N
solenoid S
Fig. 9.1
(a) The N pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the
solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The N pole is then removed from the solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
When the N pole moves into the solenoid, ......................................................... is
........................................................ in the solenoid. [2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
10 A length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of Fig. 10.1. Contact C can For
be moved to any position along the resistance wire. Examiner’s
Use
resistance
wire
I
A
contact C
2.0 V
l
5.0 1
Fig. 10.1
(a) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current I in the circuit to the
length l of the resistance wire.
I /A
0
0 l / cm
Fig. 10.2 [2]
(b) Calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l is zero.
ammeter reading = ............................................. A [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
13
(c) Contact C is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 Ω. For
Examiner’s
Calculate Use
resistance = .................................................... Ω
(ii) the new ammeter reading.
ammeter reading = .................................................... A

[2]
(d) When l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).
Calculate the resistance of 25 cm of the resistance wire.
resistance = .............................................. Ω [2]
(e) Which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?
Tick the boxes alongside two correct effects.
heating
light
sound
magnetism [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
14
11 (a) A particular radioactive source is known to emit either α-particles or β-particles. For
Examiner’s
Describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is Use
being emitted. Include a diagram of the experimental arrangement.
diagram
[1]
method
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
statement of how the results identify the particles
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of
80 minutes.
time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80
count-rate
400 228 128 80 44 16
counts / s
From this table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
15
12 Fig. 12.1 represents a neutral atom. For

Examiner’s
Use
central
mass
orbiting
particle
Fig. 12.1
(i) the central mass, ......................................................................................................
(ii) the two orbiting particles? ........................................................................................

[2]
(b) The central mass contains two neutrons.
(i) What other type of particle does it contain? .............................................................
(ii) How many of these other particles are there? .........................................................

[2]
(iii) Use nuclide notation, AZ X, to describe the nuclide in Fig. 12.1, writing appropriate
numbers in place of A and Z.
............
............ X [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12

PMT

* 8 7 6 9 7 1 6 9 8 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes
Electronic calculators may be used. 1
3
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (SJF/CGW) 58289/4
PMT
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
1 Some liquid is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cm3
250
50
200
150
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to estimate the volume of the liquid.
volume = .......................................... cm3 [1]
(b) On the enlarged part of Fig. 1.1, draw the liquid level when another 25 cm3 of liquid
has been added to the measuring cylinder. [1]
(c) Explain why it would be more accurate to use a narrower measuring cylinder to measure
liquid volumes like that in Fig. 1.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 3]

PMT
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a brick. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.1
500 bricks like the one shown in Fig. 2.1 are stacked on a wooden platform, known as
a pallet. The pallet of bricks is to be loaded on to a lorry by means of a fork-lift truck, as
shown in Fig. 2.2.
fork-lift truck
bricks
pallet
Fig. 2.2
Each brick has a volume of 0.0012 m3 and is made of a material of density 2300 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of one brick.
mass = ........................................... kg [3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
(ii) The fork-lift truck can safely lift a load of mass 2 tonnes (2000 kg). The wooden For
pallet has a mass of 100 kg. Examiner’s
Use
1. Calculate the total mass of the pallet and 500 bricks.
total mass = ................................................. kg
2. Is it safe for the fork-lift truck to lift the total mass of the pallet and 500 bricks?
yes
no
[3]
(b) The brick shown in Fig. 2.3 has the same dimensions as the brick in Fig. 2.1 and is
made of the same material. However, this brick has a hollow in one face.
hollow
Fig. 2.3
Complete the following sentences.
(i) The density of the brick in Fig. 2.3 is ……………………………………… the density
of the brick in Fig. 2.1, because ………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………….…………………………………. .
(ii) The mass of the brick in Fig. 2.3 is ……………………………………… the mass of
the brick in Fig. 2.1.
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a man pulling a truck of logs at a constant speed along a level path from For
P to Q against a resistive (frictional) force. Examiner’s
Use
logs
truck
P Q
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the two quantities, and their units, that must be measured in order to calculate the
work done on the truck.
quantity unit
[2]
(b) State the additional quantity needed in order to calculate the useful power of the man.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On another occasion, there is a smaller number of logs in the truck. The resistive force
on the truck is smaller when the truck is pulled from P to Q at the same speed as
before.
What effect does this have on
(i) the force exerted by the man,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the work done by the man,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the useful power of the man?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) What form of energy stored in his body does the man use to pull the truck of logs?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a typical laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer. For

Examiner’s
Use
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
Fig. 4.1
(a) Name a liquid that is likely to be used in this thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What occupies the space in the tube, between the end of the liquid thread and the end
of the tube?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 4.1, clearly indicate and label
(i) the ice point,

(ii) the steam point.
[2]
(d) The thermometer is moved into a hotter place.
(i) State what happens to the position of the end of the liquid thread.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
5 A family goes on holiday in a car. To stop the journey being boring for the children, every half For
an hour they note down the distance they have travelled since they left home. They then plot Examiner’s
the graph shown in Fig. 5.1. Use
400
distance from 300

home / km
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time since leaving home / hours
Fig. 5.1
The first half hour and the last half hour of their journey are on small roads. The rest of the
journey is on major roads.
Answer the following questions using information from Fig. 5.1.
(a) For how many hours were they travelling on major roads?
time = ........................................ hours [1]

(b) How far did they travel
(i) in total,
total distance = ................................................ km
(ii) on small roads,
distance on small roads = ................................................ km
(iii) on major roads?
distance on major roads = ................................................ km

[3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13
PMT
(c) They had two refreshment stops whilst on the journey. For
Examiner’s
On Fig. 5.1, clearly mark where they had these stops. [1] Use
(d) Apart from the times when they stopped, during which section of the journey was their
speed slowest? Explain your answer.
section ..............................................................................................................................
explanation .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Calculate the average speed for the whole journey. Your answer must include the unit.
average speed = .................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]

PMT
10
6 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a container, as shown in For
Use
container of gas
3 cm
oil
(a) (b)
before after
Fig. 6.1
(a) The appearance of the oil in the manometer before connecting it to the container is
shown in Fig. 6.1(a).
Explain why the oil levels are the same in both limbs of the manometer.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.1(b) shows the oil levels after connecting to the container.
By how much does the gas pressure in the container differ from atmospheric pressure?
Tick one box.
3 cm of oil greater than atmospheric pressure
3 cm of oil less than atmospheric pressure
6 cm of oil greater than atmospheric pressure
6 cm of oil less than atmospheric pressure [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
11
(c) When the gas in the container is heated, the pressure rises. For
Examiner’s
(i) What happens to the oil level Use
1. in the left-hand limb, ..........................................................................................
2. in the right-hand limb? ......................................................................................

[1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas rises when it is heated.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
7 The apparatus in Fig. 7.1 is producing a visible spectrum from a filament lamp (white light For
source). Examiner’s
Use
screen
glass
prism
glass
lens
Y
visible spectrum
filament lamp
Fig. 7.1
(a) Which two things is the lens in Fig. 7.1 doing to the light?
Tick two boxes.
refracting
reflecting
converging
diverging [2]
(b) Which two things is the prism in Fig. 7.1 doing to the light?
Tick two boxes.
diffracting
dispersing
focusing
refracting [2]
(c) Which colour light will be seen at point X, at the bottom edge of the visible spectrum?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
13
(d) A sensitive thermometer shows a small rise in temperature when held at point Y, just For
above the top edge of the visible spectrum. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Which type of electromagnetic radiation is the thermometer detecting?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why this radiation is present.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 is a ray diagram of parallel rays passing through a lens. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
P F
Fig. 8.1
(i) State the name given to point F.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which distance is the focal length of the lens?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 is another drawing of the same lens as in Fig. 8.1, with an object AX placed in
front of it.
A P F
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, draw two rays to locate the image of point X. Label this point Z.
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, draw in the image of AX, and label it “image”.
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
15
9 (a) Which electrical quantity is described as “the flow of charge”? Tick one box. For
Examiner’s
current Use
electromotive force
potential difference
power
resistance [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit in which switch S is open. The battery and ammeter have
resistances that can be ignored.
12 V
A
16 1 81
S
Fig. 9.1
(i) Switch S is closed.
Calculate
1. the combined resistance of the two resistors,
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]

2. the reading on the ammeter. Include the unit.
ammeter reading = .................................................. [4]
(ii) Switch S is opened again.

State, including units,
1. the reading on the ammeter,
ammeter reading = .................................................. [1]
2. the potential difference across the battery.

potential difference = .................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
PMT
16
10 The circuit for adjusting the brightness of the lamp in the display panel of a car is shown in For
Use
B
S
brightness
control
12 V
panel
lamp
Fig. 10.1
The brightness control is uniformly wound with resistance wire and has a sliding contact S.
(a) State the name of the component used as the brightness control.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the potential difference across the panel lamp when
(i) S is at end A, …………… V
(ii) S is at end B. …………… V

[2]
(c) Describe what happens to the brightness of the lamp as S is moved from A to B.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
17
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows the cross-section of a horizontal wire carrying a current. The wire is For
positioned between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet. Examiner’s
Use
current-carrying
wire
S N
Fig. 11.1
The wire is perpendicular to the page and the direction of the current is into the page.
There is a force on the wire due to the current being in a magnetic field. This magnetic
force balances the weight of the wire.
In which direction is the magnetic force on the wire? Tick one box.
towards the N pole
towards the S pole
towards the top of the page
perpendicularly out of the page [1]

PMT
18
(b) Two pieces of bare wire are fixed to terminals on a wooden board. A third piece of bare For
wire X rests on the other two and is free to move. Examiner’s
Use
This is shown in Fig. 11.2.
fixed bare
wires X
Fig. 11.2
You are given a 6 V battery and a strong horseshoe magnet.
On Fig. 11.2, show how you would use the battery and the magnet to make X move
along the two fixed wires. [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
19
12 (a) Complete the table below. For

Examiner’s
In the centre column, state whether the particle is inside or outside the nucleus. Use
In the right-hand column, state whether the particle has a positive charge or a negative
charge or no charge.
particle position charge
proton [2]
electron [2]
neutron [2]
(b) Which of the particles in the above table
(i) is the same as a β-particle, ......................................................................................
(ii) makes up cathode rays? ..........................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/M/J/13

PMT
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series
0625 PHYSICS
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.
© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

PMT

1 (a) 15 ±1 (cm3) B1
(b) level shown at 40 ±1 cm3 OR 25 + candidate’s (a) ±1 cm3 on magnified figure B1
(c) idea of goes up further OR more sensitive

OR idea of small variations causing larger height differences B1
OR larger divisions / more gradations
[Total: 3]
2 (a) (i) D = M / V in any form OR D × V C1

2300 × 0.0012 C1
2.76 OR 2.8 (kg) A1
(ii) (mass of bricks =) 500 × 2.76 OR 500 × candidate’s (a)(i) C1

(total mass = ) 1480 OR e.c.f. candidate’s (a)(i) C1
yes / no ticked (expect yes), must be compatible with candidate’s total mass A1
(b) (i) the same because made of same material B1
(ii) less than OR equivalent answer B1

[Total: 8]
3 (a) (frictional/tension/applied) force and newton/N B1

distance and metre/m, centimetre/cm or correct metric unit B1
(b) time / speed B1
(c) (i) smaller / less / drops B1
(ii) smaller / less / drops B1
(iii) smaller / less / drops B1
(d) chemical B1
[Total: 7]
4 (a) mercury/Hg OR alcohol OR named alcohol e.g. ethanol B1
(b) vacuum OR nothing OR empty OR vapour B1
(c) ice point indicated and labelled at 0 °C B1

steam point indicated and labelled at 100 °C B1

PMT

(d) (i) moves to the right (or equivalent e.g. goes higher/up/rises) B1
(ii) liquid expands NOT thermometer/particles expands B1

[Total: 6]
5 (a) 4 (hours) OR 5 ½ / 5.5 (hours) / 5 hours 30 mins B1
(b) (i) 300 (km) B1
(ii) 30 (km) B1
(iii) 270 (km) e.c.f. (i) & (ii) B1
(c) 2 horizontal sections clearly indicated B1
(d) last section, however expressed e.g. after 6 hours B1

smallest slope OR smallest distance in ½ hour B1
(e) distance ÷ time C1

300 ÷ 6.5 C1
answer in range 46–46.2 A1
correct unit e.g. km / h B1
[Total: 11]
6 (a) same pressure B1
(b) 6 cm of oil greater B1
(c) (i) 1. falls / decreases / down

both needed B1
2. rises / increases / up
(ii) they move faster / more energetically o.w.t.t.e.

collisions more frequent/often or harder any 3 points B1 × 3
collisions with walls/container/sides
larger force (on wall/container)
[Total: 6]

PMT

7 (a) refracting, converging B2
(b) dispersing, refracting B2
(c) violet accept blue/purple/mauve/indigo B1
(d) (i) infra-red / IR B1
(ii) idea of lamp hot/emitting heat OR glass passes IR B1

[Total: 7]
8 (a) (i) principal focus / focal point / focus / focus point B1
(ii) PF B1
(b) (i) rays from top of object

ray parallel to axis, to lens centre and through F
ray to P and then straight on any 2 B1 × 2
ray through other f.p. and then parallel
Z labelled at intersection of rays (even if rays wrong) B1
(ii) correct inverted image drawn (condone no labelling) between candidate’s Z

and the axis and perpendicular to axis A1
(if no label, must be very clear what is image)
[Total: 6]
9 (a) current B1
(b) (i) 1. R1 + R2 OR 16 + 8 C1
24 (Ω) A1
2. V = I R in any form OR V / R C1
12 / 24 e.c.f. 1. C1
0.5 A1
A/amp/ampere(s) B1
(ii) 1. 0 OR zero/nothing (ignore any unit) B1
2. 12 V B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

10 (a) rheostat/potential divider/variable resistor/potentiometer/dimmer B1
(b) (i) 0 (V) OR zero OR nothing B1
(ii) 12 (V) B1
(c) idea of increasing brightness as S moves from A to B C1

appropriate correct comment on resistance or voltage A1
[Total: 5]
11 (a) towards top of page B1
(b) indication of battery connected correctly to the bare wires B1

magnet’s poles shown either side OR end OR above and below X C1
magnetic field clearly vertical and interact with conductor A1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) inside positive / + / +1 B1 + B1

outside negative/ – / –1 B1 + B1
inside no charge / nothing / neutral / 0 B1 + B1
(b) (i) electron B1
(ii) electron B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures 2, except if specified
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) use of 2.55 (or 1455) and 3.20 (or 1520) C1
25 (mins) A1
(ii) yes/no, compatible with candidate’s time B1
(b) (speed =) distance ÷ time in any form C1

6 / 25 OR 6000 / 25 OR 6 / (25 × 60) OR 6000 / 1500 e.c.f. (a)
OR 0.24 OR 240 OR 0.004 (no e.c.f. if working not shown) C1
4 (m / s) A1
allow e.c.f. from (a) if working shown
[Total: 6]
2 (a) (i) moment B1

accept torque
(ii) F at/near L.H. edge (ignore not vertical) B1
(b) (i) idea of toppling

accept falls (over/onto its side)
ignore slides B1
(ii) above or just beyond edge of box OR outside base of box C1

vertically above edge of box OR above R.H. edge of box A1
(c) might topple accept fall (over/forwards) M1

idea of (vertical through) Centre of Mass being outside base
OR clockwise moment becomes too great A1
special case: accept for 1 mark might jam/catch hand between drawers
[Total: 7]

PMT

3 (a) ruler vertical OR ruler close B1

accept use a ruler
EITHER
measure length before and after
OR note position of bottom before and after M1
Subtract A1
OR
put ruler zero at bottom of spring M1
note reading of bottom after load applied A1
(b) (i) 58 and 297 (both) B1
(ii) (ignore (0, 0) not plotted)

6 points correctly plotted ± half small square –1 e.e.o.o. B2
(iii) 249 (mm) OR 239 (mm) OR 2 (N) OR 49 (mm) B1
(iv) good straight line through points and (0, 0) B1
(v) doubles B1
directly proportional B1
NOT inversely/indirectly proportional
[Total: 10]
4 (a) liquid/alcohol/mercury/reading (level) rises/increases/moves along the tube/expands B1

ignore temperature increases
(b) liquid expands OR liquid molecules get further apart B1
(c) arrow indicating 100 °C by eye B1
(d) idea of large movement of thread (for small temperature change) B1

accept it increases sensitivity o.w.t.t.e.
[Total: 4]

PMT

5 (a) liquid, condone named liquid

gas, condone named gas
solid
any 1 correct B1
other 2 correct B1
(b) (i) melting/fusion B1
(ii) condensation B1
(iii) evaporation OR boiling B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) correct idea of focal length C1

focal length accurately shown ± 1 mm A1
(b) (i) ray from top of object parallel to axis as far as lens, then down through F1
(ignore point of refraction, as long as somewhere on lens)
OR M1
ray from top of object, straight through centre of lens
(NOTE: ray need not intersect printed one to score M1)
image drawn perpendicularly between intersection of candidate’s rays and axis A1
(ii) diminished o.w.t.t.e. B1

inverted (ignore laterally) OR upside down B1
ignore brightness, ignore direction is changed, accept direction is reversed
[Total: 6]

PMT

7 (a)
switches closed
lamp that is lit
1 2 3 4 5
lamp A only
lamp B only B1
lamp C only B2
ignore any additions for lamp A

for C allow B1 only for
(b) all of them OR A, B and C B1
(c) (switch) 1 B1
[Total: 5]
8 (a) (i) charge OR charged particles OR electrons B1
(ii) p.d./cell/battery/e.m.f. across it OR move in a magnetic field OR connect to positive

AND negative of power supply B1
ignore connect to a battery
(iii) A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
(b) (i) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 4 C1
12 Ω A1
(ii) V = IR in any form OR V/R C1

6 / 12 C1
0.5 A A1
(iii) 1. decreases, ignore numbers B1

2. decreases, ignore numbers B1
[Total: 10]

PMT

9 (a) (i) copper B1
(ii) iron, accept (silicon) steel B1
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 in any form C1

correct substitution e.g. 240 / 6 = 800 / N2 C1
20 A1
(c) (i) idea that they would blow/burn out B1

accept blow up
(ii) 2 or more lamps in parallel across AB and none in series B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) (i) basic pattern correct, three lines C1

basic pattern correct, five lines or more A1
no lines meeting or crossing, even at magnet ends B1
(ii) direction arrow correct (condone more than one unless any of them wrong) B1
(b) (i) basic pattern correct outside coil, four lines or more B1
lines present and continuous and not touching within core B1
(ii) iron / steel B1

ignore magnet/magnetic metal
(iii) solenoid B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

11 (a) gamma OR γ
beta OR β
alpha OR α
any 1 correct B1
other 2 correct B1
(b) 2nd statement ticked B1
(c) (i) 24 (s) ± 0.5 B1
(ii) 2 B1
(iii) candidate’s (i) ÷ candidate’s (ii), correctly evaluated B1

(24 ÷ 2 = 12 (s))
[Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) electron B1
(ii) proton and neutron (both, either order) B1
(b) (i) (number of) protons accept proton number B1

NOT no. of protons and electrons
(ii) neutron(s) B1
(iii) 1. 17, accept 2, 8, 7 B1

1
2. 17, accept 2, 8, 7 B1
2
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 1 9 6 7 5 2 6 8 8 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

Electronic calculators may be used.
DC (NH/SW) 58288/5
PMT
1 The highlight of Super Academy’s athletics calendar is the end-of-year cross-country race. For
This is a circular race over a distance of 6.0 km. By tradition, it starts and ends below the Examiner’s
school clock tower. Use
Student Goodrunner is the school’s fastest athlete. His dream is to beat the school record for
the race, which is 26 minutes.
At the start of the race, the school clock looks as shown in Fig. 1.1.
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 1.1
As student Goodrunner crosses the finishing line, the school clock looks as shown in Fig. 1.2.
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
(a) (i) Calculate Goodrunner’s race time. Show your working. For
Examiner’s
Use
race time = ......................................... minutes
(ii) Did Goodrunner beat the record?
yes
no
 [3]
(b) Calculate Goodrunner’s average speed during the race.
average speed = ......................................... m / s [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
2 A piece of stiff cardboard is attached to a plank of wood by two sticky-tape “hinges”, as For
Use
stiff
cardboard
plank of
wood
Fig. 2.1
(a) The cardboard in Fig. 2.1 is to be lifted by a vertical force F, so that it turns about the
hinges.
(i) What name do we give to the turning effect of a force?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Force F is to be as small as possible.
On Fig. 2.1, show force F, positioned so that it fulfils this requirement. [1]
(b) A box of matches is balanced on the cardboard, as shown in Fig. 2.2.

matches
super
Fig. 2.2
(i) The left-hand edge of the cardboard is gradually raised. The box does not slide.
What will eventually happen to the box of matches as the edge is raised?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State where the centre of mass of the box is positioned when this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
(c) Filing cabinets often have a mechanism that prevents more than one drawer being For
opened at a time. Fig. 2.3 shows a filing cabinet standing on the floor with the middle Examiner’s
drawer open. Use
Fig. 2.3
State and explain why it might be dangerous to open the top drawer at the same time as
the middle drawer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
3 (a) A spring is hung from a support. A load, hung on the spring, makes it extend. For
Examiner’s
Describe how you would use a ruler to measure the extension. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The lengths of the spring are found for loads of various weights. From these lengths, the
extensions are calculated. Most of the results are shown in the table below.
load / N length / mm extension / mm
0 200 0
1.0 220 20
2.0 249 49
3.0 258
4.0 279 79
5.0 97
6.0 318 118
(i) Calculate the two missing values and insert them in the table. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, plot the values of extension against load, but do not draw the line yet.
[2]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
120 For
Examiner’s
Use
100
extension / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
load / N
Fig. 3.1
(iii) A mistake was made with one of the length values.
State the value of the length that is incorrect. .................................................. [1]
(iv) Ignoring the value in (iii), draw the best-fit straight line through your points and the
origin. [1]
(v) Complete the following sentences.
Within the limits of the experiment, when the load doubles, the extension of the spring
............................................................. .
The straight-line graph through the origin shows that the extension and the load are
............................................................. .
[2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a typical laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer. For

Examiner’s
Use
liquid
capillary tube
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 °C
Fig. 4.1
(a) What is seen happening when the thermometer is put into a hot liquid?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Why does this happen?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 4.1, clearly mark with an arrow the point that the liquid will reach when the
thermometer is put in pure boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure. [1]
(d) State why it is necessary for the capillary tube to be very narrow.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
5 (a) The descriptions in the table below each give information about the molecules of a For
substance. Examiner’s
Use
In the space alongside each description, write the state of the substance being
described.
description state of the substance

The molecules are close together but
not tightly-packed. They move around
amongst each other.
The molecules of the substance
exert virtually no force on each other.
They move around freely and fill their
container.
The molecules are tightly-packed.
They have “fixed” positions, about
which they can only vibrate. During
these vibrations, they exert strong
forces on each other.
[2]
(b) Which word is used to describe what is happening
(i) when a solid turns to a liquid, without change of temperature,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) when a gas turns to a liquid, without change of temperature,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) when more molecules of a liquid are escaping from the surface than are returning
to it?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a converging lens with an object placed to one side of it. For
Examiner’s
Points F1 and F2 are the principal foci of the lens. Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark the focal length of the lens, showing clearly where it starts and finishes.
[2]
(b) One ray has been drawn through the lens from the top of the object.
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw another ray to locate the image of the top of the object. Draw and
label the image of the whole object. [2]
(ii) State two ways in which this image differs from the object.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
11
7 A student has devised the circuit in Fig. 7.1 to control the lighting of three lamps, A, B and C. For
Examiner’s
Use
3 2
A
4
B
5
C
Fig. 7.1
More than one switch must be closed in order to light any lamp.
(a) In the table below, put ticks to indicate which switches must be closed in order to light
the lamps. The first row has been completed for you.
switches closed
lamp that is lit
1 2 3 4 5
lamp A only ✓ ✓ ✓
lamp B only
lamp C only
[3]
(b) All the switches are now closed.
Which of the lamps light up? ........................................................................................ [1]
(c) Which one switch must be open to ensure that none of the lamps light up? ............... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
8 (a) There is a current in a wire. For

Examiner’s
(i) What is moving in the wire, to create this current? Use
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What must be done to the wire in order to cause a current?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) In which unit do we measure the current?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit connected to a 6.0 V power supply. Ignore the resistance of the
power supply and the ammeter.
8.0 1
+
6.0 V A
–
4.0 1
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
resistance = .............................................. Ω [2]
(ii) Calculate the current indicated by the ammeter. Your answer must include the unit.
reading = .................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
13
(iii) The 8.0 Ω resistor is replaced by another resistor with a larger resistance. For
Examiner’s
Without further calculation, state the effect this has on Use
1. the ammeter reading,
..................................................................................................................................
2. the potential difference across the 4.0 Ω resistor.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
9 (a) A transformer consists of two coils of insulated wire, wound on a core. For
Examiner’s
State a suitable material from which to make Use
(i) the coils,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the core.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A lamp has a normal working voltage of 6.0 V.
The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is used to enable the 6.0 V lamp to be lit at normal brightness
using a 240 V mains supply.
A
240 V 6.0 V
mains lamp
B
800 turns
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil has 800 turns. The secondary coil is connected to terminals A and B.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]
(c) A technician wishes to use the transformer in Fig. 9.1 to light three 6.0 V lamps.
(i) What would happen to the lamps if the technician connected them directly across
the mains supply?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
15
(ii) On Fig. 9.2 below, show how the three lamps should be connected to terminals For
A and B, so that they all light with normal brightness Examiner’s
Use
A
240 V
mains
B
800 turns
Fig. 9.2
[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
16
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a bar magnet. For

Examiner’s
Use
N S
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around the magnet, ignoring
the Earth’s magnetic field.
(ii) On one of your lines, draw an arrowhead to show the direction of the field.
[4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a coil wound on a hollow cardboard tube. There is a current in the coil. For
Examiner’s
Use
current
cardboard
tube
Fig. 10.2
(i) On Fig. 10.2, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around and through the coil.
You do not need to use arrows to show any directions. [2]
(ii) Suggest one material that could be inserted into the tube to increase the strength
of the magnetic field.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) What name is given to a current-carrying coil used to provide a magnetic field?
Tick one box.
capacitor
potentiometer
relay
solenoid [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
18
11 (a) The emissions from some radioactive sources are tested. For
Examiner’s
Use the information in the table below to deduce the types of the emissions being Use
described.
passes through a sheet passes through 8 mm of

type of emission
of paper aluminium
yes yes
yes no
no no
[2]
(b) A radioactive sample has a half-life of x seconds.
Which one of the following statements is correct? Tick one box.
At a time of x seconds after starting measurements, there will be only half as

many atoms in the sample.
At a time of x seconds after starting measurements, there will be only half as

many atoms of the original sort in the sample.
It will take x /2 seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.
It will take 2x seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.
[1]
(c) The number of atoms of a radioactive nuclide in a sample decreases with time, as
shown in Fig. 11.1.
5000
4000
number of
3000
atoms
2000
1000
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT
19
(i) Use Fig. 11.1 to find the time taken for the number of atoms to decrease from 4000 For
to 1000. Examiner’s
Use
time = ..................................................... s
(ii) How many half-lives elapse as the number of atoms decreases from 4000 to 1000?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Calculate the half-life of this nuclide.
half-life = ..................................................... s
[3]
[Total: 6]
Question 12 is on the next page.

PMT
20
12 (a) Atoms are composed of protons, neutrons and electrons. For

Examiner’s
(i) Which of these particles has the smallest mass? Use
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which two of these types of particle are found in the nucleus?
............................................................. and .............................................................

[2]
(b) Naturally-occurring chlorine gas contains two types of atom.
These are 35 37
17Cl and 17Cl.
(i) What does the number 17 tell us about the nuclei of chlorine atoms?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Which particle does an atom of 37 35

17Cl contain more of than an atom of 17Cl ?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State the number of electrons in a neutral atom of

35
1. 17Cl, .....................................................................................................................
37
2. 17Cl. .....................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/M/J/13

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) use of 2 min 57 s / 177 s AND 6 min 14 s / 374 s C1
attempt at subtracting one time from another / 3 min 17 s C1

197 s A1
(ii) division by 50 C1
3.94(s) OR 3.9(s) OR 4(s) OR 4.0(s) e.c.f. (a)(i) A1
(b) (i) 5.5 (cm3) B1
(ii) 0.11 (cm3) (5.5 ÷ 50) B1
[Total: 7]
2 (a) mercury B1
(b) vacuum/nothing/(mercury) vapour B1
(c) 75 (cm) OR the middle one B1
(d) 25 (cm) OR 5 (cm) B1
(e) level falls C1

ends level with that in reservoir A1
[Total: 6]
3 (a) [top R] evaporation/boiling B1

[bottom L] freezing/solidification B1
(b) molecules move apart/become free to move, accept bonds broken B1

move around (amongst each other)/no longer in fixed positions B1
temperature remains constant B1
(c) (i) freezing point/ice point B1
(ii) 0(°C) B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

4 (a) mention of electrons C1

free electrons/charge or equiv. A1
idea of very many (free) charges in metals/conductors B1
idea of very few/no (free) charges in plastic/insulators B1
(note: “more (free) charges in metal than plastic” gets B1,B1)
(b) rod charged, condone (gains)static charge/electricity B1

charges attract (light objects) B1
(note: “charges on the rod attract (hair)” gets B1, B1)
[Total: 6]
5 (a) lamp, accept bulb B1
(b) (i) V = IR in any form OR V/R C1

5+3 C1
4/8 C1
0.5 A1
A or amp(s) or ampere(s) B1
(ii) 1. candidate’s (b)(i)

both, condone no/incorrect unit B1
2. candidate’s (b)(i)
(c) (i) voltmeter correctly shown across resistor B1

correct voltmeter symbol B1
(ii) candidate’s current × 3, correctly evaluated (0.5 × 3 = 1.5 (V)) B1
[Total: 10]
6 (a) stroke with magnet one direction

put in coil current in coil any 1 line M1, A1
position N-S/next to magnet hammer/heat
(b) attractive B1
(c) N/n at left end and S/s at right end B1
(d) no force B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

7 transverse
longitudinal both B1
longitudinal B1
transverse B1
[Total: 3]
8 (a) (i) top 2 boxes ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B2
(ii) sound cannot travel through a vacuum

OR sound needs a medium B1
(b) (i) one sound direct B1

one sound reflected/echoed accept bounces off M1
from cliff/ZY, accept ground A1
(ii) distance = speed × time in any form OR distance/time C1

195/0.6 C1
325 (m/s) A1
[Total: 9]
9 (a) (i) 1. V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form C1

correct substitution e.g. 120/ V2 = 150/300 C1
240 (V) A1
2. lamp lights C1
full/normal brightness OR as designed, e.c.f. from 1. A1
(ii) lamp dim/does not light B1

voltage low(ered)/stepped down B1
(b) (i) to step up voltage/increase voltage

OR to save energy OR to reduce energy losses B1
(ii) step-down transformer OR reduce voltage

OR make voltage safe/mains voltage B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

10 (a) I = U + W accept correct re-arrangements B1
(b) W OR wasted energy B1
(c) (i) decrease B1
(ii) increase B1
(iii) decrease B1
[Total: 5]
11 (a) 25 (counts / min) or something similar B1

sensible explanation in terms of background B1
(b) (i) smaller/lower/decreases accept stops B1
(ii) 1. all absorbed by foil or none reach detector or none penetrates foil B1
2. none absorbed by foil/ (rate) not altered/affected by thickness B1
[Total: 5]
12 (a) (i) number of protons plus neutrons

accept “and” accept (total) number of particles in the nucleus B1
(ii) 238 B1
(b) (i) 1. 4 B1
2. 2 B1
(ii) 234 e.c.f. (a)(ii) and (b)(i) B1

90 e.c.f. (b)(i) B1
(c) (i) 92 B1
(ii) orbit(s) OR shell(s) OR outside nucleus

accept surround the nucleus B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

* 3 6 9 4 1 4 9 8 2 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes
Electronic calculators may be used. 1
3
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (LEO/JG) 58286/4
PMT
1 Small drops of water fall at regular intervals from a leaking tap (faucet). For
Examiner’s
Use
tap
(faucet)
Fig. 1.1
Immediately after a drop has fallen, a student puts an empty measuring cylinder under the
tap, to catch the drops.
At the same time, her friend starts a stopwatch.
After 50 drops have fallen, she stops the stopwatch.
Fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch at the start and finish of this experiment.
time at start
02:57
minutes seconds
time at finish
06:14
minutes seconds
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
Fig. 1.3 shows the measuring cylinder at the finish. For

Examiner’s
Use
cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fig. 1.3
(a) (i) For how many seconds did the girl catch drops from the tap?
number of seconds = .................................................. [3]
(ii) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
time interval = .............................................. s [2]
(b) (i) What is the total volume of the 50 drops?
volume = ............................................... cm3
(ii) Calculate the volume of one drop.
volume = ............................................... cm3

[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple barometer. The vertical tube is fixed in position. For
Examiner’s
Use
tube
25 cm
liquid
75 cm
reservoir 5 cm
Fig. 2.1
(a) Suggest which liquid is contained in the barometer.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What occupies the space in the tube, above the liquid?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Three distances are marked on Fig. 2.1.
Which distance enables the atmospheric pressure to be deduced?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The atmospheric pressure increases.
State one of the three marked distances that decreases.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The tube is accidentally knocked at the top, so that a small crack is caused at the top of
the tube. Air leaks in through the crack.
Describe what effect, if any, this has on the level of the liquid in the tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
3 The arrows on Fig. 3.1 indicate the changes between the three states of matter. For
Examiner’s
Use
melting
solid liquid gas
condensation
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, two of the changes have been labelled. In the empty boxes, label the other
two changes. [2]
(b) In terms of molecules and temperatures, describe what happens during melting.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Pure water turns from liquid to solid at 0 °C.
(i) What name do we give to this temperature?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) At what temperature does solid water (ice) turn back to liquid water?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
4 (a) Explain why metals are able to conduct electricity well, whereas insulators, like plastic, For
are very poor conductors. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
plastic rod
dry cloth
Fig. 4.1
After this, the rod is held close to a girl’s long hair. The hair is attracted to the rod.
Suggest why this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a circuit with two ammeters, X and Y. For

Examiner’s
Use
4.0 V
X A A Y
3.0 1 5.0 1
Fig. 5.1
(a) Name the component that has 5.0 Ω resistance.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Calculate the current in the circuit. Your answer must include the unit.
current = .................................................. [5]
(ii) State the reading on
1. ammeter X, ......................................................
2. ammeter Y. ......................................................
[1]
(c) (i) On Fig. 5.1 show a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across
the resistor. Use the standard symbol for a voltmeter. [2]
(ii) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
reading = .............................................. V [1]
[Total: 10]

PMT
6 (a) A technician has an unmagnetised steel rod. For

Examiner’s
Describe how the technician can permanently magnetise the steel rod. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The technician places two magnets on a bench, in the positions shown in Fig. 6.1.
N S N S
Fig. 6.1
Which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnets? Tick one
box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
(c) The technician now places an unmagnetised iron rod between the magnets, as shown
in Fig. 6.2.
N S N S
iron rod
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, label the N pole and the S pole induced on the iron rod. [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
(d) Finally, the technician places one magnet and a charged plastic rod on the bench, as For
Use
N S +
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 6.3
Which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnet and the rod?
Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
[Total: 5]
7 Waves are either transverse or longitudinal.
Write either “transverse” or “longitudinal” in the space alongside each of the following
descriptions.
description type of wave

This type of wave has vibrations at right angles to
the direction in which the wave energy is travelling.
This type of wave has vibrations along the direction
in which the wave energy is travelling.
A sound wave is an example of this type of wave.
A ripple on the surface of water is an example of

this type of wave.
[3]
[Total: 3]

PMT
10
8 (a) An electric bell hangs from flexible wires inside a glass bell-jar, as shown in Fig. 8.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
to battery
electric
bell
bell-jar
to vacuum
pump
Fig. 8.1
(i) When air is present in the bell-jar, the electric bell can be heard ringing clearly.
What properties of sound does this observation illustrate? Tick the box alongside
any appropriate answer.
sound travels through air
sound travels through glass
sound travels faster than light
sound travels infinitely fast [2]
(ii) As the vacuum pump removes the air from the bell-jar, the sound becomes quieter.
Eventually the sound cannot be heard at all, even though the bell can still be seen
to be working.
Suggest what property of sound this observation demonstrates.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
11
(b) Fig. 8.2 illustrates a quarry where rock blasting is being carried out. For
Examiner’s
Use
P Z
Y
X
DANGER -
BLASTING
Fig. 8.2
An engineer at P sees the blast of an explosion at X, and after a short delay he hears
two bangs separated by a very short interval.
(i) Explain why the engineer hears two bangs.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) The distance PX is 195 m and the short delay between seeing the blast and hearing
the first bang is 0.60 s.
Calculate the speed of sound.
speed = ......................................... m / s [3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
12
9 (a) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is being used in an attempt to light a lamp using a 120 V a.c. For
mains supply. The lamp is designed for use in a country where the mains supply is Examiner’s
240 V a.c. Use
150 turns 300 turns
120 V lamp
a.c.
Fig. 9.1
(i) 1. Calculate the voltage across the lamp in this arrangement.
voltage = .............................................. V [3]
2. Comment on the brightness of the lamp in this arrangement.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The transformer is reversed, so that the 300 turn coil is connected to the 120 V a.c.
supply and the 150 turn coil is connected to the lamp.
Comment on the brightness of the lamp in this arrangement. Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
13
(b) In the National Grid system of electrical energy transmission, a transformer links the For
power station to the transmission cables, as shown in Fig. 9.2. Examiner’s
Use
transmission cables
power
station transformer
Fig. 9.2
(i) Why is a transformer used here?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) What has to be done at the other end of the transmission cables, before connection
is made to a factory in a town?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
10 Fig. 10.1 illustrates the energy into and out of a machine. For
Examiner’s
Use
useful energy output U

input energy I machine
wasted energy W
Fig. 10.1
(a) Write an equation that links I, U and W.
[1]
(b) Which of these three quantities needs to be as low as possible in order to keep the
efficiency of the machine as high as possible?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The machine gets older and parts of it become worn.
Suggest what is likely to happen, for the same input energy I, to
(i) the useful energy output U, ......................................................................................
(ii) the wasted energy W, ...............................................................................................
(iii) the efficiency of the machine. ...................................................................................

[3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT
15
11 (a) The α-particle source in Fig. 11.1 is placed 1 cm from a radiation detector connected to For
a ratemeter. The ratemeter gives a count-rate reading of 600 counts / min. Examiner’s
Use
60 0
1 cm
ratemeter
_–source detector
Fig. 11.1
The source is then moved to a distance of 50 cm from the detector and the count-rate
reading on the ratemeter becomes 25 counts / min.
Predict what the count-rate will be when the source is moved to a distance of 100 cm
from the detector. Explain your answer.
count-rate = .............................................. counts / min
explanation ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows aluminium being rolled into a thin sheet suitable for cooking foil.
β-particles are being used to monitor and control the thickness of the foil.
source of
aluminium rollers `-particles
aluminium
detector foil
Fig. 11.2
(i) An adjustment to the rollers is made and the foil becomes thicker.
What happens to the rate at which β-particles are detected?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Assuming that all suitable safety precautions are taken, explain
1. why α-particles would not be suitable in this application,
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
2. why γ-rays would not be suitable in this application.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
16
12 The nucleus of uranium-238 is represented in nuclide notation as 238U. For

92 Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State the meaning of the nucleon number of a nuclide.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the value of the nucleon number of 238U.

92
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A nucleus of 238U decays by emitting an α-particle. It becomes a nucleus of

92
thorium (Th).
(i) State
1. the nucleon number of an α-particle, ...............................
2. the proton number of an α-particle. ..................................

[2]
(ii) In nuclide notation, the thorium nucleus formed is written as X

YTh.
State the values of
1. X ...................................... ,
2. Y ...................................... .
[2]
(c) (i) How many electrons are to be found in a neutral atom of 238U? .......................
92
(ii) Where in the atom are these electrons to be found?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/M/J/13

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced
Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

PMT

scored.
o.w.t.t.e. means “or words to that effect”.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (speed =) distance / time in words, symbols or numbers C1
(37.1 – 2.1 =) 35 C1
35 / 7 C1
5(.0) (cm / day) A1
(b) (i) 3 points correctly plotted to ½ square B2
(ii) (vertical) spacing not uniform / equal OR points not on a straight line
OR points do not line up OR difference in gradients between points B1
[Total: 7]
2 (a) increase / change / difference in length OR new length – original length

OR amount / length / distance it stretches B1
(b) (i) 1. 2 seen OR used C1
11(.0) (cm) A1
2. 0.8 (cm) B1
(ii) W = m × g in words, symbols or numbers

OR correct conversion used, e.g. 1 kg = 10 N C1
200 g / 0.2 kg A1
[Total: 6]
3 (a) bright specks OR spots / dots OR flashes of light B1
moving randomly OR jerky movements OR zig zag / jiggling B1
(b) line representing a smoke particle moving with a change of direction B1
line is straight with at least 2 changes of direction B1
(c) collisions / bombardment B1
(with) air atoms / molecules / particles B1
(d) Brownian B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

4 (a) greater pressure from man OR man will fall through ice OR ice will break / crack B1
(b) idea of increasing area OR spreading load M1
any three from: A3

larger (surface) area
load / weight / force more spread out
less pressure
use of P = F / A
[Total: 5]
5 (a) 74 (°C) B1
(b) any three from: B3

particles move further apart / heating causes expansion
warm air less dense OR cold air more dense
hot air rises OR cold air falls
convection (current)
(c) moves / goes down (tube) OR gives a lower reading B1
contracts / decreases in volume / shrinks B1
(d) any indication between –10 °C and centre of bulb B1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) (i) i and r both clearly correct B1
(ii) i = r B1
(iii) seeing over / around an obstacle B1
(iv) image / ray moves / misses eye OR viewer can no longer see
image / ray / anything OR viewer sees inside of tube OR angle of
incidence / reflection changes B1
(b) (i) 2 focal lengths indicated B1
(ii) ray parallel to axis AND emergent ray goes through F1 B1
refraction shown at centre line OR at each surface B1
(iii) incident ray through principal focus AND emergent ray parallel to axis B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

7 (a) (milli)ammeter OR galvanometer NOT ampmeter B1
(b) (i) nothing / stays the same / half-way B1
(ii) nothing / stays the same / half-way B1
(iii) nothing / stays the same / half-way B1
(iv) it / arrow / pointer moves / goes / flicks OR current changes M1
left and right OR backwards and forwards A1
(c) generator OR dynamo OR microphone B1
[Total: 7]
8 (a) (i) nothing / zero / 0 B1
(ii) V = IR or V / R in words, symbols or numbers C1
6 / 10 C1
0.6 A1
(iii) candidate’s (a)(ii) B1
(b) (i) variable resistor OR rheostat
OR potential divider B1
(ii) neat, correct circuit with one added component in series with lamp B1
correct symbol for variable resistor B1
[Total: 9]
9 (a) idea of points to north (pole of Earth) M1
when freely suspended / floating on water A1
OR
repels (M1)
a (known) N pole (A1)

PMT

(b) (i) repulsive / repel B1
(ii) repulsive / repel B1
(iii) attractive / attract B1
(c) (i) S N B1
(ii) attractive / attract B1
(iii) attractive / attract B1
[Total: 8]
10 (a) iron B1
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 in words, symbols or numbers C1
correct substitution C1
12 (V) A1
[Total: 4]
11 (a) alpha OR α B2
beta OR β
gamma OR γ
in any order
if two correct, 1 mark
(b) (i) beta OR β B1
(ii) alpha OR α B1
(iii) alpha OR α B1
(c) (i) 2 B1
(ii) evidence of number of atoms halved twice B1
6 × 1010 B1
(iii) candidate’s (c)(ii) B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

12 (a) 17 B1
(b) 20 B1
(c) 17 B1
[Total: 3]

PMT
Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 0 9 5 6 0 8 8 0 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge Interna ional Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81302/5
PMT
1 A gardener studies the growth of one of his plants. At the same time each day, he measures the
height h of the top of the plant from the ground, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
The table of his results is shown below.
time since first measurement / days 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
height h / cm 2.1 6.5 11.4 18.4 24.5 26.7 30.7 37.1
(a) From the values in the table, deduce the average speed of growth of the plant during the
7 days. Work in days and cm.
average speed = ................................... cm / day [4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
(b) (i) Complete Fig. 1.2 by plotting the last three values of height h against time. Do not draw a
line through the points.
40
30
h / cm
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8
time / days
[2]
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Describe how the graph shows that the speed of growth of the plant is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a spring before and after a load is added.
spring
load
Fig. 2.1
(a) What is meant by the extension of the spring?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When the graph of extension against load is drawn for the spring, the result is the line shown
in Fig. 2.2.
extension / cm
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
(i) The unstretched length of the spring is 9.0 cm.
1. Calculate the total length of the spring when a 5.0 N load is hanging from the spring.
length = ........................................... cm [2]
2. Find the extension that will be caused by a load of 2.0 N.
extension = .......................................... cm [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of a load of weight 2.0 N.
mass = ..................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 The apparatus in Fig. 3.1 is being used to view the movement of some smoke particles trapped in
a box.
microscope
air molecules
and
light smoke particles
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the smoke is viewed through the microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the space below, sketch how one smoke particle might move during a short interval of time.
[2]
(c) What causes the smoke particles to move?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) What name is used for this motion of the smoke particles? Complete the sentence.
The motion of the smoke particles is known as .................................................... motion. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14
PMT
4 A young boy, skating on a frozen pond, has fallen through some thin ice about 10 m from the shore
of the pond. Fig. 4.1 shows the situation.
Fig. 4.1
A man, standing near the pond, hears the boy’s shouts for help.
The man weighs more than the boy.
(a) Why would it be unsafe for the man to walk on the ice to rescue the boy?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest and explain what the man could do to cross the ice to reach the boy safely.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 5]

PMT
5 The thermometer in Fig. 5.1 is recording the temperature of the laboratory.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
Fig. 5.1
(a) The bulb of the thermometer is placed in pure, boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure.
State the temperature increase.
temperature increase = ............................................. °C [1]
(b) During the day, the temperature in the laboratory rises. In the late afternoon a thermometer
attached to the ceiling records a higher temperature than a thermometer placed close to the
ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) At night, the temperature in the laboratory falls.
Describe what can be seen happening to the liquid in a thermometer as the temperature falls,
and explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) On Fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show where the end of the liquid thread might be seen when the
temperature being measured is −15°C. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
6 (a) A periscope is an optical instrument containing two mirrors in a long tube.
Fig. 6.1 shows the path of a ray of light through a periscope, without the tube.
mirror A
normal
normal
mirror B
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1,
1. use the letter i to indicate clearly the angle of incidence of the ray striking mirror A,
2. use the letter r to indicate clearly the angle of reflection of the ray leaving mirror A.
[1]
(ii) Write down the equation that links i and r.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest a use for the periscope.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) State what happens if mirror B is rotated through a small angle.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
10
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a converging lens. The lens has one principal focus at F1 and the other principal
focus at F2.
principal
axis
F2 F1
Fig. 6.2
Use your ruler to help you answer this question.
(i) On Fig. 6.2, clearly mark two distances that are each the focal length of the lens. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw a ray on the left side of the lens, which strikes the lens, above and
parallel to the principal axis. Label this ray: ray 1.
Continue this ray to show its path through the lens and at least 6 cm to the right of the
lens. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 6.2, draw a ray that emerges from the lens, below and parallel to the principal
axis. Label this ray: ray 2.
Show clearly the path of this ray before it reached the lens. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
11
7 In Fig. 7.1, XY is a copper rod placed between the N and S poles of a magnet.
N S
X
A B
Fig. 7.1
XY is connected to the terminals A and B of a sensitive, centre-zero instrument that measures

current.
(a) State the name of this instrument. .......................................................................................[1]
(b) When there is no current, the pointer on the instrument points half-way between A and B.
State what, if anything, is seen happening to the pointer when XY is
(i) held stationary,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) moved horizontally at a steady speed towards the N pole,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) moved horizontally at a steady speed towards the S pole,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) moved repeatedly up and down at right angles to the magnetic field.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Suggest one electrical device that makes use of the effect demonstrated in (b).
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
8 A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
S1
S2
6.0 V 10 Ω
Fig. 8.1
When operating normally, the lamp has a resistance of 10 Ω.
(a) (i) State the current in the lamp when both S1 and S2 are open.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student closes switch S1.
Calculate the current in the lamp, stating the unit of your answer.
current = ................................................. [4]
(iii) The student now closes S2 as well as S1.
State the current in the lamp with both switches closed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The student decides that she would like to be able to vary the brightness of the lamp.
(i) Name an electrical component that she could add to the circuit to do this.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
13
(ii) In the space below, redraw the circuit of Fig. 8.1, including the component for varying the
lamp brightness.
[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
9 (a) Describe how the N pole of a bar magnet can be identified.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Use words from the following list to answer the three questions below.
attractive force
repulsive force
no force
What force is there between
(i) two N poles, .......................................................................................................................
(ii) two S poles, .......................................................................................................................
(iii) a N pole and a S pole? .......................................................................................................

[3]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows an iron bar placed close to the N pole of a bar magnet.
magnet iron
bar
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, write N and S, to indicate the induced poles in the iron bar. [1]
(ii) Use a word from the list in (b) to describe the force between the magnet and the iron bar.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The iron bar is reversed end-to-end.
Describe the force that now exists between the magnet and the iron bar.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT
15
10 A transformer is a device for changing voltages.
Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that has a primary coil with 1000 turns and a secondary coil with
50 turns.
core
secondary coil
50 turns
primary coil
1000 turns
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the material from which the core of the transformer is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The primary coil is connected to a 240 V alternating current supply.
Calculate the voltage across the secondary coil.
secondary coil voltage = .............................................. V [3]
[Total: 4]

PMT
16
210
11 Polonium-210 ` 84 Poj is radioactive.
(a) Name three types of emission from radioactive sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State which of these radiations
(i) carries a negative charge, .................................................................................................
(ii) is most easily absorbed, ....................................................................................................
(iii) is the emitted particle in the decay
210 Po 206 emitted particle. .................................................................................

84 82 Pb +
[3]
(c) Polonium-210 has a half-life of 138 days.
A sample containing 8 × 1010 atoms of polonium-210 decays for 276 days.
(i) How many half-lives elapse in this time? ...........................................................................
(ii) How many atoms decay in this time?
number that decay = .......................................................
(iii) How many particles are emitted from the polonium-210 during this time?
number emitted = ...................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
12 One nuclide of chlorine has 35 nucleons and the other nuclide of chlorine has 37 nucleons. The
proton number of chlorine is 17.
(a) How many protons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-35? ................................................
(b) How many neutrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37? ..............................................
(c) How many electrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37? ..............................................
[3]
[Total: 3]
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
PMT


scored.
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) area under graph OR ½(u N v) t C1
½ × 40 × 8 C1
160 (m) A1
(b) 315 N candidate’s (a) C1
distance R speed × time OR distance / time in words, symbols or numbers C1
(315 + 160) / 80 OR (315 N candidate’s (a)) / 80 C1
(5.9) 38(m/s) A1
(c) (i) steady / same / constant / uniform speed B1
(ii) slowing down / decelerating / negative acceleration B1
[Total: 9]
2 (a) measuring cylinder / graduated cylinder B1
(b) balance, accept spring balance, accept (weighing) scales B1
(c) find mass of empty cylinder B1
find mass of cylinder N liquid B1
subtract values NOT if stated the wrong way round B1

accept valid alternative methods
(d) density R mass / volume, in words, symbols or numbers C1
62.4 Q 80 C1
0.78 OR 780 A1
g / cm3 OR kg / m3 as appropriate B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

3 (a) equal (size / magnitude) / the same (size), ignore opposite B1

NOT same direction
(b) it would (start to) sink (if weight>upthrust) B1
(c) moves (forward) C1
accelerates forward / increases speed / moves faster A1
(d) slows down, IGNORE stops (moving) B1
[Total: 5]
4 (a) idea of expansion / gets bigger B1
(b) particles have more energy / vibrate faster B1

ignore move quickly or move faster
particles move apart / space between particles increases B1

NOT particles expand
(c) contracts / gets smaller / shrinks B1

IGNORE fits tightly
(d) idea of being pushed together B1

accept move / stick together / compressed
accept pulled tight/together
[Total: 5]
5 (a) (i) wax melts (faster) on copper rod B1
wax melts less (far) / not at all / slower on plastic rod B1

comparison needed
(ii) IGNORE any statements about conduction of electricity

copper is a (good) (thermal) conductor B1
plastic is an insulator / poor conductor B1
(b) (only) faster / high (k.)e. / most energetic particles B1
escape / go into the air or leave the water (surface) B1
(this means) average (k.) e. of water decreases/falls B1

accept internal energy / thermal energy for k.e.
[Total: 7]

PMT

6 (a) speed R distance / time in words, symbols or numbers OR distance / speed C1
330 / 5000 C1
0.066 (s), allow 0.07 (s) (to one significant figure) A1
(b) man with hammer hears one sound

accept hears the sound almost instantly / first B1
other man hears two sounds OR 1 through air and 1 through rail B1
NOT hears two sounds, one is an echo
any one from:

hears sound through rail before sound through air
calculation of time difference between sounds
because (speed of sound) in metal/steel faster than (speed of) sound in air B1
[Total: 6]
7 (a) (i) correct idea ± 1 line C1
correct distance A1
(ii) (slinky spring) moved backwards and forwards owtte B1
(b) (i) correct idea e.g. crest to crest NOT just 2 peaks marked C1
(ii) idea of bigger (vertical) distance between crest and trough B1
(c) (i) no change / nothing B1
(ii) less / shorter / smaller / decreases B1
[Total: 7]
8 (a) (i) any one from: aluminium, copper, gold, iron B1
(ii) any one from: ebonite, glass, plastic, silk B1
(iii) iron B1
(iv) any one from: ebonite, glass, plastic, silk B1

PMT

(b) accept correct alternative methods
stroke with pole of magnet B1
in one direction B1
OR (alternative answer)
place in solenoid / coil (B1)
current in one direction / battery / d.c. (B1)
[Total: 6]
9 (a) (i) ammeter NOT ampmeter

accept multimeter on current range B1
(ii) 2nd box ticked, current B1
(b) (i) 1st box ticked, charge B1
(ii) 1. (R R) R1 N R2 in words, symbols or numbers C1
24 (Ω) A1
2. V R IR in any form OR V / R C1
12 / 24 e.c.f. C1
0.5 e.c.f. A1
(c) bottom box ticked, 0 V B1
[Total: 10]
10 (a) lamp will blow / burn out

accept blow up / glow too / very brightly ignore bright / won’t work B1
(b) (i) transformer shown with one coil across input and other coil across output
accept any reasonable attempt at transformer symbol B1
(ii) factor of 2 e.g. 12 / 6, 6 / 12 or 2:1 ignore units C1
1:2 OR 1 to 2 A1

PMT

(c) (i) resistor shown joining top two wires or bottom two wires M1
accept diagonal connection
complete series circuit A1

note: 2 resistors in series gains only one mark B1
(ii) 1.5 (Ω) B1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) 23 B1
(b) 11 B1
(c) 12 B1
(d) 11 no e.c.f. from (b) B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) 4 (hours) B1
appropriate indication of method (minimum indication any halving of count rate on axis
or curve) B1
(b) (i) 1000 B1
(ii) candidate’s (a) B1
(iii) in the range 62 – 63, e.c.f. from (b) (i) and (b)(ii) B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

* 3 9 5 6 7 0 6 6 2 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge Interna ional Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81309/4
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the motion of a bus along a road.
10
9
speed
m/s
8
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the distance travelled by the bus in the first 40 s.
distance = ............................................. m [3]
(b) The distance travelled between 40 s and 80 s is 315 m.
Calculate the average speed of the bus during the whole 80 s.
average speed = ......................................... m / s [4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
(c) Describe the motion of the bus
(i) between 40 s and 70 s,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) between 70 s and 80 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
2 A student has been told to find the density of some liquid paraffin by measuring its mass and its
volume.
(a) Which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to measure the volume of the liquid
paraffin?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to find the mass of the liquid paraffin?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe the procedure she would follow in order to find the mass.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) These are the student’s results.
mass of liquid = 62.4 g

volume of liquid = 80 cm3
Calculate the density of the liquid paraffin.
density = ..................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
3 A rowing boat is moving through water, in the direction shown in Fig. 3.1.
upthrust
drag
oar
movement of
boat
forward
thrust weight
Fig. 3.1
There are four forces acting on the boat.
The weight is the force of gravity on the boat.
The upthrust is the upwards force of the water on the boat.
The forward thrust is the force that drives the boat through the water, and is caused by the action
of the oars.
The drag is the resistance to the motion due to friction.
(a) The boat is floating. What can be said about the upthrust and the weight?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why it is important that the weight is not greater than the upthrust.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe what happens to the boat when the forward thrust is greater than the drag.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Describe what happens to the moving boat when the oars are out of the water and the forward
thrust is zero.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 A metal tyre for a wooden wheel is made from an iron ring. This is shown in Fig. 4.1.
wooden wheel
iron ring
joints
Fig. 4.1
The iron ring is made slightly too small to fit on the wheel.
(a) Explain why heating the iron ring will help it fit on the wheel.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the particles in the iron ring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain what will happen to the iron ring after it has been fitted on the wheel and left to cool.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Suggest what happens to the joints in the wooden wheel after fitting the iron ring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
5 (a) A copper rod and a plastic rod each pass through holes in rubber bungs, so that their ends
are inside a tank, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
hot rubber
water bung
copper rod
plastic rod
Fig. 5.1
Both rods are covered with wax.
Very hot water is poured into the tank, covering the end of each rod.
(i) What, if anything, is seen happening on the rods during the next few minutes?
copper rod .........................................................................................................................
plastic rod ..........................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Explain your answers to (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of particles, how evaporation causes the hot water to cool.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
6 A metal rail is 330 m long. Sound travels at 5000 m / s in the metal.
(a) Calculate the time taken for a sound to travel the length of the rail.
time taken = .............................................. s [3]
(b) Sound in air takes 1.0 s to travel 330 m.
As shown in Fig. 6.1, a man puts his right ear against one end of the rail. Another man strikes
the other end of the rail with a hammer.
hammer
hits rail
330 m
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
Describe and explain what each man hears.
man with hammer ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
man with one ear against rail .....................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 represents a longitudinal wave.
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave. [2]
(ii) A long spring (slinky) is used to demonstrate a longitudinal wave motion.
Describe how a longitudinal wave could be set up in the spring.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 represents a cross-section through a water wave.
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave. [1]
(ii) Describe the change that would need to be made to Fig. 7.2 in order to show a wave of
bigger amplitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
10
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows a cross-section through the water wave as it moves into a shallow region and
then out of the shallow region.
wave moving this way

shallow water
piece of plastic
Fig. 7.3
State what, if anything, Fig. 7.3 shows happening to
(i) the amplitude of the wave as it moves into the shallow region,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the wavelength of the wave as it moves into the shallow region.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
11
8 Here is a list of eight substances that may be found in a Physics laboratory.
aluminium
copper
ebonite
glass
gold
iron
plastic
silk
(a) State one substance in the list above that
(i) is a conductor, ...................................................................................................................
(ii) is an insulator, ...................................................................................................................
(iii) can be magnetised, ...........................................................................................................
(iv) can be charged by rubbing with a cloth. ............................................................................

[4]
(b) Describe briefly a method for magnetising a sample of the substance named in (a)(iii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
9 The electric circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains a battery, two resistors, a switch and another
component.
12 V
A
16.0 Ω 8.0 Ω
S
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Which instrument does the symbol A represent?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Which quantity does this instrument measure? Tick one box.
charge
current
power
[1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
13
(b) The switch is closed so that there is a current in the circuit.
(i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current? Tick one box.
charge
power
resistance
[1]
(ii) Using values from Fig. 9.1, calculate
1. the combined resistance of the two resistors,
combined resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
2. the current in the circuit, stating the unit of your answer.
current = ..................................................[4]
(c) When the switch is open, what is the potential difference across the 16 Ω resistor? Tick one
box.
12 V
8.0 V
6.0 V
0V
[1]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
10 A laboratory technician has a 12 V a.c. power supply. He wishes to use it to light a 6.0 V, 1.5 Ω
lamp, using either a transformer or a resistor.
(a) State what will happen if he connects the lamp directly to the 12 V power supply.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Using a standard transformer symbol, complete the circuit in Fig. 10.1 to show how the
transformer could be used to light the lamp at normal brightness.
12 V 6.0 V 1.5 Ω
input lamp
a.c.
[1]
Fig. 10.1
(ii) The transformer is to light the lamp at normal brightness.

number of turns on secondary coil
Determine the value of the ratio: .
number of turns on primary coil
ratio = ..................................................[2]
(c) (i) Complete the circuit in Fig. 10.2 to show how a single resistor could be connected so that
the lamp lights at normal brightness.
12 V 6.0 V 1.5 Ω
input lamp
a.c.
[2]
Fig. 10.2
(ii) State the value of the resistance that is needed for the lamp to light at normal brightness.
resistance = ............................................. Ω [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT
15
23
11 One nuclide of sodium is represented in nuclide notation as 11 Na .
23
For one neutral atom of 11 Na , state
(a) its nucleon number, ...................................................................................................................
(b) its proton number, ...................................................................................................................
(c) the number of neutrons, ............................................................................................................
(d) the number of electrons. ...........................................................................................................

[4]
[Total: 4]

PMT
16
12 Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a radioactive specimen changes with time.
count rate
counts / minute
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 time / hours
Fig. 12.1
(a) Use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive material. Make clear marks on the
graph to show how you obtained the answer.
half-life = ...................................... hours [2]
(b) Measurements are made over the same period of time for another specimen of the same
material as the specimen in (a). The second specimen has half as many radioactive atoms at
time zero.
Suggest the values this second specimen gives for
(i) the count rate at time zero, ................................ counts / minute
(ii) the half-life, ............................................... hours
(iii) the count rate after 16 hours. ................................ counts / minute

[3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/M/J/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) horizontal first section B1
short lower section, roughly in middle B1
horizontal after middle section M1
same height as first section A1
final deceleration to rest B1
(b) (i) speed = distance/time OR distance / speed in words, symbols or numbers C1
1850 / 15 C1
120 (s) or 123 (s), accept any number of sig. figs. ≥ 2 A1
(ii) top box ticked, greater than B1
(c) distance travelled = area under graph C1
areas calculated C1
areas added or subtracted or trapezium equation correct, as appropriate C1
400 (m) A1
[Total: 13]
2 (a) (take) values off rule C1
of X and Y C1
subtract X from Y A1
(b) line between X and top RH corner (accept straight or curved) B1
[Total: 4]
3 (a) (i) decreases, accept transferred to KE (and heat) B1
(ii) increases B1
(iii) nothing / constant B1
(iv) increases B1
(b) transferred into the surroundings (as an increase in internal energy)

OR transferred to thermal energy / sound
accept decreases / becomes zero B1

PMT

(c) decreases, accept becomes thermal energy, accept unchanged B1
[Total: 6]
4 (a) (i) 80 ± 2 (mm) B1
(ii) 170 ± 2 (mm) B1
(b) (i) greater because

LH level lower OR RH level pushed up OR attempt at explaining in terms of
greater force on LH column pushes it down more B1
(ii) 90 (mm Hg) e.c.f. (a) B1
(c) method for averaging answers to (a) or 90 / 2 C1
125 (mm) for both e.c.f. (a) (b) (ii) A1

(allow only one mark if no working but both stated as equal OR given equal but
incorrect values)
(d) water would squirt out / not dense enough / tube would need to be (very) long (so
not practical)
accept not very dense, less dense than mercury B1
[Total: 7]
5 (a) top box ticked convection B1
second box ticked evaporation –1 e.e.o.o. B1
(b) any idea of insulation / lagging

condone any sensible method for keeping drink warmer B1
[Total: 3]
6 (a) less loud / quieter / lower volume / not as loud B1
(b) (i) louder / greater volume B1
(ii) higher pitch B1
(c) any two from: B2

compressions and / or rarefactions
waves / vibrations / it vibrates
longitudinal
energy passed from particle to particle / particles vibrate

PMT

(d) any value between 10–25 (Hz) B1
any value between 15 000–25 000 (Hz) or 15–25 k(Hz) B1
[Total: 7]
7 (a) spectrum B1
OR colours
OR ROYGBIV
OR red at top / A and violet / blue at bottom
(b) 2nd box ticked dispersion B1
bottom box ticked refraction

–1 for each extra above 2 ticks B1
(c) (i) rays crossing / meeting before screen is reached B1
(ii) any two from: B2

spot of light
blurred / not in focus
white
coloured edge
ignore image
[Total: 6]
8 (a) principal focus B1

condone focus / focal point
(b) (i) ray shown parallel to principal axis

AND
ray emerges to pass through F B1
refraction shown at centre line or at each surface B1
(ii) ray from X to P continues straight on M1

OR other principal focus correctly positioned and ray drawn
through this and emerging from lens parallel to principal axis
image (marked Y) correctly positioned A1

condone inverted or indicated where rays cross
[Total: 5]
9 (a) top box ticked, increase or decrease a.c. B1
(b) (i) core B1

PMT

(ii) 1. copper B1
2. V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 in words, symbols or numbers C1
200 A1
3. glows less brightly / dimmer OR stops glowing B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) (i) friction / rubbing M1
on / with (dry) cloth / insulator A1
(ii) moves M1
to the right / to(wards) / by the rod / closer to (the rod)

ignore sticks to, accept attracts / attracted for both marks A1
(iii) unlike / opposite charges attract OR positive attracts negative B1
(b) threads further apart at bottom than top M1
straight threads OR equal angles to vertical A1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) voltmeter B1
(b) (i) ammeter NOT ampmeter B1
(ii) correct symbol for ammeter B1
ammeter in series with lamp and voltmeter across cell B1

condone voltmeter connected in parallel
(c) (i) V = IR OR V / R in words, symbols or numbers C1
1.9 / 0.038 C1
50 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) B1
(ii) bottom box ticked, no difference B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

12 (a) 400 (counts / min) B1
(b) 3rd box ticked half the number at the start B1
(c) 2nd box ticked same as at the start B1
(d) (i) 84 B1
(ii) 40 B1
(iii) 44 B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 3 2 4 1 5 1 0 9 9 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81311/4
PMT
1 A motorcyclist travels from A to B along a straight road, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
A flood B
1850 m
Fig. 1.1
The motorcyclist passes over the minor crossroads at A at 15 m / s and, for most of the distance
between A and B, he continues at 15 m / s.
The road is flooded at one point, so he has to slow down to ride through the water. He also slows
down and stops at the major crossroads at B.
(a) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey between A and B.
15
speed
m/s
0
0 time [5]
Fig. 1.2
(b) The distance between A and B is 1850 m.
(i) If the motorcyclist had been able to maintain 15 m / s all the way from A to B, calculate the
total time the ride would have taken.
time = .............................................. s [3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
(ii) Suggest how the actual time taken from A to B compares with your value in (b)(i). Tick
one box.
greater than calculated
the same as calculated
less than calculated

[1]
(c) The motorcyclist completes another journey. The speed-time graph for this journey is shown
in Fig. 1.3.
25
20
speed 15
m/s
10
5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.3
Use the graph to determine the distance travelled by the motorcyclist during this journey.
distance travelled = ............................................. m [4]
[Total: 13]

PMT
2 A spring is attached to the underside of the edge of a bench. A metre rule is fixed next to it, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
bench top
X spring
pin
Y
metre
rule
load L
Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2
When there is no load on the spring, the marker pin is at X.
When a load of weight L is hanging on the spring, the marker pin is at Y, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
(a) Describe how you would determine the value of the extension of the spring caused by the
load.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 2.3, sketch the graph you would expect to be able to obtain as the spring is gradually
stretched from X to Y.
length
0
0 load L
[1]
Fig. 2.3
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14
PMT
3 A wheel F on an axle is free to rotate about a horizontal axis, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
P
F
axle
Fig. 3.1
String S has a loop on one end, which is hooked over peg P on the axle. The string is wound
several times around the axle, and has a weight W attached to the other end.
W is released and accelerates downwards. The string comes off the peg just as W reaches the
ground.
(a) As W is accelerating downwards, what, if anything, happens to
(i) the gravitational potential energy of W, .............................................................................
(ii) the kinetic energy of W, .....................................................................................................
(iii) the gravitational potential energy of F, ..............................................................................
(iv) the kinetic energy of F? .....................................................................................................

[4]
(b) What happens to the kinetic energy of W when it hits the ground?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What happens to the kinetic energy of F after W hits the ground?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 A mercury manometer is connected to a gas supply, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
mm
300
250
200
from a
gas supply
150
100
50
0
mercury
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, state the reading of
(i) the mercury level in the left-hand column, ................................................. mm
(ii) the mercury level in the right-hand column. ................................................. mm

[2]
(b) (i) Is the pressure of the gas from the supply greater than or less than atmospheric pressure,
and how do you know?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) By how much is the gas pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure?
pressure difference = ............................. mm of mercury [1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
(c) The gas supply is turned off. The rubber tube connecting the manometer to the gas supply is
disconnected, so that both ends of the manometer are open to the atmosphere.
What are the new readings of the mercury levels in each column?
left-hand column reading = ............................................... mm
right-hand column reading = ............................................... mm

[2]
(d) Suggest why water could not be used in this manometer to measure the gas pressure from
the supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 As part of his meal, a workman has a cup containing a hot drink.
In order to keep the drink hot whilst he eats the rest of his meal, he covers the cup, as shown in
Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Which sources of energy loss does this action reduce? Tick two boxes.
convection from the surface of the liquid
evaporation from the surface of the liquid
conduction through the cup
radiation from the surface of the cup

[2]
(b) Suggest one other way that the workman can help to keep the drink hot while he eats the rest
of his meal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
6 A laboratory worker hears the sound from a loudspeaker, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
signal generator
amplitude
frequency
Fig. 6.1
The amplitude control knob and the frequency control knob on the signal generator are set so that
the worker hears a particular note from the loudspeaker.
(a) The two control knobs are left untouched but the worker stands further away from the
loudspeaker.
What difference, if any, does this make to the sound heard by the worker?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What difference, if any, does it make to the note heard by the worker if
(i) the amplitude of the sound wave is increased,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the frequency of the sound wave is increased?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Describe what happens to the air in order for the sound from the loudspeaker to reach the
laboratory worker’s ear.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The human ear cannot detect all frequencies.
State the approximate range of frequencies for a healthy human ear.
lower frequency limit = ................................................. Hz
upper frequency limit = ................................................. Hz

[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
10
7 A filament lamp emits white light, which passes through a small hole in a card. The light spreads
out from the hole, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
screen
glass
prism
glass P
lens
card B
filament lamp
Fig. 7.1
The light from the hole then passes through a glass lens and a glass prism, and finally reaches a
screen.
(a) State what is seen in the region AB on the screen.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In Fig. 7.1, what two things are shown happening to the light at surface PQ? Tick two boxes.
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
[2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
11
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows the same arrangement as in Fig. 7.1, but with the prism removed.
screen
glass
lens
filament lamp
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the rays until they reach the screen. [1]
(ii) Describe fully what is now seen on the screen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a lens, to the left of which is a vertical object AX with one end on the principal axis.
A P F
Fig. 8.1
(a) Distance PF is the focal length of the lens.
State the name given to the point F. .....................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a ray from the top of the object X, which is parallel to the principal axis.
Continue this ray at least 6 cm after the lens, to show its path through the air on the other
side of the lens. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw another ray that will enable you to locate the image of X. Label this
image with the letter Y. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
13
9 (a) What is the usual purpose of a transformer? Tick one box.
to increase or decrease a.c.
to increase or decrease d.c.
to turn a.c. into d.c.

[1]
(b) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is connected to a 240 V mains supply, and is being used to light a
6.0 V lamp connected between A and B.
A
240 V 6.0 V
mains lamp
supply
B
8000 turns iron
Fig. 9.1
(i) What name is given to the part of the transformer that is shown on Fig. 9.1 as being
made of iron?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The primary coil has 8000 turns.
1. State the material from which the coil is usually made.
.................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil in order to provide 6.0 V
between A and B.
number of turns = ..................................................[3]
3. Suggest one difference that is seen in the appearance of the lamp when the mains
supply voltage is reduced to 120 V.
.................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
PMT
14
10 A positively charged plastic ball is suspended on an insulating nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
nylon thread
positively
charged
plastic ball
negatively
charged rod
Fig. 10.1
A negatively charged plastic rod is brought towards the positively charged ball.
(a) (i) Describe how the rod might have been given its charge.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe what is seen happening to the ball as the rod is brought near to it.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State the reason for what you have described in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
15
(b) The negatively charged rod is removed.
An identical plastic ball is suspended on another nylon thread of equal length, so that the
balls are a short distance from each other. The second ball is also given a positive charge.
In the space below, sketch how the two balls and their threads will hang.
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
16
11 In an attempt to measure the current in a lamp and a resistor, a student connects the circuit shown
in Fig. 11.1.
Fig. 11.1
(a) What instrument does the symbol V represent?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When the lamp fails to light, she realises that she has used the wrong instrument to measure
the current.
(i) With which instrument should she replace it, in order to be able to measure the current?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In the space below, redraw the circuit of Fig. 11.1, but with the correct instrument in the
place of V , and with V connected in parallel with the cell.
[2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
17
(c) When the circuit is working correctly, the student records that the potential difference across
the cell is 1.9 V and that the current in the circuit is 0.038 A.
(i) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the resistor. State the unit.
resistance = ...................................................[4]
(ii) The positions in the circuit of the lamp and the resistor are interchanged, as shown in
Fig. 11.2. The measuring instruments are not shown.
Fig. 11.2
What difference, if any, does interchanging the components make to the value of the
current? Tick one box.
increases the current
decreases the current
makes no difference to the current

[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
18
12 A dish contains a sample of radioactive powder. The half-life of the radioactive substance is known
to be 26 minutes. It decays by β-particle emission.
A radiation detector, held close to the powder, records a count rate of 800 counts / min, after
subtraction of the background count rate.
A time of 26 minutes is allowed to elapse after recording the 800 counts / min count rate. A new
count rate is then taken.
(a) Calculate the new count rate due to the powder.
count rate = ............................. counts / min [1]
(b) How many radioactive atoms of the original type remain in the sample after the 26 minutes
have elapsed? Tick one box.
no atoms are left
the same as at the start
half the number at the start
twice the number at the start

[1]
(c) How many atoms in total remain in the sample after 26 minutes has elapsed? Tick one box.
no atoms are left
the same as at the start
half the number at the start
twice the number at the start

[1]
84
(d) The sample contains zirconium 40 Zr .
84
For one atom of 40 Zr , state
(i) its nucleon number, .............................
(ii) its proton number, ...............................
(iii) the number of neutrons. ......................

[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

PMT

Cambridge IGCSE – May/June 2015 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working
is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated “e.c.f.”
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous with spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection/refraction/diffraction or
thermistor/transistor/transformer.
Sig. figs. On this paper, answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures
≥2, except where the mark scheme specifies otherwise or gives an answer to only 1
significant figure.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are awarded for specific units.
Fractions Fractions are only acceptable where specified.

PMT

Extras If a candidate gives more answers than required, irrelevant extras are ignored; for
extras which contradict an otherwise correct response, or are forbidden by the mark
scheme, use right plus wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a
right plus wrong penalty.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
applies.

PMT

1 (a) any two from: B2

• gap between ruler and stack
• eye not perpendicular/ level with top of stack
• zero error of ruler
(b) 7.7 ÷ 20 C1
0.385 (cm) OR 0.39 (cm) A1
(c) 0.012 (kg) c.a.o. B1
[Total: 5]
2 (a) 40 (km) B1
(b) speed = distance ÷ time in any form C1

0.5 ÷ 0.04 C1
12.5 m / s A1
(c) (i) distance travelled = area under slope OR 0.5 ×15 × 6 C1

45 (m) A1
(ii) (straight) line from 15 m / s to 0 in 2.0 seconds A1
[Total: 7]
3 (a) (i) any answer in range 40 to 100 kg OR equivalent in g B1
(ii) mass of chair is the same on the moon B1
(b) (i) pressure greater in Fig. 3.2 OR reverse argument B1

force/weight is the same B1
smaller (contact/surface) area B1
(ii) vertical line through centre of mass drawn or explained B1

centre of mass outside base area of chair/beyond back leg of chair B1
[Total: 7]
4 chemical B1
kinetic B1
thermal B1
sound B1
[Total: 4]

PMT

5 (a) (i) C in box B1
(ii) A AND C in any order B1
(b) any 5 points in any order from: B5

• starting pistol fired
• stopwatch started on seeing smoke/signal
• stopwatch stopped on hearing bang
• time taken (between flash and bang) calculated/recorded
• distance measured OR at least 100 m apart, IGNORE distances less than 100 m
• speed = distance ÷ time
[Total: 7]
6 (a) (i) 380 (mm) AND 220 (mm) B1
(ii) 380 – 220 OR 160 OR ecf from (a)(i) C1

760 + 160 OR ecf from (a)(i)ECF C1
920 (mmHg) OR ecf from (a)(i) A1
(b) (i) decreases B1
(ii) molecules slow down OR (average) speed/movement decreases

OR molecules have less (average kinetic) energy B1
molecules closer B1
[Total: 7]
7 (a) (i) conduction B1
(ii) 1. water expands when heated B1

density (of warm water) decreases OR reverse argument B1
warm water rises B1
2. convection B1
(b) (i) reduce heat losses OR to act as insulation B1

• economic reason: lower costs OR cheaper OR more efficient
• environmental reason: less greenhouse gases OR maintain fuel reserves
• reason to do with system: maintain temperature of water OR less energy
needed to keep water hot OR water stays hotter for longer
[Total: 8]

PMT

8 (a) (i) angle of refraction correctly labelled B1
(ii) normal B1
(b) (i) light ray shown undergoing TIR/turns through 90° B1
(ii) total internal (reflection) B1
(iii) angle of incidence = angle of reflection OR angle of incidence greater than

critical angle B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) alternating voltage OR a.c. (supply) B1
(b) motor (accept fan) AND lamp B1
(c) line 1 tick and then tick B3

line 2 cross/nothing and then tick
line 3 tick and then cross/nothing
(d) V = IR in any form B1
(e) 50 × 5 C1
250 V A1
(f) any two from: B2

• current too large
• fuse wire melts/"blows"
• breaks circuit
• prevents overheating/fires/damage to other components
[Total: 10]
10 (a) iron clearly indicated B1

steel clearly indicated B1
(b) test to see if there is repulsion/attraction C1

clear indication that repulsion identifies the magnets A1
(c) steel B1

PMT

(d) (i) iron filings OR (plotting) compass B1
(ii) at least two complete concentric circles around wire B1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) transverse waves OR travel at same (high) speed OR travel across a vacuum B1
(b) infra-red next to visible B1

microwaves next to radio waves B1
(c) gamma rays B1
(d) (i) medical imaging OR security scanning (at airports etc.) OR dentistry
OR finding defects in welding B1
(ii) use of shielding OR monitor exposure B1
[Total: 6]
12 (a) 3 plots all correct B1

good best-fit single line curve B1
(b) point at 40 days indicated C1
775 ± 75 A1
(c) initial count rate halved OR pair of count rates indicating halving C1
at least one corresponding time from graph C1
20 days ± 2 days A1
[Total: 7]

PMT

* 0 9 3 0 7 9 3 0 0 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 90323/2
PMT
1 A student has a stack of 20 identical coins.
Fig. 1.1 shows the student measuring the height of the stack using a ruler.
cm
15
eye
10
5
stack of
20 coins
Fig. 1.1
(a) With his eye at the position shown, the student’s measurement of the height of the stack is
6.8 cm.
Suggest two reasons why the student’s measurement is inaccurate.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Another student correctly determines the height of the stack as 7.7 cm.
Calculate the average thickness of one coin.
thickness = .................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
(c) The mass of a single coin is 12 g.
State this mass in kg.
mass = ..................................................... kg [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
2 (a) A car is travelling at a constant speed of 80 km / h.
Calculate the distance travelled by the car in half an hour.
distance = .................................................... km [1]
(b) The car in Fig. 2.1 is travelling along a road on which there is a speed detector.
The speed detector consists of two parallel strips attached to the road and connected to a
timer.
speed
detector
strips
Fig. 2.1
The speed detector strips are 0.50 m apart. The time interval between the car hitting the first
strip and the second strip is 0.040 s.
Calculate the average speed of the car between the strips.
speed = ................................................... m / s [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
(c) (i) A car is travelling at a speed of 15 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and brings the car
to a stop.
Fig. 2.2 represents the last part of the journey.
16
14
12
speed
m / s 10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / s
Fig. 2.2
Calculate the distance travelled by the car as it slows down.
distance = ...................................................... m [2]
(ii) On another occasion, the car is travelling at the same speed of 15 m / s when the driver
sees a hazard ahead. She uses emergency braking to stop the car in 2.0 seconds.
On Fig. 2.2, draw the speed-time graph for the emergency stop. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
3 A student is sitting on a chair as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Estimate the mass of the student. .............................................................. [1]

(ii) Which statement is correct for the mass of the chair on the Moon and the mass of the
chair on the Earth?
Tick the box next to the correct statement.
The mass of the chair is greater on the Moon.
The mass of the chair is less on the Moon but not zero.
The mass of the chair is the same on the Moon.
The mass of the chair is zero on the Moon.

[1]
(b) The student tips his chair back to the position shown in Fig. 3.2.
centre of mass of
student and chair
Fig. 3.2
(i) State and explain how the pressure exerted by the chair on the floor in Fig. 3.2 compares
with the pressure exerted by the chair in Fig. 3.1.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
(ii) Explain why the chair will topple over backwards. You may draw on Fig. 3.2 as part of
your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a battery-operated alarm clock.
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 4.1
Use words from the box to complete the sentences.
chemical electrical kinetic light sound thermal
The battery stores ...................................... energy. When the battery is first connected, electrical
energy is transferred to ...................................... energy of the clock’s hands. Some of the electrical
energy is transferred to the surroundings as ...................................... energy. When the alarm bell
rings, electrical energy is transferred to ...................................... energy. [4]
[Total: 4]

PMT
10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows four traces produced by an oscilloscope for different sounds. For each trace
the same settings of the oscilloscope were used.
A B C D
Fig. 5.1
(i) In the box, write the letter A, B, C or D of the trace showing the sound with the highest
pitch.
[1]
(ii) Complete the statement using the letters of the traces.
The two traces that have the same amplitude are ......... and ......... . [1]
(b) Students are provided with a 100 m tape measure and stopwatches. The teacher has a
starting pistol.
Describe an experiment that they can carry out to determine the speed of sound in air.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15
PMT
11
6 A round-bottomed flask is connected to a mercury manometer. The air inside the flask is warm.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 6.1.
mm
500
400
mercury
300
air
200
100
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the scale reading for the left-hand column.
left-hand column = ......................................................... mm
State the scale reading for the right-hand column.
right-hand column = ......................................................... mm

[1]
(ii) Atmospheric pressure is equal to 760 mm of mercury.
Calculate the pressure of the air inside the flask.
pressure = ................................. mm of mercury [3]
(b) The air inside the flask cools.
(i) State what happens to the pressure of the air inside the flask as the air cools.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) In terms of the air molecules, state two ways in which the air changes as it cools.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
PMT
12
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a domestic hot water system.
to taps
metal
storage
water tank
jacket heater
from
water
supply
Fig. 7.1
(a) The heater is placed at the bottom of the storage tank.
(i) Name the process by which water in contact with the heater becomes hot.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) 1. Explain how the water at the top of the storage tank becomes hot. Include the word
density in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
2. State the name given to this process.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Hot water storage tanks are often covered in a material such as polystyrene or a ‘jacket’ made
from a woollen material.
(i) State the purpose of this covering.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons why the use of such a material is important.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15
PMT
13
8 (a) A ray of red light passes through a glass block, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
air
glass
ray of red light
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, clearly label the angle of refraction. [1]

(ii) State the name given to the dashed line drawn at 90° to the boundary.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A roadside reflector is made of plastic. It reflects the light from car headlamps.
Fig. 8.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through the reflector.
A roadside
45° reflector
45°
Fig. 8.2
The critical angle for the plastic is less than 45°.
(i) On Fig. 8.2, complete the path of the ray of light. [1]
(ii) State the term used to describe this type of reflection.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the ray turns though 90° at A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
14
9 In cold weather, houses are often heated with an electrical heater.
Fig. 9.1 shows a simplified electrical circuit for a household heater.
Fig. 9.1
(a) What does the symbol represent?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The heater has three identical heating elements, a fan driven by a motor and a lamp.
Name the components that are working when switch A only is closed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The heater has two switches, B and C, to give high, medium and low heat settings.
Identify how each heat setting is obtained. Complete the table by adding ticks to represent a
closed switch.
heater settings switch B switch C

high
medium
low
[3]
(d) Write down the equation that relates resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
15
(e) The current in one of the heating elements is 5.0 A. The resistance of the heating element
is 50 Ω.
Calculate the p.d. across the heating element. Include the appropriate unit.
p.d. = ........................................................... [2]
(f) Explain how the component with the symbol protects the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
16
10 (a) The box below contains the names of some metals.
copper gold iron lead silver steel
Circle the metals which may be attracted to a magnet. [2]
(b) A student has 3 metal bars which all look the same. Two of the metal bars are magnets and
one is not.
Explain how the student can identify the two magnets without using any other equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) From the metals given in (a), state the name of the metal that can be used to make a
permanent magnet.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Fig. 10.1 shows a vertical wire passing through a horizontal piece of card.
wire
Fig. 10.1
There is a direct current (d.c.) in the wire. The current produces a magnetic field around the
wire.
(i) Name a piece of equipment that can be used to investigate the magnetic field produced
by the current-carrying wire.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
17
(ii) Fig. 10.2 shows the wire and the card viewed from above.
vertical
wire
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, carefully draw two complete field lines produced by the current-carrying
wire. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
18
11 Fig. 11.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.
a-rays X-rays ultra- visible radio

violet light waves
Fig. 11.1
(a) Identify one feature that is the same for all radiations that form the electromagnetic spectrum.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces between visible light and radio waves by adding the names of the
radiations. [2]
(c) State the radiation that has the shortest wavelength.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Describe a common use of X-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a precaution taken by those who work with X-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
19
12 Some water is contaminated with a radioactive element.
In a laboratory, the count rate from a sample of the contaminated water is measured every 10 days.
The results are shown in the table.
time / days 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
count rate
3250 2300 1650 1200 980 550 400 320
counts / s
(a) On Fig. 12.1, complete the graph by plotting the first three points and drawing the best-fit
curve. [2]
3500
3000
2500
count-rate
counts / s 2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / days
Fig. 12.1
(b) One of the readings is incorrect due to an error.
Circle this point on the graph and estimate the correct count rate for this day.
count rate = ........................................................... [2]
(c) Use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive element. Ignore background
radiation.
half-life = ........................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in he Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

answer.
given.
significant figure.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) 0.38 and 0.66 seen

OR correct vertical lines/marks on axes ± ½ square C1
0.28 (s) A1
(b) speed is changing/increasing OR it is accelerating B1

OR accelerating at first (when curved line) then steady speed (when line is
straight)
(because) graph is a curve OR gradient is changing B1

OR different distances travelled in equal time intervals
OR accept ‘due to force of gravity’
[Total: 4]
2 (a) Any three from: max. B3

• string with mass on pin in front of card
• hang card on pin from a hole
• make sure card can swing freely
• (place plumb line on pin) and mark line/position on card
• repeat using at least one more hole
• where lines cross is centre of mass
(b) card will balance at that point B1

OR repeat using third hole
accept place pivot beneath centre of mass
[Total: 4]
3 (a) (i) 160(g) B1
(ii) (density =) mass÷volume, in any form C1
candidate’s (a)(i) ÷ 200 C1
0.8 (g / cm3) A1
(b) (i) conduction B1
(ii) warm(ed) liquid expands B1

NOT particles expand
density of warm(ed) liquid decreases B1

NOT particles become less dense
less dense liquid/warm liquid rises B1

NOT heat rises

PMT

(c) (i) evaporation OR boiling B1
(ii) any one from: max. B1

• liquid molecules gain energy/move faster
• (the) most energetic molecules
ignore vibrates faster
molecules escape (from the liquid/into the air) B1
[Total: 11]
4 (a) weight OR gravitational attraction B1
(b) two forces are equal (in size) OR X and Y are equal (in size) B1
acting in opposite directions B1
accept forces are balanced OR no resultant force for BOTH marks
(c) arrow pointing to the right on Fig. 4.1 or Fig. 4.2 B1
(d) moves downwards/falls AND explanation e.g.

Y>X OR upwards force has decreased B1
[Total: 5]
5 (a) (i) upwards B1
(ii) shape B1
(b) (i) height of bounce decreases B1
(ii) heats/is transferred into the surroundings

OR (transferred) into thermal energy/heat/internal energy of surroundings B1
[Total: 4]
6 (a) B, D, C, A
all correct for 3 marks; 2 or 3 correct for 2 marks; 1 correct for 1 mark max. B3
(b) energy source that will not run out

OR source is not finite/is unlimited/is constantly replenished/can be replaced B1

PMT

(c) (i) any two from: max. B2

• short start-up time
• lower running costs OR lower cost per unit OR no fuel costs
• can be controlled to meet peaks in demand OR predictable (supply)
• does not produce polluting gases ACCEPT is less polluting
• can be used as an energy store
• provides a recreational facility/ tourism
IGNORE vague answers such as ‘environmentally friendly’
(ii) any one from: max. B1

• loss of habitat/environmental problems
• limited (suitable) sites (available)
• ACCEPT costly to build
[Total: 7]
7 (a) tractor tracks have larger area (in contact with ground)
OR reverse argument for car B1
pressure (on ground) mentioned

OR weight spread out (over larger area) NOT pressure is spread out B1
correct argument linking pressure and area B1
(b) (i) any value or range of values >0 and < 24 B1
(ii) any two from: max. B2

• (molecules) are slower/have less KE
• fewer impacts OR impact with less force
• (so) less force per unit area
[Total: 6]
8 (a) ray goes straight through 1st surface without changing direction B1
ray reflecting and NOT refracting at either inclined surface B1
ray reflected through 90° at either surface OR i = r marked B1
emerging ray parallel to incident ray B1
(b) (i) X-rays B1

IGNORE answers in boxes
(ii) any two from: max. B2

• sensor detects warm things/heat/changes in temperature
• person is warmer/at different temperature (than surroundings)
• person emits (more) IR (than surroundings)

PMT

(iii) any two from max. B2

• same speed (in vacuum, accept air)
• can travel in a vacuum
• transverse waves
IGNORE electromagnetic
NOT 2 obviously contradictory responses,
e.g. transverse AND longitudinal scores 0
[Total: 9]
9 (a) N and S labelled correctly, N on left, S on right B1
(b) Repels (a known) magnet/ attracts unmagnetised iron/steel B1
(c) steel B1
alternative materials such as Magnadur and Alnico accepted
(d) (Place inside) coil OR hammer it OR heat it B1
coil connected to a.c. (supply) OR hammer for long time

OR heat to high temperature then cool B1
(e) (i) electromagnet B1
(ii) (magnetic field/magnetism) can be controlled /can be switched off B1
(iii) suitable use e.g. crane for moving vehicles in scrap yards / relay / electric bells etc. B1
[Total: 8]
10 (a) (i) copper B1
(ii) Vp/Vs = Np/Ns in any form OR voltage ratio calculated C1
correct substitution e.g. 240/ 6 = 6000/ Ns C1
150 A1
(b) damp B1
[Total: 5]
11 (a) ionising radiation OR radioactive emissions OR radioactivity B1
from surroundings OR that is always present B1

PMT

(b) GM tube OR Geiger counter B1

accept radiation/film badge
(c) 86 B1
133 B1
86 B1
(d) (i) α B1
(ii) nucleus B1
(iii) electron: 0/zero/blank space

neutron: 2 B1
proton: 2 B1
note: no mark for electron, but max. 1 mark for question if electron has any
non-zero number
[Total: 10]
12 (a) thermistor correctly identified (by letter T) B1
(b) (i) ammeter B1

NOT ampmeter
(ii) voltmeter B1
(c) (i) (R =) V÷I in any form C1
3.2÷0.005 C1
640 (Ω) A1
(c) (ii) increases B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

* 2 8 4 3 4 2 9 8 5 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 90331/4
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a distance-time graph for a falling object.
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
distance
fallen 1.0
/m
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use this graph to find the time it takes the object to fall from 0.60 m to 1.60 m.
time = ....................................................... s [2]
(b) State and explain what the graph shows about the motion of the falling object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an irregularly shaped piece of card.
Fig. 2.1
A student is asked to find the centre of mass of the card. The student is provided with a clamp and
stand, a small mass attached to a thin string and a long pin.
(a) Describe the procedure for finding the centre of mass of the card. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) What simple test can be carried out to confirm that the centre of mass has been found?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
3 A student has a beaker of liquid as shown in Fig. 3.1.
beaker
liquid
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student makes some measurements. His results are shown in the table.
mass of beaker and liquid 280 g

mass of empty beaker 120 g
volume of liquid 200 cm3
(i) Calculate the mass of the liquid in the beaker.
mass of liquid = ....................................................... g [1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ............................................... g / cm3 [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
(b) The student warms the beaker and liquid on an electric heater as shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
heater
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the name of the process by which thermal energy is transferred through the glass
of the beaker.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how thermal energy is transferred throughout the liquid by convection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) After heating for 20 minutes, the student re-weighs the beaker and liquid. He finds that the
mass of the beaker and liquid has decreased to 260 g.
(i) State the name of the process that causes this decrease in mass.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain how this process occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
4 At a party, three balloons are filled with a gas less dense than air. The balloons are tied to an
empty drink can. The can floats, without moving, in the air above a table, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
empty
drink can
top of Y
table
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2
(a) Fig. 4.2 represents the vertical forces acting on the can as it floats in the air.
State the name given to the downward force labelled Y.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In terms of the vertical forces acting on the can, explain why the can does not rise or fall.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A window is opened, causing a draught of air into the room. The window is to the left of the
balloons and can, and at the same height.
On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow indicating the direction of the resultant force on the can. [1]
(d) One of the balloons suddenly bursts.
State and explain what happens to the can.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
5 A footballer kicks a football and it bounces to another player.
Fig. 5.1 shows part of the path taken by the ball.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use words from the box to complete the sentences below. Each word may be used once,
more than once, or not at all.
direction downwards forwards mass shape slower upwards
(i) Each time the football moves ....................................., it gains gravitational potential
energy. [1]
(ii) Each time the football hits the ground, it changes ....................................., and this results
in energy stored as strain energy (elastic potential energy). [1]
(b) Each time the football hits the ground, energy is transferred away from the ball.
(i) State how you can tell this from the diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the energy that is transferred away from the ball.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a hydroelectric power station.
pipes
reservoir
hydroelectric
power station
dam
outflow
of water
Fig. 6.1
(a) These are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. They are not in the
correct order.
A The electromagnets turn inside a large coil.

B Water flows down pipes from the reservoir to the turbine.
C Inside the generator, the spinning shaft turns electromagnets.
D The falling water keeps the turbine spinning.
Use the letters A, B, C and D to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station
works.
Rainwater flows off the hills into the reservoir behind the dam.
The turbine transfers energy by a spinning shaft to a generator.
Electricity is generated.
[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15
PMT
(b) Hydroelectric power is described as a renewable source of energy.
Explain what is meant by the term renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Using a renewable source of energy is one advantage of hydroelectric power compared with
other energy sources.
(i) State two other advantages of hydroelectric power.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State one disadvantage of hydroelectric power.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a car and a snow tractor.
Fig. 7.1
The car and the snow tractor have the same weight.
(a) Explain why the snow tractor can travel across soft snow without sinking, but the car cannot.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The car driver checks his tyre pressure in a warm garage. The pressure of the air inside the
tyre when it is warm is 24.0 N / cm2.
The car is driven outside and left in the snow.
(i) Suggest a value for the pressure of the air inside the tyre when it is cold.
pressure = .............................................. N / cm2 [1]
(ii) In terms of the air molecules inside the tyre, explain the change in the pressure of the air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
11
8 (a) A student arranges two 45° prisms as shown in Fig. 8.1. He aims a ray of red light to hit the
surface of one of the prisms at 90°.
ray of 45°
red light
45°
45°
45°
Fig. 8.1
The critical angle for the glass is 42 °.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the path of the light through the prisms. [4]
(b) Visible light is one region of the electromagnetic spectrum, as represented in Fig. 8.2.
radio infra-red visible ultraviolet

microwaves
waves waves light waves
long wavelength short wavelength
Fig. 8.2
(i) Two regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are missing from Fig. 8.2.
State the name of the missing region with the longer wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) An infra-red sensor is fitted into a room as part of an intruder alarm system.
Explain how the sensor detects a person in the room.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State two properties that are the same for all electromagnetic waves.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
PMT
12
9 A student has two powerful bar magnets and an iron rod.
The student uses the N pole of one magnet and the S pole of the other magnet. Starting from the
centre of the iron rod he rubs the poles against the rod out to its ends. He repeats this many times.
Fig. 9.1 shows how the student uses the two magnets to make the iron rod into a magnet.
N
S
S
N
iron rod
Fig. 9.1
(a) Label the magnetic poles created on the iron rod. [1]
(b) Describe how to test whether the iron rod has become a magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest a material that could be used to make a permanent magnet.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Describe how a permanent magnet can be demagnetised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
13
(e) Another way of making a magnet is shown in Fig. 9.2.
iron nail
coil of insulated wire
Fig. 9.2
(i) State the name given to this type of magnet.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest an advantage of this type of magnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Suggest one use for this type of magnet.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a charger for a mobile phone (cell phone).
charger
Fig. 10.1
The charger contains a transformer.
(a) (i) Suggest a suitable material for the coils of the transformer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The transformer has an input voltage of 240 V and an output voltage of 6.0 V. There are
6000 turns on the input coil.
Calculate the number of turns on the output coil.
number of turns = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Place a tick in the box alongside the condition in which it could be dangerous to use the
charger.
cool
damp
dry
warm
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT
15
11 In some areas there are high levels of background radiation.
(a) Explain what is meant by background radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Suggest how background radiation can be detected.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Radon-219 (21896Rn) is a radioactive gas.
Complete the table below to show the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom
of 21896Rn.
type of particle number

electron
neutron
proton
[3]
(d) Alpha particles are emitted when radon-219 decays.
(i) Tick the box alongside the correct symbol for an alpha particle.
γ
[1]
(ii) From what part of the radon-219 atom is the alpha particle emitted?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Complete the table below to show the composition of an alpha particle.
type of particle number

electron
neutron
proton
[2]
[Total: 10]
PMT
16
12 A student sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 12.1.
Fig. 12.1
(a) On Fig. 12.1, label the thermistor with a T. [1]
(b) The student wants to determine the resistance of the thermistor at different temperatures.
Complete the sentences for the meters he should use in the circuit.
(i) The meter to be connected in series with the thermistor is .................................. . [1]
(ii) The meter to be connected in parallel with the thermistor is ................................ . [1]
(c) These are the student’s results for a temperature of 20 °C.
p.d. across thermistor / V current in thermistor / A

3.2 0.0050
(i) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 °C.
resistance = ....................................................... Ω [3]
(ii) When the temperature increases, the resistance of the thermistor decreases.
State what happens, if anything, to the current in the thermistor.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

answer.
given.
significant figure.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) volume = length × cross-sectional area words, symbols or numbers C1
8.0 accept 8 (cm3 ) A1
(b) time of burning: 2 hours 15 minutes B1
2.25 hours, accept 2¼ hours B1
(c) (speed = ) distance ÷time in any form: symbols, words, numbers, ecf from (b) C1
0.8(0) cm / hour, ecf from (b) A1
(d) correct deduction from candidate’s (c) B1
correct reasoning from candidate’s (c)

e.g. 24 cm candle would burn for 30 h OR 19.2 cm will burn in 24 h B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) (i) rule(r) A1
(ii) balance A1
(b) (i) (density =) mass ÷ volume in any form: symbols, words, numbers C1
15.2 ÷ 1.36 C1
11.2 (g / cm3) accept 11 A1
(ii) lead, ecf from (b) (i) B1
[Total: 6]
3 energy °C
max. B2
resistance m/s
speed J
temperature Ω
note: 1 mark for 1 or 2 lines correct, 2 marks for all 3 lines correct

PMT

4 (a) 4 (N) B1
up the slope B1
(b) idea of changes speed C1

reduces speed / slows down / decelerates / retardation A1
[Total: 4]
5 (a) 1100 (m) ± 20 B1
(b) stationary / not moving / at rest B1
(c) (i) C AND D B1
(ii) D AND E B1
(d) (speed=) distance ÷ time, in any form: symbols, words, numbers, ecf from (a) C1
use of 300 s OR conversion of time to s OR ÷ 60 C1
3.7 OR 3.67 (m / s) A1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) line from fossil fuel to coal-fired B1
line from hot rocks underground to geothermal B1
line from uranium fuel rods to nuclear B1
(b) D, C, B, A max. B3
note: all correct order = 3 marks, 2 or 3 correct = 2 marks, 1 correct = 1 mark
[Total: 6]
7 (a) melting evaporating / boiling max. B3

freezing / solidification condensing
note: 3 marks for all 4 correct, 2 marks for 3 correct, 1 mark for 2 correct

PMT

(b) tick in first box (particles move randomly) B1
tick in third box (particles are much further apart...) B1
tick in sixth box (particles move faster...) B1
(c) any three from: max. B3

• nail varnish remover evaporates
• energy needed to evaporate / most energetic particles escape
• energy is transferred from student / heat flow gives sensation of cold
• remaining liquid colder / average KE is less
[Total: 9]
8 (a) arrow from candle to mirror OR from mirror to eye B1

NOT contradictions
(b) candle flame image drawn at same height as flame B1
candle flame image drawn same distance behind mirror as flame is in front B1
(c) (i) further away (from mirror / eye) B1
(ii) same (size) / nothing / does not change B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) (i) 1. amplitude B1
2. D B1
(ii) any named example of electromagnetic wave OR seismic ‘S’ wave B1
(iii) speed = distance÷time OR 7.5 × 4.0 OR speed × time C1
30 (cm) A1
(b) (i) at least one straight line in shallow water and at different angle,
accept refracted wrong way B1
line(s) show wave refraction away from normal B1
at least 3 lines drawn showing refracted wave of constant wavelength, different from
incident wavelength, and continuous with incident wavefronts B1
(ii) refraction B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

10 (i) 1. negative B1
2. electrons B1
(ii) (both) strips have same (type of) charge B1
(and so) repel (each other) B1
(iii) (idea of) shirt gaining / losing (electric) charge OR becomes charged
OR charge transferred between shirt and body B1
unlike charges attract B1
[Total: 6]
11 (a) A: warm ticked B1
B: off ticked B1
C: hot ticked B1
(b) V=I×R in any form OR V ÷ I C1
(R = ) 10 ÷ 6.0 C1
1.7 OR 1.67 (Ω) A1

accept 1.66 1.6 scores 2 marks
(c) lamp B1
to indicate heater is on / working B1
(d) any two from: max. B2

• fuse identified as the relevant component
• the fuse will melt / blow / break
• (this) breaks circuit / stops current
[Total: 10]
12 (a) (i) proton B1
(ii) electron B1
(b) nucleon number = 14 B1
proton number = 7 B1

PMT

(c) evidence of halving 20 000 C1
idea of three half lives C1
3 × 5800 allow ecf for candidate’s no. of ½ lives C1
17 400 (years) A1
[Total: 8]

PMT

* 4 6 6 9 9 6 0 8 7 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/CGW) 90391/2
PMT
1 In the past, burning candles were used as timers.
A boy carries out an experiment to make his own timer using a burning candle.
Fig. 1.1 shows the length of the candle, and the clock he used, at the start of the experiment and
at the end of the experiment.
start of the experiment end of the experiment

clock clock
11: 50 14 : 05
candle at 5.0 cm
the start candle at 3.2 cm
the end
(a) The candle has a cross-sectional area of 1.6 cm2.
Calculate the volume of candle at the start of the experiment.
volume = .................................................. cm3 [2]
(b) Use Fig. 1.1 to complete the table.
time at start of the experiment

time at end of the experiment
time for which the candle .................. hours ..................minutes

was burning
= .................. hours
[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
(c) The difference in the length of the candle from the start to the end of the experiment
was 1.8 cm.
Calculate the rate, in cm / hour, at which the candle burns.
rate = ........................................... cm / hour [2]
(d) The boy estimates that he would need a candle about 24 cm long, of the same material and
diameter, to make a candle timer that would last at least one day.
State whether the boy’s estimate is correct. Give a reason for your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 (a) A student is asked to find the density of a small block of metal, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
length width
height
Fig. 2.1
Use words from the list below to complete the following sentences.
balance beaker measuring cylinder protractor rule thermometer
(i) The student should use a ............................................. to measure the length, width and
height of the metal block.
(ii) The student should use a ............................................. to find the mass of the metal
block.
[2]
(b) A jeweller has a small block of metal. The block has a mass of 15.2 g and a volume of 1.36 cm3.
(i) Calculate the density of the metal.
density = .............................................. g / cm3 [3]
(ii) The jeweller looks up the values for the density of various metals and produces a table,
part of which is shown below.
density
metal
g / cm3
gold 19.3
lead 11.3
platinum 21.5
silver 10.5
Using your answer to (b)(i) and the information in the table, state which metal the block is
most likely to be made from.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
3 In the columns below are physical quantities and the units in which they are measured.
Draw a line from each quantity to its corresponding unit. One line is drawn for you.
quantity unit
energy °C
resistance m/s
speed J
temperature Ω
[Total: 2]

PMT
4 A toy car is rolling down a slope. Fig. 4.1 shows the total forward force and the total backward force
acting on the car.
16 N
12 N
Fig. 4.1
(a) Calculate the resultant force on the car.
size of force = ............................................................ N
direction of force = ...............................................................

[2]
(b) What will be the effect of this resultant force on the car’s motion?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
5 A girl cycles to meet a friend. The distance-time graph for her journey from start to finish is shown
in Fig. 5.1.
1200
E
1000
distance / m
800
D
600
400
B C
200
0
A 0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
Fig. 5.1
(a) How far does the girl travel from start to finish?
distance = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Describe the motion of the girl between points B and C.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Which section of the graph shows
(i) the part of the girl’s journey that involves cycling up a hill 500 m long,
between ............ and ............ [1]
(ii) the girl travelling at the fastest speed?
between ............ and ............ [1]
(d) Calculate her average speed, in m / s, for the whole journey.
average speed = .................................................. m / s [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
6 Different types of power station use different sources of energy.
(a) Draw one straight line from each energy source to the type of power station that uses it.
energy source type of power station
hydroelectric
fossil fuel
nuclear
hot rocks underground geothermal
coal-fired
uranium fuel rods
wind farm
[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows part of a solar power station.
SLSH FDUU\LQJ
ZDWHU PLUURU
Fig. 6.1
These are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. They are not in the
correct order.
A Electricity is generated.
B The turbine turns the generator.
C Steam drives the turbine.
D Water in the pipe absorbs energy.
Use the letters A, B, C and D to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station
works.
Radiation from the Sun hits the mirror.
Radiation is reflected onto the pipe.
Hot water turns into steam.
[3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
7 (a) The arrows on Fig. 7.1 represent four changes of state.
solid liquid gas
Fig. 7.1
On each arrow, write the name for the change of state. [3]
(b) The statements below are about particles in a gas.
Tick three boxes to show which statements are correct.
The particles move randomly.
The particles are in a regular repeating pattern.
The particles are much further apart than they are in a solid.
The particles vibrate about fixed positions.
The particles expand when they are heated.
The particles move faster when they are heated.

[3]
(c) A student spills a small amount of nail varnish remover on one of her hands. Nail varnish
remover is a liquid with a low boiling point.
Explain why this hand feels colder than her other hand.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
11
8 A student looks into a vertical mirror to see the reflection of a burning candle.
Fig. 8.1 shows one ray of light being reflected by the mirror.
eye mirror
flame
candle
Fig. 8.1
(a) On the ray in Fig. 8.1, mark arrows to indicate the direction of travel of the light. [1]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, carefully mark the position of the image of the candle flame. [2]
(c) The candle is moved further from the mirror.
State what, if anything, happens to
(i) the position of the image
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the size of the image.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 represents a wave in a water tank. Five distances are shown, labelled A, B, C, D
and E.
B D E
A
C
Fig. 9.1
(i) 1. Which property of the wave is represented by distance C?
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Which of the labelled distances represents the wavelength of the wave?
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Water waves are transverse waves.
State another example of a transverse wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The speed of the wavefronts is 7.5 cm / s.
Calculate the distance moved by a wavefront in 4.0 s.
distance = .................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows, from above, a wave travelling on water.
shallow water
water
tank
deep
water direction of
travel of wave
wavefront
Fig. 9.2
The wave has reached an area of shallow water, where it travels more slowly.
(i) Complete the diagram to show the wavefronts in the shallow water. [3]
(ii) State the term used to describe what happens to the wave as it enters the shallow water.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
10 A student is investigating static electricity.
(i) The student charges a plastic rod by rubbing it with a dry cloth. The rod becomes
positively charged as shown in Fig. 10.1.
cloth
+
+ + rod
+ ++ +
+ + ++
+ ++
+
Fig. 10.1
1. State the sign of the charge, if any, on the cloth.
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. State which particles the cloth has gained for it to have this charge.
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student then rubs two thin plastic strips with another dry cloth. The strips are
suspended so that they are free to move.
Fig. 10.2 shows the two plastic strips before and after the student rubs them with the dry
cloth.
before rubbing after rubbing
string string
sticky tape
plastic strips
Fig. 10.2
Explain why the bottom ends of the strips move apart after rubbing.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
15
(iii) A boy wears a shirt made from nylon. After wearing the shirt for some time he finds the
shirt clinging to his body.
Use your knowledge of electrostatic charges to explain why this occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
11 Some cars have electrically heated front seats. Each seat has a warm and a hot setting, controlled
by a switch.
The circuit for one seat is shown in Fig. 11.1.
12.0 V
fuse
X
switch
A C
B
heater
Fig. 11.1
(a) The circuit contains a switch that can connect to any of the contacts A, B or C.
In the table below, put one tick for each switch setting to indicate the condition of the seat.
condition of seat
switch setting off warm hot
A
B
C
[3]
(b) When the heater setting is on ‘hot’, the current in the heater is 6.0 A. The potential difference
across the heater is 10.0 V.
Calculate the resistance of the heater.
resistance = .......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
17
(c) What is the name and purpose of component X?
name of component ..................................................................................................................
purpose .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The heated seat develops a fault and there is a large current in the circuit.
Explain what happens to prevent further damage to the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
18
12 Fig. 12.1 represents an atom of carbon.
neutron
(a) (i) State the name of particle X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of particle Y.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Carbon-14 is unstable. It decays by beta emission to form nitrogen.
Complete the equation for this decay.
14 ..... 0
6
C .....
N + –1
e
[2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
19
(c) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5800 years.
A piece of wood contained 20 000 carbon-14 atoms when it was buried in a landslide.
Calculate the number of years it takes until the number of carbon-14 atoms in the wood
is 2500.
number of years = .......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/M/J/15

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

PMT

Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 A 22 D
3 A 23 D
4 D 24 B
5 A 25 D
6 C 26 B
7 B 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 B 29 B
10 C 30 A
11 C 31 A
12 D 32 D
13 B 33 A
14 A 34 B
15 C 35 B
16 C 36 C
17 D 37 B
18 A 38 D
19 B 39 D
20 A 40 B

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
*9170531728*
Soft clean eraser

Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
Write in soft pencil.

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
IB16 06_0625_21/2RP
PMT
1 The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
10 20 30
mm
cm 1 2 3
What is the length of the feather?
A 19 mm B 29 mm C 19 cm D 29 cm
2 The speed-time graph shown is for a car moving in a straight line.
15
speed
m/s
10
0
0 20 40 60 80
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car when the time is 40 s?
A 0 m / s2 B 15 − 3 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D (15 – 3) m / s2
40 40
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
3 Two runners take part in a race.
The graph shows how the speed of each runner changes with time.
runner 1
speed
runner 2
0
0 t time
What does the graph show about the runners at time t ?
A Both runners are moving at the same speed.

B Runner 1 has zero acceleration.
C Runner 1 is overtaking runner 2.
D Runner 2 is slowing down.
4 A satellite orbits the Earth above the atmosphere at a constant speed.
The diagram shows the satellite at one point in its circular orbit around the Earth.
Which labelled arrow shows the direction of the resultant force on the satellite at the position
shown?
direction of rotation
of satellite
D B
Earth
satellite
C

PMT
5 A cup contains hot liquid.
Some of the liquid evaporates.
What happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
mass weight
A decreases decreases
B decreases stays the same
C stays the same decreases
D stays the same stays the same
6 The diagrams show three uniform beams P, Q and R, each pivoted at its centre.
The two forces acting on each beam are also shown.
2.0 m 1.0 m
P
4.0 N 4.0 N
4.0 m 2.0 m
Q
2.0 N 5.0 N
2.0 m 4.0 m
R
1.5 N 1.0 N
Which beams rotate clockwise?
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
7 An object of mass 50 kg accelerates from a velocity of 2.0 m / s to a velocity of 10 m / s in the same

direction.
What is the impulse provided to cause this acceleration?
A 250 N s B 400 N s C 850 N s D 2500 N s
8 A scalar quantity has
A magnitude and direction.

B no magnitude and no direction.
C magnitude but no direction.
D direction but no magnitude.
9 Energy is released in some nuclear reactions.
Which nuclear reaction takes place in a nuclear power station, and which nuclear reaction takes
place in the Sun?
nuclear power
the Sun
station
A fission fission
B fission fusion
C fusion fission
D fusion fusion
10 A lorry of mass 4000 kg is travelling at a speed of 4.0 m / s.
A car has a mass of 1000 kg. The kinetic energy of the car is equal to the kinetic energy of the
lorry.
What is the speed of the car?
A 2.0 m / s B 4.0 m / s C 8.0 m / s D 16.0 m / s

PMT
11 A force acts on an object and causes the object to move a certain distance, in the same direction
as the force.
Which row represents a situation in which the largest amount of work is done on the object by the
force?
force / N distance moved / m
A 2.0 40.0
B 10.0 2.0
C 20.0 6.0
D 100.0 1.0
12 A diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 × 105 Pa.
A bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20 cm3 when it is released. The bubble
moves upwards to the surface of the water.
At the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
The temperature of the water is the same at all depths.
What is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface?
A 15 cm3 B 16 cm3 C 20 cm3 D 25 cm3
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
mercury
X
Y
Z
The atmospheric pressure increases.
Which distance increases?
A VW B WY C XY D XZ
14 Which statement about evaporation is correct?
A Evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining liquid to decrease.

B Evaporation does not occur from a cold liquid near its freezing point.
C Evaporation does not occur from a dense liquid, such as mercury.
D Evaporation occurs from all parts of a liquid.
15 A beaker contains 0.500 kg of water at a temperature of 3.0 °C. The beaker is heated, and the
internal energy of the water increases by 21.0 kJ.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
What is the temperature of the water after it has been heated?
A 5.5 °C B 10.0 °C C 13.0 °C D 31.5 °C

PMT
16 A substance loses thermal energy (heat) to the surroundings at a steady rate.
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.
temperature
P
0
0 time
What could the portion PQ of the graph represent?
A gas condensing
B gas cooling
C liquid cooling
D liquid solidifying
17 A student wishes to check the upper and the lower fixed points on a Celsius scale thermometer.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
She has four beakers P, Q, R and S.
Beaker P contains a mixture of ice and salt.

Beaker Q contains a mixture of ice and water.
Beaker R contains boiling salt solution.
Beaker S contains boiling water.
Which two beakers should she use to check the fixed points?
A P and R B P and S C Q and R D Q and S
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
18 Two otherwise identical cars, one black and one white, are at the same initial temperature. The
cars are left in bright sunshine and their temperatures increase. During the night their
temperatures decrease.
Which car shows the greater rate of temperature increase and which car shows the greater rate
of temperature decrease?
greater rate of greater rate of

temperature temperature
increase decrease
A black black
B black white
C white black
D white white
19 A liquid is heated in a beaker.
liquid
heating
The density of the liquid changes as its temperature increases. This causes energy to be
transferred throughout the liquid.
How does the density change and what is this energy transfer process?
energy transfer
density
process
A decreases conduction
B decreases convection
C increases conduction
D increases convection
20 Sound waves of frequency 2.0 kHz travel through a substance at a speed of 800 m / s.
What is the wavelength of the waves?
A 0.40 m B 2.5 m C 400 m D 1600 m

PMT
10
21 Which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and X-rays?
light waves sound waves X-rays
A longitudinal longitudinal transverse

B longitudinal transverse longitudinal
C transverse longitudinal transverse
D transverse transverse longitudinal
22 The diagram shows light travelling from air into glass.
Four angles v, w, x and y are shown.
normal
light
w
air v
glass y
Which formula is used to calculate the refractive index n of the glass?
sin v sin v sin w sin w

A n= B n= C n= D n=
sin y sin x sin y sin x
23 The diagram shows a converging lens forming an image of an object.
image object
Y
Which statement about the image is correct?
A It is real and can be seen by an eye at X.

B It is real and can be seen by an eye at Y.
C It is virtual and can be seen by an eye at X.
D It is virtual and can be seen by an eye at Y.
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
11
24 A sound wave travels through air as a series of compressions and rarefactions.
Which row correctly compares the air pressure in a compression and the air pressure in a
rarefaction to the air pressure nearby where there is no sound wave?
air pressure in air pressure in

a compression a rarefaction
A higher higher
B higher lower
C lower higher
D lower lower
25 A sound wave has a certain amplitude and a certain frequency.
A second sound wave is quieter and lower in pitch than the first sound wave.
The second wave has
A a larger amplitude and a greater frequency.

B a larger amplitude and a smaller frequency.
C a smaller amplitude and a greater frequency.
D a smaller amplitude and a smaller frequency.
26 What is an electric field?
A a region around a wire carrying an electric current in which a compass needle experiences a
force
B a region in which an electric charge experiences a force
C a region in which an electric charge is attracted by the Earth’s gravity
D a region through which electromagnetic radiation is passing

PMT
12
27 A negatively charged rod is held close to one side of a metal sphere. The other side of the sphere
is earthed.
Which diagram shows the distribution of charge on the metal sphere?
A B
– + –
–
– –– – – ––
– – – + –
C D
+ + +
+
– –– – –– +
– + + – +
28 A cell is connected to a lamp, as shown.
– +
A charge of 4.0 C flows through the lamp in 2.0 s.
What is the direction of the electron flow in the lamp and what is the current in the lamp?
direction of electron
current / A
flow in lamp
A from left to right 2.0

B from left to right 8.0
C from right to left 2.0
D from right to left 8.0
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
13
29 The diagrams show four current-voltage graphs.
Which two graphs show the characteristics of an ohmic resistor and of a filament lamp?
W X Y Z
current current current current
0 0 0 0
0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage
ohmic filament
resistor lamp
A W Y
B X Y
C W Z
D X Z
30 The four circuits shown all include an a.c. power supply, two diodes and a lamp.
In which circuit is there a rectified current in the lamp?
A B
C D

PMT
14
31 The diagram shows a combination of logic gates.
input P
(= 0) output X
input Q output Y
(= 1)
Input P is at a logic state 0 (low) and input Q is at a logic state 1 (high).
What are the logic states at output X and at output Y?
output X output Y
A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
D 1 1
32 The diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.
LDR
In the evening it gets dark.
Which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (LDR) and on the
potential difference (p.d.) across it?
resistance of LDR p.d. across LDR
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
15
33 A domestic circuit includes a 30 A fuse. This protects the wiring if there is too much current in the
circuit.
In which wire is the 30 A fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?
position operation
A live wire disconnects the circuit

B live wire reduces the current to 30 A
C neutral wire disconnects the circuit
D neutral wire reduces the current to 30 A
34 A strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.
current core
coil
pins
What happens when the current in the coil is halved?
A No pins are attracted.

B Some pins are attracted, but not as many.
C The same number of pins is attracted.
D More pins are attracted.

PMT
16
35 The diagram shows a transformer.
input output
voltage voltage

800 turns 40 turns
The input voltage is 240 V.
What is the output voltage?
A 6.0 V B 12 V C 20 V D 40 V
36 The diagram shows a shaded area where the direction of a magnetic field is into the page.
A beam of β-particles enters the field as shown.
magnetic field
into the page
beam of
β-particles
In which direction is the beam of β-particles deflected as they enter the magnetic field?
A into the page

B out of the page
C down the page
D up the page
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
17
37 The arrangement shown is used to check whether the flour inside a cardboard packet is above a
certain level. If it is above this level, the flour absorbs the radiation from the source so that it
doesn’t reach the detector.
radioactive
source detector
flour
cardboard
packet
Which type of radiation is suitable to use?
A α-particles only
B β-particles only
C either α-particles or β-particles
D γ-rays only
38 A nucleus of americium 243

95 Am emits an α-particle to form a nucleus of neptunium (Np).
Which equation represents this decay?
A 243
95 Am → 247
97 Np + 2α
4
B 243
95 Am → 243
96 Np + -1 α
0
C 243
95 Am → 243
94 Np + -1 α
0
D 243
95 Am → 239
93 Np + 2α
4
39 A certain element has several isotopes.
Which statement about these isotopes is correct?
A They must have different numbers of electrons orbiting their nuclei.

B They must have the same number of neutrons in their nuclei.
C They must have the same number of nucleons in their nuclei.
D They must have the same number of protons in their nuclei.

PMT
18
40 A reading is taken every 10 minutes of the number of emissions per second from a radioactive
source. The table shows the readings.
number of
time / min emissions
per second
0 800
10 560
20 400
30 280
40 200
50 140
60 100
What is the half-life of the source?
A 10 min B 20 min C 40 min D 60 min
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/M/J/16

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.

PMT

Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 C 22 D
3 C 23 C
4 A 24 D
5 C 25 C
6 C 26 B
7 D 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 B 29 D
10 A 30 B
11 B 31 A
12 D 32 D
13 B 33 A
14 A 34 B
15 D 35 B
16 B 36 C
17 C 37 D
18 A 38 C
19 D 39 B
20 C 40 D

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

PMT
0625/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 B 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 A 1
© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 3

PMT
PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 B 1
38 B 1
39 A 1
40 B 1

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8388841185*

IB17 06_0625_21_VI_LIL/FP
PMT
1 What is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?
A Use a micrometer screw gauge.

B Use a ruler and look at the scale perpendicularly.
C Use a top pan balance.
D Use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.
2 On Earth, a ball is dropped and falls 2.0 m in a vacuum.
The acceleration of the ball at 1.0 m is 10 m / s2.
0m ball
0.5 m
1.0 m
1.5 m
2.0 m
What is the acceleration of the ball at 0.5 m?
A 5.0 m / s2 B 10 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D 20 m / s2
3 A skydiver reaches terminal velocity. Then he opens his parachute.
What happens to the skydiver as the parachute opens?
A There is a decrease in weight.

B There is acceleration upwards.
C There is an increase in speed.
D There is movement upwards.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
4 A piece of steel is taken from the Earth to the Moon for an experiment. The gravitational field
strength on the Moon is smaller than on the Earth.
Which statement about the piece of steel is correct?
A It has less mass on the Moon than on the Earth.

B It has more mass on the Moon than on the Earth.
C It weighs less on the Moon than on the Earth.
D It weighs more on the Moon than on the Earth.
5 A measuring cylinder containing only water is placed on an electronic balance. A small, irregularly
shaped stone is now completely immersed in the water.
The diagrams show the equipment before and after the stone is immersed.
measuring cm3 cm3

cylinder 100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40 stone
water 30 30
20 20
10 10
balance
g g
before the stone after the stone

is immersed is immersed
What is the density of the material of the stone?
A 1.7 g / cm3 B 3.3 g / cm3 C 4.5 g / cm3 D 8.7 g / cm3

PMT
6 A boat is travelling at a steady speed in a straight line across the surface of a lake.
Which statement about the boat is correct?
A The resultant force on the boat is in the direction of motion.

B The resultant force on the boat is in the opposite direction to its motion.
C The resultant force on the boat is vertically downwards.
D The resultant force on the boat is zero.
7 A ball of weight 1.2 N drops through the air at terminal velocity.
A sudden gust of wind exerts a horizontal force of 0.5 N on the ball from the left.
Which diagram shows the resultant force on the ball while the wind is blowing?
A B
ball 0.5 N ball 0.5 N
1.2 N resultant 1.2 N

force resultant
force
C D
1.2 N
1.2 N resultant
force
ball 0.5 N
resultant ball 0.5 N

force
1.2 N
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
8 The diagram shows a uniform bridge, 4.0 m long and weighing 10 000 N.
The bridge is pivoted at one end. A force at the other end gradually increases until the bridge
begins to lift.
lifting
bridge force
pivot
4.0 m
What is the lifting force as the bridge starts to move upwards?
A 2500 N B 5000 N C 10 000 N D 20 000 N
9 A bullet of mass 0.10 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 600 m / s. It strikes a stationary wooden
block of mass 1.90 kg resting on a frictionless, horizontal surface.
The bullet stays in the block.
What is the speed of the bullet and the block immediately after the impact?
A 30 m / s B 32 m / s C 60 m / s D 134 m / s

PMT
10 A box of mass m slides down a slope of length l and vertical height d against a frictional force F.
mass m
stop
As the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitational potential energy and it does work against
the friction.
Which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?
loss in gravitational work done

potential energy against friction
A mgd Fl
B mgd Fd
C mgl Fl
D mgl Fd
11 The diagram represents the energy transfers for a device.
useful
input output energy
energy
wasted
output energy
The device is 50% efficient.
Which equation is correct?
A input energy = useful output energy ÷ 2
B useful output energy = wasted output energy ÷ 2

C wasted output energy = useful output energy
D wasted output energy = useful output energy ÷ 2
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
12 A student carries out some simple exercises.
In which exercise is the most work done?
A B
lifting
pushing through
through 1 m
1 m against a
frictional force of 4 N
1 kg 1 kg
C D
lifting
pulling through
through 2 m
2 m against a
frictional force of 2 N
2 kg 2 kg
13 Four different liquids are poured into four containers.
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
In which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
liquid density liquid density liquid density liquid density

= 3.1 g / cm3 = 1.2 g / cm3 = 1.3 g / cm3 = 0.8 g / cm3

PMT
14 Brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.
What causes the smoke particles to move at random?
A Smoke particles are hit by air molecules.

B Smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.
C Smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.
D Smoke particles hit the walls of the container.
15 Gas molecules striking a container wall cause a pressure to be exerted on the wall.
Which statement explains this?
A When a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its energy.

B When a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its momentum.
C When a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its speed.
D When a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its temperature.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.
Liquid 1 is heated for 100 s and liquid 2 is heated for 200 s by heaters of the same power.
Each liquid has the same rise in temperature.
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2
heating time = 100 s heating time = 200 s
Which statement is correct?
A Each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.

B Each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.
C Liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.
D The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
17 Water of mass 100 g at a temperature of 100 °C is converted into steam at 100 °C. The specific
latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2300 J / g.
How much thermal energy is absorbed by the water?
A 23 J B 230 J C 230 000 J D 23 000 000 J

PMT
10
18 A copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. A piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.
The bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side
only.
wood paper copper
heat
Which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?
brown side wood copper
A copper conductor insulator

B copper insulator conductor
C wood conductor insulator
D wood insulator conductor
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
11
19 Different waves hit barriers with different sized gaps.
The waves will diffract.
In which diagram does the greatest spreading occur?
A B
barrier barrier
gap 2.0 cm gap 2.0 cm
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
20 A converging lens is used as a magnifying glass to view an object.
A The image is inverted.

B The image is nearer the lens than the object.
C The image is the same size.
D The image is virtual.

PMT
12
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
22 Light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. The speed of the light in the glass block
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
Which statement about the speed of light is correct?
A The speed in a vacuum is 1.5 times the speed in the glass.

B The speed in the glass is the same as the speed in a vacuum.
C The speed in the glass is 1.5 times the speed in a vacuum.
D The speed in the glass is 1.0 × 108 times the speed in a vacuum.
23 A fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. An engineer adjusts the alarm so that it
produces a louder note of a higher pitch.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
13
24 In a child’s toy, metal fish are lifted out of a toy pond using a metal rod. The fish are magnetically
attracted to the end of the rod. There is no magnetic force between the fish themselves.
metal rod
toy pond
metal fish
What are possible materials from which the fish and the rod are made?
fish rod
A aluminium soft iron

B aluminium steel
C soft iron soft iron
D soft iron steel
25 What is the most effective method of demagnetising a bar magnet?
A placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large alternating current and gradually
decreasing the current
B placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large direct current and gradually decreasing the
current
C placing the magnet in a solenoid that produces a magnetic field in the opposite direction to
the magnet
D placing the magnet next to an identical bar magnet with its poles in the opposite direction
26 A magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.
Which statement explains this force of attraction?
A The coil of wire has its own gravitational field.

B The coil of wire is made from soft iron.
C The current in the coil of wire creates a magnetic field.
D The current in the coil of wire induces a charge on the magnet.

PMT
14
27 A student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.
The rod becomes positively charged.
What has happened to the rod?
A It has gained electrons.

B It has gained protons.
C It has lost electrons.
D It has lost protons.
28 Which quantity is measured in coulombs?
A charge
B current
C electromotive force
D power
29 A cylinder of conducting putty has length l, diameter d and resistance R. The putty is now
moulded into a cylinder of diameter 2d that has the same volume.
R d
By which factor does the resistance of the putty cylinder decrease?
A 2 B 4 C 8 D 16
30 The average current during a lightning strike between a cloud and the ground is 1.5 × 104 A.
The lightning releases 3.0 × 108 J of energy and lasts for 2.0 × 10–4 s.
What is the average electromotive force (e.m.f.) between the cloud and the ground?
A 4.0 V B 100 V C 1.0 × 108 V D 9.0 × 108 V
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
15
31 A student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.
R
T V
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C It remains at 0 V.
D It remains at 12 V.
32 The circuit diagram shows a circuit with an a.c. supply, a diode and a resistor.
Which diagram shows how the current I in the resistor varies with time t ?
A B
I I
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
I I
0 0
0 t 0 t

PMT
16
33 A light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a resistor R are connected in a series circuit. Light falls on
the LDR.
The brightness of the light falling on the LDR decreases.
What happens to the resistance of the LDR and what happens to the reading on the ammeter?
resistance reading on
of LDR ammeter
34 The diagram shows a logic gate.
P
R
Q
Which input combinations at P and Q gives an output of 0 at R?
P Q
A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
D 1 1
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
17
35 A simple d.c. electric motor is fitted with a coil that rotates in a magnetic field. A commutator
connects the power supply to the coil.
What is the purpose of the commutator?
A It converts a.c. into d.c. in the coil.

B It prevents the current from becoming too great, because the coil has a low resistance.
C It reverses the direction of the current in the coil after every 180° rotation of the coil.
D It switches the current off momentarily after every 90° rotation of the coil.
36 What is the purpose of a relay?
A to change a large voltage into a small voltage

B to change a small voltage into a large voltage
C to use a large current to switch on a small current
D to use a small current to switch on a large current
37 Which row gives the relative charge of an electron, a neutron and a proton?
electron neutron proton
A –1 0 –1
B –1 0 +1
C +1 –1 0
D +1 0 +1
38 A nuclide of element X undergoes β-decay.
A The nucleon number increases by 1.

B The nucleon number stays the same.
C The product is another nuclide of an isotope of X.
D The proton number decreases by 1.

PMT
18
39 A sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.
The nuclei of which atoms will decay first?
A It is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.

B It is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.
C The atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.
D The atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.
40 A detector of ionising radiation gives a background reading of 20 counts / minute.
A radioactive isotope with a half-life of 2.0 days is brought near to the detector. The reading on
the detector increases to 100 counts / minute.
How long does it take for the reading on the detector to decrease to 40 counts / minute?
A 2.0 days B 4.0 days C 5.0 days D 10 days
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/M/J/17

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice Extended May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PMT
PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 A 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 C 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

PMT
PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 C 1

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7478947670*

IB17 06_0625_22/3RP
PMT

2 A student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.
When the student starts the stopwatch the bubble is at position P.
After 2.0 s the bubble is at position Q.
bubble
18 Q
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
P
26
cm
27
bubble
What is the speed of the bubble between P and Q?
A 3.2 cm / s B 3.7 cm / s C 6.4 cm / s D 7.4 cm / s
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
3 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a toy car travelling in a straight line.
4.0
speed
m/s 3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car during the first two seconds and what is the total distance that
it travels?
acceleration total
m / s2 distance / m
A 0.50 10
B 0.50 20
C 2.0 10
D 2.0 20
4 In which pair are both quantities measured in newtons?
A force and pressure

B force and weight
C mass and pressure
D mass and weight

PMT
5 The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3 cm3
200 200
100 100
liquid
mass = 80 g mass = 180 g
What is the density of the liquid?
A 100 g / cm3 B 100 g / cm3 C 180 g / cm3 D 180 g / cm3

120 140 120 140
6 A spring which obeys Hooke’s Law has an unstretched length of 10 cm.
A load of 20 N is hung from the spring.
The new length of the spring is 36 cm.
What is the spring constant k of the spring?
A 0.56 N / cm B 0.77 N / cm C 1.3 N / cm D 1.8 N / cm
7 A car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. Only the horizontal forces acting on it are
shown.
air resistance
and friction
driving force
The length of each arrow represents the size of each force.
How do these forces affect the motion of the car?
A The car moves at constant speed.

B The car moves backwards.
C The car slows down.
D The car’s forward speed increases.
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
8 The diagram shows a wooden beam of weight 20 N. The centre of mass of the beam is labelled
M.
There is a pivot at one end of the beam. The beam is kept horizontal by an upward force, F.
2.0 m
1.2 m
pivot
M wooden beam
20 N
What is the magnitude of F ?
A 12 N B 20 N C 30 N D 33 N
9 A ball of mass 2.0 kg is travelling at a speed of 12 m / s. It moves towards an object of mass 3.0 kg
which is at rest.
12 m / s
3.0 kg
2.0 kg at rest
The ball hits the object and sticks to it.
Which row gives the total momentum, and the speed of both objects immediately after the
collision?
total momentum speed

kg m / s m/s
A 0 4.8
B 0 8.0
C 24 4.8
D 24 8.0

PMT
10 An object falls from a height of 5.0 m.
Air resistance can be ignored.
As it hits the ground the object has 750 J of kinetic energy.
What is its mass?
A 15 kg B 50 kg C 75 kg D 150 kg
11 An electric generator produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 200 V and produces a current of
3.0 A in a circuit. The generator is driven by an engine with a power of 2.4 kW.
What is the efficiency of the generator?
A 2.8% B 25% C 28% D 36%
12 The diagrams show athletes training by stretching springs.
Each spring has the same stiffness.
Which athlete does the most work?
A B
one spring stretched one spring stretched

by 0.60 m by 0.80 m
C D
two springs stretched two springs stretched

by 0.60 m by 0.80 m
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm

= 3.1 g / cm3 = 1.2 g / cm3 = 1.3 g / cm3 = 0.8 g / cm3

15 A student blows air through a liquid using a straw. This causes the liquid to evaporate quickly and
therefore to cool.
Which statement explains why the remaining liquid cools?
A Slower-moving molecules are carried away by the air bubbles.

B The air molecules conduct heat from the liquid.
C The air sets up convection currents in the liquid.
D The molecules with most energy leave the liquid.
16 What is meant by the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?
A the energy needed to change unit mass of ice into water at constant temperature
B the energy needed to change unit volume of ice into water at constant temperature
C the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit mass of ice
D the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit volume of ice

PMT
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2

© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
only.
wood paper copper
heat


PMT
10
A B
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
11
20 The incomplete ray diagram shows two rays of light that have passed from one point on an object
through a thin converging lens.
left lens right

object
rays of
light
Which type of image is formed, and on which side of the lens is it formed?
type of image which side of lens
A real on the left

B real on the right
C virtual on the left
D virtual on the right
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white

PMT
12
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.

amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
24 A student demagnetises a magnetised steel bar.
He places the bar in a solenoid connected to a power supply. He then removes the bar from the
solenoid.
Which row indicates the most effective way of demagnetising the bar?
type of speed to
power supply remove bar
A a.c. fast
B a.c. slow
C d.c. fast
D d.c. slow
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
13

26 What is wrong with this labelled diagram of a permanent magnet?
iron disc
N S
A The cross-section should be rectangular.

B The length should be greater than the diameter.
C The magnet should be made of steel.
D The N-pole and the S-pole should be reversed.
27 A student tests the electrical conduction of four materials.
aluminium
iron
plastic
silver
Which materials conduct electricity?
A aluminium, iron and silver only

B aluminium and silver only
C iron, silver and plastic only
D plastic only

PMT
14
28 What is the unit of charge?
A ampere
B coulomb
C ohm
D volt
29 An isolated metal sphere is positively charged.
It is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that is neutral.
+ +
+ + +
+
+ + +
positively charged + + + neutral
metal sphere metal sphere
What happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positively charged sphere is brought
close to it?
A Some positive charges move to the left and some negative charges move to the right.
B Some positive charges move to the right and some negative charges move to the left.
C Some positive charges move to the right, but the negative charges do not move.
D The positive charges do not move, but some negative charges move to the left.
30 Which diagram is the current-voltage (I-V) characteristic graph for a metallic conductor at
constant temperature?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
15
31 Four circuits each contain a 6 V battery, a diode, an ammeter and a lamp. None of the
components is faulty.
Which circuit shows a possible ammeter reading?
A B
A A
reading = 1.0 A reading = 0 A
C D
A A
reading = 1.0 A reading = –1.0 A
R
T V
12 V

PMT
16
33 The diagram shows an electric circuit.
20 Ω 0.40 A
10 Ω
What is the potential difference (p.d.) across the LDR?
A 4.0 V B 8.0 V C 25 V D 50 V
34 What does the symbol shown represent?
A an AND gate
B a NOR gate
C a NOT gate
D an OR gate

36 Which device uses a split-ring commutator?
A a d.c. motor
B a relay
C a transformer
D an a.c. generator
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
17
37 Which particle has a negative charge?
A an alpha particle
B an electron
C a neutron
D a proton
38 A type of nuclear reaction takes place in stars.
Which row describes this type of reaction?
nuclear reaction nuclei formed energy transfer
A fission larger than original nuclei released

B fission smaller than original nuclei absorbed
C fusion larger than original nuclei released
D fusion smaller than original nuclei absorbed

40 A sample of a radioactive isotope emits particles at a rate of 240 per minute.
After 48 hours the rate of emission has decreased to 15 per minute.
What is the half-life of the radioactive material?
A 4.0 hours B 8.0 hours C 12 hours D 16 hours
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/M/J/17

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PMT
PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 A 1

PMT
PUBLISHED
29 A 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 A 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 A 1
38 A 1
39 A 1
40 B 1

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*3182427838*

IB17 06_0625_23_VI_YEL/FP
PMT

2 A pendulum is swinging. Five students each measure the time it takes to swing through ten
complete swings.
Three students measure the time as 17.2 s. Another student measures it as 16.9 s, and the fifth
student measures it as 17.0 s.
What is the average period of the pendulum?
A 1.69 s B 1.70 s C 1.71 s D 1.72 s
3 Which distance-time graph represents a body whose speed is decreasing?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
4 What are the units for mass, pressure and velocity?
mass pressure velocity
A kg Ns Pa
B kg Pa m/s
C Ns Pa m/s
D Pa Ns m/s
5 A steel ball bearing has a mass of 24 g and a density of 8.0 g / cm3. It is lowered into a measuring
cylinder containing 12 cm3 of water.
What is the new water level in the cylinder?
A 3.0 cm3 B 4.0 cm3 C 15 cm3 D 16 cm3
6 The diagram shows an object being acted upon by two forces.
6.0 N 3.0 N
What is the size of the resultant force on the object?
A 2.0 N B 3.0 N C 9.0 N D 18 N

PMT
7 The diagram shows a man holding a sack and barrow stationary. He applies a vertical force to
the handle.
The centre of mass and the weight of the sack and barrow are shown. The wheel acts as a pivot.
force
exerted
by man
centre of mass
of sack and barrow
20 cm
80 cm
15 cm 45 cm
weight of
sack and barrow
200 N
What is the magnitude of the vertical force exerted by the man?
A 38 N B 50 N C 67 N D 200 N
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
8 The diagram shows the only two forces F1 and F2 acting on an object. The magnitude of each
force is represented by the length of each arrow.
F1
110°
F2
The resultant force acting on the object is R.
Which vector diagram shows how forces F1 and F2 add to produce R?
A B
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2
C D
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2

PMT
9 The diagrams show four bodies moving in the directions shown. The only forces acting on the
bodies are shown in each diagram.
Which body gains the most kinetic energy when moving a distance of 1.0 m?
A B
20 N
movement movement
10 N 10 N
C D
10 N 25 N 30 N 30 N
movement movement
10 A steel ball is fired vertically upwards with a velocity v. The ball reaches a height h.
The same ball is now fired vertically upwards from the same position with a velocity 2v.
What is the new height reached by the ball?
A h B 2h C 4h D 8h
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
11 A solar panel is used to recharge a battery. The solar panel produces 0.80 W of electrical power.
The panel is 20% efficient.
solar panel
sunlight
power to
battery
0.80 W
What is the power input of the sunlight onto the solar panel?
A 0.16 W B 4.0 W C 8.0 W D 16 W
12 The diagrams show four different athletes training by doing pull-ups.
Which athlete does the most work?
A B C D
weight of weight of weight of weight of

athlete = 700 N athlete = 700 N athlete = 800 N athlete = 800 N
distance distance distance distance

lifted = 0.50 m lifted = 0.55 m lifted = 0.50 m lifted = 0.55 m

PMT
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm

= 3.1 g / cm3 = 1.2 g / cm3 = 1.3 g / cm3 = 0.8 g / cm3

15 The diagrams show four open dishes. Each dish contains water at the same temperature.
The dishes are different shapes and a draught blows over two of them.
From which container does the water evaporate at the greatest rate?
A B C D
draught
draught
no draught no draught
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2


PMT
10
17 A block of ice at –20 °C is heated until it turns to steam. The graph of temperature against thermal
energy absorbed is shown.
The latent heat of fusion of ice is 340 kJ / kg.
temperature 100
°C 80
60
40
20
0
–20
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600
126 kJ 1146 kJ thermal energy 2406 kJ

absorbed / kJ
What is the mass of the ice?
A 1.0 kg B 2.0 kg C 3.0 kg D 4.0 kg
only.
wood paper copper
heat

© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
11
A B
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm

PMT
12
20 A converging lens is used to make an image on a screen.
screen
converging
lens
image
formed
candle here
What type of image is formed on the screen?
A real and inverted

B real and upright
C virtual and inverted
D virtual and upright
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
13
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.

amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
24 In which way are a bar magnet and an electromagnet similar?
A A bar magnet and an electromagnet are always magnetised when stored.

B A bar magnet and an electromagnet can both be used to separate magnetic and
non-magnetic materials.
C A bar magnet can be made of steel and an electromagnet uses a steel core.
D The magnetic field strength of a bar magnet and of an electromagnet can both be varied.


PMT
14
26 A steel magnet is placed in a coil and demagnetised.
Which type of current is established in the coil, and how is the current changed?
A a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero
B a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero
C an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero
D an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero
27 Which material is a conductor of electricity?
A brass
B glass
C plastic
D wood
28 The diagrams each show a positive point charge.
Which diagram represents the pattern and the direction of the electric field due to the charge?
A B C D
+ + + +
29 Which quantity is equivalent to 1.0 V?
A 1.0 J / C B 1.0 kJ / C C 1.0 J / s D 1.0 kJ / s
30 A circuit contains a fixed resistor. The potential difference across the resistor is 24.0 V and the
current in the resistor is 2.30 A.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor in a time of 17.0 minutes?
A 938 J B 5630 J C 56.3 kJ D 9.38 kJ
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
15
31 A battery, an ammeter, a switch, a lamp and a resistor are connected together in a circuit.
With the switch open, the ammeter reads 2.4 A. When the switch is closed, this reading increases
to 4.0 A.
What is the current through the resistor with the switch closed?
A 0A B 1.6 A C 3.2 A D 6.4 A
R
T V
12 V

PMT
16
33 The diagram shows a circuit used to make a light detector.
X Y
One component is connected between X and Y.
Which component causes the ammeter reading to increase when the light gets brighter?
A B C D
34 A truth table for a type of logic gate is shown.
input 1 input 2 output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Which type of logic gate is it?
A AND B NOR C NOT D OR
35 In which device is a split-ring commutator used, and what is its purpose?
device purpose
A a.c. generator to change the direction of the
current in the coil as it turns
B a.c. generator to change the output current
from d.c. into a.c.
C d.c. motor to change the direction of the
current in the coil as it turns
D d.c. motor to change the input current
from a.c. into d.c.
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
17

37 When a source of D-particles is directed towards a thin metal foil they become scattered.
Which observation of this experiment provides evidence for a small charged nucleus?
A A small proportion of the D-particles come straight back from the foil towards the source.
B A small proportion of the D-particles pass straight through the foil.
C Some of the D-particles are deflected by an angle of less than 90°.
D Some of the D-particles follow a curved path after leaving the foil.
38 Which description of a neutral atom of copper is correct?
A a nucleus surrounded by electrons

B a nucleus surrounded by molecules
C electrons surrounded by a nucleus
D electrons surrounded by molecules


PMT
18
40 A student determines the half-life of a radioactive isotope.
The student uses a detector over five minutes and plots a graph showing how the count rate
shown on the detector varies with time.
The count rate due to background radiation is 30 counts per minute.
250
count rate
counts / minute 200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
What is the half-life of this isotope?
A 0.30 minutes
B 1.2 minutes
C 1.5 minutes
D 5.0 minutes
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/M/J/17

PMT

MARK SCHEME for the March 2016 series
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Multiple Choice – Extended),
maximum raw mark 40
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®
and Cambridge International A and AS Level components.

PMT

Cambridge IGCSE – March 2016 0625 22
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 B
2 C 22 D
3 D 23 B
4 C 24 D
5 D 25 D
6 B 26 C
7 A 27 A
8 C 28 A
9 C 29 B
10 D 30 B
11 C 31 C
12 A 32 A
13 D 33 B
14 B 34 C
15 B 35 C
16 C 36 B
17 C 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 B 39 A
20 B 40 A

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2016
45 minutes
*5652212684*
Soft clean eraser


IB16 03_0625_22/3RP
PMT
1 The diameter of a copper wire is thought to be approximately 0.3 mm.
Which instrument should be used to obtain a more accurate measurement of the diameter of the
wire?
A measuring tape
B metre rule
C micrometer
D ruler
2 Which is a unit of acceleration?
A g / cm3 B m/s C m / s2 D N/m
3 An object is released from rest and falls to Earth. During its fall, the object is affected by air
resistance. The air resistance eventually reaches a constant value.
Which description about successive stages of the motion of the object is correct?
A constant acceleration, then constant deceleration

B constant deceleration, then zero acceleration
C decreasing acceleration, then constant deceleration
D decreasing acceleration, then zero acceleration
4 A concrete post is carried up a very high mountain. At the top of the mountain, the gravitational
field is slightly weaker than at the bottom.
What is the effect of this weaker field on the mass and on the weight of the post at the top of the
mountain?
mass weight
A is less is less
B is less is unchanged
C is unchanged is less
D is unchanged is unchanged
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
5 The diagram shows a cuboid block made from a metal of density 2.5 g / cm3.
2.0 cm 10 cm
2.0 cm
What is the mass of the block?
A 8.0 g B 16 g C 50 g D 100 g
6 The diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction
shown.
A force acts on the object to keep it in the circular path.
In which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?
object
A
D B
path of
object
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16 [Turn over

PMT
7 A spring obeys Hooke’s law.
Which graph is obtained by plotting the extension of the spring against the load applied?
A B
extension extension
0 0
0 load 0 load
C D
extension extension
0 0
0 load 0 load
8 Which is the value of a vector quantity?
A 200 V
B 100 kg / m3
C 20 m / s, east
D 50 J / (kg °C)
9 The table gives four energy sources and states whether the energy of the source is derived from
the Sun.
Which row is correct?
source of energy derived from the Sun
A geothermal yes
B oil no
C water held behind a dam yes
D wind no
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
10 A weight-lifter raises a 2000 N weight through a vertical height of 2.0 m in 0.80 s.
What useful power does he develop in doing this?
A 800 W B 3200 W C 4000 W D 5000 W
11 A wind turbine generates 54 kW of useful power from an input of 180 kW of wind power.
Which calculation gives the percentage efficiency of the turbine?
A 54 000 %
180 000 × 100
B 180 000 %
54 000 × 100
C 54 000 × 100 %
180 000
D 180 000 × 100 %

54 000
12 A force acts on an area to produce a pressure.
Which changes produce the same pressure?
A double the area and double the force

B double the area and halve the force
C double the area and make the force four times bigger
D halve the area and double the force

PMT
13 Identical toy bricks are placed one on top of another to make a tower on a table.
bricks
tower of bricks
table
Which graph shows the relationship between the pressure P that the tower exerts on the table
and the weight W of the tower?
A B C D
P P P P
0 0 0 0
0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W
14 Gases can be compressed, but liquids cannot.
Which statement explains this difference?
A Each molecule in a gas is more compressible than each molecule in a liquid.

B Molecules in a gas are further apart than molecules in a liquid.
C Molecules in a gas attract each other more strongly than molecules in a liquid.
D Molecules in a gas move more slowly than molecules in a liquid.
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
15 The diagram shows a quantity of gas trapped in a cylinder. The piston is pushed in slowly and the
gas is compressed. The temperature of the gas does not change.
gas piston pushed in
piston
Which graph shows the relationship between the pressure and the volume of the gas?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
16 Which quantity gives the thermal capacity of a solid object?
A the energy lost by radiation from the object in 1.0 s

B the energy needed to melt the object
C the energy needed to raise the temperature of the object by 1.0 °C

D the total amount of thermal energy in the object

PMT
17 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are
needed.
Which of these is a fixed point on the Celsius scale?
A room temperature
B the temperature inside a freezer
C the temperature of pure melting ice
D the temperature of pure warm water
18 In an experiment, a liquid is heated at a constant rate.
The temperature of the liquid increases and eventually becomes constant.
Which statement about the experiment is correct?
A Boiling occurs at all temperatures but only on the liquid surface.

B Boiling occurs throughout the liquid but only at the constant temperature.
C Evaporation occurs throughout the liquid and at all temperatures.
D Evaporation occurs only at the constant temperature and only on the liquid surface.
19 One end of a copper rod is heated.
What is one method by which thermal energy is transferred in the copper rod?
A Free electrons transfer energy from the cooler end to the hotter end.
B Free electrons transfer energy from the hotter end to the cooler end.
C Molecules of copper move from the cooler end to the hotter end.
D Molecules of copper move from the hotter end to the cooler end.
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
20 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. A small spacer keeps the two cups separated.
Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top, as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench
A The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
B The lid reduces the energy lost by convection.
C There is no thermal conduction through the sides of either cup.
D Thermal radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
21 Which is a unit of wavelength?
A hertz
B metre
C metre per second
D second

PMT
10
22 Which diagram correctly shows a ray of light reflected by a plane mirror?
A B
ray of 40° 50° ray of 50°

light light
50°
C D
ray of 40° ray of 40°

light light
40° 50°
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
11
23 Which diagram shows how a converging lens is used as a magnifying glass?
image
F
A
object F
lens
image
F F
B
object
lens
image
F
C
F
object
lens
object
F F
D
image
lens

PMT
12
24 A sound wave travels from a point X to a point Y.
X Y
Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, due to the sound wave, in the
region between X and Y?
A B C D
25 The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
Which row gives typical values for the speed of sound in a liquid and in a solid?
speed of sound in speed of sound in

a liquid / (m / s) a solid / (m / s)
A 250 180
B 250 5000
C 1500 180
D 1500 5000
26 In which pair are both materials magnetic?
A aluminium and copper

B copper and iron
C iron and steel
D steel and aluminium
27 Which methods could be used to demagnetise a magnet?
method 1: place it in an east-west direction and hammer it

method 2: place it in an east-west direction and heat it until it is red hot
method 3: pull it slowly from a coil that is carrying an alternating current
method 4: put it slowly into a coil that is carrying a direct current
A methods 1, 2 and 3
B methods 2, 3 and 4
C methods 1 and 2 only
D methods 3 and 4 only
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
13
28 Which produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.)?
A a battery
B a filament lamp
C a resistor
D a spring balance
29 The table describes four different resistance wires. They are all made from the same metal.
Which wire has the smallest resistance?
length of diameter of
wire / m wire / mm
A 2.0 1.0
B 2.0 1.5
C 3.0 1.0
D 3.0 1.5
30 Which circuit shows the directions of the conventional current I and the flow of electrons?
A B
I electrons I electrons
C D
I electrons I electrons

PMT
14
31 Four lamps are each labelled 240 V.
In which circuit do all four lamps have normal brightness?
A B
240 V 240 V
C D
240 V 240 V
32 A battery charger plugs into a 230 V a.c. supply. The charger is used to charge a 6.0 V d.c.
battery.
The charger contains diodes and a transformer.
What is the purpose of these components?
diodes transformer
A rectify the a.c. steps down the voltage

B rectify the a.c. steps up the voltage
C step down the voltage rectifies the a.c.
D step up the voltage rectifies the a.c.
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
15
33 The diagram shows a potential divider connected to two voltmeters P and Q.
V voltmeter P
V voltmeter Q
The resistance of the variable resistor is decreased.
Which row shows what happens to the reading on each voltmeter?
reading on reading on
voltmeter P voltmeter Q
34 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.
What is the greatest hazard?
A a fire
B a fuse blows
C an electric shock
D no current flows

PMT
16
35 An electron moves into a uniform magnetic field.
The arrow shows the initial direction of motion of the electron.
The direction of the magnetic field is into the plane of the page (away from you).
uniform
magnetic field
electron
In which direction does a force act on the electron when it enters the magnetic field?
A into the page

B out of the page
C towards the bottom of the page
D towards the top of the page
36 The diagram shows an a.c. generator.
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
output voltage
As the coil passes through the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V.
When does the output voltage become –10 V?
A when the coil has turned through 90°
B when the coil has turned through 180°
C when the coil has turned through 270°
D when the coil has turned through 360°
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
17
37 The scattering of α-particles by a thin metal foil supports the nuclear model of an atom.
Why are α-particles used rather than neutrons?
A because they always travel more slowly

B because they are heavier
C because they are larger in diameter
D because they have a positive charge
84 Po undergoes an α-decay followed by a β-decay.

38 A nucleus of a radioactive substance 218
What are the nucleon (mass) number and proton (atomic) number of the nuclide formed after
both decays have happened?
nucleon number proton number
A 214 85
B 216 85
C 214 83
D 216 83
39 A scientist carries out an experiment using a sealed source which emits β-particles. The range of
the β-particles in the air is about 30 cm.
Which precaution is the most effective to protect the scientist from the radiation?
A handling the source with long tongs

B keeping the temperature of the source low
C opening all windows in the laboratory
D washing his hands before leaving the laboratory
40 Which row describes the nature of α-particles and of γ-rays?
α-particles γ-rays
A helium nuclei electromagnetic radiation

B helium nuclei electrons
C protons electromagnetic radiation
D protons electrons
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/F/M/16

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) March 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,

PMT
0625/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 B 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 C 1
15 A 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 A 1
19 C 1
20 D 1
21 D 1
22 B 1
23 B 1
24 A 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 C 1

PMT
0625/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
29 A 1
30 A 1
31 B 1
32 A 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 C 1
40 A 1

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2017
45 minutes
*9900917881*
Soft clean eraser


IB17 03_0625_22/4RP
PMT
1 The diagram shows the height of a stack of identical coins.
stack of
coins
2.40 cm
What is the thickness of one coin?
A 0.20 mm B 2.0 mm C 0.24 cm D 2.0 cm
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
P Q R S
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
Air resistance may be ignored.
Which statement about the balls is correct?
A Ball P has the greatest acceleration.

B Balls Q and R take the same time to fall to the ground.
C The acceleration of ball R is half the acceleration of ball P.
D Ball S has the greatest average speed.
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
3 An object is travelling in a straight line. The diagram is the speed-time graph for the object.
At which labelled point is the object accelerating at a changing rate?
C
speed
m/s
B
D
A
0
0 time / s
4 Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct?
A A balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.

B Heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.
C Large objects always have more mass than small ones.
D Mass is a force but weight is not.
5 An object in a space probe above the Earth weighs 3.5 N. The gravitational field strength at the
height of the space probe is 7.0 N / kg.
The gravitational field strength on the Earth’s surface is 10 N / kg.
What are the mass and the weight of the object on the Earth’s surface?
mass / kg weight / N
A 0.50 3.5
B 0.50 5.0
C 2.0 3.5
D 2.0 20

PMT
6 A skydiver jumps from a stationary helicopter and reaches a steady vertical speed. She then
opens her parachute.
Which statement about the falling skydiver is correct?
A As her parachute opens, her acceleration is upwards.

B As she falls at a steady speed with her parachute open, her weight is zero.
C When she accelerates, the resultant force on her is zero.
D When she falls at a steady speed, air resistance is zero.
7 A car moves in a circular path as it turns a corner on a horizontal road.
The car moves at constant speed.
path of car
car
direction
of travel
Which description of the forces acting on the car is correct?
A All the forces are balanced as the car is moving at constant speed.
B The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts away from the centre of the circle.
C The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts towards the centre of the circle.
D The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force is in the direction of travel of the car.
8 A moving body undergoes a change of momentum.
What is a unit for change of momentum?
A Nm B N/m C Ns D N/s
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
9 A man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.
escalator lift
The escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. The useful work done
against gravity is W. The useful power developed is P.
The lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.
How much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is
developed by the lift?
useful work
useful power
done against
developed by lift
gravity by lift
A more than W less than P

B more than W P
C W less than P
D W P
10 A 40 W lamp wastes 34 J of energy every second by heating its surroundings.
What is the efficiency of the lamp?
A 0.15% B 15% C 18% D 85%
11 A column of liquid has height h, mass m and density ρ. The gravitational field strength is g.
Which expression gives the pressure due to the column of liquid?
A hρ B mρ C mgh D ρ gh

PMT
12 The diagrams show two mercury barometers. The right-hand diagram shows a tube of larger
diameter. There is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube shows the mercury level in the right-hand tube?
A
B
C
glass
tubes
D
mercury
13 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
When looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water
What are the moving specks of light?
A pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains

B pollen grains being hit by water molecules
C water molecules being hit by other water molecules
D water molecules being hit by pollen grains
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
14 At –39 °C, liquid mercury solidifies without a change of temperature.
Which row shows whether the mercury absorbs or releases energy and what happens to the
bonds between the mercury atoms?
bonds between
energy
atoms
A absorbed stronger
B absorbed weaker
C released stronger
D released weaker
15 A model thermometer consists of a flask of coloured water and a stopper with a glass tube
passing through it, as shown.
glass tube
temperature scale
stopper
flask coloured water
The model thermometer can be changed in one of two ways.
● The flask can be replaced with a larger one full of coloured water.
● The glass tube can be replaced with one with a larger internal diameter.
A Only using a larger flask increases the sensitivity.

B Only using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.
C Using a larger flask increases the sensitivity and using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.
D Neither using a larger flask nor using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.

PMT
16 A metal has a specific heat capacity of 360 J / (kg °C). An object made of this metal has a mass of
2.0 kg.
What is the thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the object?
A 180 J / °C B 180 J / kg C 720 J / °C D 720 J / kg
17 In which type of substance are free electrons involved in the transfer of thermal energy?
A all liquids
B all solids
C metals only
D plastics only
18 Four objects, made of the same material and having the same mass, are at the same
temperature. The objects have different surfaces and different surface areas.
Which object emits infra-red radiation at the greatest rate?
surface surface area
A dull large
B dull small
C shiny large
D shiny small
19 A person uses a surfboard to ride every 30th wave crest towards the beach. The wave crest
travels at a speed of 1.6 m / s and the distance between each wave crest is 24 m.
How many wave crests does the person surf in one hour?
A 1 B 2 C 8 D 450
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
20 In a shallow tank, a water wave moves towards a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier
water
wave
Which diagram shows the wave beyond the barrier?
A B
C D
21 Light passes along an optical fibre.
What happens to the light within the fibre?
A diffraction
B dispersion
C refraction
D total internal reflection

PMT
10
22 The points labelled F are the principal foci of a lens. A beam of parallel light is incident on the
lens.
Which diagram shows the path of the light after it passes through the lens?
A
F F
B
F F
C
F F
D
F F
23 Which statement about sound waves is correct?
A They are able to travel through a vacuum.

B They are able to travel through solids.
C They are transverse waves.
D They travel at the same speed in all substances.
24 Which statement about ultrasound is correct?
A It is produced by a rapidly vibrating source.

B It is uncomfortable to human ears.
C Its frequency must be greater than 300 kHz.
D It travels the fastest in a vacuum.
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
11
25 A small compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet, the same distance from each end.
Which diagram shows the direction in which the compass needle points?
A B C D
N N N N
compass compass compass compass
S S S S
26 A bar magnet can be demagnetised by hammering it for a long time or by slowly removing it from
a coil connected to a power supply.
Which row completes the descriptions of how these processes are carried out?
hammering bar magnet slowly removing bar magnet

for a long time with from a coil connected to
A magnet aligned E-W a d.c. power supply

B magnet aligned E-W an a.c. power supply
C magnet aligned N-S a d.c. power supply
D magnet aligned N-S an a.c. power supply
27 Which particles move in a metal to cause an electric current?
A electrons
B neutrons
C nucleons
D protons

PMT
12
28 The diagrams represent four copper wires.
Which wire has the greatest resistance?
A B C D
20 mm 20 mm
10 mm 10 mm
1 mm 2 mm 1 mm 2 mm
29 An air-conditioning unit, a lamp and an electric fire all receive electrical energy from the mains
supply.
From which of these devices is all this energy eventually transferred to the surroundings?
air-
electric
conditioning lamp
fire
unit
A key
B = all energy transferred to surroundings
C = not all energy transferred to surroundings
D
30 Four circuits are set up.
In which circuit does the ammeter show the greatest reading?
A B C D
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
A A A A
2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
3.0 Ω 3.0 Ω 3.0 Ω 3.0 Ω
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
13
31 The diagram shows an electric circuit.
The light falling on the light-dependent resistor (LDR) increases in brightness.
What happens to the resistance of the LDR, the current in the fixed resistor and the reading on
the voltmeter?
resistance of current in reading on

LDR fixed resistor voltmeter
A decreases increases decreases

B decreases increases increases
C increases decreases decreases
D increases decreases increases
32 The diagram shows two linked circuits to control when a bell is switched on.
The conditions are altered and only one pair of conditions causes the bell to ring.
Which pair causes the bell to ring?
A bright light and high temperature

B bright light and low temperature
C dim light and high temperature
D dim light and low temperature

PMT
14
33 The truth table for a logic gate is shown.
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
Which type of logic gate is it?
34 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a
fault.
electrical supply
Which row indicates components that are suitable?
circuit
fuse switch
breaker
A key
B = suitable
C = not suitable
D
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
15
35 The diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240 V and an output of 40 V.
There are 600 turns on the primary coil.
600
input 240 V 40 V output
turns
How many turns are there on the secondary coil?
A 100 B 320 C 400 D 3600
36 The diagram shows a current-carrying wire. The wire is at 90° to a magnetic field. The direction of
the magnetic field is into the page.
current magnetic field

into the page
wire
A force acts on the wire due to the current and the magnetic field.
In which direction does the force act?
A into the page

B out of the page
C towards the bottom of the diagram
D towards the top of the diagram

PMT
16
37 A radioactive substance emits radiation at a rate of 600 emissions per second. Four hours later, it
emits radiation at a rate of 300 emissions per second.
What is the half-life of the substance and what is the rate of emission after a further four hours?
rate of emission after

half-life / hours a further four hours
/ emissions per second
A 2 0
B 2 150
C 4 0
D 4 150
38 The nuclide notation for an isotope of silver is 109

47 Ag .
How many nucleons are in a nucleus of this isotope?
A 47 B 62 C 109 D 156
39 The equation represents an isotope of radium Ra decaying to an isotope of radon Rn with the
emission of particle X.
226
88 Ra → 222
86 Rn +X
What is particle X?
0 1 4 1
A −1 e B 1H C 2 He D 0n
40 An atomic nucleus decays by one or more radioactive decay processes.
What causes the proton number to decrease by 1?
A α-decay followed by β-decay
B α-decay only
C β-decay followed by γ-decay
D β-decay only
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/F/M/17

PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

SP (CW/SLC) S23398/3
© CIE 2002 [Turn over
PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 A baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving
belt. The moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner.
moving
belt
A suitcase on ground
B suitcase held
level with belt
C suitcase moving
on belt
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A?
Tick one box.
The total energy is greater in B than in A.
The total energy is the same in B and in A.
The total energy is less in B than in A.
(ii) Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick
one box.
The total energy is greater in C than in B.
The total energy is the same in C and B.
The total energy is less in C than in B.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
2 Here are five words relating to the transfer of thermal energy.
conductor, convection, evaporation, insulator, radiation
Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list.
(a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal
...................................... . [1]
(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of ....................................... [1]
(c) Copper is a good ...................................... of thermal energy. [1]
(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that
...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water. [1]
0625/2/O/N/02 [Turn over

PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. There is a current down the
wire.
large
current
card
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above.
card
Fig. 3.2
The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current.
On Fig. 3.2,
(a) show the direction of the magnetic field, [1]
(b) carefully draw three more magnetic field lines. [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.
cm3
500
400 mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.1
cm3
500
oil 400 mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.2
(a) (i) Calculate the mass of oil in the jug.
mass of oil =........................ g
(ii) Calculate the density of the oil.
density of oil =......................................
(iii) How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the
measuring jug?
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
(b) Water is more dense than oil.
On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be
if it replaced the oil. [1]
level
of oil cm3
500
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.3

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) What happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity
falls to of its original value?
time = ........................ years [2]
6 (a) State what is meant by the melting point of a solid.
The melting point is ..........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes.
boiling point of iron
freezing (solidifying) point of iron
melting point of iron [1]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
boiling
liquid
heat
Fig. 6.1
(i) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature
of the liquid whilst it is boiling.
temperature
0
time
time at which
liquid starts
to boil
Fig. 6.2
(ii) On your graph, mark the boiling point of the liquid.

[2]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other.
dry cotton polythene

cloth rod
Fig. 7.1
(a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Around the charged rod will be an electric field.
What is meant by an electric field ?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has
been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
nylon charged
thread polythene
rod (–)
charged
polythene
rod (–)
Fig. 7.2
(i) What is seen to happen to the suspended rod?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not
be able to charge the rod?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 Ω resistor, an ammeter and a
variable resistor with a sliding contact. The variable resistor is set at zero. The ammeter and
battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored.
X
sliding contact
variable
resistor A
Y
4.7 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) In what unit do we measure the e.m.f. of the battery? .................................................[1]
(b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
[2]
(c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 Ω resistor is 0.5 A.
Calculate the p.d. across the resistor.
p.d. across resistor = ........................ [2]
(d) The sliding contact of the variable resistor is moved from X to Y.
(i) What happens to the resistance of the variable resistor?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) What happens to the reading on the ammeter?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 Ω.
What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?
resistance of variable resistor = ........................ Ω [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in
air.
My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured
the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I
stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I
saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard
the sound. We obtained the following readings.
distance across field = 238 m

time for sound to cross field = 0.7 s
(a) Why was it necessary to be a long way from any buildings?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Why was it necessary to use such a large distance?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together
and hearing the bang?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Use the readings to calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ...................................... [4]
(f) Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment
after they had exchanged positions.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) The apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the
copper rod.
hanging copper rod
N
S
mercury
Fig. 10.1
(i) Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is
closed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The cell is reversed and the switch closed.
How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.
coil
S
N
Fig. 10.2
(i) In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an
example.
(ii) Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is
connected?
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]

PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit.
flexible
lamp iron reeds
Fig. 11.1
Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm.
warning
lamp
thermistor
Fig. 11.2
When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to
operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases.
Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]

PMT
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at A, as shown in
Fig. 12.1.
screen
red light
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.
(ii) What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in
Fig. 12.2.
screen
red +
violet light
Fig. 12.2
Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light. [2]
(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the
Sun. State what is now seen on the screen.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through
glass.
(i) On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the
Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.
(ii) Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen?
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) What could be used to detect the infra-red radiation?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2003
1 hour
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.

If you have been given a label, look at the For Examiner’s Use
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if

provided.

MML 4505 11/02 S53489/2 UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE
© UCLES 2003 Local Examinations Syndicate [Turn over
PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) The block of wood in Fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table.
Q R
P
S
B
A
Fig. 1.1
If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when
released.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be.
(ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to
topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.
P S
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must
now lie.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.
A B
Fig. 1.3
Which diagram shows the safer arrangement? .....................
Give a reason for your choice.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be
opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Fig. 1.4
Suggest why they have this mechanism.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second.
Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for
one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a rock-fall down a mountain-side.
loose
rocks
mountain
Fig. 3.1
The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the
mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of
energy being described.
Before they fall, the rocks have this

energy because of their position.
As the rocks are falling,

their energy is changing
to these other types of energy.
At the bottom, the only energy

retained by the rocks is this type
of energy.
[5]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels.
Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.
vehicle 1 vehicle 2
Fig. 4.1
Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is
very soft? Give your reasons.
vehicle ................................................................
reasons ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) (i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be
extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain
why this is not extremely painful.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, AB and CD, in a symmetrical glass block.
glass block
A B
C D
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1,

(i) draw the ray AB before it entered the block at A,
(ii) draw the normal at B,
(iii) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at B,
(iv) draw the normal at D,
(v) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at D.
[5]
(b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the
point P?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
speed, wavelength, frequency

(i) Which of these is the same in a vacuum for both X-rays and radio waves?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) The resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length.
On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies
with length. [2]
resistance
0
0 length
Fig. 7.1
(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the
circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.
+
50 m
meter 1
–
meter 2
Fig. 7.2
(i) What sort of meter is meter 1? ........................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the sentence: “Meter 1 is measuring the .................................................

across the coil of wire.” [1]
(iii) What sort of meter is meter 2? ........................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the sentence: “Meter 2 is measuring the .................................................

in the coil of wire.” [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).
5 6 0.2 0.3
3 4 7
8 0.4
2
9 0.1
1
0.5
10
0
0
V A
Fig. 7.3(a) Fig. 7.3(b)
From the readings, calculate the resistance of the coil of wire.
resistance of coil = ................................ [5]

(vi) What is the resistance per metre of the wire?
resistance per metre = .......................... [2]

PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. The
dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet.
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown
experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines
below.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to
(i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the number of protons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the charge on the nucleus?
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of
3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the
nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.
activity = ......................... count / min [4]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 In a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the
spring.
load / N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
extension / mm 0 16 45 48 64 80 104 150
(a) Plot these values on the axes of Fig. 10.1. [3]
200
extension / mm
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 10.1
(b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a
circle around the incorrect extension. [1]
(c) After a load of about 5 N, the graph begins to curve upwards.
Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in °C.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
ºC
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling
water at standard pressure?
........................... °C
(ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice?
........................... °C
(iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the
thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing
point of water.
[3]
(b) The mercury-in-glass thermometer uses the expansion of a liquid to measure

temperature. State another physical property that can be used to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 In a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 V, the transformer in Fig. 12.1 is used
to enable a 6 V lamp to be lit.
A
240 V 8000 6V
mains turns lamp
Fig. 12.1
(a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at
normal brightness.
number of turns = ........................ [3]
(b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at
normal brightness,
A
(i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e.
number of turns = ....................

B
A
(ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e.
number of turns = ....................

B
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT

MARK SCHEME for the November 2004 question paper
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory), maximum mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does
not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking
began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be
recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
demonstrated.
Examination.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2004 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level syllabuses.
PMT
Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the November 2004
examination.
maximum minimum mark required for grade:

mark
A C E F
available
Component 2 80 N/A 55 47 40
The threshold (minimum mark) for B is set halfway between those for Grades A and C.
The threshold (minimum mark) for D is set halfway between those for Grades C and E.
The threshold (minimum mark) for G is set as many marks below the F threshold as the
E threshold is above it.
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
PMT
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/02
PHYSICS
Theory
PMT

IGCSE – November 2004 0625 2
Question Scheme Target

Mark
Grade
1 (a) 96 F B1
(b) top left eye circled F B1
(c) 100 – 96 e.c.f. F C1
4 e.c.f. F C1
4/80 e.c.f. F C1
0.05 e.c.f. F A1
6
2 (a) (i) 21 F B1
(ii) 1 increases F B1
2 falls )
) both e.c.f. F B1
3 rises )
(b) (i) same C B1
(ii) greater (accept comparison of directions) C B1
5
3 (a) (i) 0.6 x 0.5 x 0.2 F C1
0.06 F A1
3
m C B1
(ii) mass/volume F C1
7.2/his(i) F C1
120 e.c.f. F A1
kg/m3 C B1
(b) (i) “greater than” ticked C B1
(ii) Because of the air in the corrugated cardboard C B1
9
4 (a) (i) chemical )
internal OR heat OR thermal ) any 2
B1,
but also accept ) 2F
B1
nuclear OR kinetic OR potential for one of the
marks
(ii) radiation F B1
(b) (i) K.E. OR kinetic OR motion C B1
(ii) conduction F B1
(iii) 1 gravitational OR P.E. OR potential OR
F B1
position
2 chemical/fuel/food C B1
7

PMT

5 (a) bright specks OR (smoke) particles OR dots

F B1
NOT molecules, NOT air particles
something moving (however expressed) F M1
rapidly OR randomly OR zig-zag F A1
(b) air molecules OR air particles (NOT just “air”) C M1
collisions between smoke particles and air
C A1
mols/particles
invisible )
B1,
fast moving ) any 2 2C
B1
random )
(c) Idea of faster movement or more jerky movement F B1
8
6 (a) aluminum F B1
copper F B1
gold F B1
(b) insulator NOT non-conductor F B1
(c) (i) copper OR aluminum OR gold F B1
(ii) any of the insulators F B1
(d) convection F B1
(e) intelligent mention of convection currents C B1
(accept “to make sure always covered by water”
NOT “heat rises”)
8
7 (a) (i) speed = distance/time in any form F C1
correct substitution in his equation OR 1600/5 F C1
320 c.a.o. F A1
(ii) light travels instantaneously/very fast OR
reference to reaction time
NOT just faster than sound C B1
(b) explosion heard sooner/less than 5s )
second sound/echo/reflection (from ) any 2 B1,
2C
rock face) ) B1
louder )
6

PMT

8 repulsion F B1
repulsion F B1
attraction F B1
attraction C B1
attraction C B1
5
9 (a) (i) 3 )
F B1
3 ) both
(ii) 10 + 10 F C1
20 F A1
(b) (i) 1 1.5A ticked F B1
2 3A OR 3.0A C B1
(ii) 5 Ω ticked C B1
6
10 (a) electrons F B1
(b) neutrons OR atoms F B1
(c) electrons F B1
(d) electrons F B1
(e) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
(f) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
8
11 (a) (i) A or E F B1
(ii) CE or AC or 2.5 cm F B1
(b) real )
) B1,
inverted ) mark in pairs using ✓ + ✗ = 0 2f, 1C B1,
) B1
enlarged )
(c) any ray from 0’ to I’ refracting at mid-line of lens or
F B1
refractions at both surfaces
6

PMT

12 (a) (i) line from B to intersection F B1

(ii) dot at printed intersection F B1
(b) L.H. ornament C M1
lower C of M C A1
(c) block A F M1
narrower/smaller base F A1
6

PMT

NOTES ABOUT THE MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS
B marks are independent mark, which do not depend on any other marks. For a
B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen
in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend.
For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in
a candidate’s answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark,
then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the
points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does
not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or
allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by
e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his
earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated
“e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o means “each error or omission”
brackets () Around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend
on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
underlining Indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means “unit penalty”. An otherwise correct answer will have one mark
deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where
specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing
units are condoned.
OR/or Indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for
scoring the marks.

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Theory
1 hour 15 minutes

If you have been given a label, look at the


provided.

SPA (NH/BI) S66584/2
PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid.
cm3
100
90
80 liquid
Fig. 1.1
(a) What is the volume of liquid in the measuring cylinder?
volume = .............................cm3 [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observer’s eye could look when taking the reading from
the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct
reading. [1]
(c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are
added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder.
Calculate the average volume of one drop.
average volume of a drop = ............................cm3 [4]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) In Fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in
order to indicate the gas pressure.
air pressure
760 mm of mercury
B
gas pressure
781 mm of mercury A
mercury
Fig. 2.1
For convenience, gas pressure is often expressed in mm of mercury.

The gas pressure is 781 mm of mercury and air pressure is 760 mm of mercury.
(i) State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.
difference in height = ………….………..mm
(ii) The temperature of the gas rises.
1. the gas pressure, ..................................................................................................
2. the level A, ............................................................................................................
3. the level B. ...........................................................................................................

[3]
(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where
the drum is situated.
(i) State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on
the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force
exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04 [Turn over
PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods.
The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.20 m
0.60 m
0.50 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg.
(i) Calculate the volume of the bundle of boxes.
volume = .....................................[3]
(ii) Calculate the density of the corrugated cardboard.
density = .....................................[4]
(b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2
shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard.
thick paper air
Fig. 3.2
(i) Here is an incomplete sentence about the paper.
The density of the paper is ................................... that of the corrugated cardboard.
Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box.
greater than the same as less than
(ii) Explain your answer to (b) (i).
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State two types of energy that the burning logs possess.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(ii) State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the
person sitting nearby.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A spark jumps out of the fire.
(i) State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its
movement.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The spark lands on the person’s hand.

State which method of heat transfer causes the person to feel the spark.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up.
1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing.
...................................................................................................................................
2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 In order to observe Brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass
box. The box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from above
through a microscope. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State what causes the effect described in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is
seen through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Here is a list of solid materials. Put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are
good conductors of heat.
aluminium
copper
cork
gold
polystyrene
wood
[3]
(b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for
(i) the base of a cooking pot,..........................................................................................
(ii) the covering on the handle of a kettle. .......................................................................

[2]
(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
All the water heats up quite quickly.

State the process by which heat spreads most rapidly through the water.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is
obtained).
girl
explosion
rock face
quarry
1600 m
Fig. 7.1
(a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures
the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang.
The time is 5.0 s.
(i) Calculate the speed of the sound.
speed of sound = ………….………..m/s [3]
(ii) State what assumption you have made in your working in (i).
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suppose the explosion had taken place at Y instead of X.

State two ways in which the girl’s observations would have been different.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Two light conducting balls A and B are hanging side by side, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
Fig. 8.1
A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below.
In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case.
Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate.
charge on A charge on B what is seen to happen
positive positive
negative negative
positive negative
zero positive
negative zero
[5]

PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) Two 10 Ω resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
3.0 A 10 Ω 10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
The current at point X is 3.0 A.
(i) State the current at
1. point Y, ....................A
2. point Z. ....................A
(ii) Calculate the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors.
combined resistance = ………….………..Ω

[3]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The 10 Ω resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
3.0 A 1.5 A 10 Ω
10 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i) The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A.
1. What is the current at Y? Tick one box.
0A
1.5 A
3.0 A
4.5 A
2. State the value of the current at Z. ....................A
(ii) What is the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors? Tick one box.
0Ω
5Ω
10 Ω
20 Ω
[3]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
State which of these three
(a) has a negative charge, ..................................................................................................[1]
(b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1]
(c) has a much smaller mass than the others, ...................................................................[1]
(d) is outside the nucleus,...................................................................................................[1]
(e) are nucleons,.................................................................................................................[2]
(f) are lost from the nucleus during α-particle emission. ...................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 The ray diagram in Fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image II′ of an object OO′.
O′
D E I
O A BC
I′
Fig. 11.1
(a) State
(i) which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................
(ii) which distance is the focal length of the lens.............................................................

[2]
(b) Which of the following words describe the image?
Tick all that are correct.
real
virtual
inverted
upright
enlarged
diminished
[3]
(c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O′, the top of the object, to the image.
[1]

PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. A triangular piece of card with a small hole in
each corner is hung on the pin from corner A and allowed to settle, as shown in
Fig. 12.1. A plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line AP is marked on
the card.
P
plumb-line
Fig.
Fig. 12.1
This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is
marked.
After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Q C
Fig. 12
B
Fig. 12.2
On Fig. 12.2,
(i) draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,
(ii) clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G. [2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. Fig. 12.3b shows an identical
ornament filled with coloured glass beads.
State which ornament is more stable, and why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.
A
rough
surface
Fig. 12.4
The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and
explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/02 O/N/04
PMT

MARK SCHEME for the November 2005 question paper
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory)
Maximum mark 80
demonstrated.
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and
syllabuses.
PMT

IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005 0625 2
MARK
1 (a) 8.5 (cm) B1
(b) 19.0 OR 19 (± 0.1) (cm) B1
(c) his (b) – his (a) C1
his correct subtraction A1
[4]
2 (a) distance/time C1
25/2 C1
12.5 A1
m/s B1
(b) less OR decreased OR slowing down B1
(c) more than ecf B1
[6]
3 (a) skate M1
small area (in contact with ice) A1
(b) large area )

wind causes large force on side of truck ) any 2 B1,B1
vehicle liable to blow over )
[4]
4 (a) 40 or 160 B1
(b) 720 B1
(c) W=Fxd C1
720 x 0.2 C1
144 A1
J OR joule B1
(d) his(c)/1.2 C1
his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated C1
0.5 x his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated A1

i.e. 60 gets C1, C1, A1 and 120 gets C1, C1, A0)
W OR watt OR J/s B1
[10]

PMT

5 (a) level in tube lower, or equivalent B1
(b) air has expanded (could be scored in (a), but not twice)
OR Kinetic Theory application to pressure B1
(c) any sensible comment B1

e.g. limited temp range, air bubbles out of tube, slow acting,
large volume of air, change in air pressure, no scale
[3]
6 (a) (i) current (in coil) B1
magnetic field (around coil) B1
(ii) magnetised OR attract B1
(b) current zero at first (even if only at origin) B1
horizontal first part B1
vertical rise somewhere B1
horizontal final part B1
[7]
7 (a) three rays parallel and horizontal B1
(b) (i) both principal foci marked B1
(ii) refraction at mid-line, then through F B1

(allow 2 surface refractions if lead back to mid-line)
(iii) ray through F to mid-line, then parallel B1

(allow as (ii))
(iv) image drawn between axis and intersection, perpendicular to axis C B1

(condone no labelling)
drawing accuracy mark for image 2 squares tall ± 2mm and

4 squares away ± 2mm B1
[6]
8 (a) (i) iron OR steel OR any ferromagnetic material B1

(B0 if magnetised stated)
(ii) 1. nothing ecf from (i) B1

2. nothing B1
(b) L.H. compass pointing to R B1
top compass pointing to L B1

PMT

bottom compass pointing to L B1
[6]
9 (a) 1 correct C1
2 correct C1
4 correct A1
(b) (i) all 6 components shown in series (any order) B1

ecf from (a) for symbols
(ii) voltmeter connected across cell, either our diag or his B1
(iii) both B1
(iv) 0.5 B1
(v) current stops OR ammeters read zero OR other bulb goes out B1
[8]
10 (a) 10 x 4 x 6.5 C1
260 (cm3) A1
(b) D = M/V in any form, words, letters, numbers, mixed C1
250/his V ecf if written down C1
0.961538 any no. of sig figs ecf C1
0.96 ecf A1
g/cm3 unless inconsistent with his figures B1
[7]

PMT

11 (a) electrons B1
(b) A B1
(c) (i) D B1
(ii) idea of detecting electrons/making spot visible B1
(d) deflects them B1
(e) no air OR no molecules OR no particles OR “nothing” B1
to stop/slow down/absorb the electrons/cathode rays B1
[7]
12 (a) (i) time taken for (B0 for half the time) B1
activity/count-rate/mass etc. B1
to decrease to half original value B1
(ii) radiation due to surroundings B1
(b) (i) 80 – 25 C1
55 cao A1
(ii) 1. 27.5 ecf B1
2. 52.5 ecf B1
(iii) 15 ± 1 ecf B1
(iv) background remains, even when source has decayed B1
(v) curve to the left of existing one B1
flattening out at 25 count/min B1
[12]

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes



provided.

MML 8113 3/04 S80925/2
PMT
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 The length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 N to 6.0 N are hanging
from it. Fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results.
25
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
load / N
Fig. 1.1
Use the graph to find
(a) the length of the spring with no load attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(b) the length of the spring with 4.5 N attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(c) the extension caused by a 4.5 N load.
extension = ................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort.
1 2 3 4
IGCSE
Fig. 2.1
The IGCSE school bus drives along the highway.
(a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.
Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.
average speed = .......................... [4]
(b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time
taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b).
The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to
travel from tree 2 to tree 3. [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05 [Turn over

PMT
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a
Winter Olympics competition.
skate
ski
Fig. 3.1
Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why?
Which? .............................................................................................................................
Why? .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to
drive when it is very windy.
Fig. 3.2
Suggest why they receive this warning.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 A man is delivering a cupboard to a house.
house
wheels step
Fig. 4.1
(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction
force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push.
force = .................... N [1]
(b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard.
force = .................... N [1]
(c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.
work required = ..................................... [4]
(d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together,
they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard.
Calculate the power developed by each man.
power developed = ................................ [4]

PMT
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 The apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson.
flask
air
clamp
tube
water
Fig. 5.1
Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning.
(a) What change is observed in the apparatus?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why this change happens.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest one disadvantage of using this apparatus to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable
resistor is adjusted.
M +
power
– supply
reed
S
relay
variable resistor
Fig. 6.1
(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The
reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done.
(i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay
close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.
current
in
coil Fig. 6.2(a)
0
time
0
current
in
motor Fig. 6.2(b)
0
time
0
On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with
time as the variable resistor is adjusted. [4]
PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 (a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of
the lens. [1]
(b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.
object
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2,
(i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the
principal focus on the right of the lens, [1]
(ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens
and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area, [1]
(iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis
after it has passed through the lens, [1]
(iv) draw and label the image. [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) Two magnets are laid on a bench. End A of an unidentified rod is held in turn above
one end of each magnet, with the results shown in Fig. 8.1.
A A
S N
N S
bench south pole north pole

lifted off lifted off
bench bench
Fig. 8.1
(i) Suggest what the unidentified rod is made from.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of
1. an unmagnetised iron bar, ................................................................................
2. an uncharged plastic rod. ........................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where
the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been
drawn on one plotting compass.
S N
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the
directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places. [3]

PMT
10 For
Examiner's
Use
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. The names are in the wrong order.
Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an
example.
V cell
lamp
ammeter
voltmeter
A switch
Fig. 9.1
[3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a circuit.
ammeter 1
switch
lamp 2
lamp 1
V
1.5 ammeter 2
cell
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols. [1]
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the cell. [1]
(iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A.
What current does ammeter 2 read?
current = .................... A [1]

(v) One lamp “blows”, so that its filament breaks.
What happens in the circuit?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

PMT
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 Some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in Fig. 10.1.
10 cm
4 cm
6.5 cm
Fig. 10.1
Use the information in Fig. 10.1 to calculate
(a) the volume of the block,
volume = ...................... cm3 [2]
(b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ............................. [5]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
13 For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. The tube contains various parts.
B C
Fig. 11.1
A spot is formed on the screen by the cathode rays.
(a) What do cathode rays consist of? .............................................................................. [1]
(b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1]
(c) (i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1]
(ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A potential difference is applied between the two halves of part C.
What effect does this have on the cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why there needs to be a vacuum inside the tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PMT
14 For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) State what is meant by
(i) the half-life of a radioactive substance,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) In a certain laboratory, the background radiation level is 25 counts/minute.
Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance
from a radioactive source in the laboratory.
80
70
count-rate
counts / min
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time / min
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05
PMT
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is
80 counts/minute.
Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.
count-rate due to source = .................. counts/min [2]

(ii) After one half-life has elapsed, what is the count-rate
1. due to the source alone,
count-rate due to source = ................. counts/min

2. measured by the detector?
count-rate measured by detector = ........................ counts/min

[2]
(iii) Use the graph to find the half-life of the source.
half-life of source = ......................... min [1]

(iv) Why does the graph not drop below the 25 counts/minute line?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter
half-life. [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/05
PMT

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2006 question paper
0625 PHYSICS
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
demonstrated.
examination.
The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2006 question papers for most IGCSE,
syllabuses.
PMT

IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 2

B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks.
For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually
be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later
depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers
must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score
a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate
does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark,

or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward
to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated
by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind
his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not
depend on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the
unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one
mark deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies
where specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect
or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for

scoring the marks.
© UCLES 2006
PMT

QU. SCHEME MARK
1 (a) 55 (s) B1
(b) 55/5 ecf C1

11 (s) ecf A1
(c) EITHER OR OR OR
300/hour 1 takes 11s 5 takes 55s 1hour for 300 B1

= 5/min 300 take 3300s 300 take 60x55s 3600/300s for 1 B1
takes less less than 1hr less than 1hr 1 takes less
than 1 min for 300 for 300 time than B1
for 5 this
YES/NO ticked according to his working B1

7
2 2nd box ticked B1
3rd box ticked B1

(use + = 0 for extras) 2
3 (a) OP accelerating B1
PQ accelerating B1
QR constant speed B1
RS slowing down (however expressed) B1
(b) O and S (both) B1
(c) 6 (m/s) B1
(d) 70 (s) B1
(e) find area OPQRS (however expressed) B1

8
4 (a) (i) radiation B1
(ii) conduction B1
(b) (i) kinetic (however expressed) B1
potential (however expressed) B1
(ii) idea of energy loss or friction B1

5
© UCLES 2006
PMT

5 (a) (magnitude of) force B1
distance (from fulcrum) B1
(b) (i) force B1
moment OR turning effect B1
(ii) F1 + F2 + W B1
(iii) F B1
6
6 (a) (i) eye to image line perpendicular to mirror, by eye B1
object distance = image distance, by eye B1
(ii) normal correctly drawn, by eye B1
(iii) ray to bottom edge of mirror correct M1
reflected ray at correct angle to mirror, by eye

(condone sloppy normal) A1
(b) sensible attempt at explanation B1
(c) (i) 2 (m) (NO ecf) B1
(ii) distance lady to mirror = 3 (m) C1
distance moved = 2 (m) (NO ecf) A1
away from mirror/wall B1

10
7 (a) (i) large, OR accept any large example e.g. cliff B1
(ii) speed = distance/time OR speed = 2xdistance/time C1

(in any form)
480 (m) c.a.o. A1
(b) speed = 6/50 OR 3/50 C1
0.12 (m/s) OR 0.06 (m/s) A1

6
© UCLES 2006
PMT

8 (a) (i) (group) 1 B1
(ii) (group) 2 B1
(iii) plastics OR glass OR ebonite B1
(b) top – and bottom + B1
(c) region/area/space etc. B1
charge B1
experiences a force B1
7
9 (a) good straight line through first 5 points, drawn with a rule B1
(b) intelligent attempt at a reason B1
(c) 67 – 40 C1
27 (mm) A1
(d) 2.4 – 2.5 (N) B1

5
10 (a) less turns on Sy OR more turns on Py B1
(b) voltage OR p.d. OR volts is less B1
(c) V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form C1

12 (V) A1
(d) voltage too high OR bell would be damaged B1
6
11 (a) 92 B1
(b) orbit OR outside nucleus B1
(c) 146 B1
(d) nucleus B1
(e) decreases M1
by 2 A1
6
© UCLES 2006
PMT

12 (a) reverse connections to ammeter or battery B1
(b) current OR amps OR amperes B1
(c) 4 components in series (ignore symbols) B1
4 recognisably correct symbols (ignore connections) B1
(d) (i) voltmeter OR multimeter on volts scale B1
(ii) voltmeter shown connected in parallel with resistor B1
(e) I = V/R in any form C1
correct substitution no ecf from wrong equation C1
0.4 (A) c.a.o. A1
(f) his value of (e) B1
(g) (i) 7.5 Ω ticked B1
(ii) increases current e.c.f. B1

12
© UCLES 2006
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes


MML 10757 3/05 S99316/2
PMT
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 A worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. An inspector times the
worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. To start, the stopwatch is set to zero.
After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
60 5
55
50 10
60
50 10
45 40 20
15
30
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the reading on the stopwatch.
reading = .......................... s [1]
(b) Calculate the time taken to make 1 bracket.
time taken = .......................... s [2]
(c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.
Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to
your answer.
Does the worker meet his target? Yes
No [4]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Some IGCSE students were asked to write statements about mass and weight.
Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct
statements.
Mass and weight are the same thing.
Mass is measured in kilograms.
Weight is a type of force.
Weight is the acceleration caused by gravity. [2]

PMT
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor.
Q R
speed 6
m/s
2 P
O
S
0
0 50 100 170 200
time / s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections.
OP ....................................................................................................................................
PQ ....................................................................................................................................
QR ...................................................................................................................................
RS .............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary?
point ................. and point ................. [1]
(c) State the greatest speed reached by the tractor.
greatest speed = ................ m/s [1]
(d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed?
at constant speed for ................... s [1]
(e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s
journey. Do not attempt a calculation.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 (a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred
(i) from the Sun to the Earth, ........................................................................................
(ii) through the metal of a cooking pot. ..........................................................................

[2]
(b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the
oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word
equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.
gravitational
......................... .........................
potential energy
at the top of the
= energy at the + energy at the + energy losses
bottom of the bottom of the
oscillation
oscillation oscillation
(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly
decreases.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
PMT
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a
pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.
F1 P W F2
Fig. 5.1
(i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in
equilibrium.
1. There must be no resultant ..................................................
2. There must be no resultant ..................................................
(ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the
pivot P.
Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.
F = ....................................................
(iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P?
...................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 A woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
mirror
1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw

(i) a clear dot to show the position of the image of her eye,
(ii) the normal to the mirror at the bottom edge of the mirror,
(iii) a ray from her toes to the bottom edge of the mirror and then reflected from the
mirror.
[5]
(b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) How far is the woman from her image?
............................ m
(ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between
her and her image is 6.0 m?
distance walked = ............................ m
direction = ............................................
[4]
PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo.
He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree.
(i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s.
Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.
obstacle distance = ............................ m

[4]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) A branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. The branch sets
up a wave. The wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of a
moored boat and reflecting back again.
water
wave
B
3.0 m
side of
boat
A
Fig. 7.2
The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB.
Calculate the speed of the water-wave.
speed of wave = ......................... m/s [2]

PMT
10 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials.
GROUP 1 GROUP 2
copper plastics
iron silk
gold glass
aluminium ebonite
Fig. 8.1
(i) Which group contains metals?
...................................................
(ii) Which group contains insulators?
...................................................
(iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by
rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth.
...................................................
[3]
(b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate.
One is attracted to the plate and one is repelled.
attracted to plate
charged
plate
repelled by plate
Fig. 8.2
Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a – sign on the one that is
negatively charged. [1]
(c) State what is meant by an electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06
PMT
11 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching
experiment.
100
length / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to
the edge of the grid. [1]
(b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the extension caused by the 3 N load.
extension = ...................... mm [2]
(d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes
62 mm.
Use the graph to find the weight of the object.
weight of object = ......................... N [1]

PMT
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 A person has a 6 V bell. He hopes to operate the bell from a 240 V a.c. mains supply, with
the help of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V
a.c. output
input

5000 turns 250 turns
Fig. 10.1
(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains
supply.
output voltage = .................... V [3]
(d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
13 For
Examiner's
Use
11 The table below contains some information about uranium-238.
proton number Z = 92
nucleon number A = 238
decays by emitting -particle
(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.
........................................ [1]
(b) State where in the atom the electrons are to be found.
........................................ [1]
(c) State how many neutrons there are in an atom of uranium-238.
........................................ [1]
(d) State where in the atom the neutrons are to be found.
........................................ [1]
(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an
-particle is emitted.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

PMT
14 For
Examiner's
Use
12 Fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit.
ammeter
battery
lamp
15 resistor
Fig. 12.1
(a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way.
What change should be made so that the ammeter works correctly?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What does an ammeter measure?
............................................................................. [1]
(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit
symbols.
[2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(d) (i) Name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference
(p.d.) across the 15 resistor.
.............................................................
(ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a
position to measure the p.d. across the 15 resistor.
[2]
(e) The potential difference across the 15 resistor is 6 V.
Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .................... A [3]
(f) Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp.
lamp current = .................... A [1]
(g) Another 15 resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 resistor that is already in the
circuit.
(i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15 resistors in parallel?
Tick one box.
30
15
7.5
zero
(ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/06
PMT

0625 PHYSICS
demonstrated.
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 02
scored.
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark scheme.
Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
© UCLES 2007
PMT

QU. SCHEME MARK
1 (a) 60 (cm3) B1
(b) liquid surface lower than in cylinder C1

liquid surface level with 15 cm3 (± 5 cm3) A1
(c) less B1
[Total: 4]
2 (a) 200,000 (m3) B1
(b) D = M/V in any form B1

his (a) x 1.3 C1
260,000 c.a.o. A1
kg B1
(c) decreases M1
air expands OR density decreases A1
(d) hot air rises B1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) 7.5 (cmHg) C1

75 (cmHg) A1
(give C1, A1 for 1.0006 x 105 Pa or 1 x 105 Pa (N/m2) if unit given)
(b) nothing OR (Torricellian) vacuum OR Hg vapour B1
(c) tube level lower B1

reservoir level higher (any amount) B1
(d) pressures on 2 surfaces equal (always) )

Hg levels equal (always) OR no Hg column ) any two B1+B1
no change when pressure changes )
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

QU. SCHEME MARK
4 (a) (i) arrow labelled W, vertically (by eye) down

from somewhere on either boat B1
(ii) arrow labelled F, down slope, between either boat and slipway B1
(b) (i) multiply W by (vertical) height raised OR Wh B1
(ii) multiply F by distance along slope OR Fs B1
(iii) add (i) and (ii) B1
(c) time taken B1
[Total: 6]
o
5 (a) C B1
(b) (i) ICE marked at 0 B1
(ii) STEAM marked at 100 B1
(c) expansion/volume/pressure OF a gas )

expansion/length OF a solid )
resistance OF a resistor/thermistor/wire )
bending OF a bimetal strip ) any 2 B1+B1
e.m.f/voltage OF a thermocouple )
colour OF a hot surface )
colour change OF certain chemicals )
[Total: 5]
6 (a) (i) uniform acceleration B1
(ii) 9 (m/s) B1
(iii) s = vt in any form C1

90 (m) OR 10 x his (ii), evaluated A1
(b) average speed is lower B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

QU. SCHEME MARK
7 (a) (i) 1.5 (cm) B1
(ii) circle centred on X, outside printed circle (circle need not be drawn
with a compass, but must be carefully drawn) M1
diameter 4.5 cm by eye A1
(b) sound longitudinal, water transverse )

sound wave faster (than water wave) ) any 2 B1,B1
different frequency/wavelength )
[Total: 5]
8 (a) (i) principal focus unambiguously marked B1

focal length approximately indicated C1
focal length precisely indicated, from pole to principal focus A1
(ii) any ray from X to Y, correctly refracted at lens B1
(b) [mark in pairs, using + = 0]

real B1
diminished B1
inverted B1
image distance less B1
(c) gets smaller B1

gets closer to lens B1
[Total: 10]
9 (a) points correctly plotted (±½ small square) –1 e.e.o.o. B2

smooth curve through his points B1
reasonable thickness B1
(b) (i) 5.3 – 6.1 B1
(ii) 0.9 – 1.7 B1
(c) R = V/I in any form C1

division by 25 or 25 x 10–3 somewhere C1
(i) answer between 220 and 240 B1
(ii) answer between 40 and 60 B1

Ω shown in either (i) or (ii) B1
(d) answer compatible with his (c) B1
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

QU. SCHEME MARK
10 (a) (i) shape appropriate outside coil (condone incomplete loops) M1

lines mostly parallel within coil A1
pattern roughly symmetrical A1
no lines touching or crossing A1
(ii) iron bar B1
(b) rods become magnetised M1

same direction A1
repel B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) within range 18–20 (mins) B1
(b) (i) 922 or thereabouts B1
(ii) his (a) B1
(c) alpha OR beta B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) electrons B1
(b) move M1
towards P1 A1
(c) idea of making both P3 and/or P4 positive B1

equal potential B1
(earthing of P1 and P2 not required for answer)
(d) fluorescent screen OR any other appropriate method B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
PMT

*8902325113*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
appropriate units.
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (MML 13331 4/06) T25940/5

PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 Fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The metal can next to it has a cross-
sectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder 90
80
70
60
50 metal
can
40
liquid 30
20
10
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the volume of the liquid.
volume = ........................................ cm3 [1]
(b) The liquid is poured into the metal can.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can. [2]
The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is ……………………………… than
the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A theatre measures 100 m × 80 m × 25 m. The air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it
is cool.
(a) Calculate the volume of the air in the theatre.
volume of air = .......................................... m3 [1]
(b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.
mass of air = ................................................ [4]
(c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.
State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)
is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size.
glass tube
mercury
reservoir
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to
calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ..................................... cm Hg [2]
(b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in
Fig. 3.1.
On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might
be. [2]
(d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the
tube.
Explain why the barometer no longer functions.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see Fig. 4.1).
diesel
engine
slipway
s
Fig. 4.1
The boat finishes in the position shown by the broken outline.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, carefully mark
(i) the weight W of the boat, using an arrow labelled W, [1]
(ii) the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F. [1]
(b) State, in terms of W, F, h and s, how you could calculate
(i) the work done lifting the weight of the boat,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the work done against the friction force,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful
power output of the diesel engine?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
capillary tube
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments.
State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in
(i) pure melting ice (label this point ICE), [1]
(ii) steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM). [1]
(c) A liquid-in-glass thermometer makes use of the expansion of a liquid to measure

temperature. Other thermometers make use of other properties that vary with
temperature.
In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be
used to measure temperature.
example expansion OF a liquid

1. OF
2. OF
[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 A motorcyclist drives along a straight road. Fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of
his ride.
start after 5 s after 10 s

0m/s 9m/s 18 m / s
Fig. 6.1
(a) From the information on Fig. 6.1,
(i) describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,
constant speed
uniform acceleration
uniform deceleration
[1]
(ii) estimate the average speed of the motorcyclist during the 10 s,
average speed = ........................................ m / s [1]
(iii) calculate the distance travelled during the 10 s.
distance travelled = ............................................ m [2]
(b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled
in the first 10 s of the journey.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond.
Fig. 7.1
(a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the
wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.
(i) The wave travels at 5 cm / s.

Calculate how far the wave travels in 0.3 s.
distance travelled = .......................................... cm [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown. [2]
Fig. 7.2
(b) A ringing bell also sends out waves in all directions.
State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than
the fact that one is created in air and the other in water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY.
Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image.
I
O
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1,
(i) clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens, [3]
(ii) draw a third ray from X to Y. [1]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images.
Tick any which apply to the image shown in Fig. 8.1.
real
virtual
enlarged
diminished
inverted
upright
image distance less than object distance
image distance more than object distance

[4]
(c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further
away from the lens.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water.
The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
variable voltage supply
thermometer
water
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 9.1
At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of
the voltage is noted.
temperature / °C 15 30 45 60 75 90
voltage / V 18.8 8.8 4.7 2.6 1.5 1.2
(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature.
[4]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
25
voltage / V
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
temperature / oC
Fig. 9.2
(b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA
(i) at 40 °C, voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(ii) at 80 °C. voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor
(i) at 40 °C,
resistance at 40 °C = .....................................................
(ii) at 80 °C.
resistance at 80 °C = .....................................................
[5]
(d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort
used in this experiment.
The thermistor in this experiment is a device whose resistance …………………………

as the temperature increases. [1]
[Total: 12]
PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil.
[4]
(ii) A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil.
Which one makes the field stronger? ................................................................. [1]
(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then
closed.
Fig. 10.2
The iron rods move apart. Suggest why this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.
The results are shown in the table.
time / minutes 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
activity
461 332 229 162 106 81 51
count / s
(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
(b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the
start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.
Suggest what values might be obtained for
(i) the activity at the start of the second experiment,
................................... count / s [1]
(ii) the half-life of the material in the second experiment.
................................... minutes [1]
(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this
activity.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. The beam
is surrounded by four metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 as shown in Fig. 12.1.
On Fig. 12.1, the beam is shown as the dot at the centre.
P2
P1
P3
P4
Q
Fig. 12.1
(a) Cathode rays are produced by thermionic emission.
What is the name of the particles which make up cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3.
State what happens to the beam of cathode rays.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can
now be deflected down the page towards Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
demonstrated.
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if
figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units It is expected that all final answers will have correct units. Deduct one unit penalty for
each incorrect or missing unit, maximum 1 per question. No unit penalty if unit is
missing from final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.
out.
© UCLES 2008
PMT

1 (a) attempt at subtraction C1

3 hrs 20 mins C1
200 mins A1
(b) 200/20 OR 200/10 e.c.f. from (a) C1

10 OR 20 e.c.f. A1 [5]
2 (a) L×B×H C1
2 × 1.5 × 1 C1
3 (m3) A1
(b) M=V×D C1
3000 (kg) e.c.f. A1
correct units in both (a) and (b) B1 [6]
3 (a) YZ OR WZ and WY OR XZ and XY B1
(b) (i) 4.2 – 4.6 (N) B1
(ii) his (i) B1

N B1
(iii) increases B1
(iv) goes up OR oscillates OR accelerates B1 [6]
4 (a) radio OR TV B1
ultra-violet B1
(b) long wavelength written at LH end B1
(c) any three acceptable uses B1,B1,B1
(d) red B1
violet (NOT blue, purple, mauve) B1 [8]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

5 (a) (i) reflected B1
(ii) same frequency B1
(b) (i) 480 (m) B1
(ii) distance/time C1
his(i)/1.6 C1
300 (m/s) e.c.f. A1
(iii) measured distance incorrect )

measured time incorrect OR effect of reaction time ) any 2 B1,B1
any reference to temperature )
any reference to wind )
any reference to humidity )
any reference to pressure )
time interval very small to measure on a stopwatch )
[8]
6 (a) distance approximately marked (±5 mm) C1

distance accurately marked (±2 mm) A1
(b) (i) falls B1
(ii) air mols bombard surfaces B1

cause pressure on Hg B1
(c) Hg at same height as in LH tube (by eye) B1
(d) rises rises ) B1 × 4

falls stays the same )
[10]
7 (a) (i) normal correct, by eye B1
(ii) reflected ray in correct direction, by eye (condone poor normal) B1
(iii) i correctly labelled (condone poor normal) B1
(iv) r correctly labelled (condone poor normal) B1
(b) i=r B1
(c) (i) second mirror correct, by eye B1
(ii) ray parallel to original ray B1 [7]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

8 (a) (i) N at left and S at right B1
(ii) attract e.c.f. B1
(b) (i) N at left and S at right B1
(ii) attract e.c.f. B1
(c) attract B1
(d) nothing B1 [6]
9 (a) a B1
(b) B B1
(c) I = V/R C1
6/4 A1
1.5 A1
(d) connection 2 B1
both receive full voltage OR both run at full brightness B1
if one blows/switched off, other will continue working B1 [9]
10 (a) contact position shown at centre of potential divider, by eye B1
(b) current in coil )

core magnetised )
armature attracted ) any 3 B1,B1,B1
armature pivots )
armature pushes contacts closed )
[4]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

11 (a) core B1
(b) a.c. B1
(c) VP/VS = NP/NS in any form C1

200 A1
(d) voltage too high OR lamp will blow B1 [6]
12 (a) 84 B1
(b) 218 B1
(c) (i) 2 B1
(ii) 4 B1
allow both marks for interchanged answers for (i) and (ii),
if answers to (a) and (b) were interchanged
(iii) alpha-particle B1 [5]
© UCLES 2008
PMT

*5545678956*
PHYSICS 0625/02
1 hour 15 minutes
appropriate units.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4
PMT
1 A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards For
across the river. Examiner’s
Use
12 12
11 1 11 1
10 2 10 2
9 3 9 3
8 4 8 4
7 5 7 5
6 6
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
When he starts fishing one morning, the boy’s wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
When he finishes his morning’s fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(a) For how many minutes was the boy fishing?
number of minutes = ................................................ [3]
(b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,
load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.
Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy
was fishing.
number of journeys = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
2 The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m × 1.5 m × 1.0 m. It is full of water. For
Examiner’s
Use
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the volume of the tank.
volume = ................................................ [3]
(b) Water has a density of 1000 kg/m3.

Calculate the mass of water in the tank.
mass = ................................................ [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it. For
Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load. Examiner’s
Use
before after
W
X
load
Fig. 3.1
(a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order
to find the extension of the spring.
distance = ................................................ [1]
(b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains
the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4 load / N 5
Fig. 3.2
(i) When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension
of the spring is 1.7 cm.
Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.
weight = ............................................ N [1]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
(ii) State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it. For
Examiner’s
tension = ................................................ [2] Use
(iii) The load is pulled down further.

State what happens to the tension in the spring.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) After being pulled down, the load is released.

State what happens to the load immediately after it is released.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the For
visible light part of the spectrum. Examiner’s
Use
micro- infra visible X-rays γ -rays

waves -red
visible
M N
Fig. 4.1
(a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1.
In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions. [2]
(b) Write “long wavelength” next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic
spectrum. [1]
(c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions.
microwaves ......................................................................................................................
infra-red ...........................................................................................................................
γ-rays ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) State the colour you would expect to find
(i) at end M of the visible spectrum, ..............................................................................
(ii) at end N of the visible spectrum. ..............................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
5 (a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect For
alternatives. An example has been given to help you. Examiner’s
Use
large
(example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle.
thin
reflected
(i) An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle. [1]
dispersed
(ii) An echo from a stationary obstacle has

a greater frequency than
the same frequency as
a smaller frequency than
the sound hitting the obstacle. [1]
(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed
of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged
together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown
in Fig. 5.1.
school
wall
B A
240 m
Fig. 5.1
Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch.
B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s.
(i) How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s? ................................ m [1]
(ii) Calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ......................................... m/s [3]

PMT
(iii) The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to For
330 m/s. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students’ value was different from
what was expected.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is
incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum.
glass
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 6.1
(a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured
in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure. [2]
(b) A small quantity of air is introduced into X.
(i) State what happens to the mercury level in the tube.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.
On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube. [1]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08
PMT
(d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum. For
Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the Examiner’s
effect of changing the external conditions. Use
rises falls stays the same
effect on the level of the effect on the level of the

change
mercury in the left-hand tube mercury in the right-hand tube
atmospheric pressure
rises
temperature
rises
[4]
[Total: 10]
7 This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light
striking a plane mirror.
ray of
light
mirror
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw the normal to the mirror at A, [1]

(ii) draw the path of the reflected ray, [1]
(iii) mark and label the angle of incidence, i, [1]
(iv) mark and label the angle of reflection, r. [1]
(b) State the equation that links i and r.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 7.1
(i) draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to
the right of A, [1]
(ii) draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror. [1]
[Total: 7]
PMT
10
8 (a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the
iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel [1]
(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
N S N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel [1]
(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
N S N S
Fig. 8.3
What happens to the two magnets? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel [1]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
11
(d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in For
Use
N S + –
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 8.4
What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
9 A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either For
switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs. Examiner’s
The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1. Use
X Y
6V switch 2
lamp
a
6 V supply
switch 1
A
Fig. 9.1
(a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The lamp has a resistance of 4.0 Ω.
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
13
(d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply. For
Examiner’s
Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in Use
Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer.
X Y X Y
connection 1 connection 2
Fig. 9.2
Which is best? .................................................................................................................
Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor For
on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider. Examiner’s
Use
pivoted iron
armature
power supply
6V for motor
M motor
switch
relay core contacts
Fig. 10.1
(a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just
operates. [1]
(b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
240V 6V
mains lamp
8000 turns iron
Fig. 11.1
(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesn’t it
matter?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [3]
(d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by For
the symbol Examiner’s
Use
218
84 Po
(a) State the proton number of this nuclide. ........................ [1]
(b) State the nucleon number of this nuclide. ........................ [1]
(c) The nucleus decays according to the following equation.
218 214
84 Po 82 Pb + emitted particle
(i) State the proton number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
(ii) State the nucleon number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
(iii) Name the emitted particle. Tick one box.
α-particle
β-particle
neutron
proton [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if
figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units It is expected that all final answers will have correct units. Deduct one unit penalty for
each incorrect or missing unit, maximum 1 per question. No unit penalty if unit is
missing from final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
plus wrong penalty.
applies.
out.
© UCLES 2009
PMT

1 (a) (i) 20 (cm3) )
(ii) 25 (cm3)±0.5 ) both B1 [1]
(b) 5 (cm3) e.c.f. B1 [1]
(c) 5/200 e.c.f. C1

0.025 (cm3) e.c.f. A1 [2]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) kinetic or K.E. or motion B1 [1]
(b) strain or elastic B1 [1]
(c) gravitational or P.E. or G.P.E. or potential B1 [1]
(d) weight /mass (of athlete) AND height/distance (of bar) B1 [1]
[Total: 4]
3 (a) (i) 1. increasing M1

steady or uniform A1
2. constant B1 [3]
(ii) horizontal straight line between A & B B1 [1]
(b) (i) line on axis between B & C B1 [1]
(ii) horizontal straight line between C & D M1

lower than that for AB A1 [2]
(c) zero distance or equiv. B1 [1]
[Total: 8]
4 (a) (i) moves to the left C1

accelerates to the left A1 [2]
(ii) arrow to the right B1

9N B1 [2]
(iii) blob on diagram clearly indicated as the C of M B1 [1]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

(b) (i) rises B1 [1]
(ii) less stable B1 [1]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) (i) 1. cooling OR energy/heat lost seen anywhere in (i) B1

2. solidifying or temperature constant B1
3. cooling B1 [3]
(ii) first and last both ticked B1

middle ticked B1 [2]
(iii) solid accept ice/frozen B1 [1]
(b) rising curve of some sort C1

idea of mirror image of Fig. 6.1 A1 [2]
[Total: 8]
6 (a) same B1
greater at B B1
greater at B B1 [3]
(b) box 1 ticked ) B1

) use + =0 for extras
box 3 ticked ) B1 [2]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) q B1 [1]
(b) F marked close to point of image/object B1 [1]
(c) [mark in pairs, use + =0]

inverted B1
real B1 [2]
(d) same B1 [1]
(e) (i) nothing C1 [1]
(ii) image blurs A1 [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

8 (a) one sound direct B1

one sound after reflection/echo B1 [2]
(b) first M1
second one suffers absorption,dispersion A1 [2]
(c) (i) s = vt in any form (seen somewhere in (c)) B1

time to hear 1st sound = 990/330 or 3 (s) B1 [2]
(ii) time to hear 2nd sound = (3 × 330)/330 or 9 (s) B1 [1]
(iii) interval = 6 (s) e.c.f. B1 [1]
[Total: 8]
9 (a) L.H. circuit – series AND R.H. circuit – parallel B1 [1]
(b) (i) 280 + 200 C1

480 (Ω) A1 [2]
(ii) I = V/R in any form C1

12/his (i) seen or 12/480 need not be seen C1
0.025 or 25 or 1/40 c.a.o. A1
A or mA as appropriate B1 [4]
(iii) his (ii) × 200 or proportion or potential divider calculation C1

5 (V) e.c.f. A1 [2]
(iv) connect voltmeter ) M1

) (could be shown on diag)
between A and B ) A1 [2]
[Total: 11]
10 (a) (i) core correctly labelled B1 [1]
(ii) iron B1 [1]
(iii) idea of magnetic linkage B1 [1]
(b) V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form C1

120 (V) A1 [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

11 no exposed wires )
)
no worn insulation )
)
no loose wires/connections )
)
no short circuits )
) any 3
plug correctly wired )
)
any idea about continuity check )
)
no sharp bends in cable ) B1 x 3 [3]
[Total: 3]
12 (a) 5 points correctly plotted (–1 e.e.o.o.) B2

reasonable curve through his points B1 [3]
(b) (i) between 30 and 35 or his correct value ± 5 B1 [1]
(ii) 2 (minutes) or his correct value ± 0.02 B1 [1]
(c) 2 (minutes) or his (b) (ii) B1 [1]
(d) (i) half-life too short B1 [1]
(ii) mark any correct 2, ignore the rest
long half life )

)
gamma-emitter )
)
good penetration ) any 2
)
similar particle size )
)
similar density ) B1+B1 [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
PMT

*3735851861*
PHYSICS 0625/02
1 hour 15 minutes

part question.
DCA (SHW 00151 2/08) 12741/5

PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water. For

Examiner’s
A student allows 200 drops of water to fall into the water in the measuring cylinder. Fig. 1.2 Use
shows the measuring cylinder after the addition of the drops.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
final level
20 original level 20 of water
of water
10 10
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) State
(i) the original volume of water in the cylinder,
................................................ cm3
(ii) the final volume of water in the cylinder.
................................................ cm3
[1]
(b) Calculate the volume of water added.
volume added = ......................................... cm3 [1]
(c) Calculate the average volume of one of the drops of water.
average volume = ......................................... cm3 [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
2 As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is For
bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
pole
Fig. 2.1
(a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done
lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?
............................................................. and .............................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girl’s bicycle ride and the axes for the For
corresponding speed/time graph. Examiner’s
Use
distance
from
starting
point
0A B C D time
speed
0
A B C D time
Fig. 3.1
(a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.
(i) Answer the following questions for the time interval AB.
1. What is happening to the distance from the starting point?
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
2. What can you say about the speed of the bicycle?
..................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
(ii) On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could For
show the speed during AB. [1] Examiner’s
Use
(b) On the speed/time axes of Fig. 3.1
(i) draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC, [1]
(ii) draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD. [2]
(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?
distance from starting point = ................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
4 (a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N. For
Examiner’s
Use
12 N
15 N 6N
weight = 12 N
Fig. 4.1
(i) State what happens to the object.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to
a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the
letter G. [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the For
upper deck. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.2
(i) What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars
are loaded?
Tick one box.
rises
stays at the same height
falls
[1]
(ii) How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?
Tick one box.
more stable
no effect
less stable
[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A. For
Examiner’s
Use
temperature
A
C
B
time
Fig. 5.1
(i) Describe what is happening to the substance between
1. A and B, . ..........................................................................................................
2. B and C, ...........................................................................................................
3. C and D. ...........................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to
the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.
between A and B
between B and C
between C and D
[2]
(iii) What is the state of the substance at D?
................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
(b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it For
again reaches the temperature it had at A. Examiner’s
Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the
substance. [2]
temperature
time
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
6 A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
handle
bung B A
air piston
Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is
pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B.
Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as
the piston is moved.
greater with greater with same with

piston at A piston at B piston at A or B
the average speed of the air molecules
the frequency with which the air

molecules hit the walls and the piston
the pressure of the air in the pump
[3]
(b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.
Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes.
friction force between bung and hole
resultant due to forces of air on each side of piston
resultant due to forces of air on each side of bung
gravitational force on bung
force of air on walls

[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a For
plane mirror. Examiner’s
Use
lens image
torch
p q
plane
mirror
hole cut
in card
Fig. 7.1
The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real
experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the
centre of the lens.
(a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.
................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F. [1]
(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.
erect
inverted
real
virtual [2]
(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.
State what, if anything, happens to the image on the card if
(i) the plane mirror is moved slightly to the left,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the lens is moved slightly to the left.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside. For
Examiner’s
Use
steep
mountainside
student
bell tower
and bell
990 m 990 m
Fig. 8.1
The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.
(a) Explain why the student hears two rings.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State which of the sounds is loudest, and why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
13
(c) Sound in that region travels at 330 m / s. For

Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for Use
the first time.
time interval = ............................................. s [2]
(ii) Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the second time.
time interval = ............................................. s [1]
(iii) Calculate the time interval between the two sounds.
time interval = ............................................. s [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
9 (a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery. For
Examiner’s
Complete the statement under each circuit. Use
R1 R3
R2 R4
Resistors R1 and R2 are Resistors R3 and R4 are
connected in ………………………… connected in ………………………… [1]
Fig. 9.1
(b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so
low that it can be ignored.
280 Ω
12 V
200 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i) Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.
resistance = ............................................ Ω [2]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
15
(ii) Calculate the current delivered by the battery. For

Examiner’s
Use
current = ................................................ [4]
(iii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ............................................. V [2]
(iv) Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 Ω resistor is
the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use
for this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a diagram of a transformer. For

Examiner’s
Use
30 turns 300 turns
12 V a.c. voltmeter
V
a.c.
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer. [1]
(ii) Name a suitable material from which the core could be made.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State the purpose of the core.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ............................................. V [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
17
11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in For
Use
Fig. 11.1
The drill mechanism itself is guaranteed to be electrically safe.
Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his
purchase is electrically safe.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3. .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]

PMT
18
12 A radioactive material, X, has a half-life of 2 minutes. For

Examiner’s
At the beginning of an experiment, a sample of the material produces a count-rate of Use
800 counts / s.
Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life
has elapsed.
900
800
700
600
500
count-rate
counts / s
400
300
200
100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
time t / minutes
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
19
(a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve For
through your points. [3] Examiner’s
Use
(b) From your graph find
(i) the count-rate from the sample after 9 minutes,
count-rate = ................................. counts / s [1]
(ii) the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.
time = ................................... minutes [1]
(c) A second sample of this radioactive material X gives an initial count-rate of

400 counts / s.
What will be the half-life of this sample?
half-life = ................................... minutes [1]
(d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and
prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the
mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive
material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.
(i) Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the
dumped mud.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable
for tracking the mud.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/09
PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
© UCLES 2010
PMT

1 (a) (i) 6 (cm) B1

5 (cm) B1
(ii) 6 × 5 × 2 ecf C1
60 (cm3) ecf A1
(b) D = M/V in any form, letters, words or numbers B1

53 C1
2.65 OR 2650 A1
g/cm3 OR kg/m3 (unit must be appropriate) B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) distance/time in any form C1

960/8 OR 960/(8 × 60) C1
120 OR 2 A1
m/min OR m/s must correspond with value B1
(b) friction or air resistance or force accelerating/decelerating legs B1
[Total: 5]
3 (a) tidal B1
wave B1
hydroelectric accept waterfall B1
(any order)
(b) tidal wave hydroelectric

PE of rise and fall PE of rise and fall water stored at high level B1
flow through turbine rotates/moves floats flowing water drives turbine B1
turbine drives generator floats drive generator turbine drives generator B1
[Total: 6]
4 (a) focal length OR focal distance B1
(b) 4 rays all passing through F M1

appropriate refraction at both lens surfaces
OR all rays bent at lens mid-line A1
(c) focused image OR sharp image OR dot B1
(d) 4 dots OR out-of-focus/blurred/fuzzy image B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

5 (a) alpha and beta both underlined –1 e.e.o.o. B2
(b) gamma B1
(c) radio B1
(d) alpha B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) conduction B1
(b) (i) convection B1
(ii) hot water expands OR hot water less dense B1

hot water rises (ignore anything about cold water falling) B1
(c) convection cannot occur B1

water is a poor conductor B1
[Total: 6]
7 (a) i correctly shown B1
(b) (i) ray shown in air at angle > 40° C1

angle same as in Fig. 7.1, by eye A1
(ii) ray reflected (MO if says along surface) M1

critical angle exceeded A1
[Total: 5]
8 (a) (i) one sound or equivalent (NOT an echo) B1
(ii) distance = speed × time in any form ...... condone factor of 2 C1

330 × 1.5 C1
495 (m) A1
(b) (i) idea of one sound direct

OR original sound B1
other sound by echo B1
(ii) 1.5 (s) B1

4.5 (s) B1
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

9 (a) (i) N at left end and S at right end (inside or outside magnet outline) M1
both N and S within magnet outline A1
(ii) attracted/moves towards magnet OR it becomes magnetised B1
(iii) nothing B1
(b) (i) pass current through coil/wire OR connect a battery across coil B1
(ii) iron NOT steel B1
(iii) can be very strong )

can be switched on & off easily ) any one B1
can reverse polarity easily )
adjustable strength )
[Total: 7]
10 (a) parallel B1
(b) I = V/R in any form C1

100/250 C1
0.4 (A) A1
(c) 12 (A) OR 30 × his (b), correctly evaluated B1
(d) parallel B1
(e) (i) none e.c.f. from (a) B1
(ii) none e.c.f. from (d) B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) cell/battery shown M1

complete series circuit, including cell/battery A1
(ignore any switch, open or closed
ignore any other component, as long as a current would flow)
(b) (i) S and M on door and frame (either way) so they would be next to each other when door
closed B1
S on frame and M on door edge/door face close to edge B1
(ii) any suitable application B1

e.g. shop door, security door, lift door, fridge door, oven door
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

12 (a) yes B1
yes B1
no B1
(b) nucleus B1
(c) (i) 6 points correct ±½ small square –1 e.e.o.o. B2

thin, smooth curve through points B1
(ii) 8 ± 1 (mins) C1
108 ± 1 (mins) C1
100 ± 2 (mins) e.c.f. if working shown A1
(iii) half his (ii) e.c.f. B1
(d) his (ii) e.c.f. B1
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

*2512877189*
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 24995/3
PMT
1 (a) (i) Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a
ruler. They are not shown full size.
Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers
in cm.
length of block ................. cm [1]
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
millimetres
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
Fig. 1.1
210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
millimetres
width of block ...................... cm [1]
Fig. 1.2
(ii) When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.
Calculate the volume of the block.
volume = ................................................. cm3 [2]

© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10
PMT
(b) Another block has a volume of 20 cm3.
Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance.
block
40 50 60 70
grams
Fig. 1.3
Find the density of this block.
density = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 A boy cycles a distance of 960 m from home to school in 8.0 minutes.
(a) Calculate his average speed for the journey.
average speed = ......................................................... [4]
(b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of
the work he has done.
Against which force has this work been done?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of
how the energy is converted to electrical energy.
Which energy resource are you describing? ............................................................................
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus
of the lens.
P F
Fig. 4.1
(a) What name do we give to the distance PF? ....................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the
broken line. [2]
(c) A flat white screen is placed at F, parallel to the broken line.
Describe what is seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The screen is moved so that it is along the broken line.
Describe what is now seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
5 Here is a list of different types of radiation.
alpha (α), beta (β), gamma (γ), infra-red, radio, ultra-violet, visible, X-rays
(a) Underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations. [2]
(b) Which radiation is the most penetrating? ............................................................................ [1]
(c) Which radiation has the longest wavelength? ..................................................................... [1]
(d) Which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4He nuclei? ............................. [1]
[Total: 5]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two experiments to investigate energy transfer in water.
water water
ice
gentle
heating
ice trapped by
small piece of
gentle wire gauze
heating
Experiment 1 Experiment 2
Cold water is gently heated Cold water is gently heated
at the bottom. The ice at the at the top. The ice trapped
top melts before the water at the bottom remains solid,
boils. even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Name the principal process in Experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the
bottom to the ice at the top.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
(ii) Describe how the process in (b)(i) occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest two reasons why the ice in Experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. The angle of the refracted ray to
the normal is 40°.
On Fig. 7.1, mark clearly the angle of incidence i. [1]
ray of
light
air
40° water
Fig. 7.1
(b) In Fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of
40° to the normal.
air
water
40°
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air. [2]
(ii) The angle in the water in Fig. 7.2 is increased from 40° to 70°, and the ray no longer
emerges into the air.
State what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. Some distance away is a
vertical cliff.
cliff
workman
boy girl
Fig. 8.1
(a) A boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. It takes 1.5 s for
the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy.
(i) What does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance between the post and the boy.
distance = ..................................................... m [3]
(b) A girl is also watching the workman. She is standing the same distance behind the post as
the boy is in front of it. She hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the
post.
(i) Why does she hear two sounds?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
11
(ii) How long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds?
girl hears first sound after ............... s
girl hears second sound after ............... s [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet.
A B
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters N and S.
[2]
(ii) A small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at A.
What, if anything, happens to it?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A small piece of positively charged plastic is placed at B.
What, if anything, happens to it?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows an electromagnet.
coil
core
Fig. 9.2
(i) What must be done to magnetise the core?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the material from which the core should be made.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
13
10 A cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. The crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the
ship’s electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps.
Fig. 10.1
Each string of lamps contains thirty 100 V lamps. The strings of lamps are run from a 100 V
generator. The resistance of each lamp is 250 Ω. Ignore the resistance of the generator.
(a) State whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the current in each lamp when it is at normal brightness.
current = ..................................................... A [3]
(c) What current does the generator supply to each string of lamps?
current = ..................................................... A [1]
(d) The generator supplies current to several strings of lamps.
State whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) One of the lamps “blows” and forms an open circuit.
What effect, if any, does this have on
(i) the other lamps in the same string, ...................................................................................
(ii) the lamps in the other strings? .................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
15
11 The reed switch (reed relay) shown in Fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one.
Fig. 11.1
When a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell.
N S
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete Fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is
taken away. [2]
(b) Fig. 11.3 shows a door in a wall.
(i) On Fig 11.3, show where

you would fix the reed
switch and the magnet of
Fig 11.2, so that the bell
rings when the door opens.
Use the letter S for the
switch and the letter M for
the magnet. [2]
(ii) Suggest one application of

this arrangement.
............................................
............................................
............................................
...................................... [1]
Fig. 11.3
[Total: 5]
PMT
16
12 The table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay.
(a) Complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has
charge. Three answers have been given to help you.
mass charge
alpha (α) YES
beta (β) YES
gamma (γ) NO
[3]
(b) From which part of the atom do all of these emissions come?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance.
elapsed time / minutes count rate

counts / min
0 909
20 689
40 522
60 400
80 300
100 230
120 170
140 125
160 99
(i) On Fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you.
Plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for
these points. [3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
17
1000
900
count rate
counts / min
800
time to decrease from 800 counts / min to

700 200 counts / min
= .................................. minutes
600
half-life of substance
= .................................. minutes
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
elapsed time / minutes
Fig. 12.1

PMT
18
(ii) From the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min
to 200 counts / min. Write your answer and any working in the space on the graph. [3]
(iii) Use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.
Write your answer in the space on the graph. [1]
(d) A different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of
4000 counts / min.
Write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
© UCLES 2010
PMT

1 (a) 13.6 (s) B1
(b) 13.6/40 e.c.f. C1

0.34 (s) e.c.f. A1
(c) more accurate OR errors less significant OR time for 1 interval too small B1
(d) 4 intervals OR 4 and a bit intervals OR 5 intervals C1

4 × his (b) OR (4 and a bit) × his (b) 5 × his (b) C1
1.36 – 1.5 (s) e.c.f. A1
(e) drops accelerate/go faster B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) extension indicated between two broken lines B1
(b) (i) 4 points correctly plotted ± ½ small square –1 e.e.o.o. B2

(condone 0,0 not plotted)
straight line through points and origin, by eye B1
(ii) proportional B1
(iii) 1. newton(s) B1
2. 25 – 26 (mm) C1
75 – 76 (mm) A1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) (i) (engine) thrust and (air) friction B1
(ii) force shown vertically upwards, anywhere on plane B1
(b) (i) v = s/t in any form C1

2200/2.75 C1
800 (km/h) A1
(ii) idea of
headwind on outward journey
OR tailwind on return journey
OR shorter route on return journey
OR air friction is less
OR idea of less weight
NOT flies slower B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

4 work B1
potential/gravitational/PE/GPE/position B1
kinetic/KE/movement B1
constant/the same/uniform B1
joule(s) OR J condone j B1
[Total: 5]
5 (a) (i) internal energy B1
(ii) thermal capacity B1
(iii) boiling point B1
(b) increases temperature rises OR mercury/alcohol/liquid expands B1 + B1

changes rod/brass expands B1 + B1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) 40 condone no unit B1
(b) (i) ray reflected at angle > 40° to dotted line B1
(ii) 60 condone no unit B1
(iii) his (ii) – 40 C1
20 e.c.f. condone no unit A1
(c) (i) 2 (cm) B1
(ii) idea of distance behind = distance in front C1

10 (cm) A1
[Total: 8]
7 (a) (i) refraction B1
(ii) dispersion B1
(b)
red B1
yellow e.c.f. from red B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT

(c) any two from

gamma, cosmic, X-rays, UV, IR, microwaves, radio, TV
(ignore extras, unless wrong, in which case + = 0) B1 + B1
[Total: 6]
8 (a) (i) amplitude B1
(ii) wavelength B1
(b) (i) string moves air M1

backwards & forwards OR up & down
OR compressions & rarefactions A1
(ii) gets quieter/softer/less loud B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) (i) (accept any recognisable symbols for M1 and A1 marks)

battery/cell, ammeter, coil in series (ignore any switch or rheostat) M1
voltmeter clearly in parallel with coil A1
standard symbols used for battery/cell, voltmeter and ammeter B1
(ii) R = V/I in any form B1
(iii) length (of wire) )

diameter/cross-section/area (of wire) ) any 2 B1 + B1
resistivity/type of material )
temperature )
(b) EITHER
6/1.5 C1
(circuit res. =) 4 (Ω) C1
(res. of AB =) 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
OR
p.d. across 3Ω = 4.5 (V) C1

p.d. across AB = 1.5 (V) C1
res. of AB = 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

10 (a) (i) deflects NOT vibrates OR oscillates M1

returns to zero/centre again A1
(ii) induction/induced current or emf B1

axle/wire cuts magnetic field B1
not when axle out of field B1
(iii) opposite deflection B1
(b) needle/pointer swings from side to side B1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) condone OR B1
(b) current too large B1

fuse wire melts B1
(c) live ticked B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) (i) it is an electron B1
(ii) no/negligible mass/weight allow “its mass”

OR not one of nuclear particles B1
(iii) negative charge allow “its charge” M1

one unit of A1
(b) 250 B1
98 B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

*9349479720*
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 24987/3
PMT
1 Drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an IGCSE Physics student’s room, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
cracked
gutter
Fig. 1.1
The student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.
To do this he
sets the stopwatch to zero,
then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,
then, stops the stopwatch 40 drops later.
The appearance of the stopwatch after 40 drops is shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(a) State the reading on the stopwatch. reading = ............... s [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
(b) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
time = ...................................................... s [2]
(c) Explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Using Fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the
ground.
time = ...................................................... s [3]
(e) Fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 An unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
50.0 mm
load
Fig. 2.1
Different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load. [1]
(b) The extensions for different loads are given in the table below.
load / N extension / mm
0 0
1.0 10.0
2.0 20.5
3.0 31.0
4.0 41.5
(i) On Fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (), and draw the best straight
line for the points. [3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
60
extension / mm
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Complete the following sentence by inserting the appropriate word.
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring
are .......................................................... to each other. [1]
(iii) A load of 2.5 N is hung on the spring.
1. What does the letter N stand for? .............................................................. [1]
2. Use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 N is hanging from
it.
length = .................................................. mm [2]
[Total: 8]
PMT
3 (a) An aeroplane is flying horizontally at a steady speed in a straight line.
Fig. 3.1 shows three of the four forces acting on it.
air friction
engine thrust
weight
Fig. 3.1
(i) In order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the
aeroplane must be equal?
................................................ and ................................................ are equal. [1]
(ii) In order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the
plane.
Draw an arrow on Fig. 3.1 to represent this force. [1]
(b) The aeroplane in Fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from Budapest (Hungary) to Palermo (Italy)
in 2.75 hours. The distance is 2200 km.
(i) Calculate, in km / h, the average speed of the aeroplane.
average speed = ............................................... km / h [3]
(ii) On the return journey from Palermo to Budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though
the engine thrust is the same.
Suggest what might have caused the return journey to be shorter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
4 A simple pendulum starts with its bob at position X, shown in Fig. 4.1. The bob is pulled aside to Y
and then released. It swings from Y to Z and back to Y.
support
thin cord
pendulum
bob Z
Y
ground
Fig. 4.1
Write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. Ignore air resistance.
In order to move the bob from X to Y, ................................. has to be done on it and its
............................................... energy increases because it is raised further from the
ground. As it moves towards X, some of this energy is converted into
........................................... energy. Throughout the swing from Y to Z and back to Y, the total
energy is ............................................. . Energy is measured in units called ................................... .

[5]
[Total: 5]

PMT
5 (a) The list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature.
boiling point, melting point, internal energy, thermal capacity
(i) Which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity
of energy, without changing state?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Some liquid is heated until its temperature stops rising.
Which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. The brass rod is inside a tube, called a
steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. The rod is fixed at the right-hand end,
but free to move at the left-hand end. The dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left
hand end.
thermometer
steam steam
in out
dial steam brass

micrometer jacket rod rigid frame
fixed end
Fig. 5.1
Steam is now passed through the steam jacket. In the boxes below, write down what will
happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why.
what will happen why
reading on
thermometer
reading on dial
micrometer
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10
PMT
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light AB striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40°.
mirror B
40°
A C
Fig. 6.1
State the value of the angle of reflection of the ray ..................................................... [1]
(b) In Fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10° from its position in Fig. 6.1. AB has remained
unchanged.
10°
B
mirror 40°
A C
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.
(ii) State the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line BC. .................
(iii) Through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates
through 10°? .............................................................................................. [4]
(c) An object of height 2 cm is placed 5 cm in front of a plane mirror.
(i) State the height of the image formed by the mirror. ............................................ [1]
(ii) Find the distance between the object and the image.
distance = ................................................... cm [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
7 A narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible
spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in Fig. 7.1.
space for
answers to part
(b)
o f
b eam
ow
narr e ligh
t
i t
wh
Fig. 7.1
(i) the bending of the light as it enters the prism,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.
In the answer spaces provided on Fig. 7.1, write
(i) ‘red’ in the space alongside the red ray,
(ii) ‘yellow’ in the space alongside the yellow ray. [2]
(c) The visible spectrum is part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
State two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
11
8 A stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. Fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating.
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the name of
(i) distance a, ............................................................................................... [1]
(ii) distance b. ............................................................................................... [1]
(b) The string is causing a sound to be transmitted through the air.
(i) Describe how the string causes the sound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what happens to the sound as the distance a decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
9 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the
resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Use conventional symbols and label the coil clearly.
[3]
(ii) State the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.
[1]
(iii) State two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In Fig. 9.1, AB is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.
Ignore the resistance of the battery.
6.0 V
3.0
A B
Fig. 9.1
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
13
The current I is 1.5 A.
Calculate the resistance per metre of the resistance wire.
resistance per metre = ................................................ Ω / m [4]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
10 (a) The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. The metal wheels are rolled along the rails
from the left-hand end to the right-hand end.
metal wheels
on metal axle metal
rails
sensitive
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.
Describe what now happens to the millivoltmeter pointer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a magnet suspended above a coil of wire.
spring
magnet
sensitive
coil
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.2
The end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in
and out of the coil.
Describe what is seen on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
16
11 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1]
(b) Describe how a fuse protects an electric circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.
In which of these is the fuse connected? Tick one box.
live
neutral
earth
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
17
12 (a) A β-particle may be represented by the symbol 0

–1e.
(i) What does the e indicate about a β-particle?
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What does the 0 indicate about a β-particle?
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) What does the –1 indicate about a β-particle?
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The nuclide 250Bk decays by emitting a β-particle.

97
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the
boxes.
250 0
97
Bk Cf + e –1
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
© UCLES 2010
PMT

1 (a) 13.6 (s) B1
(b) 13.6/40 e.c.f. C1

0.34 (s) e.c.f. A1
(c) more accurate OR errors less significant OR time for 1 interval too small B1
(d) 4 intervals OR 4 and a bit intervals OR 5 intervals C1

4 × his (b) OR (4 and a bit) × his (b) 5 × his (b) C1
1.36 – 1.5 (s) e.c.f. A1
(e) drops accelerate/go faster B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) extension indicated between two broken lines B1
(b) (i) 4 points correctly plotted ± ½ small square –1 e.e.o.o. B2

(condone 0,0 not plotted)
straight line through points and origin, by eye B1
(ii) proportional B1
(iii) 1. newton(s) B1
2. 25 – 26 (mm) C1
75 – 76 (mm) A1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) (i) (engine) thrust and (air) friction B1
(ii) force shown vertically upwards, anywhere on plane B1
(b) (i) v = s/t in any form C1

2200/2.75 C1
800 (km/h) A1
(ii) idea of
headwind on outward journey
OR tailwind on return journey
OR shorter route on return journey
OR air friction is less
OR idea of less weight
NOT flies slower B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

4 work B1
potential/gravitational/PE/GPE/position B1
kinetic/KE/movement B1
constant/the same/uniform B1
joule(s) OR J condone j B1
[Total: 5]
5 (a) (i) internal energy B1
(ii) thermal capacity B1
(iii) boiling point B1
(b) increases temperature rises OR mercury/alcohol/liquid expands B1 + B1

changes rod/brass expands B1 + B1
[Total: 7]
6 (a) 40 condone no unit B1
(b) (i) ray reflected at angle > 40° to dotted line B1
(ii) 60 condone no unit B1
(iii) his (ii) – 40 C1
20 e.c.f. condone no unit A1
(c) (i) 2 (cm) B1
(ii) idea of distance behind = distance in front C1

10 (cm) A1
[Total: 8]
7 (a) (i) refraction B1
(ii) dispersion B1
(b)
red B1
yellow e.c.f. from red B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT

(c) any two from

gamma, cosmic, X-rays, UV, IR, microwaves, radio, TV
(ignore extras, unless wrong, in which case + = 0) B1 + B1
[Total: 6]
8 (a) (i) amplitude B1
(ii) wavelength B1
(b) (i) string moves air M1

backwards & forwards OR up & down
OR compressions & rarefactions A1
(ii) gets quieter/softer/less loud B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) (i) (accept any recognisable symbols for M1 and A1 marks)

battery/cell, ammeter, coil in series (ignore any switch or rheostat) M1
voltmeter clearly in parallel with coil A1
standard symbols used for battery/cell, voltmeter and ammeter B1
(ii) R = V/I in any form B1
(iii) length (of wire) )

diameter/cross-section/area (of wire) ) any 2 B1 + B1
resistivity/type of material )
temperature )
(b) EITHER
6/1.5 C1
(circuit res. =) 4 (Ω) C1
(res. of AB =) 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
OR
p.d. across 3Ω = 4.5 (V) C1

p.d. across AB = 1.5 (V) C1
res. of AB = 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

10 (a) (i) deflects NOT vibrates OR oscillates M1

returns to zero/centre again A1
(ii) induction/induced current or emf B1

axle/wire cuts magnetic field B1
not when axle out of field B1
(iii) opposite deflection B1
(b) needle/pointer swings from side to side B1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) condone OR B1
(b) current too large B1

fuse wire melts B1
(c) live ticked B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) (i) it is an electron B1
(ii) no/negligible mass/weight allow “its mass”

OR not one of nuclear particles B1
(iii) negative charge allow “its charge” M1

one unit of A1
(b) 250 B1
98 B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT

* 8 7 9 2 2 1 8 0 7 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (SJF/SW) 33915
PMT
1 Drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an IGCSE Physics student’s room, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
cracked
gutter
Fig. 1.1
The student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.
To do this he
sets the stopwatch to zero,
then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,
then, stops the stopwatch 40 drops later.
The appearance of the stopwatch after 40 drops is shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(a) State the reading on the stopwatch. reading = ............... s [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
(b) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
time = ...................................................... s [2]
(c) Explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Using Fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the
ground.
time = ...................................................... s [3]
(e) Fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 An unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
50.0 mm
load
Fig. 2.1
Different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load. [1]
(b) The extensions for different loads are given in the table below.
load / N extension / mm
0 0
1.0 10.0
2.0 20.5
3.0 31.0
4.0 41.5
(i) On Fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (), and draw the best straight
line for the points. [3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
60
extension / mm
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Complete the following sentence by inserting the appropriate word.
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring
are .......................................................... to each other. [1]
(iii) A load of 2.5 N is hung on the spring.
1. What does the letter N stand for? .............................................................. [1]
2. Use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 N is hanging from
it.
length = .................................................. mm [2]
[Total: 8]
PMT
3 (a) An aeroplane is flying horizontally at a steady speed in a straight line.
Fig. 3.1 shows three of the four forces acting on it.
air friction
engine thrust
weight
Fig. 3.1
(i) In order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the
aeroplane must be equal?
................................................ and ................................................ are equal. [1]
(ii) In order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the
plane.
Draw an arrow on Fig. 3.1 to represent this force. [1]
(b) The aeroplane in Fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from Budapest (Hungary) to Palermo (Italy)
in 2.75 hours. The distance is 2200 km.
(i) Calculate, in km / h, the average speed of the aeroplane.
average speed = ............................................... km / h [3]
(ii) On the return journey from Palermo to Budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though
the engine thrust is the same.
Suggest what might have caused the return journey to be shorter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
4 A simple pendulum starts with its bob at position X, shown in Fig. 4.1. The bob is pulled aside to Y
and then released. It swings from Y to Z and back to Y.
support
thin cord
pendulum
bob Z
Y
ground
Fig. 4.1
Write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. Ignore air resistance.
In order to move the bob from X to Y, ................................. has to be done on it and its
............................................... energy increases because it is raised further from the
ground. As it moves towards X, some of this energy is converted into
........................................... energy. Throughout the swing from Y to Z and back to Y, the total
energy is ............................................. . Energy is measured in units called ................................... .

[5]
[Total: 5]

PMT
5 (a) The list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature.
boiling point, melting point, internal energy, thermal capacity
(i) Which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity
of energy, without changing state?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Some liquid is heated until its temperature stops rising.
Which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. The brass rod is inside a tube, called a
steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. The rod is fixed at the right-hand end,
but free to move at the left-hand end. The dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left
hand end.
thermometer
steam steam
in out
dial steam brass

micrometer jacket rod rigid frame
fixed end
Fig. 5.1
Steam is now passed through the steam jacket. In the boxes below, write down what will
happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why.
what will happen why
reading on
thermometer
reading on dial
micrometer
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10
PMT
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light AB striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40°.
mirror B
40°
A C
Fig. 6.1
State the value of the angle of reflection of the ray ..................................................... [1]
(b) In Fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10° from its position in Fig. 6.1. AB has remained
unchanged.
10°
B
mirror 40°
A C
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.
(ii) State the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line BC. .................
(iii) Through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates
through 10°? .............................................................................................. [4]
(c) An object of height 2 cm is placed 5 cm in front of a plane mirror.
(i) State the height of the image formed by the mirror. ............................................ [1]
(ii) Find the distance between the object and the image.
distance = ................................................... cm [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
7 A narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible
spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in Fig. 7.1.
space for
answers to part
(b)
o f
b eam
ow
narr e ligh
t
i t
wh
Fig. 7.1
(i) the bending of the light as it enters the prism,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.
In the answer spaces provided on Fig. 7.1, write
(i) ‘red’ in the space alongside the red ray,
(ii) ‘yellow’ in the space alongside the yellow ray. [2]
(c) The visible spectrum is part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
State two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
11
8 A stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. Fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating.
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the name of
(i) distance a, ............................................................................................... [1]
(ii) distance b. ............................................................................................... [1]
(b) The string is causing a sound to be transmitted through the air.
(i) Describe how the string causes the sound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what happens to the sound as the distance a decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
9 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the
resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Use conventional symbols and label the coil clearly.
[3]
(ii) State the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.
[1]
(iii) State two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In Fig. 9.1, AB is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.
Ignore the resistance of the battery.
6.0 V
3.0
A B
Fig. 9.1
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
13
The current I is 1.5 A.
Calculate the resistance per metre of the resistance wire.
resistance per metre = ................................................ Ω / m [4]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
10 (a) The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. The metal wheels are rolled along the rails
from the left-hand end to the right-hand end.
metal wheels
on metal axle metal
rails
sensitive
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.
Describe what now happens to the millivoltmeter pointer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a magnet suspended above a coil of wire.
spring
magnet
sensitive
coil
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.2
The end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in
and out of the coil.
Describe what is seen on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
16
11 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1]
(b) Describe how a fuse protects an electric circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.
In which of these is the fuse connected? Tick one box.
live
neutral
earth
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
17
12 (a) A β-particle may be represented by the symbol 0

–1e.
(i) What does the e indicate about a β-particle?
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What does the 0 indicate about a β-particle?
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) What does the –1 indicate about a β-particle?
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The nuclide 250Bk decays by emitting a β-particle.

97
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the
boxes.
250 0
97
Bk Cf + e –1
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures
specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
plus wrong penalty.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) BC B1
(ii) AB B1
(b) area under graph C1

0.5 × 15 × 5 C1
37.5 (m) A1 [5]
2 (a) tape measure OR trundle wheel OR laser measure IGNORE metre rule B1
(b) (i) clock OR watch (any sort) B1
(ii) set clock/watch to zero OR note start time OR start clock/watch/timing B1

(start clock/watch/timing) when wood seen to fall or equivalent B1
stop clock/watch/note time when wood reaches bridge 2 B1
(iii) speed = distance/ time in any form, letters, words, numbers C1

50/400 C1
0.125 A1
m/s B1 [9]
3 (a) (i) plumb-line (name or description) OR try-square and (horiz.) bench

OR spirit level B1
(ii) line joining A and D M1

line joining B and E M1
intersection clearly labelled G (dependent on scoring both M marks) A1
(b) X clearly on centre line B1

X clearly within semicircular portion, but not on surface B1 [6]
4 (a) dark specks OR bright specks NOT molecules/particles B1

moving C1
randomly/zigzag OR dancing about A1
(b) Brownian motion/movement B1
(c) invisible/too small to see/very small B1

moving fast/high kinetic energy B1
moving randomly/all directions B1 [7]
5 (a) 150 × 3 C1
450 (Hz) A1

PMT

(b) any figure between 20 and 50 inclusive

AND any figure between 15,000 and 25,000 inclusive B1
(c) increases/rises B1 [4]
6 (a) ultrasound B1
(b) (i) infra-red

visible all 4 correct B2
ultra-violet (any 2 correct B1)
X-rays
(ii) radio OR the top/first one B1
(iii) infra-red B1
(iv) X-rays OR gamma rays B1 [6]
7 (a) (i) needle inside coil B1

current through coil OR connect battery/power supply M1
direct current OR d.c.
OR a.c. and switch off before removing needle/ magnet A1
(ii) freely suspend/pivot and see which end points N (or equivalent)
OR see which end is repelled by N pole of a magnet B1
(b) 4+ smooth curves leaving one end and going to the other (ignore any arrows) B1
no lines crossing or meeting, even at ends B1 [6]
8 (a) battery/ammeter connected wrong way round

OR negative of battery should go to negative of ammeter B1
(b) correct symbols for battery, ammeter and rheostat

(allow common variants on battery/cell symbol) M1
all components in series A1
(c) voltmeter (any recognisable symbol) clearly in parallel with coil B1
(d) (i) 2.8 (A) and 12 (V) both B1
(ii) ammeter increases B1

voltmeter increases B1
(iii) 1.4 (A) OR half candidate’s original reading B1

6 (V) OR half candidate’s original reading B1 [9]

PMT

9 (a) transformer (ignore step-up/down) B1
(b) 132,000/22,000 OR 240/132,000 C1

X: 6 A1
Y: 0.001818 to at least 4 dec. pl. OR 1/550 NOT 550 A1
(c) less heat/energy loss

thinner/smaller cables
less copper used
less cable weight any 2 use + = 0 for incorrect extras B1+B1
less massive pylons
cheaper
smaller current [6]
10 (a) (electric) charge OR charged body B1

force B1
(b) A and B closer together allow touching M1

threads straight and equal angle (by eye) to vertical A1
(c) E horizontal to left

W vertically down all 3 marked on his diagram –1 e.e.o.o. B2
T up thread
(d) zero or 0 or nothing B1 [7]
11 (a) (i) filament/cathode clearly and correctly labelled B1
(ii) anode clearly and correctly labelled B1
(b) (i) battery shown connected across filament (no e.c.f.) B1
(ii) power supply connected between filament & anode (no e.c.f.) B1
(iii) straight path shown along axis (no e.c.f.) B1
(c) bright spot (or equivalent) B1
(d) spot moves down B1 [7]
12 (a) points correctly plotted (±½ small square) –1 e.e.o.o. B2

smooth curve through candidate’s points (by eye) B1

PMT

(b) (i) 1. in range 2.2–3.0 B1

2. in range 18.0–19.0 B1
(ii) 2 half-lives C1
(candidate’s 2 – candidate’s 1)/2 C1
7.5–8.6 (days) e.c.f. A1 [8]

PMT

* 1 2 6 4 5 3 7 1 3 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/CGW) 34004/4
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of a moving object.
speed B C
m/s 5
A D
0
0 10 20 time / s 35
Fig. 1.1
(a) Which part, or parts, of Fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is
(i) travelling at uniform speed, ...........................................................................................[1]
(ii) accelerating? .................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled in the last 15 s.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
2 Two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
bridge 1
50
m
bridge 2
Fig. 2.1
(a) The distance between the two bridges is measured as 50 m.
Suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. The girl on bridge 2 measures how
long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. It takes 400 s to travel between the two
bridges.
(i) Name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the procedure for measuring this time.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Calculate the speed of the water.
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

PMT
3 (a) In a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is
suspended first from point A and then from point B, as shown in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2.
B B
A
E
D D
E
C
C
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
When suspended from A, point D is found to be vertically below A.
When suspended from B, point E is vertically below B.
(i) What piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through A and B?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of
the triangular card. Label this point clearly with the letter G.
C
B D
[3]
Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
(b) Fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put
in to start with.
Fig. 3.4
On one of the three positions of the toy shown in Fig. 4.3, clearly mark X at a possible position
for the centre of mass of the toy. [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 In Fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been
injected.
microscope
smoke
cell light
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the
focused microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State the name we normally give to what is seen.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from
these observations?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
5 A card is held against a rotating toothed wheel, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
card
Fig. 5.1
The wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second.
(a) Calculate the frequency of the sound produced.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
(b) State the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
lowest frequency = ........................... Hz
highest frequency = ........................... Hz [1]
(c) The speed of rotation of the wheel is increased.
What happens, if anything, to the pitch of the sound that is heard?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
6 The list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they
are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included.
infra-red radiation
X-rays
gamma rays
visible light
radio waves
ultrasound waves
ultra-violet radiation
(a) Which one of these is not electromagnetic?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) In the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of
wavelength. The first and last boxes have been filled in for you.
radio waves
gamma rays
[2]
(ii) Which of these has the longest wavelength?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which of these produces a significant heating effect?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
7 The pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised.
The coil shown in Fig. 7.1 is to be used to magnetise it again.
coil
steel
arrow
Fig. 7.1
(a) Describe carefully
(i) how the coil is used to magnetise the steel arrow,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) how the polarity of the magnetised needle may be checked.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle. [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
8 A student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
battery
ammeter
01 23
4
AMP 5
S
coil of
wire
variable resistor
(rheostat)
Fig. 8.1
(a) The student has already made one mistake with his connections.
What is his mistake?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1, using
standard symbols. [2]
(c) The student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find
the resistance of the coil of wire. On your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to
measure the potential difference across the coil. [1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
11
(d) Having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of
the variable resistor are as shown in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
2 3 4 5 10
1
0 5 0 15
AMPS VOLTS
Fig. 8.2 Fig. 8.3
(i) Record these two readings.
ammeter reading = ...................................................... A
voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [1]
(ii) The slider on the variable resistor (see Fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left,
reducing its resistance.
State what happens to the readings on the two meters.
ammeter reading ...............................................................................................................
voltmeter reading ...........................................................................................................[2]
(iii) The slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave
the readings in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
Calculate the new values of the readings on the meters.
ammeter reading = ...................................................... A
voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
12
9 (a) The circuit symbol shown in Fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment.
Fig. 9.1
State the name of this device.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical
energy from a power station to domestic consumers. The device in part (a) is used both at X
and at Y.
132 000 V
power transmission
22 000 V cables and 240 V domestic
station
X pylons Y consumer
Fig. 9.2
(i) Using information from Fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns necessary at X and
at Y. primary turns
turns ratio at X = ...............................................................
turns ratio at Y = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) State two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is
very high.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
PMT
13
10 (a) Complete the following statement about an electric field.
An electric field is a region in which ........................................................
experiences a ....................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads.
nylon thread
ball
A B
Fig. 10.1
Ball A is given a positive charge and ball B is given a negative charge.
In the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take,
now that the balls are charged.
[2]
(c) On ball B in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of
(i) the electrostatic force on the ball (label it E),
(ii) the weight of the ball (label it W),
(iii) the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it T). [2]
(d) Ball B is in equilibrium. State the value of the resultant of forces E, W and T.
resultant = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. Metal plates above and below
the tube have zero potential difference between them.
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, clearly label
(i) the filament cathode (label it C),

(ii) the anode (label it A). [2]
(b) On Fig. 11.1, draw
(i) a battery (label it B), connected to cause thermionic emission of electrons,

(ii) a 1000 V power supply (label it P), connected to cause a beam of cathode rays along the
tube,
(iii) the path of the beam of cathode rays along the tube.
[3]
(c) What is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower
plate is positive and the upper plate is negative.
What change is seen on the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT
15
12 The count-rate from a sample of radioactive material is investigated by a team of scientists in a

laboratory.
(a) With the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every
7 days, with the results shown below. The background count-rate has already been subtracted.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
count-rate
1000 550 300 160 90
counts / s
On Fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time. [3]
1000
800
600
count-rate
counts / s
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 12.1
(b) (i) From your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is
1. 800 counts / s, .................................................. days
2. 200 counts / s. .................................................. days [2]
(ii) From the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ................................................. days [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
plus wrong penalty.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) D = M/V in any form, letters, words, numbers C1

394 – 210 OR 184 C1
0.92 A1
g/cm3 B1
(accept correct conversion to kg/m3, with unit)
(b) decreases B1 [5]
2 (a) sound/waves hitting obstacle C1

reflected/bounced back (from obstacle) A1
(b) (i) speed = distance/time in any form C1

12.9/1500 C1
0.0086 OR 8.6 × 10–3 (s) A1
(ii) 130 – 150 (m) B1 [6]
3 (a) turning effect OR force x distance (from fulcrum) B1
(b) (i) A and idea of bigger distance from hinge/pivot B1
(ii) closes B1 [3]
4 (a) temperature at which B1

change between solid and liquid (or v.v.) B1
(b) stays constant (if (b) left blank, can score from (a), if stated there) B1
(c) one section horizontal M1

at –10°C A1
curve, decreasing gradient, down to L end of horiz section from 50 at t = 0 A1
curve from R end of horiz section to –18, but no lower A1 [7]
5 (a) (i) decreases B1
(ii) thermistor B1
(b) (i) 1. put X in ice M1

pure OR melting A1
2. put X in steam/boiling water M1
pure OR standard pressure A1
record ammeter reading mentioned somewhere in (b)(i) B1
(ii) idea of not very accurate/ not linear M1

unless more calibration points (between 0°C and 100°C)/other logic A1 [9]

PMT

6 (a) (i) 1. points P & P joined and continued back to lens surface
both B1
points Q & Q joined and continued back to lens surface
2. single straight line across lens for each ray, joining incident and
emerging rays B1
(ii) F clearly shown at junction of the 2 refracted rays B1
(b) (i) 1. refraction B1

2. reflection M1
total OR internal A1
(ii) refracted away from normal M1

same angle as ray striking 1st surface of block (by eye) A1 [8]
7 (a) increases B1
(b) (i) R side M1

link shown between speed & distance between waves/wavelength
(accept v = fλ) A1
R side has bigger distance, so faster, so deeper (all 3 steps) A1
(accept reverse logic for L side)
(ii) 1. waves further apart B1

2. waves further apart B1 [6]
8 (a) (i) attract B1
(ii) repel B1
(iii) repel B1
(b) water charged B1

opposite charge OR positive charge OR by induction B1
charge on water attracted by charge on rod B1 [6]
9 (a) (i) 1. magnetised B1

2. attracted OR magnetised B1
3. deflects M1
momentary OR then goes back to zero A1
(ii) deflects other way B1
(b) (i) electromagnet shown as coil wrapped around iron bar

(interpret generously, but B0 if wire clearly connected to iron bar) B1
series circuit containing electromagnet, battery/cell, and variable resistance
(condone inaccuracy of symbols, if clear) B1

PMT

(ii) zero/minimum/resistance B1 [8]
10 (a) (i) voltmeter NOT voltameter B1
(ii) voltmeter connected in parallel across R B1

symbol correct B1
(b) (i) 2 (A) B1
(ii) 2 (A) B1
(c) (i) R = V/I in any form C1

8/2 C1
4 (Ω) A1
(ii) candidate’s (c)(i) + 4 correctly evaluated B1
(d) 8 (V) B1 [10]
11 (a) contaminated surfaces (any sort)

other radioactive material nearby
(radiation from) rocks/soil any 1 B1
cosmic rays/radiation from space
radon gas from ground
(b) alpha OR α B1
beta OR β B1
(–1 if gamma mentioned)
(c) any value within range 45–55 B1
(d) (i) (all) larger B1
(ii) same B1
(e) any sensible precaution B1 [7]
12 (a) correct form of equation

i.e. 238 A 4
92 U → Z Th + 2 He B1
A clearly 234 B1
Z clearly 90 B1
(b) mass number OR nucleon number OR no. of nucleons OR no. of protons

+ neutrons B1

PMT

(c) atomic number OR proton number OR no. of protons/positive charges

IGNORE no. of electrons B1 [5]

PMT

* 6 5 8 8 4 8 2 6 8 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

part question.
DC (NF/SW) 34010/4
PMT
1 (a) An empty glass beaker has a mass of 210 g.
When 200 cm3 of olive oil is poured into the beaker, the total mass is 394 g.
Calculate the density of the olive oil.
density = .......................................................... [4]
(b) When the beaker and olive oil are heated, the olive oil expands.
What happens to the density of the olive oil?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
2 (a) Describe what is meant by an echo.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the mouth of a river, viewed from above. A and B are on opposite banks, and
are 800 m apart.
800 m
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
Echo depth measurements use the time taken for sound to go from the surface to the river
bed and back again.
Such measurements give the following values for the depth of the water at different distances
from A, along the line AB.
distance from A / m 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
depth of water / m 0 1.8 5.1 12.9 18.9 22.2 16.5 6.3 0
(i) The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate how long a sound wave takes to travel from the surface to the bottom of the
river at a point 300 m from A.
time = ....................................................... s [3]
(ii) A ship has 3 m of itself below the surface of the water.
From the figures in the table, estimate how close to A it can sail without hitting the bottom
of the river.
distance from A = ...................................................... m [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 (a) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A warehouse worker is about to close a large door, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
A
B
Fig. 3.1
(i) State, with a reason, which of the two positions, A or B, will enable him to close the door
with least force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On another occasion, with the door in the position shown in Fig. 3.1, two workers each
push on the door with the same force at the same time. One worker pushes at A, from
the side seen in Fig. 3.1. The other worker pushes at B, from the other side of the door.
Which way does the door move, if at all? Tick one box.
the door closes
the door opens
the door remains as it is [1]
[Total: 3]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
4 (a) State what is meant by the term melting point.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Some ice has all reached its melting point, and it begins to melt. What happens to the
temperature of the ice as it melts?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A certain substance has a melting point of –10 °C (minus 10 °C). A small amount of this
substance is cooled from 50 °C to –18 °C in a very cold freezer unit.
On Fig. 4.1, sketch a possible graph that shows how the temperature of the substance varies
with time during the cooling process.
60
temperature / °C
40
20
0
time
–20
–40
–60
Fig. 4.1 [4]
[Total: 7]

PMT
5 The circuit in Fig. 5.1 is connected, and the ammeter reading is noted as the water is heated.
insulated
connecting
wires
heat
Fig. 5.1
It is found that the ammeter reading increases as the temperature rises.
(a) (i) State what happens to the resistance of component X as the temperature rises.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest what component X might be.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) This circuit is to be used as a thermometer.
(i) What must be done to calibrate it
1. at 0°C,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2. at 100 °C?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
(ii) The resistance of X does not vary linearly with temperature between 0 °C and 100 °C.
How will this affect the use of this circuit as a thermometer?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
6 (a) In a laboratory optics experiment, a student stands a cylindrical converging lens on a large
piece of paper and shines two parallel rays of light into it. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
converging lens
P P
P
parallel rays
of light
Q
Q Q
Fig. 6.1
The student traces one of the rays using four pins, labelled P in Fig. 6.1. He traces the other
ray using four more pins, labelled Q.
(i) Using a ruler, draw
1. the paths of the two rays in the air to the right of the lens,
2. the paths of the two rays as they pass through the lens.
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, use the letter F to label the principal focus of the lens.
[3]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through a glass block.
The critical angle for the glass/air boundary is 42°.
air
B
ray of
light glass
block
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name that describes what is happening to the ray
1. at A, ..............................................................................................................................
2. at B. ......................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the ray after it has reached C. [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
7 Plane waves travel on the surface of some water in a tank. Fig. 7.1 shows the appearance, from
above, of the waves before and after the boundary between two different depths of water in the
tank.
L R
waves move
this way
boundary
Fig. 7.1
(a) State what happens to the wavelength as the waves cross the boundary.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Water waves travel more slowly when the water is shallower, but the frequency does not
change.
(i) State, giving your reasons, which side of the boundary, L or R, has the deeper water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Some more water is poured into the tank, and waves of the same frequency as before
are generated in the tank.
What difference, if any, will this make to the appearance of the waves
1. to the left of the boundary,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. to the right of the boundary?
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
11
8 (a) Two charged metal spheres are placed next to each other.
+ indicates that the sphere is positively charged.
– indicates that the sphere is negatively charged.
In the box alongside each pair of spheres, write “attract” or “repel” or “no effect” to describe
the effect the spheres have on each other.
(i) + –
(ii) + +
(iii) – –
[3]
(b) Water is flowing in a very narrow stream from a water tap (faucet). A negatively-charged
plastic strip is held close to the stream of water, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
tap (faucet)
negatively-charged
plastic strip
water X
Fig. 8.1
The stream of water moves towards the plastic strip.
In terms of the water at the point labelled X, suggest why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
12
9 (a) Two coils are wound on an iron rod, as shown in Fig. 9.1. One coil is connected to a cell and a
switch. The other is connected to a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.
iron rod
millivoltmeter
Fig. 9.1
(i) The open switch is now closed.
1. the iron rod,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. a small steel pin held close to one end of the iron rod,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
3. the needle of the millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The switch is opened again.
State what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT
13
(b) You are given an iron bar, a length of insulated wire, a battery and a variable resistor.
You are to make an electromagnet whose strength can be varied.
(i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the electromagnet that includes the circuit. [2]
(ii) What is the setting of the variable resistor that gives the strongest magnetism of the
electromagnet?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 is connected. The potential difference across resistor R is measured as 8.0 V.
ammeter 3
A
current
reading A ammeter 1 A ammeter 2
= 2.0 A
R 4.0 Ω
potential
difference
= 8.0 V
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) What instrument is used to measure the potential difference across R?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw this instrument in position in the circuit, using the correct circuit
symbol. [2]
(b) The reading on ammeter 1 is 2.0 A. State
(i) the reading on ammeter 2, ................................................................................................
(ii) the reading on ammeter 3. .......................................................................................... [2]
(c) Using the values on Fig. 10.1, calculate
(i) the resistance of R,
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit.
total resistance = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(d) State the value of the potential difference across the 4.0 Ω resistor.
potential difference = .......................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11
PMT
15
11 The count rate from a sample of radioactive material is measured every 20 minutes for 2 hours.
The results, suitably corrected for background radiation, are shown in the table.
time / s 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
count rate
280 210 164 122 88 72 54
counts / s
(a) Suggest one possible source for the background radiation.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Name the two types of particle that the radioactive material might be emitting.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From the table, without attempting a graph, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = ....................................................... s [1]
(d) A similar experiment is carried out, using a larger quantity of the same radioactive material.
State what effect, if any, this has on
(i) the readings in the table,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the half-life of the material.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State one precaution that should be taken for safe handling of the radioactive material.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
16
12 Fig. 12.1 represents the radioactive decay of a 238U nucleus.

92
4
2 He
238
92 U
A
Z Th
Fig. 12.1
(a) In the space below, write the nuclear equation for this decay, including the numerical values of
A and Z. [3]
(b) What does the letter A stand for?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) What does the letter Z stand for?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11

PMT


0625 PHYSICS
examination.
syllabuses.
PMT

scored.
brackets.
plus wrong penalty.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) 25km B1
(b) (i) accelerating OR increasing speed B1
(ii) steady/constant speed B1
(iii) decelerating OR retarding OR slowing down B1
(c) less than B1 [5]
2 (a) Brownian (motion) B1
(b) bombardment by (water) molecules/particles/atoms M1

random OR from all directions A1 [3]
3 (a) strain/elastic/potential B1
(b) Y OR vertical OR straight down B1
(c) (i) 1. number of oscillations/vibrations/swings M1

per second/unit time NOT in a certain time A1
2. displacement/distance from mean position M1
maximum A1
(note: XY or YZ score M1A1)
(ii) decreases or equivalent B1
(d) Y OR vertical OR straight down B1 [8]
4 (a) (i) liquid B1
(ii) gas/vapour B1
(iii) liquid B1
(b) condensation B1
(c) decreases OR given to the jug/surroundings OR changes to another form B1 [5]
5 (a) 30.98 – 30.72 C1

0.26 (g) A1

PMT

(b) D = M/V in any form C1

candidate's 0.26/200 C1
0.0013 e.c.f. from (a) A1
g/cm3 B1 [6]
6 (a) (i) reflection OR wave bounces back M1

from large object/sea bed A1
(ii) speed = distance/time in any form C1

1500 × 0.8 C1
1200 (m) A1
(iii) 600 (m) OR ½ × candidate’s (ii), correctly evaluated B1
(b) line with positive gradient M1

straight line OR meets horizontal axis to right of graph origin A1 [8]
7 (a) (i) image behind mirror M1

image same distance from mirror, by eye and image-object line
perpendicular to mirror, by eye A1
(ii) (ignore any arrows)

reflected ray reaching eye B1
direction of reflected ray coming from image B1
(b) HIS B1
(c) both rays straight on at first surface B1

30° prism ray refracted down in air at 2nd surface B1
45° prism ray reflected down in glass at 2nd surface M1
90° reflection, by eye A1
straight on at 3rd surface A1 [10]
8 (a) (i) limit/control current OR adjust resistance B1
(ii) ammeter shows a reading B1
(iii) copper and iron ticked –1 e.e.o.o. B1
(b) (i) voltmeter NOT voltameter B1
(ii) voltmeter shown in parallel to heater

(condone incorrect symbol if clear it is a voltmeter) NO e.c.f. from (i) B1
(c) (i) top heater and switch correctly connected B1

middle 2 heaters and switch correctly connected B1

PMT

(ii) R = V/I in any form C1

250/2.5 C1
100 A1
ohm OR Ω B1
(iii) smaller ticked B1 [12]
9 (a) (i) iron OR ferromagnetic B1

unmagnetised (before being brought near magnet) NOT non-magnetic B1
(ii) magnet B1
(b) attracts (at first) NOT goes towards B1

repels after touching OR angle of thread increases as XY decreases B1 [5]
10 (a) (i) deflection (in one direction) M1

idea of momentary OR goes back to zero again A1
(ii) idea of same as (i) but opposite direction B1
(b) larger B1
(c) smaller B1
(d) nothing OR small oscillations about zero position OR blurred light spot B1 [6]
11 (a) (i) background

contaminated surfaces (any sort)
other radioactive material nearby any 1 B1
radiation from rocks/soil
cosmic rays/radiation from space
radon gas from ground
(ii) 136/4 C1
34 (counts/min) A1
(b) (i) alpha OR α B1
(ii) 876 – (a figure between 131 and 136, inclusive) C1

division by 4 C1
185 – 186 (counts/min) A1 [7]
12 (a) (i) 3 B1
(ii) 3 e.c.f. (i) B1

PMT

(iii) 4 B1
(iv) 7 OR candidate’s (i) + (iii), correctly evaluated B1
(b) 7
and
3
e.c.f. from (ii) and (iv) B1 [5]

PMT

* 6 4 0 2 5 1 4 4 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/CGW) 34016/3
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the route OPQR taken by a car.
m
P
k
10
5k
m
km
10
Q
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graph for the car journey. The car starts from rest at O.
speed
O P Q R
time
Fig. 1.2
(a) State the value of the distance represented by the shaded area.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what the car was doing during the interval
(i) OP, .................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) PQ, ................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) QR. ................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Is the average speed during the journey the same as, less than or more than the maximum
speed shown on the graph?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
2 Some very fine grains of powder are mixed with some water. The powder does not dissolve.
A small drop of the mixture is put on a glass slide and viewed through a microscope.
The powder grains are observed to be moving with a jerky, random motion.
(a) What name is given to this movement of the powder grains?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why the powder grains behave like this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 3]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical strip made of springy metal, clamped at the top.
clamp
metal strip
X Y Z
Fig. 3.1
(a) The strip is moved from position Y to position X.
The work done moving the strip is stored as energy in the strip.
In which form is this energy?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The strip is released from X and it initially oscillates between X and Z.
In which position does the strip have maximum kinetic energy?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) As time progresses, the frequency of the oscillation remains the same but the amplitude
becomes less.
(i) State what is meant by
1. frequency,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. amplitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
(ii) What happens to the total energy of the strip as the amplitude decreases?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) When the oscillations eventually cease, in which position does the strip come to rest?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
4 Matter exists in three states: solid, liquid and gas.
Steam is coming out of a kettle of boiling water. When the steam strikes a cold jug, it makes the
jug wet.
(a) In which of the three states is
(i) the boiling water, ...............................................................................................................
(ii) the steam, .........................................................................................................................
(iii) the water on the jug? .....................................................................................................[3]
(b) All of the following words are names of things that could happen during a change of state.
boiling, condensation, evaporation, melting, solidification
State which of these is used to describe what happens to the steam to make the jug wet.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) When the steam hits the jug, what happens to the energy stored in the steam?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
5 A flask with a tap has a volume of 200 cm3.
When full of air, the flask has a mass of 30.98 g.
The flask is connected to a vacuum pump, the air is pumped out and then the tap is closed.
The flask now has a mass of 30.72 g.
Calculate
(a) the mass of the air in the flask before connecting to the vacuum pump,
mass = .............................................. g [2]
(b) the density of the air in the flask.
density = ................................................. [4]
[Total: 6]

PMT
6 A boat is using echo-sounding equipment to measure the depth of the water underneath it, as
illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
(a) The equipment in the boat sends a short pulse of sound downwards and detects the echo
after a time interval of 0.80 s.
(i) Describe how an echo is caused.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.

Calculate the distance travelled by the sound in 0.80 s.
(iii) State the depth of water under the boat.
depth = ..............................................m [1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
(b) The boat is sailing away from the shore. The depth of water increases uniformly with distance
from the shore.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph that shows how the time interval to hear the echo might change
as the distance from the shore changes.
time interval
to hear echo
0
0 distance from shore
Fig. 6.2
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a point object P above a horizontal plane mirror.
eye
object
P
plane
mirror
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) mark and label the position of the image of P, [2]

(ii) draw a line showing how a ray of light travels from the object to the eye. [2]
(b) A boy carefully writes HE CHECKED HIS BOOK on a piece of graph paper. He lays the paper
on the table and then positions a vertical mirror as shown in Fig. 7.2.
vertical
mirror
HE CHECKED HIS BOOK

Fig. 7.2
Which word of the reflection of the sentence in the mirror looks different from that written on
the paper?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
11
(c) The two prisms shown in Fig. 7.3 are made of glass.
A ray of red light enters each prism from the air, as shown.
45°
30°
ray of ray of
red red
light light
60° 45°
Fig. 7.3
The critical angle for red light at the glass-air boundary is 42°.
On Fig. 7.3, complete the paths of the rays through the prisms and out into the air again. [5]
[Total: 10]

PMT
12
8 (a) A student tests to see whether certain materials conduct electricity. He uses the circuit in
Fig. 8.1 and connects the materials in turn in the gap between P and Q.
6 V battery
A X
P Q
Fig. 8.1
(i) What is the purpose of component X in the circuit?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the student can tell if a certain material conducts electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which of the following materials is a good conductor of electricity? Put a tick alongside
each material that is a good conductor.
copper
glass
iron
nylon
perspex [1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
13
(b) The student now connects a small heater in the gap in the circuit, as shown in Fig. 8.2. He
wishes to determine the resistance of the heater.
6 V battery
A X
heater
Fig. 8.2
(i) What other meter must he connect in the circuit, in order to determine the resistance?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, draw this meter in the correct position in the circuit. [1]

PMT
14
(c) Fig. 8.3 shows a radiant electric fire with 3 heating elements, each of which operates at full
temperature when 250 V is connected across it.
Fig. 8.3
(i) Fig. 8.4 shows an incomplete circuit diagram of the fire.
There are 2 switches. The top switch controls one heating element and the bottom switch
controls two heating elements connected in parallel.
250 V a.c.
Fig. 8.4
Complete Fig. 8.4, showing all the electrical connections. [2]
(ii) The current in one heating element is 2.5 A when it is connected to the 250 V supply.
Calculate the resistance of the heating element.
resistance = ................................................. [4]
(iii) All three heating elements are switched on. Which statement about the total resistance
of the electric fire is correct? Tick one box.
no resistance
smaller resistance than in (c)(ii)
same resistance as in (c)(ii)
larger resistance than in (c)(ii) [1]

[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11
PMT
15
9 (a) A girl has two metal bars, 1 and 2.
(i) When the girl holds one end of bar 1 near a magnet, she finds that it attracts both the
N pole and the S pole of the magnet.
What does this tell you about bar 1?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) When the girl holds one end of bar 2 near the magnet, it attracts the N pole of the
magnet, but repels the S pole.
What does this tell you about bar 2?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In another experiment, the girl uses two table-tennis balls A and B. Each is coated with a thin
layer of conducting material. Ball A is mounted on an insulating stand and ball B is suspended
from a thin nylon thread. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 9.1.
A B
Fig. 9.1
Ball A is given a negative charge, and is slowly moved towards ball B until it touches.
Predict what is seen to happen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
16
10 A coil P is joined to a battery and a switch S. A similar coil Q is joined to a sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter G.
P and Q are placed end to end, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
P Q
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe what is seen happening to the reading of G
(i) as switch S is closed,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) as switch S is opened again.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A soft iron bar, as long as the combined lengths of P and Q, is placed inside P and Q.
State what difference this makes to what is observed on G as S is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The bar in (b) is removed and the battery is changed for one with a smaller e.m.f.
State what difference this makes to what is observed on G as S is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
17
(d) The battery is replaced by an a.c. power supply of frequency 50 cycles per second, and then
S is closed.
Describe what is seen on G.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
18
11 The counter in Fig. 11.1 records the total number of times that a radiation is detected whilst the
counter is switched on.
counter
HUNDREDS TENS UNITS
OFF
ON
X•
radiation detector
Fig. 11.1
(a) With no radioactive source present, the counter is set to zero and then switched on for
4 minutes.
After this time, the counter reads:
1 3 6
(i) What radiation is the apparatus detecting?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the average count rate of this radiation.
count rate = ...................................... counts / min [2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT
19
(b) (i) Point X is 25 cm from the radiation detector. A source that is known to be highly radioactive
is placed at X.
The counter is reset to zero, and the count again taken for 4 minutes.
The counter now reads:
1 3 2
State what type of radiation is being emitted by the source.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The source is moved to a position 2 cm from the detector. The counter is set to zero and
restarted. The counter reading after counting for 4 minutes is:
8 7 6
Estimate the count rate due to the radioactive source alone.
count rate = ............................. counts / min [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
20
12 Fig. 12.1 represents a neutral lithium atom. All the particles in the atom are shown on the diagram.
orbit
nucleus
Fig. 12.1
(a) Use Fig. 12.1 to help you answer the following questions.
(i) How many electrons does this atom have? ................................... [1]
(ii) What is the value of the proton number of this atom? ................................... [1]
(iii) How many neutrons does the atom have? ................................... [1]
(iv) What is the value of the nucleon number of this atom? ................................... [1]
(b) Write the appropriate numbers in the boxes below, to represent this atom of Lithium in nuclide
notation.
Li
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011 0625/23/O/N/11

PMT

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
0625 PHYSICS
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.

PMT

plus wrong penalty.
applies.
out.

PMT

1 (a) moment/torque
ignore turning force B1
(b) opposite direction B1

condone different direction(s)
larger or correct reverse argument (opening force is smaller) B1
(c) (apply) force further from hinge

OR oil/reduce friction/new hinge/use an assist mechanism/replace hinge(s) B1 [4]
2 (a) D = M / V in any form B1
(b) (i) length × width × height in any form

OR 2.5 ( × 104) × 6.0 ( × 103) × 3 ( × 10–6) i.e. ignore powers of 10 C1
4.5 × 10n any power of 10 C1
450 (m3) c.a.o. 4.5 x 102 A1
(ii) 900 × his 450 or correct sub into D = M / V C1

4.05 × 105 OR 405 000 (kg) e.c.f. A1 [6]
3 (a) speed = distance / time in any form OR distance / speed C1

80 / 320 C1
0.25 (s) A1
(b) (i) 0.45 OR his (a) + 0.2(0) correctly evaluated B2

(allow B1 only, 0.05 / his(a) – 0.2(0) OR 0.25 / his (a) alone)
(ii) start timing when he sees flash/smoke (accept any other

appropriate visual stimulus e.g. hand dropping as gun fires) B1
(c) 12.5 ± 0.2(s) Condone (1 min) 12.5 s OR 12.05 / 12.5 – 0.45 C1
12.95 OR 12.5 + his (b)(i) A1 [8]

PMT

4 (a) top box ticked B1
(b) elastic/strain/potential NOT gravitational PE B1
(c) kinetic B1
ignore heat
(d) gravitational/gravitational potential/GPE/PE B1

maximum B1
kinetic OR thermal/allow heat B1
thermal allow heat B1 [7]
5 (a) (i) move/vibrate/oscillate faster OR increase/gain KE B1

move (further) apart OR (they) separate B1
(ii) any 1 increases/enlarges/gets bigger/expands o.w.t.t.e. C1

all three increase A1
(b) nut/hole expands/enlarges

ignore particles expand/enlarge B1
bolt doesn’t expand (as much) B1 [6]
6 (a) (i) r correctly shown B1
(ii) bent up at first surface B1

bent up at second surface B1
straight line within prism B1
(iii) P clearly shown as the original point of entry B1
(b) (i) blue light refracted from same point at first surface B1
blue shown with greater refraction B1
blue light always below red light B1
(ii) dispersion B1 [9]

PMT

7 (a) arrow pointing to left B1
(b) rotates/turns/S pole goes away from magnet/repelled/ changes direction B1

N pole points to magnet/S Pole points to N Pole (of Earth)/turns through 180° B1
S Pole/N Pole points in opposite direction
(c) magnetic field/electromagnet(ism)/(ic) M1

caused by current A1 [5]
8 (a) its voltage/potential difference C1

condone volts
its e.m.f./electromotive force A1
(b) V = IR in any form OR V / R C1

4.5 / 180 C1
0.025 OR 2.5 × 10–2 OR 1 / 40 A1
A/amps/amp/a B1
(c) (i) two resistors shown in parallel (accept any symbol here) B1
condone faint lines through resistors (where attempted to rub out wire)
battery in series with resistances (allow any recognisable symbol here) B1

(even if resistances not in parallel)
all symbols correct (allow cell symbol for battery) B1
(allow rheostat for resistor condone old symbol)
(ii) 1. 4.5 (V) B1

ignore units
2. 0.025 OR his (b) B1
ignore units [11]
9 (a) switch correctly identified B1
(b) (i) moves/flows condone (current) flows OR stays the same B1

ignore nothing (happens)
(ii) increases/higher/greater M1
condone greater than zero
any indication of gradual increase A1
(c) remains the same OR decreases/goes back to zero (very) slowly i.e. ignore B1 [5]
decreases/getting smaller on their own.

PMT

10 (a) copper B1
(b) core B1
(c) Np / Ns = Vp / Vs in any form C1

8000/Ns = 240 / 6 OR 240 = 6 OR Ns = 6 C1
8000 Ns 8000 240
200 A1
(d) (i) lamp less bright/less than full brightness/wouldn’t light B1

(up properly)/ has less energy
(ii) lamp blows/bursts OR lamp too bright OR lamp B1 [7]

overheats/burns out OR much brighter/has more energy
11 (a) paper stops α C1

sheet of paper makes no difference to count rate A1
(b) Aluminium absorbs β allow aluminium stops β C1

Aluminium makes count rate decrease A1
(c) (10mm) lead / Pb stops all β OR only γ gets through (10 mm) lead / Pb B1
still some count rate with lead / Pb B1 [6]
12 (a) (i) (number of) protons + neutrons OR p + n B1

OR mass number/nucleon number
(ii) (number of) protons OR atomic number/ proton number B1

Ignore electrons
(b) (i) zero nucleons OR mass number is zero B1
(ii) negative charge OR requires a proton to be neutral B1
240 240
(c) (i) 94 Pu OR Pu OR 94 B1
250 250
(ii) 98 Cf OR 98 NOT just Cf B1 [6]

PMT

* 0 2 9 5 0 5 8 2 3 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in. 1
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. 2
3
appropriate units.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part 6
question.
7
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49779/4
PMT
For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State the name that is given to the turning effect of a force. Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. A man opens the gate by pulling on it, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
After he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him.
When closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length.
State two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he
opened the gate.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT
2 (a) State the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an
oil slick, on the water.
One such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 × 104 m by
6.0 × 103 m.
The oil slick is 3.0 × 10–6 m (0.0000030 m) thick.
(i) Calculate the volume of the oil slick.
volume = ........................................... m3 [3]
(ii) The density of the oil is 900 kg / m3.
Calculate the mass of oil in the slick.
mass = ............................................ kg [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day. For
Examiner’s
Use
starting pistol timekeeper
80 m
(a) Sound travels at 320 m / s.
Calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.
time = .............................................. s [3]
(b) The timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the
stopwatch.
He makes no other experimental inaccuracies.
(i) By how much will his time for the race be in error?
time error = .............................................. s [2]
(ii) Suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT
(c) When he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance For
of the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
55 0 5
50 min 10
5
45 15
seconds
40 20
35
30 25
Fig. 3.2
How long did the winner actually take to run the race?
time = .............................................. s [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
4 An archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in Fig. 4.1. For
He then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target. Examiner’s
Use
bow
string
arrow
Fig. 4.1
(a) The archer does work on the bow.
When is this work done? Tick one box.
as the string is pulled back to the position shown in Fig. 4.1
whilst holding the string in the position shown in Fig. 4.1
after releasing the string to fire the arrow [1]
(b) What type of energy is stored in the bow because it is bent?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) On another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height
before falling back down to the ground.
Use words from the following list to complete the sentences below.
gravitational potential, kinetic, thermal, maximum, minimum, zero
As the arrow rises, its ..................................................... energy increases. At the top of
the flight, this energy is at a ..................................................... . As the arrow falls, this
energy is converted into ..................................................... energy. When it hits the ground,
the energy of the arrow is converted into ..................................................... energy.

[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
PMT
5 (a) A metal ruler with a rectangular cross-section is heated in an oven. For

Examiner’s
(i) State two things that happen to the atoms of the metal. Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State what happens to
1. the length of the ruler, ..........................................................................................
2. the width of the ruler, ............................................................................................
3. the thickness of the ruler. ......................................................................................

[2]
(b) The nut in Fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate.
nut
bolt
very hot
flame
Fig. 5.1
Explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
6 (a) In Fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to For
another prism that is identical but upside down. Examiner’s
Use
t
l igh
red
Fig. 6.1
(i) The angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on Fig. 6.1 as i.
On Fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into
the air again. Label the emergent ray “line R”. [3]
(iii) The beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along
line R.
Using the letter P, mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the left-
hand prism. [1]
(b) On another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a
prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
i red lig
ht
t
igh
l
red + ht
ig
el
blu
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air
again. [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT
(ii) Refraction is occurring at the first surface. For

Examiner’s
Which of the following is also occurring? Tick one box. Use
diffraction
dispersion
focusing
total internal reflection [1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the Earth’s magnetic field. For
Examiner’s
Use
compass
needle
N S
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the Earth. [1]
(b) The S pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the S pole of the compass needle, as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
N S S
Fig. 7.2
Describe what is seen happening to the compass needle as this is done.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT
11
(c) The magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass For
needle, as shown in Fig. 7.3. Examiner’s
Use
wire
N S
Fig. 7.3
When there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle.
Suggest why this rotation occurs.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a cell. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 8.1
(a) What does the 1.5 V indicate about the cell?
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Three cells identical to the cell in Fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 V battery. The battery is
connected in series with a 180 Ω resistor.
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = .................................................. [4]
(c) A second 180 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 Ω resistor from (b).
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel,
connected to the battery. Use standard symbols.
[3]
(ii) State the value of
1. the potential difference across the second 180 Ω resistor, ...................................
2. the current in the second 180 Ω resistor. ..............................................................

[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
PMT
13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor C and a resistor of very high For
resistance. Examiner’s
Use
C V
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, use the letter S to label the switch. [1]
(b) When the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero.
After the switch has been closed, what happens, if anything, to
(i) the charge in the circuit,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the reading on the voltmeter?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The switch is now opened again.
State what happens, if anything, to the reading on the voltmeter.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
14
10 A 240 V a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in For
Fig. 10.1. A lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 V supply is connected to the secondary Examiner’s
coil. Use
240 V 6V
mains lamp
8000 turns soft iron
Fig. 10.1
(a) Name a suitable material from which the coils may be made.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see
Fig. 10.1).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to
light at full brightness.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]
(d) State what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was
(i) much less than that calculated in (c),
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) much more than that calculated in (c).
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT
15
11 The apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is For
Use
radioactive absorbing detector

source material
Fig. 11.1
The source and detector are about 2 cm apart. The detector is connected to a scaler, which
measures the count rate.
Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector.
The table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers.
count rate
absorbing material
counts / s
air 523
sheet of paper 523
0.5 mm of aluminium 391
10 mm of aluminium 214
10 mm of lead 122
(a) How can you tell that the source is not emitting any α-particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) What is the evidence that β-particles are being emitted?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) What is the evidence that γ-rays are being emitted?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
4 4
12 (a) The symbol for an α-particle is either 2 α or 2 He. For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) What does the 4 indicate about an α-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) What does the 2 indicate about an α-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
0 0
(b) The symbol for a β-particle is either –1β or –1e.
(i) What does the 0 indicate about a β-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) What does the –1 indicate about a β-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides.
240 244 248 250 250
94Pu 96Cm 98Cf 97Bk 98Cf
244
(i) 96Cm decays by emitting an α-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
250
(ii) 97Bk decays by emitting a β-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures

PMT

plus wrong penalty.
applies.
out.

PMT

1 (a) (i) 6 (km) B1
(ii) 8 minutes OR 8/60 C1

0.13 (hours) OR 2/15 (hours) A1
(iii) Speed = distance/time in any form C1

distance/time correctly calculated and rounded C1
answer in range 45.0 – 46.2 (km/hr) NO e.c.f. A1
(b) straight line graph B1
(c) (i) 3 or 4 B1
(ii) 1 (km) B1
[9]
2 (a) 8 or 8.0 (cm) B1
(b) 8 × 4 × 0.5 e.c.f. from (a) C1

16 (cm3) e.c.f. A1
(c) (i) D = M / V in any form OR V × D OR his volume × 1.2 C1

19.2 (g) e.c.f. A1
(ii) balance (accept spring balance)

OR scales NOT scale B1
[6]
3 (a) less B1
(b) 123 (mm Hg) B1
(c) 752 + or – his 123 C1

629 (mm Hg) c.a.o. A1
(d) same OR no change B1

[5]

PMT

4 (a) X clearly beyond back of mirror B1

X correct vertical distance by eye B1
(b) (i) normal between mid point of mirror and P correct by eye B1
(ii) lines A′ and B′ drawn correctly to mirror so that i = r M1

either of top two boxes ticked A1
[5]
5 (a) (i) 0 (J) B1
(ii) 150 (J) B1
(b) any timer B1

start timing at A or B OR fiducial aid B1
stop timing when gets back to start/after complete oscillation B1
stopwatch OR stopclock used B1

repeat and average OR time multiple swings B1
[7]
6 (a) (i) convection B1
(ii) hot water expands/molecules further apart B1

NOT molecules expand
hot water less dense NOT molecules less dense B1
hot water rises, accept hot molecules rise B1
cool water falls/takes place of hot water B1
(b) hot air rises NOT heat rises B1

[6]
7 (a) left box infra-red OR IR B1

right box gamma OR γ B1
(b) (i) red B1
(ii) violet B1
(c) (i) infra-red OR IR B1
(ii) Any one from:

photographing/seeing (broken) bones
crystallography/crystal structure B1
any other sensible use
NOT body scan

PMT

(d) Any one from:

same speed in a vacuum
all transverse (waves) B1
all transfer energy
[7]
8 (a) (i) meter 2

B1
(ii) ammeter mark (a) and (b) together,
any 2 correct B1
(b) (i) meter 1 remaining 2 correct B1
B1
(ii) voltmeter
(c) (i) 1.6 (V) B1
(ii) R = V / I in any form OR V / I C1

1.6/ 0.8 OR e.c.f. from (c) (i)/0.8 C1
2 or 2.0 A1
ohm(s) OR Ω B1
(iii) straight line through origin OR any V / I gives same value B1
(iv) greater slope OR bigger V needed for same I o.w.t.t.e. B1
(v) wire B AND larger resistance from longer wires o.w.t.t.e. B1

[10]
9 (a) (i) L1 and L2 B1
(ii) L2 and L3 B1
(b) L1 off
L2 full – 1 e.e.o.o. B2
L3 off
L1 partial
L2 partial – 1 e.e.o.o. B2
L3 partial
[6]
10 (a) arrow down, close to or joined to wire B1
(b) arrow up, close to or joined to wire B1

PMT

(c) (i) moves/bends up B1
(ii) motor/ammeter/voltmeter/galvanometer/multimeter B1
[4]
11 (a) spontaneous/random break up OR unstable atoms B1

results in new element/particles OR nucleus changes B1
radioactive particles/α/β/γ emitted B1
(b) (i) clear statement of start point B1

clear halving B1
time to halve is 2 minutes B1
(ii) 550/2 OR 1100/4 OR 2200/8 C1

275 (counts/min) c.a.o. A1
[8]
12 (a) vacuum B1
(b) glows or equivalent OR spot OR dot of light on screen B1

when electrons hit it B1
(c) heated B1
(d) cathode B1
anode B1
(e) P1 and P2 OR y-plates B1

[7]

PMT

* 3 7 0 6 6 8 5 3 7 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST For Examiner’s Use

1
hand in.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. 3
appropriate units.
question.
7
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49780/3
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the distance / time graph for a bus that goes to collect supporters from a For
football match and take them home to their villages. Examiner’s
Use
6
distance from
bus depot 5
/ km
4
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / minutes
Fig. 1.1
(a) The bus drives from its depot, without stopping, along the straight road to the football
ground.
From Fig. 1.1, find
(i) the distance from the bus depot to the football ground,
distance = ........................................... km [1]
(ii) the time taken, in hours, to travel from the bus depot to the football ground,
time = ....................................... hours [2]
(iii) the speed, in km / hour, of the bus on its journey to the football ground.
speed = .................................. km / hour [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
(b) State how you can tell from Fig. 1.1 that the bus travelled at a constant speed to the For
football ground. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The bus returned to the depot by the same route, stopping a number of times to let
supporters get off near to their home villages.
(i) At how many villages did the bus stop? ............................................................... [1]
(ii) What was the smallest distance from a village to the football ground?
distance = ........................................... km [1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
2 (a) The length of a rectangular sheet of plastic is measured using a short ruler, as shown in For
Fig. 2.1 (not full size). Examiner’s
Use
mm 1
6
2
5
3
4
5
4
6
7
3
8
9
10
2
11
12
sheet of plastic
13
1
14
15
ins
Fig. 2.1 (not full size)
From the ruler in Fig. 2.1, find the length, in cm, of the sheet.
length = ........................................... cm [1]
(b) The sheet of plastic in (a) has a thickness of 0.50 cm and a width that is half its length.
Calculate the volume of the sheet of plastic.
volume = .......................................... cm3 [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
(c) The plastic has a density of 1.2 g / cm3. For

Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the mass of the sheet. Use
mass = .............................................. g [2]
(ii) Which laboratory instrument could be used to check the mass of the sheet?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of some gas in a container. For
The container is connected to the manometer by a length of rubber tubing. Examiner’s
Use
millimetre scale
rubber
tubing
to container
184 mm
of gas
61 mm
mercury
Fig. 3.1
(a) State whether the pressure of the gas in the container is greater than, the same as, or
less than the pressure of the atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) From Fig. 3.1, deduce the difference between the gas pressure and the atmospheric
pressure.
difference in pressure = ........................ mm of mercury [1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is 752 mm of mercury.
Calculate the actual pressure of the gas in the container.
pressure of gas = ........................ mm of mercury [2]
(d) State how the vertical height difference of the two mercury surfaces changes, if at all, if
a mercury manometer made from a narrower tube is used.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12
PMT
4 A busy factory has a corner in a corridor where people are likely to collide. To avoid such For
collisions, a plane mirror is fixed across the corner, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
plane mirror
offices
corridor
A'
workshop
B B'
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using this mirror, people at A and at B can see each other’s reflections.
On Fig. 4.1, put X to show where the image of the person at A will be, as seen by the
person at B. [2]
(b) The two people move to A' and B' respectively.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the mirror at end P. [1]
(ii) Draw lines on Fig. 4.1 to help you decide whether the two people can still see each
other’s reflections.
Can they still see each other’s reflections? Having drawn your lines, tick one box
below.
definitely yes
just about
definitely no [2]
[Total: 5]
PMT
5 A boy is sitting still on a swing that is oscillating from side to side, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
B
Fig. 5.1
(a) At the highest point of the oscillation, the boy’s gravitational potential energy is 150 J
more than it is at the lowest point of the oscillation.
State the value of the kinetic energy of the boy
(i) at the highest point of the oscillation, ............................... J
(ii) at the lowest point of the oscillation. ............................... J

[2]
(b) The time for the boy to swing from A to B and back to A is approximately 3 s.
Describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible. State the simple
laboratory instrument you would use.
instrument used ........................................................................................................... [1]
method .............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
6 (a) A crystal that dissolves slowly is put into some water in a beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
crystal
heat
Fig. 6.1
As it dissolves, the crystal colours the water around itself. When the beaker is heated,
the coloured water moves as shown in Fig. 6.1.
(i) What name is given to this movement of the water?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Describe why this movement happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A decorator, up a step-ladder painting the ceiling of a room, comments, “It is hotter up
here by the ceiling than it is down on the floor.”
Explain why his observation is correct.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Two regions have not been For
named, and there is an enlargement of the visible region. Examiner’s
Use
radio micro- visible ultra- X-rays

waves waves violet
visible
L M
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the two boxes on Fig. 7.1, write the names of the regions they are indicating. [2]
(b) State the name of the colour of the light that is found
(i) at the end L of the visible spectrum, .........................................................................
(ii) at the end M of the visible spectrum. ........................................................................

[2]
(c) (i) A man stands in the beam of light from a spot-lamp and finds that it makes him feel
warm.
Which radiation, other than visible, does this observation show that the spotlight is
emitting?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one use to which X-rays are put.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) State one property, apart from their electromagnetic nature, that is the same for
the radiations in all the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
11
8 A student has two wires A and B. She connects each in turn between the terminals P and Q For
in the circuit of Fig. 8.1. Examiner’s
Use
meter 2
meter 1
P Q
wire A
or wire B
Fig. 8.1
For each wire, she measures the current in the wire when there are various potential
differences across it.
(a) (i) Which of the two meters measures the current? ......................................................
(ii) Name this type of meter. ..........................................................................................
(b) (i) Which of the two meters measures the potential difference (p.d.)? .........................
(ii) Name this type of meter. ..........................................................................................

[2]
Question 8 continues on page 12.

PMT
12
(c) When the student draws the graphs of p.d. against current for the two wires, she gets For
the lines shown in Fig. 8.2. Examiner’s
Use
p.d. / V wire B
2
wire A
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
current / A
Fig. 8.2
(i) From Fig. 8.2, find the p.d. across wire A when there is a current of 0.8 A in it.
p.d. = ...............................................V [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance of wire A when the current in it is 0.8 A.
resistance = ................................................. [4]
(iii) From Fig. 8.2, how can you tell that the resistance of wire A remains constant
during the experiment?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
13
(iv) How can you tell that the resistance of wire B is greater than the resistance of For
wire A? Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(v) Wires A and B are made of the same material and have the same thickness.
State, giving your reasons, which of the wires is the longer wire.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
9 In the circuit of Fig. 9.1, a 12 V car battery is connected to three identical lamps and two For
switches. The resistance of the battery is so small that it may be ignored. Examiner’s
Use
12 V
S1
L2
L1
L3 S2
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) When switches S1 and S2 are both open, which two lamps are in series?
............................................................. and ..............................................................
(ii) When switches S1 and S2 are both closed, which two lamps are in parallel?
............................................................. and ..............................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
15
(b) Each of the three lamps glows with full brightness when there is a p.d. of 12 V across the For
lamp. Examiner’s
Use
With a smaller p.d., a lamp will glow with partial brightness.
With no p.d. across it, it will be off.
Complete the tables below, to show how the lamps glow with different switch
combinations. Tick one box in each row.
switch combination: S1 closed and S2 open

full partial
off
brightness brightness
L1
L2
L3
[2]
switch combination: S1 open and S2 closed

full partial
off
brightness brightness
L1
L2
L3
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
10 A wire between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet is carrying a current. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 10.1 shows the direction of the force acting on the wire. Use
current
force
magnet magnet
N S
wire
Fig. 10.1
(a) The magnetic poles are interchanged.
On Fig. 10.2 below, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire.
current
magnet magnet
S N
Fig. 10.2
[1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
17
(b) The battery is now reversed. For

Examiner’s
On Fig. 10.3 below, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire. Use
current
magnet magnet
S N
Fig. 10.3
[1]
(c) In the arrangement of Fig. 10.1 at the beginning of this question, the electromagnetic
force on the wire is greater than the weight of the wire.
(i) Suggest what happens to the wire as the current is switched on.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest one common device that makes use of this effect.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
18
11 (a) What is meant by radioactive decay ? For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows the decay curve for a particular radioactive substance.
2500
count rate
counts / min
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
Fig. 11.1
(i) Use numbers from the graph to show that the half-life of the radioactive substance
is 2 minutes.
[3]
(ii) Estimate the value of the count rate at a time of 6 minutes from the start of the
measurements.
count rate = .............................. counts / min [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
19
12 Fig. 12.1 shows parts of a tube in which cathode rays are produced. For
Examiner’s
Use
Y-plates
X-plates
P1
screen
cathode
P2 P4
P3
anode
electron beam
(cathode rays)
Fig. 12.1
(a) What occupies the remaining space within the tube? Tick one box.
air
hydrogen
nitrogen
vacuum [1]
(b) How does the screen show the presence of electrons?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) What is done to the cathode to make it release electrons?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Between which two parts shown on Fig. 12.1 is there a large potential difference that
causes the electrons to be accelerated into a beam?
............................................................... and ...............................................................[2]
(e) The electron beam normally travels along the axis of the tube, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
Between which two parts must a potential difference be connected in order to deflect
the beam upwards?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures

PMT

plus wrong penalty.
applies.
out.

PMT

1 (a) 54 (s) B1
(b) (Speed =) distance / time in any form C1
405 / 54 C1
7.5 A1
m/s B1
(c) (i) greater than at y B1
(ii) greater than average speed B1 [7]
2
shape molecular
arrangement
(a) solid fixed fixed position B2
(b) liquid fill from bottom B1
(c) gas move around, far B1

apart
[4]
3 renewable
any 2 from hydroelectricity, solar, tidal, wind B2
non-renewable
any two from coal, oil, nuclear B2 [4]
If more than two boxes ticked in a column –1 for each error

PMT

4 (a) (i) 34 (cm3) C1

42 (cm3) C1
8 (cm3) A1
(ii) 1. balance (accept spring balance) OR newtonmeter

OR scales NOT scale B1
2. D = M/V in any form C1
21.2 / his 8 C1
2.65 e.c.f. A1
g / cm3 B1
(b) (i) rule(r) OR vernier/digital calipers IGNORE just calipers B1
(ii) measure diameter / radius / c.s.a. B1

use cylinder formula (need not be quoted) to calculate B1
OR
measure mass B1
use density from (a) in V = M / D B1 [11]
5 (a) (i) angle of reflection B1
(ii) 1. 45(°) B1
2. 45(°) with correct ° symbol at least once B1
(iii) ray shown in correct position, by eye B1
(b) mirror shown perpendicular to reflected ray, by eye B1 [5]
6 (a) (i) conduction B1
(ii) convection B1
(b) idea of heat lost at same rate as heat supplied B1
(c) (i) boiling B1
(ii) steam B1 [5]

PMT

7 (a) reflection / sound coming back / sound heard for 2nd time M1
off an object A1
(b) DIAGRAM
source of sound and large obstacle B1
distance shown as [ 150 m B1
DESCRIPTION
make (loud) sound and listen B1
(c) (i) distance between source of sound and obstacle

NOT just “distance” B1
time between making sound and hearing echo
NOT just “time” B1
(ii) speed = distance/time B1

clear that “there and back” has been taken into account B1 [9]
8 (a) conventional circuit diagram with two lamps in parallel B1

switch in correct position alongside power supply B1
correct symbols for lamps and switch used B1
(b) V = IR in any form OR V/I C1

12 / 1.6 C1
7.5 A1
ohm(s) OR Ω B1
(c) L2 has blown, however expressed

OR L2 is loose NOT L2 is missing/stolen/fallen out B1
(d) (i) blows B1
(ii) nothing / doesn’t light / off

NOT turns off B1
(iii) nothing / doesn’t light / off

NOT turns off B1 [11]

PMT

9 (a) N S N B1
(b) (i)
switch closed switch open
soft iron magnetised loses its magnetism both B1
steel magnetised keeps its magnetism both B1
(ii) attractive force B1
(iii) the one with the soft iron core OR L.H.one B1
(iv) can be switched on & off OR can be stronger B1 [6]
10 (a) rub / rubbing M1

with dry cloth A1
(b) (i) negative OR – B1
(ii) opposite charges attract B1
(c) horizontal arrow to L, starting or ending on sphere B1
(d) swings / moves away / to R OR idea of repulsion B1 [6]
11 (a) neutron 0 2000 m B2

proton +1 2000 m B2
(b) 92 B1
146 B1
92 no e.c.f. B1 [7]

PMT

12 (a) 37.5 ± 0.4 s B1
(b) 3 B1
(c) his(a) / his(b) C1

in range 12 to 13 OR his value calculated correctly A1
(d) curve above existing line at all points and roughly parallel B1 [5]

PMT

* 0 5 0 1 6 1 0 4 3 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

hand in. 1
3
appropriate units.
question.
7
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49782/4
PMT
1 Two boys, X and Y, decide to measure the speed of some of the vehicles travelling along a For
road. The two boys stand 405 m apart beside the road, as shown in Fig. 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
Y 405 m X
Cambridge
Transport
Company
Boy X has a stopwatch which he sets to zero. As a vehicle passes boy Y, boy Y drops his
hand as a signal to boy X to start his stopwatch. Boy X then stops the stopwatch as the
vehicle goes past him.
The appearance of the stopwatch is then as shown in Fig. 1.2.
60
55 5
seconds
50 10
45 15
40 20
35
30 25
Fig. 1.2
(a) How long did it take for the vehicle to travel from Y to X?
time = ............................................... s [1]
(b) Calculate the average speed of the vehicle as it travels from Y to X.
average speed = ................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
(c) The vehicle in (a) and (b) is accelerating as it travels from Y to X. For
Examiner’s
(i) How does its speed at X compare with that at Y? Use
Tick one box.
greater than at Y
same as that at Y
less than that at Y
(ii) How does its speed at X compare with the average speed calculated in (b)?
Tick one box.
greater than average speed
same as average speed
less than average speed

[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
2 Solids, liquids and gases have different properties. The list below gives some of them. For
Examiner’s
completely fills the container Use
shape fills the container from the bottom
fixed shape
move around, close together
molecules move around, far apart
vibrate about a fixed position
Use descriptions from the list to complete the table. Any description may be used more than
once if appropriate. Two spaces have been filled in to help you.
shape molecules
(a) solid
[2]
(b) liquid move around, close together
[1]
(c) gas completely fills the container
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
3 Here is a list of energy resources available to the world. Some of these are renewable and For
some are non-renewable. Examiner’s
Use
In the first blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are renewable.
In the second blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are non-renewable.
renewable non-renewable
coal
hydroelectricity
nuclear energy
oil
solar energy
tidal energy
wind energy
[4]
[Total: 4]

PMT
4 An aluminium rod is cut into a longer section and a shorter section, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
(a) The shorter section of the rod is placed into a measuring cylinder containing water.
Fig. 4.2 shows the appearance of the measuring cylinder before and after this is done.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
water
10 10 shorter section of
aluminium rod
Fig. 4.2 (not full size)
(i) Calculate the volume of the shorter section of aluminium rod.
volume = .......................................... cm3 [3]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
(ii) The mass of this shorter section is measured as 21.2 g. For

Examiner’s
1. Name a laboratory instrument that might have been used to measure this mass. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. Calculate the density of aluminium.
density = .................................................. [4]
(b) (i) Name an instrument that could be used to measure the length of the longer section
of aluminium rod.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest a method, different from that in Fig. 4.2, that could be used to determine
the volume of this longer section.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

PMT
5 (a) In Fig. 5.1, A and B are two parallel plane mirrors. A ray of light strikes mirror A at an For
angle of incidence of 45°. The ray then reflects, to strike mirror B. Examiner’s
Use
45°
normal
x
y
normal
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the name given to the angle x shown on Fig. 5.1.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State the value of
1. angle x, .....................................................
2. angle y. .....................................................
[2]
(iii) On Fig. 5.1, use your ruler to draw the path of the ray after it leaves the surface
of B. [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
(b) The mirror B is now rotated so that it reflects the ray of light back along its original path. For
Examiner’s
On Fig. 5.2, draw mirror B in the correct position to do this. Use
45°
normal
x
[1]
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
6 Some water in a glass beaker is heated from below, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred
(i) through the glass, .....................................................................................................
(ii) throughout the water. ................................................................................................

[2]
(b) As thermal energy is supplied, the temperature of the water begins to rise. Although
the supply of energy remains constant, eventually the temperature becomes steady at
about 80°C.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The rate of energy supply is increased. The temperature of the water begins to rise
again, but eventually becomes steady at a higher temperature. This time many bubbles
are seen throughout the water.
(i) State what is now happening to the water.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) What gas do the bubbles contain? Tick one box.
air
hydrogen
oxygen
steam [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
11
7 (a) State what is meant by the echo of a sound. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how the echo of a sound may be demonstrated. Include a diagram that shows
approximate sizes and distances.
diagram
description of method ......................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The demonstration in (b) is used to find the speed of sound in air.
(i) Which two measurements should be made?
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State how you would calculate the speed of sound from these measurements.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 represents the circuit that operates two of the lamps on a car. For
Examiner’s
Use
switch
fuse
L1 car battery
lamps L2
Fig. 8.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram for this circuit, using conventional symbols.
[3]
(b) The car battery has an e.m.f. of 12 V and, when the lamps are switched on, there is a
current of 1.6 A in each lamp.
Calculate the resistance of one of the lamps.
resistance = .................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
13
(c) When the switch is turned on, both lamps should light up. On one occasion when the For
driver operates the switch, lamp L2 fails to light up. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest a reason for this.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) An amateur workman connects a length of wire across lamp L2 and shorts it out.
When the switch is closed for the first time after this, what happens, if anything, to
(i) the fuse, ....................................................................................................................
(ii) lamp L1, ....................................................................................................................
(iii) lamp L2? ...................................................................................................................

[3]
[Total: 11]

PMT
14
9 (a) Magnets A and B, shown in Fig. 9.1, attract each other. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 9.1
The S pole of magnet A has been marked.
On Fig. 9.1, mark the polarities of the other poles, using the letters N or S. [1]
(b) A soft-iron rod and a steel rod each have coils around them. Both rods are initially
unmagnetised. The coils are attached to circuits, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
soft iron steel
Fig. 9.2
(i) Use the following statements to complete the table referring to the soft-iron rod and
the steel rod shown in Fig. 9.2.
magnetised loses its magnetism keeps its magnetism
switch closed switch open
soft iron
steel
[2]
(ii) Which words apply to the force between the rods when the switches are closed?
Tick one box.
no force
attractive force
repulsive force [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
15
(iii) Which of the two arrangements in Fig. 9.2 would be used as the electromagnet on For
the crane in a scrap-metal yard? Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) State one advantage that an electromagnet could have in comparison with a
similar-sized permanent magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
10 (a) Suggest how a plastic rod may be given an electrostatic charge. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A charged sphere is suspended on an insulating thread.
When a plastic rod with a positive charge is held near the suspended charged sphere,
the sphere moves to the position shown in Fig. 10.1.
plastic rod
insulating thread
+
+
+
+ charged sphere
+
+
+
+
Fig. 10.1
(i) State the sign of the charge on the sphere. ..............................................................
(ii) Give the reason for your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow to show the electrostatic force on the sphere. [1]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
17
(d) The positively-charged plastic rod is removed and replaced by a plastic rod with a For
negative charge. Examiner’s
Use
Describe the position that the suspended sphere now takes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
18
11 (a) The charges on the particles in an atom may be represented by For

Examiner’s
0 or +1 or –1. Use
The masses of the particles in an atom may be represented by
0 or m or 2000 m.
Using these choices, complete the table below.
particle charge mass

electron –1 m
neutron
proton
[4]
238
(b) How many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 92U?
number of electrons = ......................................................
number of neutrons = ......................................................
number of protons = ......................................................

[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT
19
12 Fig. 12.1 shows the graph of the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time. For
The readings have already had the background count rate subtracted. Examiner’s
Use
1000
count rate
counts / s
800
600
400
200
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / s
Fig. 12.1
(a) From Fig. 12.1, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 1000 counts / s to
125 counts / s.
time = .............................................. s [1]
(b) How many half-lives of the radioactive material were there during the time interval
in (a)?
number of half lives = .................................................. [1]
(c) From your answers to (a) and (b), calculate the half-life of the material.
half-life = .............................................. s [2]
(d) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might have been plotted if the background count rate
had not been subtracted. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) 7 minutes 20 seconds B1
(ii) 440 (s) C1

division by 40 C1
11 (s) A1
(b) (speed =) distance/time in any form C1

75/15 C1
5 (m / s) A1
Note: 6.8 (m / s) gains 2 marks as correctly using time 11(s) from (a)
[Total: 7]
2 (a) (D = ) mass/volume C1
476/35 C1
13.6 OR 13 600 A1
g / cm3 OR kg / m3 B1
note: if value calculated, unit must agree with value)
(b) top box ticked (mass of water is less than mass of mercury) B1
(c) (i) middle box ticked (stays the same) B1
(ii) top box ticked (decreases) B1
[Total: 7]
3 (a) turning effect OR force x distance (between force and pivot) B1
(b) (i) equal (magnitude) accept the same size/balanced B1

note: no turning effect is insufficient
opposite direction B1
note: CW moment = ACW moment scores both marks
(ii) 1. at pivot (however expressed) e.g. idea of where plank in contact with log B1
2. upwards accept up, vertically is insufficient B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

4 (a) number of (complete) vibrations/oscillations/waves M1

per second/unit time A1
note: rate of oscillations/vibrations scores both marks
(b) (i) particles/air/solid vibrates/is moved OR prongs push/collide with air molecules B1
reference to/idea of (sound) waves B1
idea of pressure/longitudinal/compressions/rarefactions (transmitted through air) B1
(ii) amplitude decreases o.w.t.t.e. e.g. smaller vibration of prongs B1

NOT slower vibrations / frequency decreases / less vibrations
(iii) pitch C1
lower pitch / octave lower ignore lower/less sound NOT louder/quieter A1
[Total: 8]
5 (a) thermometer B1
(b) reduce heat loss/transfer B1

accept keeps heat in/insulates
(c) balance OR scales, condone scale / weighing machine, accept measuring cylinder B1
find mass of empty beaker/container/apparatus, accept measure volume of water B1
find mass of beaker/container/apparatus + water, accept look up density of water B1
subtract the two masses, accept use M = D x V B1
note: allow weight/weigh instead of mass, ignore if subtraction gives negative mass
(d) bubbles (ignore “of air”)

(water) vapour accept “steam” or equivalent
temperature/thermometer reading stops rising any 2 B2
level of water decreases ignore evaporation
[Total: 8]
6 (a) (i) refraction

accept refracted ray, ignore bends B1
(ii) 45 (°) condone no/incorrect unit B1
(b) (i) refracted down at first surface B1

refracted down at 2nd surface B1
(ii) X marked above point where candidate’s blue light hits screen B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

7 (a) (i) focal length indicated ± 0.2 cm B1
(ii) either principal focus clearly indicated B1
(b) diminished B1
inverted B1
image distance less B1
(c) any correct ray with appropriate refraction either at centre line or at both surfaces B1
[Total: 6]
8 (a) clockwise from top:
right B1
left B1
right OR accept left if top compass is left B1
sloping away from letter N any angle from up to B1
(b) no effect B1
no effect B1
attracts B1
attracts B1
[Total: 8]
9 (a) resistor B1
(b) (i) 6.0 V OR 6 V, unity penalty applies B1
(ii) 6.0 V OR 6 V, unity penalty applies unless penalised in (i), no e.c.f. from (i) B1
(iii) 250 mA OR 0.25 A, unit penalty applies unless penalised in (i) or (ii) B1
(c) (R =) V/I C1
6/0.25 OR 6/250 C1
24 OR 0.024 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) OR kΩ (note: if value calculated, unit must agree with value) B1

PMT

(d) (i) decreases B1
(ii) increases B1
(iii) unchanged B1
accept no effect/none
[Total: 11]
10 (a) motors correctly connected in parallel across output B1

suitable substitution e.g. 18/240 = N1/4800 C1
360 A1
(c) will run at reduced speed NOT will not work B1

accept will work/turn slowly
[Total: 5]
11 (a) (i) 210 and 122 and 72 B1
(ii) 40–60 (s) C1

45–55 (s) A1
(b) background (radiation) OR any suitable example of background radiation B1

accept radiation in the environment
[Total: 4]
12 (a) 84 B1
(b) 128 B1
(c) (i) 84 or candidate’s (a) B1
(ii) orbits OR shells OR outside nucleus B1
(d) 208 B1
82 B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

* 5 3 1 0 3 5 8 7 6 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 64825/7
PMT
1 A wind turbine can be seen through the window of the IGCSE Physics class laboratory, as For
Use
Fig. 1.1
The blades on the wind turbine are turning slowly, so a student uses a laboratory stopclock
to time 40 rotations of the blades.
Fig. 1.2 shows the stopclock after 40 rotations of the blades.
start reset stop

60
55 5
50 minutes 10
hand
45 15
seconds
40 hand 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) State the reading on the stopclock.
reading = ..................... minutes ..................... seconds [1]
(ii) Calculate the time, in seconds, for one rotation of the blades.
time for one rotation = .............................................. s [3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
(b) Later in the day, the blades of the wind turbine are found to take 15 s to rotate once. For
Examiner’s
The tip of the blade travels in a circle of circumference 75 m. Use
Calculate the average speed of the tip of the blade.
average speed = .......................................... m / s [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
2 (a) The mass of 35 cm3 of mercury is measured as 476 g. For

Examiner’s
Calculate the density of mercury. Give the unit. Use
density = ................................................... [4]
(b) The density of water is much less than the density of mercury.
How does the mass of 35 cm3 of water compare with the mass of 35 cm3 of mercury?
Tick one box.
mass of water is less than mass of mercury
mass of water is the same as mass of mercury
mass of water is greater than mass of mercury

[1]
(c) The mercury in a thermometer expands when it is heated.
(i) What happens to the mass of the mercury? Tick one box.
decreases
stays the same
increases
(ii) What happens to the density of the mercury? Tick one box.
decreases
stays the same
increases
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
3 (a) State what is meant by the moment of a force. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A plank balances horizontally on a log of wood, which acts as a pivot.
A girl sits on one end of the plank, and a boy pushes down on the other end to keep the
plank horizontal. Fig. 3.1 shows this arrangement.
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(i) What two things can be said about the moments caused by the boy and by the girl?
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) There are four forces acting on the plank when it is in equilibrium. Three of the
forces are:
• the weight of the girl

• the weight of the plank
• the force provided by the boy
1. Where does the fourth force act?
..................................................................................................................................
2. What is the direction of this force?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) State what is meant by the frequency of the vibration of a vibrating object. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a tuning fork. Its frequency is indicated by the number on the handle.
512 Hz
handle B
Fig. 4.1
When the tuning fork is struck on a solid surface, the prongs A and B vibrate as indicated
by the arrows.
(i) Explain how a sound is produced and transmitted when the prongs are vibrating.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) After the tuning fork was struck on the solid surface, the sound from the tuning fork
gradually gets quieter.
State what happens to the tuning fork to cause this.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Another tuning fork is marked with 256 Hz, to indicate its frequency.
State how the sound from this tuning fork compares with the sound from the tuning
fork in Fig. 4.1.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
5 The apparatus in Fig. 5.1 is used to investigate temperature rise when some water is heated. For
Examiner’s
+ Use
–
lagging heater
beaker
water
Fig. 5.1
(a) Name the instrument used to measure the temperature of the water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the purpose of the lagging.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe how the mass of the water may be determined, stating the apparatus you
would use.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) The heater is switched on and eventually the water starts to boil.
State two things that may be observed about the water when it is boiling.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
6 (a) A ray of red light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
A Use
45°
glass block
B
26°
Fig. 6.1
(i) What name describes what happens to the ray of light at B?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, the emergent ray is not drawn at the correct angle θ to the normal.
State the correct value of the angle θ.
θ = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
(b) A ray of blue light is directed into a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
screen Use
air air
no
rm
al
of
ray ght
li
blue
glass prism
Fig. 6.2
(i) Using your ruler, draw a possible path for the blue light, until it reaches the screen.
(ii) The ray of blue light is replaced by a ray of red light.
On Fig. 6.2, mark an X to show where the red light might hit the screen.
[3]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram for a converging lens. For

Examiner’s
Use
object
image
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, clearly mark and label
(i) the focal length of the lens,

(ii) one principal focus of the lens (use the letter F).
[2]
(b) The following can be used to describe the image formed by a lens.
enlarged diminished
inverted upright
image distance image distance

greater than object less than object
distance distance
Put ticks in the boxes containing descriptions that apply to the image in Fig. 7.1. [3]
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw one more ray from the top of the object to the top of the image. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
11
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the outline of a bar magnet. A compass needle is being used to show the For
magnetic field pattern around the bar magnet. The needle is a small, freely-pivoted magnet. Examiner’s
Use
N S
Fig. 8.1
(a) The compass is placed to the left of the N pole of the magnet. Its needle points in the
direction shown by the arrow.
Four other positions are indicated around the magnet, each marked by a circle.
In each circle, draw an arrow to indicate the direction in which the compass needle
would point at each of these positions. Other magnetic fields can be ignored. [4]
(b) Five pieces of metal are placed, in turn, near the S pole of the magnet.
In the table below tick the box that states what happens to each of the different metals.
An example has been given to help you.
attracted by repelled by
type of metal no effect
magnet magnet
gold ✓
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
[4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a series circuit. The resistances of the ammeter and of the battery may be For
ignored. Examiner’s
Use
6.0 V
reading
A
250 mA
X
Fig. 9.1
(a) What is component X? Tick one box.
bell
fuse
relay
resistor
[1]
(b) State the value of
(i) the e.m.f. of the battery, ..............................................................................
(ii) the potential difference across component X, ............................................
(iii) the current in the circuit. .............................................................................

[3]
(c) Use values from Fig. 9.1 to calculate the resistance of component X. Give the unit.
resistance = .................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
13
(d) A resistor R is connected in parallel with component X. For

Examiner’s
State what effect, if any, this has on Use
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the reading on the ammeter,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the current in component X.
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]

PMT
14
10 The transformer in Fig. 10.1 is to be connected to a circuit containing two electric motors. For
Examiner’s
240 V Use
primary secondary
coil coil
4800 turns
output
18 V
Fig. 10.1
To operate at full speed, each motor requires a voltage of 18 V.
At a lower voltage the motors will operate but at a lower speed.
(a) On Fig. 10.1, draw the two motors connected in parallel across the output of the
transformer. Use the circuit symbol M to represent each motor. [1]
(b) Calculate the number of turns needed in the secondary coil in order to supply 18 V.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]
(c) The motors are now connected in series across the output of the transformer.
State the effect on the motors.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT
15
11 A radiation detector is used to monitor the radiation from a radioactive source. A ratemeter For
records the number of counts per minute. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The source is brought close to the detector. The table below shows how the ratemeter
reading varies with time.
time / s 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

ratemeter reading
300 230 184 142 108 92 74 60 50 42
counts / min
count rate due to source
280 164 88 54 40 30 22
counts / min
(i) The bottom row gives the count rate due only to the source.
Fill in the missing values. [1]
(ii) From the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.
half-life = ............................................... s [2]
(b) Even when the source is a long way from the detector, the ratemeter registers a reading
of 20 counts / min.
Suggest a cause of this 20 counts / min.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]

PMT
16
212
12 (a) How many protons are in the nucleus of an atom of 84Po? ............................ [1] For
Examiner’s
212 Use
(b) How many neutrons are in the nucleus of an atom of 84Po? .......................... [1]
212
(c) (i) How many electrons are in a neutral atom of 84Po? ...............................
(ii) Where in the atom are these electrons to be found?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
212
(d) When a nucleus of 84Po decays by emitting an alpha-particle, it becomes a nucleus of
lead (Pb).
The equation below represents this process.

212 X 4
84Po Y Pb + 2α
Deduce the values of X and Y.
X = ..........................
Y = ..........................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/21/O/N/13

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
components.
PMT

scored.
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
mistake and has carried this incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working,
the candidate may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided the subsequent working is
correct, bearing in mind this earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised
more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English.
Significant figures
response or are forbidden by the mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
plus wrong penalty.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) 7.02 7.13 6.97 B1
(b) evidence of adding three times C1
7.04 e.c.f. (a) A1
(c) distance / length of slope B1
(d) oil axles (accept oil wheels)

steeper slope / raise plank any 1 B1 [5]
push trolley
2 (a) speed × time

OR
area under graph C1
8 × 50 C1
400 (m) A1
(b) half candidate’s (a)

OR
1 × base × height C1
2
200 (m) e.c.f. from (a) A1
(c) 600 (m) e.c.f. from (a)(b) B1
(d) (i) equation using candidate’s (c)/60 C1
10 e.c.f. (c) C1
m/s B1
(ii) horizontal straight line at 10 m / s e.c.f. (i) M1
from 0 s – 60 s, not beyond A1 [11]

PMT

3 (a) (i) food

coal
oil/diesel/petrol/etc. any 1 B1
gas
(ii) waves
wind
hydro (electric)
tides any 1 B1
geothermal
sun (light) / solar
biofuel
wood
(iii) waves
tides / tidal any 1 B1
hydro (electric)
(b) fossil fuels will run out/not renewable

fossil fuels increasingly expensive to extract any 2 B1 + B1 [5]
fossil fuels cause pollution/climate change/global warming
4 (a) (i) tick under boy lying down M1
(ii) larger area (of contact with floor) A1
(b) (i) greater/more/stronger/higher than B1
(ii) becomes less / decreases / falls B1 [4]
5 (a) 31 ± 2 (mm) C1
31 ± 0.2 (mm) A1
(b) (i) number of waves per second/unit time B1
(ii) reference to (vertical) displacement/distance/height/depth B1

half peak to trough distance / distance from mean position A1
(c) reflects / 3rd box ticked B1 [6]

PMT

6 (a) Mark both parts together
(i)(ii) glycerol highest BP and water highest thermal capacity B1
1st explanation, needs to be comparative:

glycerol stops rising at higher temperature than water
OR
290 > 100 – both numbers must be seen B1
2nd explanation:
more energy to raise temperature (in 1 minute)
OR
4 < 8; water must be stated to score mark B1
(b) (i) conduction B1
(ii) convection B1
radiation B1
(iii) arrows indicating air moving up above heater B1

complete convection current indicated B1 [8]
7 (a) cell OR battery B1

rheostat / variable resistor / resistance B1
lamp / light / bulb B1
switch B1
(b) all 5 components shown in series B1

correct symbol for ammeter B1
(c) 2nd box ticked B1 [7]
8 (a) A and B both B1
(b) C B1
(c) D B1
(d) (i) attract c.a.o. B1
(ii) no effect / nothing c.a.o. B1 [5]

PMT

9 (a) (i) at least 1 complete circle drawn C1

at least two circles not touching each other and centred on hole A1
at least 4 concentric circles not touching each other B1
(ii) iron filings

OR
compass (needle) M1
sprinkle / tap card

OR
move around wire / tap compass A1
(b) (i) break circuit when current too high/large

OR
break circuit when overloaded
OR
prevent wires/circuit overheating/damage to circuit / electrocution B1
(ii) V = IR in any form

OR
V/R C1
12/4 C1
3.0 (A)
OR
3 (A) A1
nothing happens to circuit breaker

e.c.f. allow correct deduction based on candidate’s current B1 [10]
10 (a) (i) normal correct B1
(ii) reflected ray correct B1
(iii) both angles i and r in correct place B1
(b) bottom box/i = r ticked B1
(c) (i) ray continued to upper mirror B1
reflected at correct angle B1
(ii) parallel
OR
same (direction) B1 [7]

PMT

11 (a) (i) protons and neutrons M1

two of each A1
(ii) easier to get inside body OR can be breathed in

reference to ability of gas to diffuse/spread/move in air any 2 B1 + B1
danger to internal organs / damages cells
(b) (i) C B1
(ii) B or D any 1 B1
(iii) A B1
(iv) C B1 [8]
12 (a) radioactive materials/sources

OR
any named radioactive material B1
(b) to prevent access by (unauthorised) people / can only be opened by key holder B1
(c) to reduce/prevent escape of radiation/radioactive emissions C1
to reduce/prevent escape of beta or gamma radiation A1 [4]

PMT

* 1 1 8 5 8 9 6 1 7 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/JG) 64874/6
PMT
1 A slope is made by resting one end of a plank of wood on a block, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
plank trolley
Fig. 1.1
Three students each use a digital stopwatch to time a small trolley rolling down the full length
of the slope.
The times on their stopwatches as the trolley reached the bottom of the slope are shown in
Fig. 1.2.
min sec 1/100
student 1 time = ....................... s
min sec 1/100
student 2 time = ....................... s
min sec 1/100
student 3 time = ....................... s
Fig. 1.2
(a) On the line next to each stopwatch, write the time measured by each student. [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT
(b) Calculate the average time measured for the trolley to roll down the slope. Show your For
working. Examiner’s
Use
average time = ............................................... s [2]
(c) What other measurement must be taken in order to be able to calculate the average
speed of the trolley?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest one change that might be made to the arrangement in Fig. 1.1 so that the
same trolley takes less time to roll down the full length of the slope.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
2 A lorry travels at constant speed for 50 s and then steadily slows down, taking another 50 s to For
come to a stop. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.1 is the speed-time graph for the 100 s.
10
speed
m/s 8
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the distance travelled by the lorry in the first 50 s.
distance = ............................................. m [3]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.
distance = ............................................. m [2]
(c) Calculate the total distance travelled.
distance = ............................................. m [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT
(d) (i) A car takes 60 s to travel the distance calculated in (c) at a constant speed. For
Examiner’s
Calculate the speed of the car. Use
speed = .................................................. [3]
(ii) On Fig. 2.1, draw the speed-time graph for the 60 s at this constant speed. [2]
[Total: 11]
3 (a) (i) State one example of a fuel in which chemical energy is stored.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one example of a renewable source of energy.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State one energy resource that involves liquid water (not steam).
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State two reasons why it is important that nations investigate energy resources other
than fossil fuels (coal, oil, natural gas).
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a boy in four positions on a flat floor. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
(i) Put a tick in the box under the position where the boy is exerting the least pressure
on the floor.
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The pressure of carbon dioxide in a container is being measured by means of a mercury
manometer. This is shown in Fig. 4.2.
gas cylinder
carbon dioxide
h
mercury
manometer
Fig. 4.2
(i) How does the pressure of the carbon dioxide compare with atmospheric pressure?
Complete the sentence below.
The pressure of the carbon dioxide is .......................................................... the

atmospheric pressure. [1]
(ii) The atmospheric pressure increases.
State what happens to the value of the distance h, shown on Fig. 4.2.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13
PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a wave on a water surface, at a particular instant. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, measure carefully, in mm, the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ............................................ mm [2]
(b) State what is meant by
(i) the frequency of a wave,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the amplitude of a wave.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A large barrier, of height greater than the height of the wave in Fig. 5.1, is put in the path
of the wave.
What, if anything, does this do to the wave? Tick one box.
It diffracts the wave.
It does nothing to the wave.
It reflects the wave.
It refracts the wave.

[1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
6 (a) A certain mass of water at The same mass of glycerol at For

Examiner’s
20 °C is heated using a 30 W 20 °C is heated using the same Use
immersion heater. 30 W immersion heater.
Initially the temperature rises at Initially the temperature rises at

4 °C per minute. 8 °C per minute.
Eventually, the temperature Eventually, the temperature

stops rising at 100 °C. stops rising at 290 °C.
State and explain
(i) which has the greater boiling point, water or glycerol,
statement .................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) which has the greater thermal capacity, the water or the glycerol.
statement .................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows a cross-section through a room.
ceiling
wall
window
metal
case
hot
water
floor
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT
The room is heated by a heater containing hot water. The heater is mounted on one For
wall, as shown. Examiner’s
Use
(i) By what process does thermal energy pass through the metal case of the heater in
Fig. 6.1?
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State the two main processes by which the thermal energy from the heater is
transferred to the whole room.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) One of the processes in (b)(ii) involves the air moving.
On Fig. 6.1, draw arrows to show how the air moves in the room. [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows circuit symbols for four electrical components. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the box next to each component, write the name of that component. [4]
(b) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram that shows these four components connected
in series with an ammeter.
[2]
(c) The reading on the ammeter is gradually increased.
Which one of the components is adjusted in order to do this? Tick one box.
Z [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13
PMT
11
8 An IGCSE Physics student is set a puzzle by his teacher. For

Examiner’s
He is given four rods, A, B, C and D, all painted white. He is told that two rods are permanent Use
magnets, another rod is made of iron and the final rod is made of copper. His teacher asks
him to find out, by experiment, which rod is which.
Fig. 8.1 shows the results the student obtains when he puts the rods next to each other.
A B repel
A C attract
B D no effect
Fig. 8.1
(a) Which two rods are magnets? ............................. and ............................. [1]
(b) Which is the iron rod? .................................... [1]
(c) Which is the copper rod? ............................... [1]
(d) What will be the result of putting
(i) B and C end to end, .......................................................................................
(ii) C and D end to end? ......................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a thick, vertical copper rod AB, of negligible resistance, connected into an For
electrical circuit. AB passes through a hole in a horizontal card PQRS. Examiner’s
Use
41
Q R
+
d.c. power supply
P S –
Fig. 9.1
(a) The d.c. power supply produces a current in the circuit, which causes a magnetic field
around AB.
(i) Fig. 9.2 shows the view from above of the card PQRS, with the hole through which
AB passes.
Q R
P S
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2, draw the pattern of the magnetic field around AB. Include at least four
magnetic field lines. [3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT
13
(ii) Describe briefly how the pattern of the magnetic field may be shown experimentally. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The d.c. power supply contains a circuit breaker that operates at a current of 5 A.
(i) What is the purpose of the circuit breaker?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The power supply is set at 12 V and then switched on. The resistor has a resistance
of 4 Ω.
1. Calculate the current in the circuit of Fig. 9.1.
current = .................................................... A
2. Deduce what, if anything, happens to the circuit breaker.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]

PMT
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror at point A. For
Examiner’s
Use
ray of mirror
light
mirror
Fig. 10.1
(a) The construction in this question requires you to draw rays carefully.
On Fig. 10.1,
(i) draw the normal to the mirror at A,

(ii) draw the ray reflected at A,
(iii) label the angles of incidence i and reflection r at A, using the letters i and r.
[3]
(b) Which of the following equations correctly links i and r? Tick one box.
i + r = 90°
i + r = 180°
i=r
[1]
(c) A second mirror is positioned as shown in Fig. 10.1, parallel to the first mirror.
(i) Continue the ray reflected from A, to show what happens to it after it reaches the
second mirror. [2]
(ii) State how the direction of the ray, after it has reflected from both mirrors, compares
with its original direction.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT
15
11 (a) Radon-220 is a radioactive gas. It decays by emitting α-particles. An α-particle is a For

helium nucleus. Examiner’s
Use
(i) What four particles together make up an α-particle?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why the fact that radon-220 is a gas makes it potentially more
dangerous than an α-emitting solid source of similar activity.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) In the situations illustrated in Fig. 11.1, the radioactive source is emitting α-particles,
β-particles and γ-rays. The detector is sensitive to all three types of radiation. The
apparatus is in air.
A B
radioactive radiation
source thick detector
aluminium thick paper
1 cm 2 cm
C D
1 cm 15 cm
Ignore background radiation.
State one of the situations, A, B, C or D where
(i) α-particles are detected, ..............................
(ii) only β-particles and γ-rays are detected, ............................
(iii) only γ-rays are detected, ............................
(iv) α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are all detected. ..............................

[4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
16
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a locked box. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 12.1
(a) Suggest what is stored in this box.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest why the box is locked.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The interior of the box is lined with thick lead.
Suggest the reason for this.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
components.
PMT

scored.
Significant figures
plus wrong penalty.
applies.

PMT

1 (a) 2.4 and 15.6 used C1

13.2 (cm) A1
(b) R.H. end at {candidate’s (a) + 1.0 (cm)} B1
(c) 4.4 (cm) OR candidate’s (a) / 3 correctly evaluated C1

division by 4 C1
1.1 (cm) e.c.f. A1
[Total: 6]
2 (a) (i) chemical B1
(ii) GPE / gravitational potential energy (allow gravitational / potential / thermal) B1
(b) all stated quantities are appropriate for calculating power, expect weight/mass and height
and time
–1 for each error or omission (minimum zero) B2
(c) athlete/he/she is heavier o.w.t.t.e. B1
[Total: 5]
3 (a) (i) any statement that indicates that sound travels slower than light B1
(“sound travels slowly”, on its own, gets zero)
(ii) speed = distance/time in any form C1

1700/5 C1
340 A1
m/s B1
(b) (i) 2nd box ticked / before the girl B1
(ii) bottom box ticked / louder B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

4 (a) thermometer B1
(b) temperature B1
(c) mercury / Hg / alcohol B1
(d) put it in ice M1

melting A1
(e) liquid/Hg/alcohol expands/moves along tube/gets hotter B1
[Total: 6]
5 (a) (i) cross same distance from mirror, B1

line joining cross and object would be perpendicular to mirror, B1
(ii) reflected ray going down to left B1
EITHER line of reflected ray, goes through candidate’s dot

B1
OR angles of incidence and reflection are equal, by eye
(iii) normal shown correctly drawn, B1

i and r correctly marked B1
(b) same size

behind mirror
same distance from mirror
virtual any 2 B1+B1
same height above ground, o.w.t.t.e.
upright
allow idea of side to side swap / laterally inverted
(c) light reflected at each surface / both sides B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

6 (a) (i) further apart at bottom / 2nd box ticked M1
(ii) like charges repel / positive charges repel other positive charges A1
(b) (i) closer together at bottom / bottom box ticked M1
(ii) unlike/opposite/different charges/ + and – / attract A1
(c) moves to L OR moves towards rod OR attracted by rod B1

moves to R OR moves away from rod OR repelled by rod B1
[Total: 6]
7 (a) conduction B1
(b) convection B1
(c) conduction B1
convection B1
[Total: 4]
8 (a) (radio)
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
gamma B2
note: all 5 correct gains B2, any 3 consecutive in correct order, even if shifted in list,
gains B1
(b) between radio and infra-red B1
(c) idea that microwaves can be hazardous B1
(d) communications
GPS/satellite navigation
satellite TV any 1 B1
mobile/cell phones
[Total: 5]

PMT

9 (a) (i) 0.3 (A) B1
(ii) 0.3 (A) B1
(b) R = V/I in any form OR IR C1

0.3 × 10 C1
3 (V) OR 3.0 (V) A1
(c) (i) variable resistor / variable resistance / rheostat B1
(ii) zero OR 0 (Ω) OR “nothing” stated B1
(iii) decreases B1
[Total: 8]
10 (a) (i) 4th box ticked B1
(ii) p.d. / 12 V / voltage is shared between two resistors B1

LDR more than half / greater share of 12 V B1
(b) (i) any 3 from:

current in coil
coil becomes electromagnet
magnetic field (generated) around coil
coil attracts / closes switch B3
(ii) lights up o.w.t.t.e. B1
(c) (i) in darkness B1
(ii) 1st box ticked B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

11 (a) (i) plastic absorbs alpha / alpha will not penetrate plastic / will not be detected B1
(ii) more particles reach detector when closer B1
(iii) idea of short half-life will cause inaccuracy over time or will need replacing B1
(b) (i) 88 B1
(ii) 226 – 88 / i.e. candidate’s (b)(i) C1

138 / e.c.f. A1
(iii) 226 – 222 = 4 OR 88 – 86 = 2 C1

α-particle A1
[Total: 8]
12 (a) (i) iron B1
(ii) copper B1

12 (V) A1
(c) 3 lamps all in parallel, connected correctly to Fig. 12.1 output terminals B1
correct symbol for all 3 lamps B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

* 0 1 8 5 7 7 1 7 3 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 16 printed pages
DC (SLM/SW) 64841/5
PMT
1 A ruler is used to measure the length of a piece of cotton, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cotton
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
cm
Fig. 1.1 (not actual size)
(a) Use the ruler in Fig. 1.1 to find the length of the piece of cotton.
length = ............................................ cm [2]
(b) The left-hand end of the cotton is moved to the 1.0 cm mark on the ruler.
On Fig. 1.1, mark clearly and carefully, with an arrow, where the right-hand end will
reach on the ruler. [1]
(c) The piece of cotton is wound around a wooden rod.
The rod has a square cross-section. The cotton goes around the rod exactly 3 times, as
shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
Calculate the thickness of the square wooden rod.
thickness = ............................................ cm [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
2 Fig. 2.1 shows two athletes training for a race. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.1
They run up a hill at steady speed.
(a) During the run up the hill,
(i) which form of energy decreases,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) which form of energy increases?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the three quantities that need to be known in order to calculate the useful power of
one of the athletes.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The two athletes run side-by-side all the way to the top of the hill, but one athlete
develops more useful power than the other.
Suggest a reason for this difference.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
3 An explosion at X in a quarry is heard by a boy at Y and a girl at Z. Their relative positions For
are shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
girl
explosion
Z
X boy
rock
face
Y
quarry
1700 m
(a) The girl hears the explosion 5.0 s after she sees the explosion happening.
(i) Explain why there is a delay between seeing and hearing the explosion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The girl is standing 1700 m from the explosion site X.
Calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = .................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
(b) The boy is standing at Y, between the explosion site and the girl. For
Examiner’s
(i) When does he hear the explosion? Tick one box. Use
immediately it happens
before the girl
at the same time as the girl
later than the girl  [1]
(ii) How does the sound heard by the boy compare with the sound heard by the girl?
Tick one box.
The sound heard by the boy is quieter.
The sounds are equally loud.
The sound heard by the boy is louder.  [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a common laboratory instrument. For

Examiner’s
Use
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the name of this instrument.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What does this instrument measure?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest the liquid that this instrument contains.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What must be done in order to make the instrument give a zero reading?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) What happens within the instrument to make it give a reading larger than zero?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a small object in front of a vertical plane mirror. For
Examiner’s
plane mirror Use
object
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1,
(i) mark carefully with a clear cross, labelled I, where the image of the object is
located, [2]
(ii) draw the path of a ray from the object to point P on the mirror, and its path after the
ray is incident on the mirror, [2]
(iii) mark clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at P. [2]
(b) When you look into a mirror, you see an image of your face.
State two characteristics of the image you see.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) If you look from a brightly-lit room into a thick glass window when it is dark outside, you
can see two images of your face.
Suggest why there are two images.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two light, uncharged balls A and B suspended next to each other on vertical, For
insulating threads. Examiner’s
Use
A B
Fig. 6.1
(a) A and B are each given a positive charge.
(i) How will the two threads appear? Tick one box.
both still vertical
further apart at the bottom
closer together at the bottom
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The charge on A is made negative, but B remains positively charged.
(i) How will the two threads appear? Tick one box.
both still vertical
further apart at the bottom
closer together at the bottom
(ii) Explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
(c) Ball A remains negatively charged and ball B remains positively charged. A rod with a For
large positive charge is positioned to the left of A. Examiner’s
Use
State what happens to A and to B.
ball A ................................................................................................................................
ball B ................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
7 Three methods of transfer of thermal energy are conduction, convection and radiation.
(a) Which one is involved when thermal energy is transferred through a solid?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which one can occur only in a liquid or a gas?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which two are impossible in a vacuum?
............................................................... and ............................................................... [2]
[Total: 4]

PMT
10
8 In alphabetical order, some major regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are For
Examiner’s
gamma, Use
infra-red,
radio,
ultra-violet,
visible,
X-rays.
(a) List these regions in order of decreasing wavelength. The first one has been filled in for
you.
radio
longest wavelength .......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
shortest wavelength .......................................................

[2]
(b) Where in this list would you insert microwaves?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A microwave oven is one device that makes use of microwaves.
Explain why the design of microwave ovens must include effective screening, so that
microwaves do not escape.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest one other use for microwaves.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
11
9 A 6.0 V battery is connected as shown in the circuit of Fig. 9.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
6.0 V
X
P 0.3 A 10 1 Q 10 1 R
Fig. 9.1
(a) The current to the right of point P is 0.3 A.
An ammeter is inserted into the circuit.
What value will the ammeter show when it is inserted
(i) at Q, .........................................................................................................................
(ii) at R? .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across one of the 10 Ω resistors.
potential difference = .............................................. V [3]
(c) (i) State the name of the component labelled X.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Deduce the value of the resistance of X when the 6.0 V battery is supplying 0.3 A to
the circuit.
resistance = .............................................. Ω [1]
(iii) What happens to the current in the circuit when the resistance of X is increased?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
12
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) connected with a 1000 Ω resistor to For
form a potential divider. Examiner’s
Use
1000 1
+
12.0 V d.c.
–
LDR
Fig. 10.1
• In daylight, the LDR has a resistance much lower than 1000 Ω.
• In the dark, the LDR has a resistance much higher than 1000 Ω.
(i) What is the potential difference across the LDR when it is dark? Tick one box.
0V
greater than 0 V but less than 6.0 V
exactly 6.0 V
greater than 6.0 V but less than 12.0 V
12.0 V
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
13
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the potential divider of Fig. 10.1 connected to a relay and a lamp. For
Examiner’s
Use
1000 1 lamp
+
12 V d.c.
–
LDR switch in
relay
relay coil
2000 1
Fig. 10.2
In order to close the switch in the relay, there must be at least 6.0 V across the relay coil.
(i) At a certain time, the potential difference across the relay coil is greater than 6.0 V.
Describe how this potential difference causes the switch to close.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) What happens to the lamp when the switch in the relay is closed?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) The circuit of Fig. 10.2 is positioned in a laboratory.

Use your answers to (a) and (b) to deduce the condition in the laboratory that will
cause the lamp to glow. Complete the sentence below.
The lamp will glow when ..........................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) A similar circuit in the laboratory has a thermistor instead of the LDR.
Which one of the following will cause this circuit to switch the lamp on or off? Tick
one box.
change in temperature
change in light level
change in sound level
change in air pressure
change in background radiation [1]

[Total: 9]
PMT
14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows an arrangement to monitor the level of the fuel in the tank of a car. For
Examiner’s
level indicator Use
detector of radioactive
emissions
tank
fuel
plastic float containing

radioactive source
Fig. 11.1
(i) Suggest why the radioactive source in the float is unlikely to be an α-particle emitter.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the detector gives different readings for different fuel levels.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Comment on the value of the half-life of the radioactive source used in the float.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT
15
226
(b) Radium-226 ( 88Ra) decays according to the equation below, emitting a particle X. For
Examiner’s
226 222 Use
88Ra 86Rn + particle X
(i) How many protons are there in a nucleus of radium-226?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) How many neutrons are there in a nucleus of radium-226?
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) From the equation, deduce the nature of particle X.
Particle X is ............................................... . [2]
[Total: 8]

PMT
16
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a simple transformer. For

Examiner’s
Use
core
240 V coil B
250 turns
coil A
5000 turns
Fig. 12.1
Coil A has 5000 turns and coil B has 250 turns.
(a) Name a suitable material for
(i) the core, ...................................................................................................................
(ii) the coils. ...................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) Coil A is connected to a 240 V alternating voltage.
Calculate the output voltage across coil B.
output voltage = .............................................. V [3]
(c) Three lamps each require a voltage equal to the output voltage of coil B in order to
operate at full brightness.
On Fig. 12.1, show these three lamps, suitably connected to run at full brightness. Use
the standard circuit symbol for each lamp. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/23/O/N/13

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some

PMT

Cambridge IGCSE – October/November 2014 0625 21
B marks B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s
answer.
M marks M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an
M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer.
If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks
can be scored.
C marks C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These
can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
A marks A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are
one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored. A marks are commonly awarded for
final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is
correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the
marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at
a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not
award the A mark, but award C marks on their merits. An A mark following an M mark is
a dependent mark.
Brackets ( ) Brackets around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording
used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or
units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
Underlining Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very
similar.
OR / or This indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
e.e.o.o. This means "each error or omission".
o.w.t.t.e. This means “or words to that effect”.
Ignore This indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
what we want, give credit. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g. spelling which
suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or thermistor / transistor /
transformer.
Not / NOT This indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
applies.

PMT

ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a
candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a
candidate from being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies
to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one. Regard a power-of-ten error as an arithmetic error.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because previously
calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
Fractions Allow fractions only where specified in the mark scheme.

PMT

1 (a) rule alongside spring B1
set zero at one end and read scale at other end

OR take scale reading at each end and subtract B1
extra valid detail, e.g. rule close to and parallel with spring, use of marker/set-
square, eye level with reading etc. B1
(b) 3 OR 3.0 (cm) B1
(c) 0.8 (N) ignore negative sign B1

up(wards), accept arrow upwards B1
[Total: 6]
2 (a) 5000 (g) B1
(b) density = mass / volume in any form OR (volume =) mass / density C1

5000 / 7.81 OR 5 / 7.81 OR 0.64, ecf from (a) C1
640 (cm3), accept 6.4 × 10 4 if clearly stated in m3 A1
[Total: 4]
3 (a) force (exerted), distance (moved), either order B1 + B1

time (taken) B1
(b) energy lost / wasted / transferred (to surroundings) OR inefficiency B1

suitable cause for energy lost e.g. friction, heat, sound, moving parts B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

4 (a) (i) temperature (of solid) rising OR (solid) expanding

NOT any indication of melting / turning into liquid,
accept particles gain k.e. / vibrate more B1
(ii) melting owtte B1
(iii) temperature of liquid rising OR liquid expanding

accept liquid particles gain k.e. / move faster / more B1
(b) ice needs (thermal) energy/heat to melt / overcome intermolecular forces M1
takes this energy from drink B1
(c) (i) (temperature) increases / gets hotter M1
steam transfers thermal energy/heat / supplies energy (to water), accept

steam loses (latent) heat (as it condenses) A1
(ii) increases M1
steam condenses/turns into water OR gas molecules become liquid

molecules A1
[Total: 9]
5 (a) echo OR sound reflected (from rock face) B1
(b) speed = distance / time in any form OR (distance =) speed × time C1

330 × 1.8 OR 330 × 0.9 OR 594 C1
297 (m) accept 2 or 3 sig. figs. A1
(c) 0.9 (s) B1
(d) any two from:

(sound is) longitudinal / light is transverse
(sound) travels more slowly / light travels faster
(sound) has lower frequency / longer wavelength accept reverse for light
(sound) cannot travel through a vacuum / light can travel in a vacuum
(sound is a) mechanical/pressure wave OR is not electromagnetic / light is
electromagnetic B2
[Total: 7]

PMT

6 (a) (i) rub rod with cloth B1
(ii) any suitable test,

e.g. picks up/attracts paper, hair, stream of water etc. OR using electroscope
OR attracts/repels an object known to be charged B1
(b) any two from:

friction/rubbing (between clothing and seat)
lady becomes charged
discharged when touches handle, accept charge travels through/to/from lady
(from/to handle) / charge is earthed B2
[Total: 4]
7 (a) (i) a line between F2 or F1 and C ±3 mm C1

a line between F2 or F1 and C ±1 mm A1
(ii) refraction either at centre line OR at both surfaces, B1

parallel after lens OR reaches tip of image B1
(b) bottom box ticked: at I B1
(c) (i) closer to F1 / C / lens / F2 NOT closer to object B1
(ii) smaller / reduced / diminished B1
[Total: 7]
8 (a) (i) variable resistor B1
(ii) adjust/change/vary/control the current/voltage, ignore vary resistance B1
(b) (i) top box ticked: charge B1
(ii) A or amp(s) or ampere(s), condone a, ignore I, NOT ammeter B1
(c) (R =) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 12 C1
20 (Ω) A1
(d) (i) R1 and R2 clearly shown in parallel (between X and Y) M1

rest of circuit including R1 and R2 correct A1
note: short circuit across resistors loses both marks
(ii) parallel B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

9 (a) (i) core B1
(ii) iron NOT steel, accept ferrite B1

250 A1
(c) reduced brightness / dimmer M1

fewer (than 250) turns A1
lower voltage, accept smaller/lower current A1
(d) lamp would blow/burn out B1

accept blow up / glow extremely
[Total: 9]
10 (a) electrons B1
(b) glows or equivalent e.g. (spot of) light / fluorescence B1
(c) (i) H1 and H2 both, either order B1
(ii) A and C both, either order B1
(iii) Y1 and Y2 both, either order B1
(d) (i) Y2 OR top

both B1
(ii) Y1 OR bottom
[Total: 6]

PMT

11 (a) (i) B B1
(ii) A
both correct B1
(iii) C
(b) 3 B1
2
(c) 1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
3
1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
[Total: 5]
12 (a) all 5 points plotted ± ½ small square -1 e.e.o.o. B2
smooth best-fit single line curve through most of the points, not joining points dot
to dot B1
(b) (i) half / 50% / 0.5 / ½ B1
(ii) indication of correct use of graph B1
idea of halving, e.g. 175 or mark at 175 on graph, NOT halving number of
days, i.e. 7 C1
3.4 – 4.0, accept nearest integer from candidate’s graph A1
(iii) 1. candidate’s (ii) OR integer either side of candidate’s (ii) M1

2. half-life not affected by sample size / starting point
accept idea that half-life does not change. A1
[Total: 9]

PMT

* 9 6 9 1 1 0 8 5 2 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (AC/SW) 81802/5
PMT
1 A student hangs a spring vertically from a hook, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
12.0 cm 15.0 cm
2.0 N
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung
from the hook.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) With no load, the spring is 12.0 cm long.
With a load of 2.0 N on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.
Calculate the extension of the spring.
extension = ......................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
(c) The load is attached to the spring and then released.
Fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released.
2.8 N
2.0 N
Fig. 1.2
Calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.
resultant force = ................................................... N
direction = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
2 A steel object has 5 kg stamped on its side, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
5 kg
Fig. 2.1
(a) Express 5.0 kg in grams. 5.0 kg = ............................................ g [1]
(b) The density of the steel is 7.81 g / cm3.
Calculate the volume of the object.
volume = ........................................cm3 [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
3 (a) Use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.
initial acceleration
distance moved
force exerted
potential energy
time taken
An object is dragged across a rough surface. In order to find the work done on the object, it is
necessary to know the ............................................. and the ............................................. .
To calculate the power, it is also necessary to know the ............................................. . [3]
(b) A machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is
involved in.
Suggest why this is so.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) Thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. The temperature of the
substance varies with time as shown in Fig. 4.1.
D
temperature
B C
time
Fig. 4.1
At the temperature indicated by point A on Fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.
State what is happening to the substance
(i) in the region AB,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) in the region BC,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) in the region CD.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Suggest why ice at 0 °C is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at
0 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
(c) Steam is pumped into cold water in a container.
(i) State and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. She has a flat piece of wood
in each hand.
rock face
When the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. A short time later
she hears the sound again.
(a) Why does she hear this second sound?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.
Calculate the distance of the girl from the rock face.
distance = ........................................... m [3]
(c) A boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.
How long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?
time interval = ............................................ s [1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
(d) State two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
10
6 (a) Describe
(i) how a dry cloth can be used to charge a plastic rod,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the rod may be tested to check that it is charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. She gets out of the car. She touches
the door handle when her feet are on the ground. She experiences an electric shock.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
11
7 Fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.
C I
O
F2 F1
Fig. 7.1
F1 and F2 are the two principal focuses of the lens. The object is at O and its image is at I.
(a) On Fig. 7.1,
(i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]
(ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through F2, until it reaches
the image. [2]
(b) Where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? Tick one box.
at F2
at C
at F1
at I
[1]
(c) The object is moved a small distance away from the lens.
State what this causes to happen to
(i) the position of the image,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
8 The electric circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.
X R1 R2 Y
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Name the component that is shown in Fig. 8.1 by the symbol .
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the function of this component in the circuit?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? Tick one box.
charge
power
resistance
(ii) In which unit do we measure current? ...............................................................................

[2]
(c) Resistor R1 has a resistance of 8 Ω and resistor R2 has a resistance of 12 Ω.
Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2 when arranged as in Fig. 8.1.
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
13
(d) R1 and R2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between X and Y, so that they
have a different combined resistance.
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit showing R1 and R2 connected in this different way.
[2]
(ii) What word is used to describe this different way of connecting R1 and R2?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a
240 V mains supply.
240 V X
Y
Z

500 turns 500 turns
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.
Electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, W, X, Y and Z.
(a) The piece of metal P provides a magnetic link between the coils.
State
(i) the name of this part of the transformer, ............................................................................
(ii) the metal from which P is made. .......................................................................................

[2]
(b) A lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 V supply, lights normally when
connected between W and X.
Calculate the number of turns between W and X.
number of turns = ...................................................[3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
15
(c) The lamp in (b) is connected between X and Y.
Describe and explain what happens to the lamp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) State what would happen if the 120 V lamp in (b) is connected between W and Z.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.
top
Y2 X2
H2
heater screen
H1
C A Y1 X1
cathode anode Y-plates X-plates
bottom
path of cathode rays
Fig. 10.1
The cathode rays are represented by the broken line in Fig. 10.1.
(a) Which particles make up cathode rays? ...............................................................................[1]
(b) How does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in
order to
(i) make the cathode hot, .................... and .................... [1]
(ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube, .................... and .................... [1]
(iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen. .................... and .................... [1]
(d) In (c)(iii), which of the two terminals should be made
(i) positive, ................................................
(ii) negative? .............................................

[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
17
11 Fig. 11.1 represents the atomic structure of three neutral atoms.
B B B
C
A A C A
C
nucleus nucleus nucleus
hydrogen deuterium tritium
Fig. 11.1
(a) What letter in Fig. 11.1 is used to represent
(i) an electron, ...................................
(ii) a proton, ........................................
(iii) a neutron? .....................................

[2]
(b) State the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ............... [1]
(c) All three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol H. Hydrogen can be represented
in nuclide notation as 11 H .
Write down the nuclide notation for
(i) deuterium, ................................................
(ii) tritium. .......................................................

[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
18
12 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
blue face
Fig. 12.1
Throwing large numbers of dice represents radioactive decay.
The 350 dice are thrown on a bench. All those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are
removed. They are regarded as having “decayed”.
The remaining dice are then thrown again, and the “blue-uppermost” dice are removed. This
process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.
The table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw.
throw 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
number of dice 350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35
remaining
On Fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.
(a) On Fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]
(b) (i) Complete the sentence below.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei
of the original sort to ................................... its original value. [1]
(ii) Throwing dice obeys the same laws as radioactive decay.
From your graph in Fig. 12.2, find the “half-life” of dice, showing clearly on Fig. 12.2 how
you obtained your answer.
“half-life” of dice = .................................... throws [3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
19
350
300
number of
dice
remaining
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
throw number
Fig. 12.2
(iii) The experiment is repeated with 800 dice.
1. Suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.
...........................................................................................................................................
2. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/O/N/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

answer.
can be scored.
a dependent mark.
given.
similar.
transformer.
applies.

PMT

Arithmetic errors

PMT

1 (a) last 2 boxes ticked B2
(b) (i) 267 (g) B1
(ii) LHS goes down OR RHS goes up B1
(iii) density = mass / volume, in any form e.g. words, symbols, numbers C1
267 / 30 C1
8.9 A1
g / cm3 B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) 2800 (N) B1
(b) (i) straight line B1

line slopes down M1
clearly indicated on axes 36 (m / s) and 18 (s) A1
(ii) area under graph OR

distance = (average) speed × time, in any form C1
½ × 36 × 18 C1
324 (m) A1
[Total: 7]
3 (a) any two from:

waves
wind
hydro(electric)
tidal
geothermal
solar
biofuel / biomass
wood B2
(b) any two from:

coal
oil OR any stated refined fuel
(natural) gas
nuclear B2
(c) (i) gravitational potential (energy) B1
(ii) water falls / drops OR GPE transferred to KE B1

spins / turns / moves turbine /generator B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

4 (a) evaporation B1
(b) molecules escape (from the surface) M1

if they gain / have enough energy owtte A1
(c) more energetic / faster molecules escape B1

lower (average) energy (results in lower temperature)
OR energy flows from metal into water causing metal to cool B1
[Total: 6]
5 B1
B1
x B1
B1
x B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) (i) ice M1

pure OR melting A1
(ii) boiling water OR steam M1
(b) solid B1
(c) any two from:

resistance of thermistor
pressure / volume / expansion of a gas
volume / length / expansion of a solid / metal
e.m.f. of a thermocouple
colour of a surface / liquid crystal
melting point of waxes
density of liquid (in Galileo thermometer) B2
[Total: 6]
7 (a) (i) tape measure OR laser measure OR trundle wheel B1
(ii) stopwatch / stopclock B1
(b) reaction time owtte OR delay in hearing sound B1
(c) (i) (speed =) distance ÷ time C1

100 ÷ 12.5 C1
8.0 (m / s) A1

PMT

(ii) acceleration (at the start) or similar idea

OR indication of slowing down at the end (due to tiredness) B1
(d) (i) 200 m – 500 m B1
(ii) means of signalling when gun fired such as dropped arm or smoke seen B1
[Total: 9]
8 (a) (maximum) angle of incidence B1

for a ray to be just refracted / emerge OR resulting in an angle of refraction of 90o B1
beyond this angle the ray is totally internally reflected
OR ray travelling from (optically) dense medium to less dense medium B1
(b) ray at A: one emergent ray and one reflected ray B1

refracted away from normal B1
ray at B: one reflected ray only B1
angle of reflection is 50° by eye B1
[Total: 7]
9 (a) potential difference B1
(b) (i) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 in any form C1

80 (V) A1
(ii) 1. zero OR 0 (V) M1

2. idea of requirement of varying field / flux linkage A1
[Total: 6]
10 (a) volts OR V B1
(b) A and V in correct circles B1
(c) S OR symbol for variable resistor M1

variable resistor OR rheostat A1
(d) (i) points correctly plotted to ½ small square B1

good best-fit straight line through all points B1

PMT

(ii) use of any V from table / graph OR large triangle drawn on graph C1
calculation using V / I OR gradient calculation C1
5.2 – 5.8 (Ω) A1
[Total: 9]
11 (a) background OR reasonable source of background B1
(b) 592 – 85 OR 507 seen OR used B1

507 / 3 accept 592 / 3 (i.e. background not deducted) C1
169 counts / min accept 197.3 counts / min (i.e. background not deducted) A1
Note: a candidate who does not deduct background but whose answer is otherwise
correct will gain two marks.
(c) (i) 85 OR “approx. 85” B1
(ii) aluminium absorbs (β) radiation OR stops (β) radiation B1

only background count left OR reading goes back to value in (a) B1
[Total: 7]
12 (a) 5 B1
(b) (i) 9 B1
(ii) 4 B1
(c) electrons B1
[Total: 4]

PMT

* 0 7 5 6 6 7 2 3 4 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (AC/SW) 81803/5
PMT
1 (a) Which two conditions apply for an object on Earth to be in equilibrium? Tick two boxes.
there are no forces acting on the object
the object has no mass
there is no resultant force on the object
there is no resultant moment

[2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a simplified diagram of a balance with equal arms.
Fig. 1.1
A copper block of unknown mass is placed on the left-hand pan. Six standard masses, placed
on the right-hand pan, cause the balance to be in equilibrium, with the beam horizontal.
The six standard masses on the right-hand pan are:
100 g, 100 g, 50 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g
(i) What is the mass of the copper block?
mass = ........................................... g [1]
(ii) What will be seen to happen if the 2 g mass is removed from the right-hand pan?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The volume of the copper block is 30 cm3.

Calculate the density of copper. State the unit in your answer.
density = ................................................. [4]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14
PMT
2 A car travels along a straight, horizontal road at a steady speed of 36 m / s. The total resistive force
on the car is 2800 N, as represented on Fig. 2.1.
36 m / s
2800 N
resistive driving
force force
Fig. 2.1
(a) The speed of the car is constant at 36 m / s.
What is the value of the driving force?
driving force = ........................................... N [1]
(b) Later in the journey, the car’s speed decreases uniformly from 36 m / s to zero in 18 s.
(i) On the axes in Fig. 2.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the motion of the car during
these 18 s. Mark 36 m / s and 18 s clearly on your graph.
speed
m/s
0
0
time / s [3]
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Determine the distance travelled by the car in these 18 s.
distance = .......................................... m [3]
[Total: 7]

PMT
3 (a) State two sources of energy that are renewable.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two sources of energy that will eventually run out or become uneconomic to extract.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) In a hydroelectric power station, water is stored high up behind a dam.
(i) State the type of energy stored by the water.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain what happens to the water in order to generate electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
4 Some water forms a shallow puddle on a metal surface in a laboratory, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
puddle of water
metal surface
Fig. 4.1
Later in the day, it is noticed that the puddle has disappeared and the metal surface is dry.
(a) Which process has caused the disappearance of the puddle? Tick one box.
boiling
condensation
evaporation
freezing
[1]
(b) In terms of molecules, describe how this process occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) When this process occurs, it causes cooling.
In terms of molecules, explain why this cooling occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
5 Here are some statements about forces.
Some statements are correct. Put a tick () in the box alongside each of these.
Other statements are false. Put a cross () in the box alongside each of these.
On Earth, an object has weight due to a force acting towards the Earth.
Work is done when an object moves in the direction of the force acting on it.
When a single force acts on an object, it moves at constant speed.
If the only forces acting on an object are two equal and opposite forces in the same
straight line, then the object is in equilibrium.
An object at rest always has no forces acting on it.

[5]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
6 (a) A laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer has a range from –10 °C to 110 °C.
Describe what you would do to check the accuracy of
(i) the 0 °C mark on the thermometer,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) the 100 °C mark on the thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The temperature of some water is reduced to –10 °C.
In which state is the water at this temperature? ....................................................................[1]
(c) The measurement of temperature can be carried out using any physical property that changes
with temperature. Two examples are given below.
the volume of a liquid

the resistance of a wire
Add two more examples. You may re-use words from the examples if you wish, but you do not
have to do so.
1. the of
2. the of
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
7 Four school athletes are about to run a 100 m race, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
starter
starting pistol
timekeeper
100 m A
B
winning line
The runners start at A, when the starter fires the starting pistol, and they finish at B.
(a) Suggest what equipment
(i) the groundsman used when he measured out the 100 m before marking the track,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the timekeeper uses to time how long the runners take to run the 100 m.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The timing instrument is known to work correctly.
What might cause the timekeeper to introduce an inaccuracy into the timing of the race?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
(c) The winner takes 12.5 s to run the race.
(i) Calculate the average speed of the winner.
average speed = ...................................... m / s [3]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the average speed of the winner is less than his top speed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) On another occasion, the starter and timekeeper decide to measure the speed of the sound
from the gun. They use the same equipment they used to time the race.
(i) Suggest how far apart they should be. ...............................................................................
(ii) Suggest how the timekeeper would know when to start timing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a section through the swimming pool in a hotel.
To make the pool more attractive at night, there are submerged lamps in the pool. Fig. 8.1 shows
three rays coming from one of these lamps.
air
A B
40° 50°
30°
water
lamp
Fig. 8.1
The critical angle for the water/air boundary is 48 °.
(a) State what is meant by the critical angle for a ray of light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, use your ruler to draw approximate paths for the rays after they reach the surface
at A and B. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
11
9 (a) Which electrical quantity does a voltmeter measure? Tick one box.
current
power
resistance
[1]
(b) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 has 600 turns on its primary coil AB, and 400 turns on its secondary
coil CD.
iron core
A
C
D
B

600 turns 400 turns
Fig. 9.1
(i) AB is connected to a 120 V alternating mains supply. An a.c. voltmeter is connected

across CD.
Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = .............................................. V [3]
(ii) A large number of cells are connected in series, to make a 120 V battery.
The mains supply is disconnected from AB, and the 120 V battery is connected in its
place.
1. State the voltage across CD. ..........................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
PMT
12
10 A student is attempting to measure the resistance of a resistor R. To do this, she connects the
circuit of Fig. 10.1.
E S
Fig. 10.1
(a) The letter E on Fig. 10.1 represents the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.
In which unit is E measured? ............................................................ [1]
(b) The circles on Fig. 10.1 represent a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Write V and A in the appropriate circles, to show which meter is which. [1]
(c) The battery cannot be changed.
(i) Write down the label of the component that is used to vary the current in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is this component called?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The table below gives the readings obtained by the student for different currents.
ammeter reading / A 0 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.00

voltmeter reading / V 0 1.15 1.65 2.65 4.10 5.55
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
13
(i) On Fig. 10.2, draw a graph of these values. The first two points have been plotted for you.
[2]
voltmeter reading / V
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
ammeter reading / A
Fig. 10.2
(ii) Use your graph to find a value for the resistance of R.
resistance = .......................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
11 The radiation detector and counter in Fig. 11.1 are being used to count particles from a radioactive
source.
counter
X Y
radiation detector
Fig. 11.1
Each time the counter is used to make a measurement, it is first reset to zero and then left switched
on for 3 minutes.
(a) With no radioactive source anywhere near the radiation detector, after being switched on for 3
minutes the reading on the counter is 85 counts.
Suggest what radiation caused this reading.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A radioactive source emitting β-particles is placed at X. After 3 minutes, the counter reads
592 counts.
Calculate the average count rate, in counts / min, from the radioactive source.
count rate = ........................... counts / min [3]
(c) The β-particle source is left at X and a block of aluminium 4 cm thick is placed at Y.
(i) Suggest what the counter would read on this occasion, after 3 minutes.
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer to (c)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
15
12 Fig. 12.1 is a very simple representation of the structure of an atom.
–
nucleus
+
– + –
+
+
Fig. 12.1
The broken circle indicates the nucleus, and the particles inside this broken circle are the particles
in the nucleus.
Charged particles are marked + or –. Uncharged particles are shown as empty circles.
(a) State the number of neutrons in this atom. ........................................................................ [1]
(b) State
(i) the nucleon number of the atom, ......................................................................................
(ii) the proton number of the atom. ......................................................................................

[2]
(c) What name is given to the negatively-charged particles? .................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

answer.
can be scored.
a dependent mark.
given.
similar.
transformer.
applies.

PMT

Arithmetic errors

PMT

1 (a) rule alongside spring B1
set zero at one end and read scale at other end

OR take scale reading at each end and subtract B1
extra valid detail, e.g. rule close to and parallel with spring, use of marker/set-
square, eye level with reading etc. B1
(b) 3 OR 3.0 (cm) B1
(c) 0.8 (N) ignore negative sign B1

up(wards), accept arrow upwards B1
[Total: 6]
2 (a) 5000 (g) B1
(b) density = mass / volume in any form OR (volume =) mass / density C1

5000 / 7.81 OR 5 / 7.81 OR 0.64, ecf from (a) C1
640 (cm3), accept 6.4 × 10 4 if clearly stated in m3 A1
[Total: 4]
3 (a) force (exerted), distance (moved), either order B1 + B1

time (taken) B1
(b) energy lost / wasted / transferred (to surroundings) OR inefficiency B1

suitable cause for energy lost e.g. friction, heat, sound, moving parts B1
[Total: 5]

PMT

4 (a) (i) temperature (of solid) rising OR (solid) expanding

NOT any indication of melting / turning into liquid,
accept particles gain k.e. / vibrate more B1
(ii) melting owtte B1
(iii) temperature of liquid rising OR liquid expanding

accept liquid particles gain k.e. / move faster / more B1
(b) ice needs (thermal) energy/heat to melt / overcome intermolecular forces M1
takes this energy from drink B1
(c) (i) (temperature) increases / gets hotter M1
steam transfers thermal energy/heat / supplies energy (to water), accept

steam loses (latent) heat (as it condenses) A1
(ii) increases M1
steam condenses/turns into water OR gas molecules become liquid

molecules A1
[Total: 9]
5 (a) echo OR sound reflected (from rock face) B1
(b) speed = distance / time in any form OR (distance =) speed × time C1

330 × 1.8 OR 330 × 0.9 OR 594 C1
297 (m) accept 2 or 3 sig. figs. A1
(c) 0.9 (s) B1
(d) any two from:

(sound is) longitudinal / light is transverse
(sound) travels more slowly / light travels faster
(sound) has lower frequency / longer wavelength accept reverse for light
(sound) cannot travel through a vacuum / light can travel in a vacuum
(sound is a) mechanical/pressure wave OR is not electromagnetic / light is
electromagnetic B2
[Total: 7]

PMT

6 (a) (i) rub rod with cloth B1
(ii) any suitable test,

e.g. picks up/attracts paper, hair, stream of water etc. OR using electroscope
OR attracts/repels an object known to be charged B1
(b) any two from:

friction/rubbing (between clothing and seat)
lady becomes charged
discharged when touches handle, accept charge travels through/to/from lady
(from/to handle) / charge is earthed B2
[Total: 4]
7 (a) (i) a line between F2 or F1 and C ±3 mm C1

a line between F2 or F1 and C ±1 mm A1
(ii) refraction either at centre line OR at both surfaces, B1

parallel after lens OR reaches tip of image B1
(b) bottom box ticked: at I B1
(c) (i) closer to F1 / C / lens / F2 NOT closer to object B1
(ii) smaller / reduced / diminished B1
[Total: 7]
8 (a) (i) variable resistor B1
(ii) adjust/change/vary/control the current/voltage, ignore vary resistance B1
(b) (i) top box ticked: charge B1
(ii) A or amp(s) or ampere(s), condone a, ignore I, NOT ammeter B1
(c) (R =) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 12 C1
20 (Ω) A1
(d) (i) R1 and R2 clearly shown in parallel (between X and Y) M1

rest of circuit including R1 and R2 correct A1
note: short circuit across resistors loses both marks
(ii) parallel B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

9 (a) (i) core B1
(ii) iron NOT steel, accept ferrite B1

250 A1
(c) reduced brightness / dimmer M1

fewer (than 250) turns A1
lower voltage, accept smaller/lower current A1
(d) lamp would blow/burn out B1

accept blow up / glow extremely
[Total: 9]
10 (a) electrons B1
(b) glows or equivalent e.g. (spot of) light / fluorescence B1
(c) (i) H1 and H2 both, either order B1
(ii) A and C both, either order B1
(iii) Y1 and Y2 both, either order B1
(d) (i) Y2 OR top

both B1
(ii) Y1 OR bottom
[Total: 6]

PMT

11 (a) (i) B B1
(ii) A
both correct B1
(iii) C
(b) 3 B1
2
(c) 1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
3
1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
[Total: 5]
12 (a) all 5 points plotted ± ½ small square -1 e.e.o.o. B2
smooth best-fit single line curve through most of the points, not joining points dot
to dot B1
(b) (i) half / 50% / 0.5 / ½ B1
(ii) indication of correct use of graph B1
idea of halving, e.g. 175 or mark at 175 on graph, NOT halving number of
days, i.e. 7 C1
3.4 – 4.0, accept nearest integer from candidate’s graph A1
(iii) 1. candidate’s (ii) OR integer either side of candidate’s (ii) M1

2. half-life not affected by sample size / starting point
accept idea that half-life does not change. A1
[Total: 9]

PMT

* 7 5 5 3 8 0 8 0 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SW) 98699
PMT
1 A student hangs a spring vertically from a hook, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
12.0 cm 15.0 cm
2.0 N
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung
from the hook.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) With no load, the spring is 12.0 cm long.
With a load of 2.0 N on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.
Calculate the extension of the spring.
extension = ......................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
(c) The load is attached to the spring and then released.
Fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released.
2.8 N
2.0 N
Fig. 1.2
Calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.
resultant force = ................................................... N
direction = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

PMT
2 A steel object has 5 kg stamped on its side, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
5 kg
Fig. 2.1
(a) Express 5.0 kg in grams. 5.0 kg = ............................................ g [1]
(b) The density of the steel is 7.81 g / cm3.
Calculate the volume of the object.
volume = ........................................cm3 [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
3 (a) Use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.
initial acceleration
distance moved
force exerted
potential energy
time taken
An object is dragged across a rough surface. In order to find the work done on the object, it is
necessary to know the ............................................. and the ............................................. .
To calculate the power, it is also necessary to know the ............................................. . [3]
(b) A machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is
involved in.
Suggest why this is so.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
4 (a) Thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. The temperature of the
substance varies with time as shown in Fig. 4.1.
D
temperature
B C
time
Fig. 4.1
At the temperature indicated by point A on Fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.
State what is happening to the substance
(i) in the region AB,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) in the region BC,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii) in the region CD.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Suggest why ice at 0 °C is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at
0 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
(c) Steam is pumped into cold water in a container.
(i) State and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. She has a flat piece of wood
in each hand.
rock face
When the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. A short time later
she hears the sound again.
(a) Why does she hear this second sound?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.
Calculate the distance of the girl from the rock face.
distance = ........................................... m [3]
(c) A boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.
How long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?
time interval = ............................................ s [1]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
(d) State two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
10
6 (a) Describe
(i) how a dry cloth can be used to charge a plastic rod,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the rod may be tested to check that it is charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. She gets out of the car. She touches
the door handle when her feet are on the ground. She experiences an electric shock.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
11
7 Fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.
C I
O
F2 F1
Fig. 7.1
F1 and F2 are the two principal focuses of the lens. The object is at O and its image is at I.
(a) On Fig. 7.1,
(i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]
(ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through F2, until it reaches
the image. [2]
(b) Where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? Tick one box.
at F2
at C
at F1
at I
[1]
(c) The object is moved a small distance away from the lens.
State what this causes to happen to
(i) the position of the image,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
8 The electric circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.
X R1 R2 Y
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Name the component that is shown in Fig. 8.1 by the symbol .
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the function of this component in the circuit?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? Tick one box.
charge
power
resistance
(ii) In which unit do we measure current? ...............................................................................

[2]
(c) Resistor R1 has a resistance of 8 Ω and resistor R2 has a resistance of 12 Ω.
Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2 when arranged as in Fig. 8.1.
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
13
(d) R1 and R2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between X and Y, so that they
have a different combined resistance.
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit showing R1 and R2 connected in this different way.
[2]
(ii) What word is used to describe this different way of connecting R1 and R2?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a
240 V mains supply.
240 V X
Y
Z

500 turns 500 turns
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.
Electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, W, X, Y and Z.
(a) The piece of metal P provides a magnetic link between the coils.
State
(i) the name of this part of the transformer, ............................................................................
(ii) the metal from which P is made. .......................................................................................

[2]
(b) A lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 V supply, lights normally when
connected between W and X.
Calculate the number of turns between W and X.
number of turns = ...................................................[3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
15
(c) The lamp in (b) is connected between X and Y.
Describe and explain what happens to the lamp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) State what would happen if the 120 V lamp in (b) is connected between W and Z.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

PMT
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.
top
Y2 X2
H2
heater screen
H1
C A Y1 X1
cathode anode Y-plates X-plates
bottom
path of cathode rays
Fig. 10.1
The cathode rays are represented by the broken line in Fig. 10.1.
(a) Which particles make up cathode rays? ...............................................................................[1]
(b) How does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in
order to
(i) make the cathode hot, .................... and .................... [1]
(ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube, .................... and .................... [1]
(iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen. .................... and .................... [1]
(d) In (c)(iii), which of the two terminals should be made
(i) positive, ................................................
(ii) negative? .............................................

[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
17
11 Fig. 11.1 represents the atomic structure of three neutral atoms.
B B B
C
A A C A
C
nucleus nucleus nucleus
hydrogen deuterium tritium
Fig. 11.1
(a) What letter in Fig. 11.1 is used to represent
(i) an electron, ...................................
(ii) a proton, ........................................
(iii) a neutron? .....................................

[2]
(b) State the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ............... [1]
(c) All three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol H. Hydrogen can be represented
in nuclide notation as 11 H .
Write down the nuclide notation for
(i) deuterium, ................................................
(ii) tritium. .......................................................

[2]
[Total: 5]

PMT
18
12 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
blue face
Fig. 12.1
Throwing large numbers of dice represents radioactive decay.
The 350 dice are thrown on a bench. All those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are
removed. They are regarded as having “decayed”.
The remaining dice are then thrown again, and the “blue-uppermost” dice are removed. This
process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.
The table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw.
throw 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
number of dice 350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35
remaining
On Fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.
(a) On Fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]
(b) (i) Complete the sentence below.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei
of the original sort to ................................... its original value. [1]
(ii) Throwing dice obeys the same laws as radioactive decay.
From your graph in Fig. 12.2, find the “half-life” of dice, showing clearly on Fig. 12.2 how
you obtained your answer.
“half-life” of dice = .................................... throws [3]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
19
350
300
number of
dice
remaining
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
throw number
Fig. 12.2
(iii) The experiment is repeated with 800 dice.
1. Suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/O/N/14

PMT

0625 PHYSICS
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most

PMT

answer.
which shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
given.
working, he or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This
prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but
only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
owtte means “or words to that effect”
OR indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities,
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except
where the mark scheme specifies otherwise.
commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.

PMT

otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate. i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) measuring OR graduated cylinder B1
(ii) balance B1
(b) Honey has a larger density than water. B1

Kerosene has a smaller density than water. B1
(c) density = mass / volume in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

10.5 / 13 C1
0.81 A1
g / cm3 B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) (i) calculation seen using times from cameras A and B C1

160 (s) A1
(ii) speed = distance / time in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

5000 / 160 C1
31.3 (m / s) A1
(iii) much slower than between A and B B1
(b) less / lower than suggested speed limit B1

either reference to just over limit between cameras A and B B1
then much slower speed, so average below limit B1
OR average speed over 10 000 m is about 15 m / s (for B2)
[Total: 9]
3 (a) three lines required: B1

• line from solid to bottom pattern
• line from liquid to middle pattern
• line from gas to top pattern
(b) (i) any two from: B2

• energy needed to turn liquid into a gas
• remaining perfume / liquid / particles have lower energy
• energy transfers from arm to perfume (cooling arm)
(ii) particles move / evaporate faster (when hotter) B1

collisions (with stopper) harder / more often B1
pressure greater (inside than outside) OR
force on stopper (from perfume) greater than friction + stopper weight B1
[Total: 6]

PMT


• microwave not heard / sound is heard
• sound is slower / longitudinal wave or signal is transverse
• sound needs medium / cannot travel through a vacuum
• signal is electromagnetic wave owtte
• sound has longer wavelength / lower frequency
(b) (i) reflected B1
(ii) diffracted B1
[Total: 4]
5 (a) 100 (°C) B1

0 (°C) B1
(b) thermometer (bulb) placed in ice C1

melting ice OR ice and water mixture A1
(c) expansion B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) wind B1
(b) electrical B1
light B1
(c) (i) dark B1

no wind / calm B1
(ii) (back-up / rechargeable) battery B1
(d) gravitational potential (energy) B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

7 (a) A: arrow pointing left / away from N B1

C: arrow pointing left / same as A B1
B and D: arrow pointing right B1
(b) correct field lines carefully drawn through B and D B1
(c) steel B1
[Total: 5]
8 (a) (i) any two from: B2

• (small current in) relay coil produces magnetic field
• relay coil attracts armature
• starter motor connected across battery p.d.
(ii) lower (electrical) resistance B1

less heating (in cable) B1
(b) (i) 1.2 (A) B1
(ii) if a lamp fails other will work OR

each lamp can be controlled by a switch B1
[Total: 6]
9 (a) (i) thermistor correctly labelled B1
(ii) correct symbol for voltmeter B1

voltmeter in parallel with thermistor OR e.c.f. (a)(i) B1
(b) (i) R = V / I in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

6.0 / 0.004 OR 6.0 / 4.0 C1
1500 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) B1
(ii) not a straight line / constant gradient OR not through origin B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

10 (a) resistance of LDR decreases M1

current increases A1
(b) (i) ray from object parallel to axis M1

ray continued correctly through F A1
(ii) second ray correctly drawn through centre of lens OR through F B1

intersection of two or more rays B1
(iii) image at intersection drawn and labelled correctly A1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) Gamma / γ B1
(b) (i) nucleon (accept mass) B1

proton (accept atomic) B1
(ii) A = 4 B1
Z=2 B1
(iii) alpha / α (particle) B1
[Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) turbine B1

• produces sulfur oxides / nitrous oxides
• produces carbon dioxide
• (fossil fuels / they) are non-renewable / not sustainable (resources)
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 C1
115 / 25 × 500 C1
2300 A1
(c) smaller current (in transmission cables) B1

smaller heating effect (in transmission cables) B1
less energy wasted (in) / more efficient (transmission) B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

* 9 4 8 2 3 6 4 4 4 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CGW) 96018/4
PMT
1 A student investigates the density of three different liquids.
The student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the container shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. The liquids do not mix
but form three separate layers as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
50
kerosene
40
30
water
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
Identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. Tick only two boxes.
Honey has the smallest density.
Honey has a larger density than water.
Kerosene has the largest density.
Kerosene has a smaller density than water.
Water has a larger density than honey.
Water has a smaller density than kerosene.

[2]
(c) The mass of 13 cm3 of the kerosene is 10.5 g.
Calculate the density of the kerosene, including an appropriate unit.
density = .................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 Cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. Each camera records the
exact time that a car passes the camera.
Fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes.
camera A camera B camera C
h min s h min s h min s

08 : 43 : 17 08 : 45 : 57 08 : 54 : 20
(a) (i) Calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera A and camera B. State your
answer in seconds.
time taken = ............................................... s [2]
(ii) The cameras are placed 5000 m apart.
Calculate the average speed of the car between camera A and camera B.
average speed = .......................................... m / s [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
(iii) Using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between
camera B and camera C. Tick one box.
slightly slower than between A and B
much slower than between A and B
same as between A and B
slightly faster than between A and B
much faster than between A and B

[1]
(b) The speed limit for the road is 30 m / s.
Use your answers to (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to estimate whether the car’s average speed was
greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera A and camera C. Explain
how you decided on your answer.
estimate ....................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
3 (a) There are three states of matter.
Draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the
arrangement of the particles in that state of matter.
state of matter diagram
solid
liquid
gas
[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a perfume bottle.
plastic
stopper
air and
vapour
perfume
perfume
bottle
Fig. 3.1
(i) A student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. She notices that her arm feels
cold as the perfume evaporates.
Explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
(ii) When the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the
bottle.
Suggest why the stopper pops out of the bottle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 A student has a mobile (cell) phone. The phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces
a ring tone.
(a) State two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound
wave produced when the phone rings.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. The waves interact with a wall,
and a doorway, in the room.
view from above
mobile phone
doorway
wall
With reference to Fig. 4.1, complete each of the following sentences using a word from the
box below.
diffracted dispersed reflected refracted
(i) When the waves hit the wall, the waves are .............................................................. . [1]
(ii) When the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are ...................................... . [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.
Fig. 5.1
The thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range −10 °C to 110 °C. There is
no scale on the thermometer.
(a) The scale is added using fixed points.
State the temperature of each of the fixed points used.
upper fixed point = .................................................. °C
lower fixed point = .................................................. °C

[2]
(b) Describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.
Tick one box.
colour
expansion
pressure
resistance
[1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a sign used to warn drivers of a road hazard.
solar
panels
SLOW
DOWN
Fig. 6.1
The sign lights up as cars approach.
(a) The sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.
Identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. Tick the correct box.
chemical
geothermal
light
wind [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when
the sign is operating using solar energy.
solar energy ................................. ................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
11
(c) (i) In certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.
State these conditions.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The sign needs to be able to operate at all times.
Suggest a way of overcoming the problem identified in (c)(i).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) After passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.
State the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet.
paper
A
N magnet S C
Fig. 7.1
The bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. A plotting compass is placed in each of the four
positions labelled A, B, C and D.
The plotting compass is a small pivoted magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
plotting
compass
S N
pivot
pointer
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
13
(a) In each of positions A, B, C and D on Fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of
the pointer. Ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position B and the
other through position D. The lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]
(c) State the material from which a permanent magnet is made.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows part of a wiring diagram for a car.
starter
motor
M
S relay
coil
Fig. 8.1
When the driver closes switch S, there is a current of 200 A in the starter motor.
(a) (i) Explain how closing switch S causes the starter motor to operate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire
connecting the switch S to the battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
15
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows part of a lighting circuit for a car.
12 V P
fuse
Fig. 8.2
(i) The switch is closed. There is a current of 1.2 A in the fuse.
State the current at point P.
current = .............................................. A [1]
(ii) The lights of the car are connected in parallel.
State one reason for connecting lights in parallel.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
9 A student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. Fig. 9.1
shows the circuit that the student uses.
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Label clearly the thermistor in Fig. 9.1. [1]

(ii) On Fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that the resistance of the thermistor can be
determined. [2]
(b) The student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. The
results are shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
temperature of thermistor / °C 0 10 20 30 40 50
current in thermistor / mA 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5
(i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 V at 20 °C.
Calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 °C. Include the unit.
resistance = .................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
17
(ii) Fig. 9.2 shows the student’s results plotted on a graph.
25
20
current in
thermistor /
mA
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
temperature / °C
Fig. 9.2
The student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the
temperature of the thermistor.
Explain how the graph shown in Fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
18
10 A camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 10.1 shows part of this
circuit.
6V
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe what happens to the resistance of the LDR and the current in the LDR when a bright
light is shone on the LDR.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A camera lens is used to produce an image of an object OX. The arrangement is shown in
Fig. 10.2.
principal axis
O
F F
Fig. 10.2
The principal focuses of the lens are labelled F.
On Fig. 10.2,
(i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through
and beyond the lens, [2]
(ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of OX, [2]
(iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
19
11 Three types of radioactive decay are by the emission of
α - radiation,
β - radiation,
γ - radiation.
(a) State which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A nucleus of americium-241 decays to become a nucleus of neptunium-237 by the emission

of one particle.
The equation below describes the change. The symbol AZ X represents the particle emitted.
241Am 237 Np + AX
95 93 Z
(i) State the name given to each of the numbers A and Z.
A is the ........................................ number.
Z is the ........................................ number.

[2]
(ii) Determine the values of A and Z.
A = .......................................................
Z = .......................................................
[2]
(iii) State the name of the particle emitted.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
20
12 Fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a power station that uses coal.
X generator
boiler transmission
lines
steam
transformer
coal
water
cooling
tower
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i) State the name of the part of the power station labelled X.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two disadvantages of generating electricity using fossil fuels.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The transformer converts the 25 kV output from the generator to 115 kV. The primary coil of
the transformer has 500 turns.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
21
(c) Explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kV.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT
24
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/O/N/15

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

scored.
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark and
the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her subsequent working is
correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated
"e.c.f."
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g.
spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except where
the mark scheme specifies otherwise.

PMT

applies.

PMT


wire not starting at 0 cm
wire not straight
wire away from / not close to rule
(b) (i) 0.65 (cm) B1
(ii) candidate’s (b)(i) / 8 C1

0.8125 OR 0.813 OR e.c.f. C1
0.81 A1
[Total: 6]
2 (a) (i) 10 (m / s) B1
(ii) distance = speed × time OR 10 × 20 C1

200 (m) A1
(iii) 7 (s) B1
(b) (i) 50 (N) B1

forwards B1
(ii) (cyclist is) accelerating / speed increases B1
(iii) move more slowly / speed decreases / decelerates B1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) decreases B1
(b) increases B1
(c) increases B1
(d) increases B1
does not change B1
decreases B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

4 (a) (i) joule / J / kJ B1
(ii) kinetic B1
(iii) heat / thermal B2

sound
(iv) more efficient. B1
(b) greater area (of tyres in contact with ground) B1

less pressure B1
weight / force spread out OR p = F / A B1
[Total: 8]
5 (a) strip bent upwards B1
(b) (i) two fixed points marked B1

ice or steam point stated B1
positions divided by difference in temperature OR the more it bends the higher the
temperature B1
(ii) plausible suggestion, e.g. inaccurate, too large, difficult to calibrate B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) (i) at least two arrows pointing in correct direction B1
(ii) convection B1
(b) hot water expands / water molecules further apart B1

hot water less dense B1
hot water rises B1
cool water falls / takes place of hot water B1
[Total: 6]
7 (a) (i) sound travels slowly B1

sound travels slower than light or reverse argument B1
(ii) reflection of the sound from the cliff B1
(b) evidence of average found / 1.56 OR 1.6 B1

speed = distance / time in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1
500 / 1.6 OR 500 / candidate’s time C1
321 OR e.c.f. A1
[Total: 7]

PMT

8 (a) (i) F2 correctly positioned and labelled B1
(ii) ray through centre C of the lens correctly drawn B1
(iii) second ray correctly drawn through either principal focus and horizontal section,
correct to better than ± 1 small square B1
(iv) position of inverted image shown B1
(b) diminished B3
inverted
real
[Total: 7]
9 (a) (i) a.c. waveform drawn B1
(b) (i) (step-down) transformer B1
(ii) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 B1
4800 / (120 / 10) OR correct substitution C1
400 A1
[Total: 5]
10 (a) (i) iron core becomes an electromagnet B1

(bar magnet is) repelled B1
(ii) steel B1
(b) move pivoted magnet to new position B1

mark direction of arrow OR mark direction N pole points B1
repeat for other positions around magnet B1
[Total: 6]

PMT

11 (a) motor / blower and heater B3

motor / blower only
nothing / none OR left blank
nothing / none OR left blank
Any three correct for 2 marks.

Any two correct for 2 marks.
(b) V = IR B1
(c) 250 / 2 C1
125 (Ω) A1
(d) (i) fuse symbol correct and placed correctly B1
(ii) (fuse) wire melts B1

circuit breaks / incomplete B1
[Total: 9]
12 (a) nature: helium nucleus owttte, (e.g. 2p + 2n) B1

charge: minus 1 / –1 / 1– / negative B1
(b) (i) (α particles) produce more ions ( / cm) B1

(α particles) collide with / are stopped by smoke B1
(ii) 100 years B1
(c) 237 B1
93 B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

* 9 1 7 1 7 6 2 9 3 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CGW) 96017/4
PMT
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
1 A student uses a rule to measure a thin piece of wire as shown in Fig. 1.1.
wire
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cm
Fig. 1.1
The student records the length of the wire as 12.8 cm.
(a) State two errors in the student’s measurement of the length of wire.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The student is asked to measure the thickness of the wire using the same ruler. The student
does this by bending a short length of the wire and measuring distance x as shown in Fig. 1.2.
0
cm
wire
1
x
2
3
Fig. 1.2
(i) Use the ruler in Fig. 1.2 to determine the distance x.
distance x = ............................................ cm [1]
(ii) Calculate the average thickness of the wire, in mm. Give your answer correct to two
significant figures.
average thickness of wire = .......................................... mm [3]
[Total: 6]
PMT
2 Two cyclists, A and B, are riding their bicycles on a flat and straight road.
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows a speed-time graph for the first part of their journey.
20
speed cyclist A
m/s
cyclist B
10
cyclist B
cyclist A
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the speed of cyclist B.
speed = .......................................... m / s [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by cyclist B during the first 20 s.
(iii) Determine the time for which cyclist A was accelerating.
time = .............................................. s [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on cyclist A and his bicycle at one instant.
backwards force forwards force

40 N 90 N
Fig. 2.2
(i) Calculate the resultant force acting on cyclist A and his bicycle.
force = .................................................... N
direction = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the effect of this resultant force on the cyclist’s motion.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) At time t = 20 s, the backwards force on the cyclist increases suddenly to 100 N. The
forwards force remains the same at 90 N.
State the immediate effect on the cyclist’s motion.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
3 The following statements are about solids, liquids and gases.
Complete each of the statements by adding in the spaces the words decreases, increases or
does not change.
(a) When a liquid evaporates, the more energetic molecules escape from the surface and the
temperature of the remaining liquid ........................................... . [1]
(b) When the volume of a gas is decreased at constant temperature, the pressure of the gas
........................................... . [1]
(c) When the temperature of a gas is increased at constant volume, the pressure of the gas
........................................... . [1]
(d) When a metal block is heated, the volume of the block ........................................... , the mass of
the block ........................................... and the density of the block ........................................... .

[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a farmer driving a tractor that has a diesel engine.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State the unit of energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the useful energy obtained from the diesel engine as the tractor starts to move.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State two other forms of energy output from the diesel engine.
...................................................... and ...................................................... [2]
(iv) Complete the following sentence by ticking one box.
Modern diesel engines waste less energy than older diesel engines. This means modern
diesel engines are
faster.
more efficient.
more reliable.
[1]
(b) The tractor in Fig. 4.1 is a lot heavier than a car. A car sinks into soft ground. The tractor does
not sink.
Explain why this is.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

PMT
5 A bimetallic strip is made from two metals, brass and invar, stuck together. A student clamps the
bimetallic strip, as shown in Fig. 5.1, and heats the end.
clamp invar
brass
clamp stand
heat
Fig. 5.1
When the bimetallic strip is heated, the brass expands more than the invar. The bimetallic strip
bends.
(a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the position of the strip after it has been heated. [1]
(b) (i) Suggest how the bimetallic strip may be used to measure temperature. Include the idea
of fixed points.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest one reason why, in practice, a thermometer using this bimetallic strip would be
difficult to use.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a piece of apparatus used to show the transfer of thermal energy in liquids.
crystals coloured water
glass water
tube
heat
Fig. 6.1
The glass tube is filled with cold water. Crystals that dissolve slowly are inserted into the bottom of
the tube. The water around the crystals becomes coloured.
When the glass tube is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1, the coloured water moves.
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.1, draw arrows indicating the direction of movement of the water in each section
of the tube. [1]
(ii) State the name of this method of thermal energy transfer in the water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why the water moves in this way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 6]

PMT
10
7 A battle re-enactment enables observers to see and hear an old cannon being fired.
Fig. 7.1 shows the battle site and the distant cliffs.
cliffs
cannon
observers
valley
500 m
The cannon is fired. Observers see the smoke and then hear the bang.
(a) (i) Explain why there is a short delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the bang of
the cannon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) An observer notices that, after the cannon is fired, she hears a loud bang and then a
quieter bang a short time later.
Tick one box to identify the reason for the second bang.
diffraction of the sound in the valley
dispersion of the sound in the valley
reflection of the sound from the cliff
refraction of the sound from the cliff [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
11
(b) Another observer is standing 500 m away from the cannon. He uses a stopwatch to measure
the time delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the first bang. His timings are shown in
the table.
measurement time delay / s

1 1.9
2 1.5
3 1.3
4 1.4
5 1.7
Use the measurements in the table to calculate an accurate value for the speed of the sound
produced by the cannon.
speed of sound = .......................................... m / s [4]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens.
object
C
F1
Fig. 8.1
The principal focus on the left hand side of the lens is labelled F1.
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, clearly mark the position of the principal focus on the right hand side of the
lens and label it F2.
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw a ray from the top of the object that passes through the
centre C of the lens. Continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through a
principal focus. Continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.
(iv) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw the position of the image produced.
[4]
(b) Which of the following words describe the image produced? Tick all that are correct.
diminished
enlarged
inverted
upright
real
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
13
9 A child has an electric car racing game. The game operates from a 120 V a.c. supply.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, sketch a graph showing how voltage output varies with time for an a.c. supply.
Fig. 9.1 [1]
(b) (i) A device is used to change the 120 V supply to the 10 V needed by the toy cars.
State the name of the device.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The device used in part (b)(i) has a primary coil consisting of 4800 turns.
turns on secondary coil = .................................................. [3]
[Total: 5]

PMT
14
10 A coil is wound on an iron core. A student places a permanent bar magnet near the coil, as shown
in Fig. 10.1.
d.c.
supply
switch
bar magnet
N S
iron core
Fig. 10.1
When the switch is closed, the bar magnet moves away from the coil.
(a) (i) Explain why the magnet moves away.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The iron core is replaced with a new core. When the current is switched on, this new core
becomes a permanent magnet.
State the name of the material used for the new core.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows apparatus used to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet. The bar magnet is placed on a piece of card. A small pivoted magnet, with N-pole
and S-pole as shown in Fig. 10.3, is placed near the magnet.
card
bar magnet
pivoted N S
magnet
Fig. 10.2
S N
pivot
Fig. 10.3
Starting from the arrangement shown in Fig. 10.2, describe how the apparatus is used to
produce a pattern of the field lines around the bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
11 Hair dryers are used by many people. Fig. 11.1 shows an example of a hair dryer.
blower heater
hot
motor air
Fig. 11.1
The hair dryer has two switches, one for the heater, the other for the motor that operates the
blower. Fig. 11.2 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the hair dryer.
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete the table identifying which of the circuit’s components, if any, is operating.
switch S switch T component or components operating

closed closed
closed open
open closed
open open
[3]
(b) State the equation that links potential difference (p.d.), current and resistance.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
17
(c) The current in the heater is 2.0 A when the potential difference across the heater is 250 V.
Calculate the resistance of the heater.
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
(d) The hair dryer circuit contains a fuse.
(i) On Fig. 11.2, draw the symbol for a fuse between the power supply and switch S. [1]
(ii) State what happens if a fault develops in the hair dryer, causing a large current in the
circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

PMT
18
12 A smoke detector contains a source of ionising radiation.
(a) Different types of ionising radiation have different properties, as shown in the table.
name nature charge

α-particle 2+
β-particle an electron
γ-ray electromagnetic wave zero
Complete the table by filling in the two blank spaces. [2]
(b) A smoke detector is placed in a building to warn people if there is a fire.
(i) Fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a smoke detector.
charged alarm
_ air circuit
metal plates _ _
ï
_-particle
source
Fig. 12.1
The α-particles ionise the air inside the smoke detector. This results in a small current
between the charged metal plates.
When smoke enters the smoke detector the current decreases and an alarm sounds.
Explain why α-particles are used rather than β-particles or γ-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
19
(ii) Suggest which of the following times would be a suitable half-life for the source of
α-particles used in the smoke detector. Tick one box.
100 minutes
100 hours
100 days
100 years [1]
(c) The radioactive source in the smoke detector contains americium-241.
An americium-241 nucleus emits an α-particle to become a neptunium nucleus.
Complete the equation to show the nucleon number and proton number of neptunium.
241 ........ 4
95
Am ........ Np + 2
α [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15

PMT

0625 PHYSICS

PMT

answer.
which shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
given.
working, he or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This
prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but
only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities,
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except
where the mark scheme specifies otherwise.

PMT

applies.

PMT

1 (a) (i) measuring OR graduated cylinder B1
(ii) balance B1
(b) Honey has a larger density than water. B1

Kerosene has a smaller density than water. B1
(c) density = mass / volume in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

10.5 / 13 C1
0.81 A1
g / cm3 B1
[Total: 8]
2 (a) (i) calculation seen using times from cameras A and B C1

160 (s) A1
(ii) speed = distance / time in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

5000 / 160 C1
31.3 (m / s) A1
(iii) much slower than between A and B B1
(b) less / lower than suggested speed limit B1

either reference to just over limit between cameras A and B B1
then much slower speed, so average below limit B1
OR average speed over 10 000 m is about 15 m / s (for B2)
[Total: 9]
3 (a) three lines required: B1

• line from solid to bottom pattern
• line from liquid to middle pattern
• line from gas to top pattern
(b) (i) any two from: B2

• energy needed to turn liquid into a gas
• remaining perfume / liquid / particles have lower energy
• energy transfers from arm to perfume (cooling arm)
(ii) particles move / evaporate faster (when hotter) B1

collisions (with stopper) harder / more often B1
pressure greater (inside than outside) OR
force on stopper (from perfume) greater than friction + stopper weight B1
[Total: 6]

PMT


• microwave not heard / sound is heard
• sound is slower / longitudinal wave or signal is transverse
• sound needs medium / cannot travel through a vacuum
• signal is electromagnetic wave owtte
• sound has longer wavelength / lower frequency
(b) (i) reflected B1
(ii) diffracted B1
[Total: 4]
5 (a) 100 (°C) B1

0 (°C) B1
(b) thermometer (bulb) placed in ice C1

melting ice OR ice and water mixture A1
(c) expansion B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) wind B1
(b) electrical B1
light B1
(c) (i) dark B1

no wind / calm B1
(ii) (back-up / rechargeable) battery B1
(d) gravitational potential (energy) B1
[Total: 7]

PMT

7 (a) A: arrow pointing left / away from N B1

C: arrow pointing left / same as A B1
B and D: arrow pointing right B1
(b) correct field lines carefully drawn through B and D B1
(c) steel B1
[Total: 5]
8 (a) (i) any two from: B2

• (small current in) relay coil produces magnetic field
• relay coil attracts armature
• starter motor connected across battery p.d.
(ii) lower (electrical) resistance B1

less heating (in cable) B1
(b) (i) 1.2 (A) B1
(ii) if a lamp fails other will work OR

each lamp can be controlled by a switch B1
[Total: 6]
9 (a) (i) thermistor correctly labelled B1
(ii) correct symbol for voltmeter B1

voltmeter in parallel with thermistor OR e.c.f. (a)(i) B1
(b) (i) R = V / I in any form: words, symbols, numbers C1

6.0 / 0.004 OR 6.0 / 4.0 C1
1500 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) B1
(ii) not a straight line / constant gradient OR not through origin B1
[Total: 8]

PMT

10 (a) resistance of LDR decreases M1

current increases A1
(b) (i) ray from object parallel to axis M1

ray continued correctly through F A1
(ii) second ray correctly drawn through centre of lens OR through F B1

intersection of two or more rays B1
(iii) image at intersection drawn and labelled correctly A1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) Gamma / γ B1
(b) (i) nucleon (accept mass) B1

proton (accept atomic) B1
(ii) A = 4 B1
Z=2 B1
(iii) alpha / α (particle) B1
[Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) turbine B1

• produces sulfur oxides / nitrous oxides
• produces carbon dioxide
• (fossil fuels / they) are non-renewable / not sustainable (resources)
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 C1
115 / 25 × 500 C1
2300 A1
(c) smaller current (in transmission cables) B1

smaller heating effect (in transmission cables) B1
less energy wasted (in) / more efficient (transmission) B1
[Total: 9]

PMT

* 2 0 0 5 0 3 5 5 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/CGW) 116361
PMT
1 A student investigates the density of three different liquids.
The student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the container shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. The liquids do not mix
but form three separate layers as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
50
kerosene
40
30
water
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
Identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. Tick only two boxes.
Honey has the smallest density.
Honey has a larger density than water.
Kerosene has the largest density.
Kerosene has a smaller density than water.
Water has a larger density than honey.
Water has a smaller density than kerosene.

[2]
(c) The mass of 13 cm3 of the kerosene is 10.5 g.
Calculate the density of the kerosene, including an appropriate unit.
density = .................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

PMT
2 Cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. Each camera records the
exact time that a car passes the camera.
Fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes.
camera A camera B camera C
h min s h min s h min s

08 : 43 : 17 08 : 45 : 57 08 : 54 : 20
(a) (i) Calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera A and camera B. State your
answer in seconds.
time taken = ............................................... s [2]
(ii) The cameras are placed 5000 m apart.
Calculate the average speed of the car between camera A and camera B.
average speed = .......................................... m / s [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
(iii) Using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between
camera B and camera C. Tick one box.
slightly slower than between A and B
much slower than between A and B
same as between A and B
slightly faster than between A and B
much faster than between A and B

[1]
(b) The speed limit for the road is 30 m / s.
Use your answers to (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to estimate whether the car’s average speed was
greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera A and camera C. Explain
how you decided on your answer.
estimate ....................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

PMT
3 (a) There are three states of matter.
Draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the
arrangement of the particles in that state of matter.
state of matter diagram
solid
liquid
gas
[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a perfume bottle.
plastic
stopper
air and
vapour
perfume
perfume
bottle
Fig. 3.1
(i) A student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. She notices that her arm feels
cold as the perfume evaporates.
Explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
(ii) When the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the
bottle.
Suggest why the stopper pops out of the bottle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]

PMT
4 A student has a mobile (cell) phone. The phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces
a ring tone.
(a) State two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound
wave produced when the phone rings.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. The waves interact with a wall,
and a doorway, in the room.
view from above
mobile phone
doorway
wall
With reference to Fig. 4.1, complete each of the following sentences using a word from the
box below.
diffracted dispersed reflected refracted
(i) When the waves hit the wall, the waves are .............................................................. . [1]
(ii) When the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are ...................................... . [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.
Fig. 5.1
The thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range −10 °C to 110 °C. There is
no scale on the thermometer.
(a) The scale is added using fixed points.
State the temperature of each of the fixed points used.
upper fixed point = .................................................. °C
lower fixed point = .................................................. °C

[2]
(b) Describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.
Tick one box.
colour
expansion
pressure
resistance
[1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a sign used to warn drivers of a road hazard.
solar
panels
SLOW
DOWN
Fig. 6.1
The sign lights up as cars approach.
(a) The sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.
Identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. Tick the correct box.
chemical
geothermal
light
wind [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when
the sign is operating using solar energy.
solar energy ................................. ................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
11
(c) (i) In certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.
State these conditions.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The sign needs to be able to operate at all times.
Suggest a way of overcoming the problem identified in (c)(i).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) After passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.
State the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

PMT
12
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet.
paper
A
N magnet S C
Fig. 7.1
The bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. A plotting compass is placed in each of the four
positions labelled A, B, C and D.
The plotting compass is a small pivoted magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
plotting
compass
S N
pivot
pointer
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
13
(a) In each of positions A, B, C and D on Fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of
the pointer. Ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position B and the
other through position D. The lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]
(c) State the material from which a permanent magnet is made.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

PMT
14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows part of a wiring diagram for a car.
starter
motor
M
S relay
coil
Fig. 8.1
When the driver closes switch S, there is a current of 200 A in the starter motor.
(a) (i) Explain how closing switch S causes the starter motor to operate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire
connecting the switch S to the battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
15
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows part of a lighting circuit for a car.
12 V P
fuse
Fig. 8.2
(i) The switch is closed. There is a current of 1.2 A in the fuse.
State the current at point P.
current = .............................................. A [1]
(ii) The lights of the car are connected in parallel.
State one reason for connecting lights in parallel.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
16
9 A student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. Fig. 9.1
shows the circuit that the student uses.
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Label clearly the thermistor in Fig. 9.1. [1]

(ii) On Fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that the resistance of the thermistor can be
determined. [2]
(b) The student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. The
results are shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
temperature of thermistor / °C 0 10 20 30 40 50
current in thermistor / mA 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5
(i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 V at 20 °C.
Calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 °C. Include the unit.
resistance = .................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
17
(ii) Fig. 9.2 shows the student’s results plotted on a graph.
25
20
current in
thermistor /
mA
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
temperature / °C
Fig. 9.2
The student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the
temperature of the thermistor.
Explain how the graph shown in Fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

PMT
18
10 A camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 10.1 shows part of this
circuit.
6V
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe what happens to the resistance of the LDR and the current in the LDR when a bright
light is shone on the LDR.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A camera lens is used to produce an image of an object OX. The arrangement is shown in
Fig. 10.2.
principal axis
O
F F
Fig. 10.2
The principal focuses of the lens are labelled F.
On Fig. 10.2,
(i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through
and beyond the lens, [2]
(ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of OX, [2]
(iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
19
11 Three types of radioactive decay are by the emission of
α - radiation,
β - radiation,
γ - radiation.
(a) State which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A nucleus of americium-241 decays to become a nucleus of neptunium-237 by the emission

of one particle.
The equation below describes the change. The symbol AZ X represents the particle emitted.
241Am 237 Np + AX
95 93 Z
(i) State the name given to each of the numbers A and Z.
A is the ........................................ number.
Z is the ........................................ number.

[2]
(ii) Determine the values of A and Z.
A = .......................................................
Z = .......................................................
[2]
(iii) State the name of the particle emitted.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

PMT
20
12 Fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a power station that uses coal.
X generator
boiler transmission
lines
steam
transformer
coal
water
cooling
tower
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i) State the name of the part of the power station labelled X.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two disadvantages of generating electricity using fossil fuels.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The transformer converts the 25 kV output from the generator to 115 kV. The primary coil of
the transformer has 500 turns.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
21
(c) Explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kV.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 0625/23/O/N/15

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
®
Cambridge IGCSE , Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

PMT

Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 D 22 D
3 A 23 B
4 A 24 A
5 B 25 C
6 B 26 D
7 A 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 A 29 B
10 C 30 A
11 C 31 B
12 D 32 D
13 D 33 A
14 C 34 C
15 B 35 B
16 A 36 C
17 C 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 B 39 D
20 D 40 C
© UCLES 2016
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2016
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2117549282*

IB16 11_0625_21/8RP
PMT
1 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
A constant zero constant

B constant zero decreasing
C increasing constant decreasing
D increasing zero constant
2 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
3 A car travels along a horizontal road in a straight line. The driver presses the accelerator to
increase the speed of the car.
The speed-time graph for the car is shown.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car?
A 0.50 m / s2 B 1.00 m / s2 C 1.50 m / s2 D 2.00 m / s2
4 A spaceship approaches the Earth from deep space. Near the Earth, a force on the spaceship
causes it to have weight. This causes it to change its speed and direction.
Which type of force causes the spaceship’s weight, and which property of the spaceship resists
its change in speed and direction?
force that property that resists change in

causes weight speed and direction
A gravitational mass
B gravitational volume
C magnetic mass
D magnetic volume

PMT
5 The diagrams show an empty rectangular box, and the same box filled with liquid.
The box has a mass of 60 g when empty. When filled with liquid, the total mass of the box and the
liquid is 300 g.
empty box box filled with liquid

60 g 300 g
The density of the liquid is 1.2 g / cm3.
What is the volume of the liquid in the box?
A 50 cm3 B 200 cm3 C 250 cm3 D 300 cm3
6 An object travels in a circular path at constant speed.
Which statement about the object is correct?
A It has changing kinetic energy.

B It has changing momentum.
C It has constant velocity.
D It is not accelerating.
7 Which diagram shows the magnitude and direction of the resultant R of the two forces F1 and F2?
A B C D
F1 F1 F1 F1
R R
R R
F2 F2 F2 F2
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
8 Two cars, P and Q, have different masses and different speeds as shown.
mass mass
1000 kg 500 kg
speed speed
10 m / s 20 m / s
car P car Q
Which row correctly compares the momentum and the kinetic energy of P with the momentum
and the kinetic energy of Q?
momentum kinetic energy
A P greater than Q P equal to Q

B P equal to Q P equal to Q
C P equal to Q P less than Q
D P less than Q P greater than Q
9 A car of mass 800 kg travels over a hill of height h.
hill
h NOT TO
SCALE
By travelling to the top of the hill, the car gains 40 000 J of gravitational potential energy.
The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the height h of the hill?
A 5.0 m B 20 m C 50 m D 500 m
10 A lamp has a power input of 5.0 W. It wastes 1.0 W of power heating the surroundings.
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120%
11 The box contains the names of eight different energy resources.
natural gas geothermal solar waves

hydroelectric oil wind coal
How many of these energy resources are renewable?
A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6

PMT
12 The diagram shows a dam holding back water.
65 m water
dam
The depth of the water is 65 m.
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted at the base of the dam due to the water?
A 15.4 Pa B 154 Pa C 65 000 Pa D 650 000 Pa
13 Air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The original volume of the trapped air is V and the original
pressure of the trapped air is P. The piston is pushed to the left. The temperature of the gas does
not change.
before piston is pushed in after piston is pushed in
piston
cylinder 25 50 25 50
trapped air trapped air
What is the new volume and what is the new pressure of the trapped air?
new volume new pressure

P
A 2V
2
B 2V 2P
V P
C
2 2
V
D 2P
2
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
14 When a liquid evaporates, some of its molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of
the liquid changes.
Which row describes the escaping molecules and the change in temperature of the liquid?
temperature of
escaping molecules
the liquid
A less energetic goes down

B less energetic goes up
C more energetic goes down
D more energetic goes up
15 A gas at a constant temperature is in a container of fixed volume. The gas exerts a pressure on
the walls of the container. The pressure is caused by the gas molecules striking the walls.
Which statement about the gas molecules when they strike the walls is correct?
A The average kinetic energy of the gas molecules changes.

B The average momentum of the gas molecules changes.
C The average speed of the gas molecules changes.
D The chemical energy of the gas molecules changes.
16 A piece of melting ice at 0 °C and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. The
laboratory is at 20 °C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the
temperature of the boiling water?
temperature of temperature of
melting ice boiling water
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing

PMT
17 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
glass bulb tube stem
°C
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
liquid
liquid thread
Which feature would give a thermometer with an increased range?
A a smaller internal diameter of the tube containing the liquid thread

B a thinner glass bulb
C a larger length of the tube and stem
D a larger volume of the liquid
18 A copper container of mass 0.20 kg contains 0.10 kg of water.
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C) and the specific heat capacity of water
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
How much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the
water by 10 °C?
A (0.20 × 385 × 10) – (0.10 × 4200 × 10)
B (0.20 × 385 × 10) + (0.10 × 4200 × 10)

 4200 + 385 
C (0.10 + 0.20) ×   × 10
 2 
D (0.10 + 0.20) × (4200 + 385) × 10
19 The thermal transfer of energy through a copper rod involves electrons.

A second process is also involved.
What is this method of thermal energy transfer, and what is the second process?
method second process
A conduction density change

B conduction lattice vibration
C convection density change
D convection lattice vibration
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
20 The diagrams show four spherical objects at the same temperature. Two of the objects are small
and two are large. Two of the objects are white and two are black.
A B C D
21 The diagram represents plane wavefronts being diffracted by passing through a gap in a barrier.
barrier
wavefronts
gap
Which pair of changes must increase the amount of diffraction that occurs?
A decrease the wavelength and decrease the size of the gap

B decrease the wavelength and increase the size of the gap
C increase the wavelength and decrease the size of the gap
D increase the wavelength and increase the size of the gap
22 An image is formed by a plane mirror. A second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying
glass.
Which row states the nature of each of these images?
plane mirror magnifying glass
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual

PMT
10
23 Light travelling at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes
refraction as it enters the block.
The diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enters the block.
55°
glass block
33°
What is the speed of light in the glass?
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.0 × 108 m / s
C 4.5 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
24 Radiation from which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in the remote controller for a
television?
A infra-red waves
B microwaves
C radio waves
D ultraviolet waves
25 A girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.
Which wave property causes the echo?
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
11
26 The diagrams represent the displacement in four different sound waves. All the diagrams are
drawn to the same scale.
Which diagram represents the sound with the highest pitch?
A B
displacement displacement
0 time 0 time
0 0
C D
displacement displacement
0 time 0 time
0 0
27 A student suggests three methods for demagnetising a piece of steel.
1 placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it hard

2 placing it in an east-west direction and heating it until red hot
3 removing it slowly from a coil carrying alternating current
Which of the methods will demagnetise the piece of steel?
A 1 only B 2 only C 3 only D 1, 2 and 3

PMT
12
28 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
experiment 1 N magnet S X iron bar
experiment 2 S magnet N iron bar Y
Which magnetic pole is induced at X and at Y?
pole induced at X pole induced at Y
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
29 A polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth. The rod becomes positively charged because of the
movement of charged particles.
Which row gives the name of these charged particles, and the direction in which they move?
charged direction of
particles movement
A electrons from cloth to rod

B electrons from rod to cloth
C protons from cloth to rod
D protons from rod to cloth
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
13
30 The diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
A adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit

B adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit
C decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit
D moving the lamp to point P in the circuit
31 A 12.0 Ω resistor and a 6.0 Ω resistor are connected in parallel.
Another 6.0 Ω resistor is then connected in series with the parallel combination.
12.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
What is the combined resistance of all three resistors?
A 8.0 Ω B 10 Ω C 15 Ω D 24 Ω
32 The circuit shows a 12 V battery connected to a lamp of resistance 3.0 Ω.
12 V
How much energy is transferred to the surroundings by the lamp in 2.0 minutes?
A 48 J B 96 J C 2880 J D 5760 J

PMT
14
33 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a resistor with high resistance, a switch and a
lamp.
12 V
battery
12 V
resistor lamp
Initially the switch is open.
What happens to the lamp when the switch is closed?
A It glows more brightly.

B It glows less brightly.
C It goes out.
D Its brightness does not change.
34 This is the truth table for a logic gate.
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Which symbol represents the logic gate?
A B C D
35 Why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit?
A so that the current can have only one value

B to prevent the current becoming too large
C to provide a path to earth if a fault occurs
D to save electrical energy
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT
15
36 An electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.
Which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?
effect used by a relay one application of a relay
A heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current

B heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply
C magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current
D magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply
37 A very important experiment improved scientists’ understanding of the structure of matter.
The experiment involved α-particles being fired at a thin gold foil.
What happened?
A All the α-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.
B All the α-particles were unaffected by the gold atoms.
C Some of the α-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.
D Some of the α-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.
38 What is meant by nuclear fusion?
A the emission of an electron from a nucleus

B the emission of two protons from a nucleus
C the joining together of two nuclei
D the splitting of a nucleus into two smaller nuclei
39 A nucleus undergoes radioactive decay. The proton number increases by one. The nucleon
number does not change.
Which particle has been emitted in this decay?
A a neutron
B a proton
C an α-particle
D a β-particle

PMT
16
40 Radioactive source S emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. A detector is placed 5 cm away
from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
thin sheet of paper
S detector
5 cm
Which emissions from the source can be detected?
A α-particles and β-particles only
B α-particles and γ-rays only
C β-particles and γ-rays only
D α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
© UCLES 2016 0625/21/O/N/16

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
®
components.

PMT

Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 D 22 D
3 C 23 A
4 B 24 B
5 D 25 C
6 B 26 A
7 A 27 A
8 B 28 D
9 B 29 A
10 C 30 D
11 C 31 A
12 D 32 A
13 D 33 C
14 D 34 A
15 A 35 B
16 C 36 C
17 B 37 C
18 C 38 A
19 C 39 D
20 B 40 C
© UCLES 2016
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*0209924104*

IB16 11_0625_22/6RP
PMT
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time

A B
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
3 The speed-time graph for an object is shown.
speed X Y
20
m/s
W P
Z
0
0 5 15 25
time / s
Below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.
A The acceleration in the first 5 s is given by area P.

B The acceleration increases between W and X.
C The acceleration is negative between Y and Z.
D The deceleration between Y and Z is (20 ÷ 25) m / s2.
4 An object tends to keep moving with the same speed and in the same direction due to a certain
property.
The object also has weight due to the action of a field.
What is the name of the property, and what is the name of the field?
property field
A mass electric
B mass gravitational
C volume electric
D volume gravitational

PMT
5 A student uses a measuring cylinder and a balance to find the density of oil. The diagram shows
the arrangement used.
empty measuring
measuring cylinder containing
cylinder volume V of oil
oil
m1 m2
g g
Which calculation gives the density of the oil?
A V B V C
m2
D
(m 2 − m1)
m2 (m2 − m1) V V

© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
7 The diagrams show a spring and a graph of the length of the spring against the load applied to it.
7
length / cm
6
5
spring
length 4
3
load
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
load / N
What is the extension of the spring when a load of 40 N is applied to it?
A 1.5 cm B 2.5 cm C 4.0 cm D 6.5 cm
8 A girl of mass 50 kg runs at 6.0 m / s.
What is her momentum?
A 300 J B 300 kg m / s C 900 J D 900 kg m / s
9 Which list contains only vector quantities?
A acceleration, energy, force, mass

B acceleration, force, momentum, velocity
C distance, energy, mass, speed
D distance, momentum, power, speed
10 Electricity can be generated using different energy resources.
Which energy resource is used to generate electricity without needing any moving parts?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C solar
D water waves

PMT
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120%
12 A pendulum bob swings along the path WXYZ and back again.
Resistive forces can be ignored.
pendulum bob
W Z
X Y
Which statement describes the total energy of the bob?
A It has a maximum value at X.

B It has a maximum value at Y.
C It has a maximum value at Z.
D It has the same value at W, X, Y and Z.
13 The equation used to find the pressure caused by a liquid can be written as
p=h×Y×Z
where p is the pressure and h is the depth of the liquid.
Which row gives the quantities Y and Z?
Y Z
A cross-sectional area gravitational field strength

B cross-sectional area volume
C density cross-sectional area
D density gravitational field strength
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
14 The diagram shows a gas that is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The volume of the gas is
120 cm3 and the pressure of the gas is P.
gas piston
The piston is moved slowly to the left so that the volume of the gas is reduced to 30 cm3. The
temperature of the gas does not change.
What is the new pressure of the trapped gas?
P P
A B C P D 4P
4 2
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
A constant constant

PMT
16 A puddle of water is formed after a rain shower on a windy day.
Which statement explains the effect of the wind on the rate of evaporation of the water in the
puddle?
A The wind gives molecules in the water extra kinetic energy and so increases the rate of
evaporation.
B The wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so decreases the rate of
evaporation.
C The wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so increases the rate of
evaporation.
D The wind takes energy from molecules near the surface and so decreases the rate of
evaporation.
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
water by 10 °C?
A (0.20 × 385 × 10) – (0.10 × 4200 × 10)
B (0.20 × 385 × 10) + (0.10 × 4200 × 10)

 4200 + 385 
C (0.10 + 0.20) ×   × 10
 2 
D (0.10 + 0.20) × (4200 + 385) × 10
18 On a very cold day, a boy puts one hand on the metal handlebars of his bicycle. He puts the
other hand on the rubber hand grip.
The metal feels colder than the rubber hand grip, although they are both at the same
temperature.
Why is this?
A The metal has a higher melting point than the rubber.

B The metal has a lower thermal capacity than the rubber.
C The metal is a better thermal conductor than the rubber.
D The metal radiates more infra-red radiation than the rubber.
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
19 The diagrams show four spherical objects of the same colour and same type of surface. Two of
the objects are small and two are large. Two of the objects are at the same high temperature and
two are at the same low temperature.
A B C D
high low high low

temperature temperature temperature temperature
20 Which wave has an amplitude equal to half its wavelength?
displacement 1.0
/ cm
A 0
0 1 2 3 4 distance / cm
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
B 0
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
C 0
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
D 0
–1.0

PMT
10
21 Which diagram shows what happens when plane waves pass the edge of the object shown?
A B
object object
C D
object object
glass.
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
11
23 The diagram shows light passing from air into glass. Two angles p and q are marked.
normal
p
air
glass
q
Which pair of equations can both be used to calculate the refractive index n of the glass?
speed of light in air sin p

A n= , n=
speed of light in glass sin q
speed of light in glass sin p

B n= , n=
speed of light in air sin q
speed of light in air sin q

C n= , n=
speed of light in glass sin p
speed of light in glass sin q

D n= , n=
speed of light in air sin p
24 Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used to send television signals from a satellite to
Earth?
A infra-red
B microwaves
C ultraviolet
D visible light
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction

PMT
12
26 Which property of a sound wave affects the loudness of the sound?
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S

© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
13

30 The diagram shows a circuit.
The reading on the ammeter is 12 A.
How much charge passes through the ammeter in 2.0 minutes?
A 0.10 C B 6.0 C C 24 C D 1440 C
31 A copper wire has a resistance of 2.0 Ω.
A second copper wire is twice as long as the first wire, and its diameter is twice the diameter of
the first wire.
What is the resistance of the second wire?
A 1.0 Ω B 2.0 Ω C 8.0 Ω D 16.0 Ω

PMT
14
32 Which combination of resistors in parallel has an effective resistance of 0.50 Ω?
A B
1.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
1.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
C D
1.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
3.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
33 In the circuit shown, the voltmeter reads 2.0 V. A charge of 5.0 C passes through the resistor in a
certain time.
How much energy is supplied to the resistor in this time?
A 0.40 J B 2.5 J C 10 J D 20 J
34 Two NAND gates are connected together as shown.
input 1
output
input 2
The arrangement acts like a single logic gate.
What is the name of this single logic gate?
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT
15
35 An electric kettle has a metal casing. The cable for the kettle contains a wire that is connected to
the earth pin of the plug.
Which danger does this guard against?
A the cable to the kettle becoming too hot

B the casing of the kettle becoming live
C the casing of the kettle becoming wet on the outside
D the casing of the kettle overheating

37 What happens in the process of nuclear fission?
A electrons are added to a nucleus

B electrons are removed from a nucleus
C the nucleus of an atom splits
D two atomic nuclei join together
38 A β-particle enters a uniform magnetic field directed out of the page.
uniform
β-particle magnetic field
out of the page
In which direction is the β-particle deflected by the field?
A towards the top of the page

B into the page
C out of the page
D towards the bottom of the page

PMT
16
39 The radioactive nucleus 214

83 Bi decays to another nucleus by the emission of a β-particle.
What is the proton number and what is the nucleon number of the nucleus formed by this decay?
proton number nucleon number
A 81 210
B 81 212
C 84 213
D 84 214
thin sheet of paper
S detector
5 cm
© UCLES 2016 0625/22/O/N/16

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
Teachers.
®
components.

PMT

Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 D 22 A
3 A 23 C
4 B 24 C
5 B 25 B
6 B 26 D
7 D 27 A
8 C 28 C
9 C 29 A
10 B 30 D
11 B 31 D
12 C 32 A
13 D 33 B
14 D 34 B
15 C 35 A
16 A 36 C
17 D 37 A
18 B 38 D
19 B 39 C
20 C 40 A
© UCLES 2016
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*5649030721*

IB16 11_0625_23/6RP
PMT
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time

A B
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
3 The speed-time graph for an object is shown.
speed X Y
10
m/s
W
Z
0
0 10 30 50
time / s
Below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.
Which statement is true?
A The acceleration in the first 10 s is (10 ÷ 10) m / s2.

B The acceleration increases between W and X.
C The acceleration decreases between Y and Z.
D The deceleration between Y and Z is (10 ÷ 50) m / s2.
4 An astronaut on the Moon weighs less than on Earth.
What is the reason for this difference, and how does his mass on the Moon compare with his
mass on Earth?
reason for weight difference mass on Moon

the Moon has a weaker
A less than on Earth
gravitational field
B same as on Earth
gravitational field
C less than on Earth
magnetic field
D same as on Earth
magnetic field

PMT
5 The diagrams show an empty container, and the same container filled with liquid.
The empty container has a mass of 120 g. When filled with the liquid, the total mass of the
container and the liquid is 600 g.
empty container container filled with liquid

120 g 600 g
The volume of liquid in the container is 600 cm3.

© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
7 Different loads are hung on a spring. The diagram shows the length of the spring with and without
the loads attached.
20 cm
40 cm
65 cm
200 N
400 N
What is the extension of the spring when the load is 400 N?
A 5 cm B 25 cm C 40 cm D 45 cm
8 A vehicle of mass 900 kg is travelling with a velocity of 20 m / s.
What is the momentum of the vehicle?
A 45 kg m / s B 450 kg m / s C 18 000 kg m / s D 180 000 kg m / s
9 Which list contains only scalar quantities?
A acceleration, energy, force, mass

B acceleration, force, momentum, velocity
C distance, energy, mass, speed
D distance, momentum, speed, velocity

PMT
10 A ball is dropped onto a floor.
Its speed just before hitting the floor is 3.0 m / s.
Which change would result in a speed of 6.0 m / s just before hitting the floor?
Ignore any effects due to air resistance.
A Drop the ball from double the height above the floor.
B Drop the ball from four times the height above the floor.
C Use a ball with double the mass.
D Use a ball with four times the mass.
11 Which list contains only energy resources that derive their energy from the Sun?
A geothermal, nuclear, tidal

B hydroelectric, water waves, wind
C geothermal, hydroelectric, solar
D nuclear, solar, water waves
A 20% B 50% C 80% D 120%
13 A container is filled with liquid to a certain depth h.
container
h
liquid
The pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container depends on several factors.
Which is one factor on which the pressure does not depend?
A the strength of the Earth’s gravitational field

B the density of the liquid
C the depth of the liquid
D the strength of the Earth’s magnetic field
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
14 Which diagram best represents the movement of a smoke particle displaying Brownian motion?
A B
smoke smoke
particle particle
C D
smoke
particle
smoke
particle
15 The volume of a gas is measured at different pressures.
The pressure p and the volume V of the gas are found to be related by the equation:
pV = constant.
Which quantities are kept constant and which quantities change?
density of gas mass of gas temperature of gas
A key
B = constant
C = changed
D

PMT
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
A constant constant
17 A scientist has two thermometers available: a liquid-in-glass thermometer and a thermocouple

thermometer.
Which thermometer is better for measuring a very high temperature, and which thermometer is
better for measuring a rapidly varying temperature?
very high temperature rapidly varying temperature
A liquid-in-glass liquid-in-glass
B liquid-in-glass thermocouple
C thermocouple liquid-in-glass
D thermocouple thermocouple
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
water by 10 °C?
A (0.20 × 385 × 10) – (0.10 × 4200 × 10)
B (0.20 × 385 × 10) + (0.10 × 4200 × 10)

 4200 + 385 
C (0.10 + 0.20) ×   × 10
 2 
D (0.10 + 0.20) × (4200 + 385) × 10
19 The diagrams show four spherical objects of the same size. Two of the objects are white and two
are black. Two of the objects are at the same high temperature and two are at the same low
temperature.
A B C D
high high low low

temperature temperature temperature temperature
20 A man is talking at the side of a house. He can be heard by a woman at the front of the house
even though she cannot see him.
What is the explanation for this?
A Sound waves are longitudinal and light waves are transverse.

B Sound waves are transverse and light waves are longitudinal.
C The sound waves have a long wavelength and the light waves have short wavelength.
D The sound waves have a short wavelength and the light waves have long wavelength.

PMT
10
glass.
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual
22 The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
The critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37°.
What is the speed of light in the plastic material?
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.4 × 108 m / s
C 3.8 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
23 Which description applies to infra-red radiation?
A longitudinal and electromagnetic

B longitudinal but not electromagnetic
C transverse and electromagnetic
D transverse but not electromagnetic
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
11
25 A man stands 110 m from a high wall. He makes a short, sharp sound and then hears an echo
from the wall.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
How long after making the sound does the man hear the echo?
A 0.33 s B 0.67 s C 1.5 s D 3.0 s

A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S

PMT
12
28 A student holds a rod in his hand.
cloth
hand
rod
He rubs the rod with a cloth. The rod gains a positive charge.
Of which material could the rod be made, and which transfer of charge has happened?
material of rod transfer of charge
A metal negative charge from rod to cloth

B metal positive charge from cloth to rod
C plastic negative charge from rod to cloth
D plastic positive charge from cloth to rod

© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
13
30 The graph shows the relationship between the current in a circuit component and the potential
difference (p.d.) across it. The graph has a straight section and a curved section.
current
0
0 p.d.
What happens to the resistance of the component in these two sections as the current increases?
straight section curved section
A resistance increases resistance decreases

B resistance increases resistance increases
C no change in resistance resistance decreases
D no change in resistance resistance increases
31 In the circuit shown there is a current of 10 A.
How much charge passes through the resistor in 2.0 minutes?
A 0.083 C B 5C C 20 C D 1200 C

PMT
14
32 The four circuits shown each contain four diodes.
In which circuit is the direction of the current in the resistor always from the red terminal to the
black terminal?
A B
12 V 12 V
red black red black

terminal terminal terminal terminal
C D
12 V 12 V
red black red black

terminal terminal terminal terminal
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
15
33 The diagram shows a potential divider.
6V
0V
When brighter light falls on the light-dependent resistor (LDR), its resistance changes.
What happens to the resistance of the LDR and what happens to the current in it?
resistance of LDR current in LDR
34 The diagram shows two logic gates connected together.
low (0) P Q
low (0)
The two inputs are both low (0).
What are the logic states at P and at Q?
P Q
A high (1) high (1)

B high (1) low (0)
C low (0) high (1)
D low (0) low (0)

PMT
16
35 Two electrical appliances are connected to the mains supply.
The cable connected to one appliance includes an earth wire.
The cable connected to the second appliance does not need an earth wire.
What is a reason for this difference?
A One appliance has a metal case, but the other appliance does not.
B One appliance is fitted with a fuse, but the other appliance is not.
C One appliance is fitted with a switch, but the other appliance is not.
D One appliance needs more current than the other appliance.

37 Which particle is absorbed by a nucleus to cause nuclear fission?
A a neutron
B a proton
C an α-particle
D a β-particle
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
17
38 An α-particle enters a uniform magnetic field directed out of the page.
uniform
magnetic field
out of the page
α-particle
In which direction is the α-particle deflected by the field?
A into the page

B out of the page
C to the left
D to the right
thin sheet of paper
S detector
5 cm

PMT
18
40 Uranium-238 is radioactive and decays to thorium-234 by the emission of a particle.
238
92 U → 234
90 Th + particle
Which particle is emitted in this process?
A an α-particle
B a β-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/23/O/N/16

Cambridge Assessment International Education
PHYSICS 0625/21
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

0625/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 B 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*6133216338*

IB17 11_0625_21/4RP
2
1 A student measures the volume of a cork.
He puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. He puts the cork and then
a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.
cm3 cm3 cm3

100 100 100
80 80 80
glass ball
60 60 60
40 40 40 cork
20 20 20
glass ball glass ball
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3
Diagram 1 shows the first water level.
Diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.
Diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.
What is the volume of the cork?
A 30 cm3 B 40 cm3 C 50 cm3 D 100 cm3
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
Which ball has the smallest average speed?
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

3
3 An ice crystal falls vertically from a cloud.
What happens to the acceleration of the ice crystal as it falls?
A It decreases because of air resistance.
B It decreases because of gravity.

C It increases because of air resistance.
D It increases because of gravity.
4 A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal
Which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
5 Which object has the greatest weight?
A an object of mass 10 kg in a 15 N / kg gravitational field

B an object of mass 15 kg in a 13 N / kg gravitational field
C an object of mass 20 kg in a 9.0 N / kg gravitational field
D an object of mass 50 kg in a 3.0 N / kg gravitational field

4
6 A uniform beam XY is 100 cm long and weighs 4.0 N.
80 cm
60 cm
10 cm
X Y
centre
pivot
of beam F
8.0 N
The beam rests on a pivot 60 cm from end X.
A load of 8.0 N hangs from the beam 10 cm from end X.
The beam is kept balanced by a force F acting on the beam 80 cm from end X.
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A 8.0 N B 18 N C 22 N D 44 N
7 The diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. The position of the centre of mass of
each lamp is labelled X.
Which lamp is the most stable?
A B C D
X X
X X
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

5
8 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
What is the magnitude of the resultant force?
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A tennis ball of mass 0.060 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 25 m / s. The ball hits a tennis
racket and rebounds horizontally at a speed of 40 m / s.
racket
ball
25 m / s 40 m / s
before hitting racket after hitting racket
The ball is in contact with the racket for 50 ms.
What force does the racket exert on the ball?
A 0.018 N B 0.078 N C 18 N D 78 N

6
10 The diagram shows the path of a stone that is thrown from X and reaches its maximum height
at Y.
Y
path of
stone
The stone gains 10 J of gravitational potential energy as it moves from X to Y.
The stone has 2.0 J of kinetic energy at Y.
How much kinetic energy did the stone have immediately after it was thrown at X?
A 2.0 J B 8.0 J C 10 J D 12 J
11 A motor is used to lift a load of 40 N.
motor
load lifted
through 0.50 m
load
40 N
The power of the motor is 40 W and the system is 20% efficient.
How long does it take the motor to lift the load through 0.50 m?
A 0.50 s B 2.5 s C 5.0 s D 25 s
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

7
12 A student runs up a flight of stairs.
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
A the height of the flight of stairs

B the length of the flight of stairs
C the time taken to run up the stairs
D the weight of the student
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
Which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm

8
14 The diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. When
the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.
glass tube
mercury
air
water
What is the main cause of the movement of the mercury?
A expansion of air in the flask

B expansion of the glass flask
C expansion of the glass tube
D expansion of the mercury
15 A pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.
Which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?
A B C D
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

9
16 The diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. A child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.
The temperature of the air in the toy does not change.
How does the air pressure in the toy change and why?
pressure reason
A decreases air molecules move more slowly

B decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently
C increases air molecules move more quickly
D increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently
17 A strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. This
combination is a bimetallic strip.
iron strip
brass strip
This bimetallic strip is heated and it bends as shown.
iron
fixed support
brass
The bimetallic strip is now cooled and becomes straight again.
What causes the bimetallic strip to become straight again?
A The brass contracts more than the iron.

B The brass expands more than the iron.
C The iron contracts more than the brass.
D The iron expands more than the brass.

10
18 An aluminium block has a mass of 200 g.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900 J / (kg °C).
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the block from 20 °C to 110 °C?
A 2.0 J B 200 J C 16 200 J D 16 200 000 J
19 Which statement about convection currents is correct?
A Convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.
B Convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.
C Convection currents only occur in liquids.
D Convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

11
20 The diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.
wavefronts
Which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected

12
21 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. A ray of light from the object is incident on
the mirror.
object
R
Q S
P
plane
mirror
Through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object
formed?
point through which point at which

reflected ray passes image is formed
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
22 A laser is a source of light with a single frequency.
Which description of this type of light is correct?
A dispersed
B focused
C monochromatic
D refracted
23 Visible light, X-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Which statement about the waves is correct?
A In a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
B In a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter
wavelength.
C In a vacuum, X-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
D In a vacuum, X-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

13
24 The Moon is 380 000 km from the Earth. A laser light beam is directed from the Earth to the
Moon. The beam is reflected back to the Earth.
How long does it take for the light to travel to the Moon and back to the Earth?
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s
25 Which wavefront is travelling at a speed closest to that of a sound wave through a solid?
A one that moves 10 m in 0.01 s

B one that moves 50 m in 0.5 s
C one that moves 1000 m in 100 s
D one that moves 2000 m in 2000 s
26 Different waves travel through air.
Which waves have the greatest difference in speed?
A ultrasound waves and sound waves

B ultrasound waves and ultraviolet waves
C ultraviolet waves and light waves
D ultraviolet waves and radio waves
27 A student stands 180 m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to
make a short, loud sound.
A timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.
Based on this result, what is the speed of sound?
A 120 m / s B 240 m / s C 270 m / s D 540 m / s

14
28 A train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.
magnet
train of train of
steel nails iron nails
The trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.
What happens to the trains?
A Both trains fall apart.

B Both trains stay together.
C Only the train of iron nails falls apart.
D Only the train of steel nails falls apart.
29 How can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?
A Cool the magnet for a long time.

B Place it next to another magnet.
C Slowly pull it out of a coil connected to an a.c. supply.
D Slowly pull it out of a coil connected to a d.c. supply.
30 A positively-charged rod is held near to, but not touching, an uncharged metal sphere.
The sphere is briefly now connected to earth.
The rod is removed.
Which statement about the charge on the sphere is correct?
A It is charged negatively because negative charges have moved from earth to the sphere.
B It is charged negatively because positive charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
C It is charged positively because negative charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
D It is charged positively because positive charges have moved to earth from the sphere.
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

15
31 The diagram shows a circuit with a gap between points P and Q.
Four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points P and Q in
the circuit.
P Q
The table gives the diameters and lengths of the wires.
In which wire is the current the largest?
diameter / mm length / m
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A torch has a simple circuit with a 3.0 V battery and a lamp. There is a 20 mA current in the lamp.
How much energy is transferred to the lamp in 5.0 minutes?
A 0.30 J B 18 J C 60 J D 0.30 kJ

16
33 A student connects the circuit shown.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the current in the resistor?
A B
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
current current
0
0 time
0
0 time
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

17
34 The diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an
ammeter.
Which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the
current in the circuit?
resistance of
temperature current in circuit
thermistor
A decreases decreases increases

B decreases increases decreases
D increases increases increases
35 What does the symbol shown represent?
A an AND gate
B a NOR gate
C a NOT gate
D an OR gate

18
36 The diagram shows a copper wire XY connected to a resistor.
The wire is moved in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
There is an induced current in the wire from X to Y.
In which labelled direction is the wire moving?
X
B
A C
N S
D
37 The graph shows how the voltage induced across a coil changes with time as the coil spins in a
magnetic field.
voltage
0
0 time
Which graph shows what happens when the coil spins more quickly?
(All graphs are drawn to the same scale.)
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

19
38 Emissions X and Y from radioactive material are passed through a magnetic field. The diagram
shows the direction of the emissions, the direction of the magnetic field and the effect on the
emissions.
emission X magnetic field

emission Y into the page
Which type of emission is X, and which type of emission is Y?
emission X emission Y
A α-particles β-particles
B α-particles γ-rays
C β-particles α-particles
D β-particles γ-rays
39 What is meant by the half-life of a radioactive isotope?
A half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay
B the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay
C the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve
D the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve

20
40 The rate of emission of a radioactive source is measured until the reading reaches the
background rate of 20 counts per minute.
The results are shown.
200
190
180
rate of emission
170
counts / minute
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / minute
What is the best estimate of the half-life of the source?
A 10 minutes
B 12 minutes
C 14 minutes
D 30 minutes
© UCLES 2017 0625/21/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/22
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 B 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 A 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 B 1
39 D 1
40 A 1

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*2664559192*

IB17 11_0625_22/4RP
2
1 A student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.
The diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of
the experiment, and one minute later.
80 80
cm3 cm3
60 60
40 40
20 20
initial after 1.0

measurement minute
What is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?
A 0.73 cm3 / s B 0.80 cm3 / s C 44 cm3 / s D 48 cm3 / s
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
Which ball hits the floor last?
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

3
3 The gravitational field strength on the Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on the
Moon. The Earth has an atmosphere, but the Moon does not.
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a light ball dropped from a great height near
the surface of the Earth and near the surface of the Moon?
A B
Earth
Moon
speed speed
Earth
Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Earth
Earth
speed speed
Moon Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight

4
5 A body of mass m has a weight W in a location where the gravitational field strength is g.
Which statement about these quantities is correct?
A m and W are both forces.

B m and W are both vector quantities.
C m and W are related by the equation W = g.
m
D m and W have the same unit.
6 An object is pivoted at point P. A student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. He pulls
the string with a force F.
string
s t
peg
r
q P
object
What is the moment of the force F about the point P?
A F×q B F×r C F×s D F×t
7 Each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. These are the only forces
acting on the plates.
In which diagram is the plate in equilibrium?
A B
1.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N
C D
1.0 N 1.0 N 2.0 N 1.0 N
2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N 2.0 N
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

5
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A ball has a mass of 0.30 kg. It moves horizontally with a speed of 3.0 m / s in the direction shown.
The ball hits a wall.
wall wall
ball ball
3.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
before hitting the wall after hitting the wall
The ball rebounds from the wall with a horizontal speed of 2.0 m / s.
What is the change in momentum of the ball?
A 0.30 kg m / s B 1.0 kg m / s C 1.5 kg m / s D 5.0 kg m / s
10 An object has a mass of 500 kg.
It moves with a speed of 30 m / s.
What is its kinetic energy?
A 7.5 kJ B 15 kJ C 225 kJ D 450 kJ

6
11 Different processes have different efficiencies.
Which row shows the most efficient process?
energy useful energy

input / J output / J
A 10 3
B 40 10
C 100 25
D 2000 250
height
length
gravity?

© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

7
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
A B C D

8
pressure reason

glass tube
mercury
air
water

© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

9
17 Which row identifies the fixed points on the Celsius scale?
lower fixed point upper fixed point
A boiling point of mercury melting point of pure ice

B boiling point of pure water melting point of pure ice
C melting point of mercury boiling point of pure water
D melting point of pure ice boiling point of pure water
18 Aluminium has a specific heat capacity of 900 J / (kg °C).
The internal energy of a 2.0 kg block of aluminium increases by 13 500 J.
By how much does the temperature of the block increase?
A 0.067 °C B 0.13 °C C 7.5 °C D 15 °C
19 Why does a balloon filled with hot air rise?
A Cold air is less dense than hot air.

B Cold air is more dense than hot air.
C Heat rises.
D The density of the balloon is greater than the density of the surrounding gas.

10
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

11
21 The diagram shows an object O in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.
At which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?
A
O
f f
C
D
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a rectangular glass block at 90° to the
surface.
ray of light
glass block
Which quantities remain unchanged as the light enters the glass block?
A direction and frequency

B direction and speed
C frequency and speed
D speed and wavelength
23 Which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s

12

26 The speed of sound is different in different states of matter.
The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.
Which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in steam with
the speed of sound in water?
speed of sound in ice speed of sound in steam

m/s m/s
A less than 1500 less than 1500

B less than 1500 more than 1500
C more than 1500 less than 1500
D more than 1500 more than 1500
27 A student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.
From this information, what is the speed of sound?
A 30 m / s B 60 m / s C 300 m / s D 600 m / s
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

13
magnet
train of train of

29 An old and expensive steel watch becomes magnetised.
The owner wants to use the watch again. He must demagnetise the watch.
What is the best method to do this?
A Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries alternating current and then slowly remove it.
B Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries direct current and then slowly remove it.
C Pass alternating current through the watch.
D Pass direct current through the watch.
30 Which diagram represents the electric field due to a negatively-charged conducting sphere?
A B C D
– – – –

14
the circuit.
P Q
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 The graph shows the way in which one physical quantity y varies with another physical quantity x.
0
0 x
Which row gives suitable quantities for y and x?
y x
A the number of atoms of a the time taken

radioactive isotope present
B the potential difference the current in the metallic conductor
across a metallic conductor
C the resistance of a length of wire the diameter of the wire
D the volume of a 1.0 kg object the density of the material from
which the object is made
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

15
33 The potential difference across a car headlamp is 12 V. The current in the lamp is 2.5 A.
How much energy is transferred by the lamp in 1.0 hour?
A 1800 J B 1800 W C 108 000 J D 108 000 W
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor


16
35 An incomplete truth table for a NAND gate is shown.
input P input Q output
0 0 W
0 1 X
1 0 Y
1 1 Z
What are the values of W, X, Y and Z?
W X Y Z
A 0 0 0 1
B 0 1 1 1
C 1 0 0 0
D 1 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a wire hanging freely between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in
the wire in the direction shown.
wire
S N
current
The magnet and current cause a force to act on the wire.
In which direction does this force act?
A into the page (away from you)

B out of the page (toward you)
C to the left
D to the right
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

17
37 A 100% efficient transformer has 6000 turns on its primary coil and 600 turns on its secondary
coil. The output voltage of the transformer is 12 V.
A resistor is connected across the secondary coil and dissipates 24 W of power.

output voltage 12 V
power 24 W
What is the current in the primary coil of the transformer?
A 0.050 A B 0.20 A C 5.0 A D 20 A
38 In the diagram, the circle represents an atom (not to scale) with the nucleus at its centre.
A particle is emitted by a radioactive source and approaches the nucleus of the atom. The curved
arrow shows the path of the particle.
nucleus
path of
particle
What is the nature and charge of the particle?
nature of particle charge of particle
A α-particle negative
B α-particle positive
C β-particle negative
D β-particle positive

18
39 Which row describes the behaviour of γ-rays in an electric field and in a magnetic field?
electric field magnetic field
A deflected deflected
B deflected undeflected
C undeflected deflected
D undeflected undeflected
40 A radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.
A detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.
Background radiation can be ignored.
What is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?
A 750 counts per second

B 1500 counts per second
C 2000 counts per second
D 3000 counts per second
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/22/O/N/17

PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

PUBLISHED 2017
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 D 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

PUBLISHED 2017
29 A 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 C 1
40 D 1

PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7509628836*

IB17 11_0625_23/4RP
2
1 A measuring cylinder contains some water. A small metal block is slowly lowered into the water
and is then removed.
Finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into
the water.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.
1 2 3
cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20 plastic
10 10 10
metal block metal block
What is the volume of the piece of plastic?
A 10 cm3 B 25 cm3 C 70 cm3 D 80 cm3
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
Which ball hits the floor first?
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

3
3 The diagram shows the vertical forces acting on a ball as it falls vertically through the air. The ball
does not reach terminal velocity.
air resistance
weight
Which row describes what happens to the resultant force on the ball and what happens to the
acceleration of the ball as it falls through the air?
resultant force acceleration
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight

4
5 On the Moon, all objects fall with the same acceleration.
Which statement explains this?
A On the Moon, all objects have the same weight.

B The Moon has a smaller gravitational field strength than the Earth.
C The weight of an object is directly proportional to its mass.
D The weight of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.
6 A pair of cutters is used to cut a rope.
blade
handle
P
Q
R
S
blade
handle
Where should the rope be positioned and at which labelled points should the hands be positioned
to produce the greatest cutting force?
rope hands
positioned positioned
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

5
7 The lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.
shade
stem
base
Which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?
base centre of gravity
A narrower higher
B narrower lower
C wider higher
D wider lower
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N

6
9 An object has a mass of 60 kg.
It decelerates from 50 m / s to 20 m / s when a resultant force of 300 N acts on it.
For how long does the force act?
A 0.071 s B 0.17 s C 6.0 s D 14 s
10 A car, starting from rest at position X, accelerates up a hill. The car reaches a speed of 10 m / s at
position Y.
The kinetic energy of the car at position Y is equal to its gain in gravitational potential energy from
X to Y.
X gain in
height
of car
Take the gravitational field strength g to be 10 N / kg.
What is the gain in height of the car between X and Y?
A 0.50 m B 5.0 m C 10 m D 50 m
11 A 150 W filament lamp has an efficiency of 10%. A 40 W compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) has an
efficiency of 30%.
Each lamp is switched on for the same amount of time.
Which lamp produces more light and which lamp converts more energy into other forms of
energy?
converts more energy

produces more light
into other forms
A CFL lamp CFL lamp

B CFL lamp filament lamp
C filament lamp CFL lamp
D filament lamp filament lamp
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

7
height
length
gravity?

cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm

8
A B C D
pressure reason

© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

9
glass tube
mercury
air
water

17 Which property cannot be used for the measurement of temperature?
A half-life of a radioactive isotope

B length of a solid metal bar
C pressure of a gas
D volume of a liquid
18 A student uses an immersion heater to heat some water in a beaker.
The water is heated from 20 °C to 80 °C.
The energy supplied to the water is 60.0 kJ.
What is the thermal capacity of the water? (Ignore any heat loss.)
A 667 J / °C B 750 J / °C C 1000 J / °C D 3000 J / °C

10
19 Why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?
A Cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.
B Cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.
C Hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.
D Hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.
wavefronts
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

11
21 The diagram shows a ray of light in glass. The ray reaches a boundary with air.
One weak ray of light is missing from the diagram.
air
glass 50°
A At the boundary, the speed of the light will become less.
B The critical angle for light at this boundary is 50°.

C The diagram shows an example of diffraction of light.
D The missing ray is a weak reflected ray.
22 Light travelling in air enters a plastic block at an angle of incidence of 62°.
The plastic has a refractive index of 1.48.
plastic block
62°
ray of
light
What is the angle of refraction?
A 18° B 28° C 37° D 42°

12
23 A sound wave travels from a medium in one state into the same medium but in another state.
This causes the speed of the wave to change from approximately 300 m / s to approximately
3000 m / s.
Between which two states is the sound wave travelling?
A gas to solid
B liquid to gas
C liquid to solid
D solid to liquid
A 1.27 ms B 2.53 ms C 1.27 s D 2.53 s
25 Which statement about radio waves is correct?
A They are used in television remote controllers.

B They can be detected by the human eye.
C They travel as longitudinal waves.
D They have the same speed in a vacuum as ultraviolet waves.
26 The diagram shows the Earth and its surroundings.
Through which labelled region can sound not be transmitted?
A B C D
sea land atmosphere outer space
(water) (rock) (air) (vacuum)
not to scale
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

13

magnet
train of train of

29 What is the best method to demagnetise a steel rod?
A Pass the rod through a coil connected to an a.c. supply.

B Pass the rod through a coil connected to a d.c. supply.
C Place the rod next to another magnet.
D Stroke the rod with another magnet.
30 There is a current in a metal wire.
Which particles in the wire move to cause this current?
A α-particles
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons

14
the circuit.
P Q
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A battery is connected to a circuit. It is switched on for 1.0 minute. During that time, there is a
current of 0.40 A in the circuit and the battery supplies a total of 48 J of energy.
Which row gives the charge that passes and the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?
charge that passes e.m.f. of the

in 1.0 minute / C battery / V
A 0.40 2.0
B 0.40 120
C 24 2.0
D 24 120
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

15
33 Identical cells and identical resistors are used to make the circuits shown.
A A
circuit 1 circuit 2
In circuit 1, the ammeter reads 2.0 A.
What is the ammeter reading in circuit 2?
A 1.0 A B 2.0 A C 4.0 A D 8.0 A
ammeter.
resistance of
thermistor


16
35 The diagram shows an AND gate and an OR gate connected together.
X
Y
output
Z
Which combination of inputs X, Y and Z gives an output of 0?
X Y Z
A 0 0 1
B 0 1 1
C 1 0 0
D 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a short-circuited copper coil swinging about an axis at right-angles to a
strong magnetic field. The motion induces a current in the coil.
axis of rotation
of coil
coil
magnetic field
direction of
swing of coil
What is the effect, if any, of this induced current in the coil?
A The induced current has no effect on the movement of the coil because copper is non-
magnetic.
B The induced current produces a magnetic field of constant magnitude in the coil.
C The induced current produces forces that assist the change causing it.
D The induced current produces forces that oppose the changes causing it.
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

17
37 Diagram 1 shows a magnet being pushed into a coil that is connected to a centre-zero
galvanometer.
N
stationary
magnet
S N
0 0 0
N
S
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3
Which row shows the directions of the pointer when the magnet is as shown in diagrams 2
and 3?
diagram 2 diagram 3

18
38 Radioactive carbon-14 decays to nitrogen-14 by the emission of a particle.
14 14
6C → 7N + particle
Which particle has been emitted in this process?
A a β-particle
B an α-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
39 As α-particles pass through the electric field between two charged plates, they are deflected
downwards.
+ + + + + + + + +
α-particles
– – – – – – – – –
What happens to γ-rays passing through the same electric field?
A They are deflected downwards more than the α-particles.

B They are deflected upwards.
C They are not deflected at all.
D They follow the same path as the α-particles.
40 Radioactive iodine-131 emits β-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. It decays to produce
xenon-131.
Which statement about this decay is correct?
A After 8 days no more β-particles are emitted.

B After 8 days the number of xenon-131 atoms has halved.
C After 16 days the iodine-131 has decayed completely.
D After 16 days the number of iodine-131 atoms has reduced to one quarter.
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/23/O/N/17

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN MARK SCHEME
45 minutes
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

PMT
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 A
2 B 22 C
3 B 23 C
4 C 24 C
5 B 25 D
6 B 26 D
7 B 27 B
8 C 28 D
9 A 29 B
10 C 30 B
11 C 31 C
12 D 32 C
13 A 33 A
14 A 34 C
15 D 35 B
16 B 36 A
17 D 37 D
18 D 38 A
19 C 39 D
20 A 40 C
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SM/16

PMT

*0123456789*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN PAPER
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2)
The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

PMT
1 Which quantity is measured in newton seconds (N s)?
A impulse
B moment
C power
D work done
2 Which measurement can be made using a micrometer screw gauge?
A the air pressure of a tyre

B the diameter of a wire
C the turning effect of a spanner
D the wavelength of microwaves
3 A parachutist is falling at terminal velocity, without her parachute open.
She now opens her parachute.
What is the direction of her motion, and what is the direction of her acceleration, immediately
after she opens her parachute?
direction of motion of direction of acceleration

the parachutist of the parachutist
A downwards downwards
B downwards upwards
C upwards downwards
D upwards upwards
4 An astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft experiences a force due to gravity. This force is less than
when she is on the Earth’s surface.
Compared with being on the Earth’s surface, how do her mass and her weight change when she
goes into orbit?
mass in orbit weight in orbit
B decreases unchanged
C unchanged decreases
D unchanged unchanged
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
5 The diagram shows an experiment to find the density of a liquid.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 measuring 40
cylinder
30 30
liquid
20 20
10 balance 10
g g
6 An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
load / N 0 1.0 2.0 3.0

length / cm 15.2 16.2 18.6
extension / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4
Which figure is missing from the table?
A 17.2 B 17.3 C 17.4 D 17.6
7 The diagram shows a satellite that is moving at a uniform rate in a circular orbit around the Earth.
Which statement describes the motion of this satellite?
A It is accelerating because its speed is changing.

B It is accelerating because its velocity is changing.
C It is not accelerating but its speed is changing.
D It is not accelerating but its velocity is changing.
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16 [Turn over

PMT
8 Which statement about an object moving in a straight line through air is correct?
A When it accelerates, the resultant force acting on it is zero.

B When it moves at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it is zero.
C When it moves at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it is zero.
D When it moves, there is a resultant force acting on it.
9 A beam pivoted at one end has a force of 5.0 N acting vertically upwards on it as shown. The
beam is in equilibrium.
5.0 N
2.0 cm 3.0 cm
pivot
weight
of beam
What is the weight of the beam?
A 2.0 N B 3.0 N C 3.3 N D 5.0 N
10 A car has a mass of 1000 kg and a momentum of 12 000 kg m / s.
What is its kinetic energy?
A 6 kJ
B 12 kJ
C 72 kJ
D 144 kJ
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
11 Which diagram shows two forces X and Y with their resultant force?
resultant
resultant
Y
X Y
X
A B
resultant
resultant
Y X
Y
C D
12 A ball is dropped on to a hard surface and bounces. It does not bounce all the way back to where
it started, and so has not regained all of its original gravitational potential energy.
ball dropped
from here
ball bounces
to here
hard surface
Which statement accounts for the loss of gravitational potential energy?
A Energy was destroyed as the ball hit the ground.

B Energy was destroyed as the ball travelled through the air.
C The chemical energy and elastic energy of the ball have increased.
D The internal (heat) energy of the ball and its surroundings has increased.

PMT
13 The Sun is the original source of energy for many of our energy resources.
Which energy resource does not originate from the Sun?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C waves
D wind
14 A dam across a lake is divided into two sections by a rock. Section X is longer than section Y but
the two sections are otherwise identical. The water in the lake by the dam is the same depth
everywhere. The diagram shows a view from above of the lake and the dam.
section X of dam
water in
lake
rock
section Y of dam
The water creates a total force on each section of the dam and an average pressure on each
section of the dam.
A The average pressure on X equals the average pressure on Y.

B The average pressure on X is less than the average pressure on Y.
C The total force on X equals the total force on Y.
D The total force on X is less than the total force on Y.
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
15 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer. The
manometer contains some trapped gas.
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
What is the pressure of the trapped gas?
A 10 cm of mercury
B 50 cm of mercury
C 66 cm of mercury
D 86 cm of mercury

PMT
16 Very small pollen grains are suspended in a beaker of water. A bright light shines from the side.
Small, bright dots of light are seen through a microscope. The dots move in rapidly changing,
random directions.
eye
microscope
light
pollen grains
in water
What are the bright dots?
A pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains

B pollen grains being hit by water molecules
C water molecules being hit by other water molecules
D water molecules being hit by pollen grains
17 A sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.
What happens to the average speed of the gas molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the
cylinder as the temperature of the gas rises?
average speed of pressure of gas in

gas molecules cylinder
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
18 The diagram shows four beakers A, B, C and D. The beakers contain different amounts of the
same liquid at the same temperature. The beakers are left next to each other on a laboratory
bench overnight. The diagrams are all drawn to the same scale.
From which beaker does the largest quantity of liquid evaporate?
A B C D
19 Which line in the table shows the relative expansion of the three states of matter from the most
expansion to the least expansion?
most expansion least expansion
A solids > liquids > gases

B solids > gases > liquids
C gases > liquids > solids
D gases > solids > liquids
20 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
glass bulb stem
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
liquid liquid
thread
Which two features both affect the sensitivity of the thermometer?
A mass of liquid and diameter of liquid thread

B mass of liquid and length of stem
C thickness of glass bulb and diameter of liquid thread
D thickness of glass bulb and length of stem

PMT
10
21 A student wishes to calculate the specific heat capacity of copper.
He has a block of copper and an electrical heater. He knows the power of the heater.
Which other apparatus does he need?
balance stop watch thermometer
A key
B = needed
C = not needed
D
22 A mass of 0.20 kg of a substance is initially solid.
It is heated at a steady rate of 500 W.
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.
temperature
/ °C
0
0 100 300 time / s
What is the specific latent heat of fusion of the substance?
A 20 000 J / kg
B 30 000 J / kg
C 500 000 J / kg
D 750 000 J / kg
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
11
23 The diagram shows some ice being used to lower the temperature of some warm water.
ice
warm water
glass
What is the main process by which the water at the bottom of the glass becomes cool?
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D radiation

PMT
12
24 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water.
Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?
A B
fast slow fast slow
deep shallow deep shallow

water water water water
C D
fast slow fast slow
deep shallow deep shallow

water water water water
25 The diagram shows a ray of monochromatic light passing through a semi-circular glass block.
50° ray emerges in air

close to glass
surface
incident reflected
ray glass ray
air
What is the refractive index of the glass?
A 0.64 B 0.77 C 1.31 D 1.56
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
13
26 An object O is placed close to a thin converging lens.
The diagram represents three rays from the top of O passing through the lens.
Which type of image is produced by the lens when the object O is in this position?
A real and diminished

B real and enlarged
C virtual and diminished
D virtual and enlarged
27 An echo-sounder on a ship produces a pulse of sound. The echo is received by the echo-sounder
after two seconds.
ship
echo-sounder
sea bed
The speed of sound in sea-water is 1500 m / s.
What is the depth of the sea-water below the ship?
A 750 m B 1500 m C 3000 m D 6000 m

PMT
14
28 The diagram shows apparatus that can be used to make a magnet.
power supply
metal
coil
Which metal and which power supply are used to make a permanent magnet?
metal power supply
A iron 6 V a.c.
B iron 6 V d.c.
C steel 6 V a.c.
D steel 6 V d.c.
29 A positively charged plastic rod is placed just above a thick metal plate. The metal plate rests on
an insulator and is connected to the earth by a wire.
positive rod metal plate
+ + + + + +
earthing wire
insulator
A student disconnects the earthing wire and then removes the positively charged rod.
The experiment is repeated. This time the student removes the positively charged rod and then
removes the earthing wire.
A When the earthing wire is disconnected first, the metal plate becomes positively charged.
B When the earthing wire is disconnected first, the metal plate becomes negatively charged.
C When the plastic rod is removed first, the metal plate becomes positively charged.
D When the plastic rod is removed first, the metal plate becomes negatively charged.
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
15
30 The resistance of a wire depends on its length l and on its cross-sectional area A.
The resistance is
A directly proportional to l and directly proportional to A.

B directly proportional to l and inversely proportional to A.
C inversely proportional to l and directly proportional to A.
D inversely proportional to l and inversely proportional to A.
31 In the circuit shown, the ammeter reads 2.0 A and the voltmeter reads 12 V.
12 V
6.0 Ω
How much energy is transferred by the resistor in 10 seconds?
A 2.4 J
B 14.4 J
C 240 J
D 1440 J

PMT
16
32 The diagram shows part of an electrical circuit.
3.0 A 4.0 Ω
A
2.0 Ω
The current in the 4.0 Ω resistor is 3.0 A.
What is the current in the ammeter?
A 4.5 A
B 6.0 A
C 9.0 A
D 12.0 A
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
17
33 The circuit diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the
thermistor.
The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.
resistance
temperature
As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the
reading on the voltmeter?
resistance voltmeter reading

PMT
18
34 A circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2 A.
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
160
time taken
140
to break the
circuit / s 120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current is 18 A?
when the current is 2 A when the current is 18 A
A the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
B the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit does not break
C the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
D the circuit does not break the circuit does not break
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
19
35 A solenoid is connected in series with a sensitive ammeter. The N pole of a magnet is placed
next to one end of the solenoid, marked X.
solenoid
N X
magnet
First, the N pole of the magnet is pushed towards X, then the magnet is pulled away from X.
During both stages the ammeter deflects.
Which type of magnetic pole is induced at X during these two stages?
as N pole moves as N pole moves away

towards X from X
A N pole N pole
B N pole S pole
C S pole N pole
D S pole S pole

PMT
20
36 The diagram shows a transformer.
soft-iron core
primary secondary
coil coil
Which row describes the magnetic field in the soft-iron core and the magnetic field in the
secondary coil when the transformer is operating?
magnetic field
in soft-iron core in secondary coil
A changing changing
B changing constant
C constant changing
D constant constant
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
21
37 The graph shows the output of an a.c. generator. The coil in the generator rotates 20 times in one
second.
+1
output
p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
The speed of rotation of the coil steadily increases.
Which graph best shows how the output changes?
+1
output
A p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
+1
output
B p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
+2
output
p.d. / V
+1
C 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
–2
+2
output
p.d. / V
+1
D 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
–2

PMT
22
38 The diagram shows a wire placed between two magnetic poles of equal strength.
A current passes through the wire in the direction shown. The current causes a downward force
on the wire.
wire
direction
of force
direction
of current
What is the arrangement of the magnetic poles?
S N
A
N S
B
N N
C
S S
D
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
23
39 A beam of γ-rays passes between two charged metal plates as shown in the diagram.
γ-rays
How do the γ-rays pass between the two charged plates?
A The rays are deflected in a direction perpendicular to the page

B The rays are deflected towards the negative plate.
C The rays are deflected towards the positive plate.
D The rays will continue in the same direction.
40 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive isotope that emits α-particles.
The half-life of the isotope is 5 days.
What mass of this isotope remains after 10 days?
A 0 mg B 40 mg C 100 mg D 200 mg
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 0625/02/SP/16

PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2
May/June 2003
1 hour



provided.

SP (AT/KN) S46409/2
© CIE 2003 [Turn over
PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 A person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the
ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
ends cut
off here
thread 1 m rule
Fig. 1.1
(a) To the nearest metre, what is the length of the thread?
.................. m [1]
(b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)?
Tick one box and give your reason.
slightly greater slightly less
reason .......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10 N F
Fig. 2.1
A force of 10 N pulls on one string.
(i) The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string?
F = .............................. N
(ii) What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equally-
spaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.
The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
(i) What is the force exerted by each block on the pot? ...............N
(ii) State the direction of these forces.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot
up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the
pot?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03 [Turn over

PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) An unopened bottle of olive oil has
a mass of 0.97 kg. The empty bottle
has a mass of 0.51 kg.
Calculate the mass of the olive oil.
OLI V OLI V
OIL OIL
0.97 kg 0.51 kg
Fig. 3.1
mass of olive oil = .................................. kg [2]
(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders
are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2.
cm3
250
200
50
150
100
50
Fig. 3.2
(i) What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder?
volume = .................................. cm3
(ii) Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.
volume = .................................. cm3
(iii) Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ..................................
[7]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
fixed
pivot
load
piston
cylinder
air
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The load is increased.
(i) State what happens to the piston.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.
what happens ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 °C. The immersion heater is switched
on.
insulating immersion heater

beaker
crushed ice
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the
ice has melted. [3]
100
temperature / °C
0 time
time when
all ice has
melted
Fig. 5.2
(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.
After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
(i) Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 In this question, drawing should be done carefully.
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking mirror 1 at point X.
ray of
light mirror 2
mirror 1 X
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1,
(i) draw the normal at X,

(ii) draw the ray reflected from mirror 1,
(iii) mark the angle of incidence using the letter i and the angle of reflection using the
letter r.
[3]
(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2.
Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You
may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below.
The reflected ray from mirror 2 is .....................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds
after the sound was made. [1]
time elapsed/s 0 1 2 3 4 5
distance travelled/m 0 340
Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave. [3]
distance
travelled
/m
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/s
Fig. 7.2
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.
distress
flare
lifeboat
sinking ship
Fig. 7.3
The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a
bright flash of light.
(i) A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time.
State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the
lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.
distance of lifeboat = .................................. m

[6]

PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 (a) In an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store? ................................ [1]
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.
S1
large-value
resistor
6 V d.c.
V capacitor –
S2
Fig. 8.1
(i) Switch S1 is open. Switch S2 is closed and then opened again.
What reading now shows on the voltmeter? ................................ V
(ii) S2 is left open and S1 is closed and left closed.
Describe what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 is an example of a simple time-delay circuit.
State one use of a time-delay circuit.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically
in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
S
N
Fig. 9.1
Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A
and B is not shown.
A A
magnet magnet
pole pole
B B
Fig. 9.2 Fig. 9.3
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes
through it. [2]
(ii) Explain why the wire looks like this.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed. [1]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.
brightness focus
time-base y-gain
ms/cm volts/cm
x-shift y-shift
on
y input off
Fig. 10.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen.
(i) Describe what causes this bright spot.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal
line.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i) Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 10.2
1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor.
Fig. 11.1
The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the
variable resistor makes no difference.
In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor
may be used to change the brightness of the lamp. [2]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply.
The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored.
8Ω
Q
P
+
6V A
–
R
S
4Ω
Fig. 11.2
(i) Calculate the combined resistance of the 8 Ω and 4 Ω resistors in series.
combined resistance = .................................. Ω [2]
(ii) 1. Calculate the current supplied by the 6 V d.c. supply.
current = ..................................
2. State the value of the current
in section PQ of the circuit ..................................
recorded by the ammeter ..................................
in section SR of the circuit ..................................

[5]
(iii) On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference
across the 4 Ω resistor. [1]

PMT
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
safety rope
climber
Fig. 12.1
(a) To climb the rock face, the climber must do work.

Which force must the climber work against as he climbs? Tick one box.
air resistance
friction on the rock
his weight
tension in the safety rope [1]
(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the
work done by the climber?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to
climb the cliff.
(i) Which one has done the most work? ........................................................................
(ii) Which one has the greater power rating? .................................................................

[2]
(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential
energy than he had at the bottom.
(i) What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra
gravitational potential energy? ..................................................................................
(ii) Where did he get this energy from? ..........................................................................
(iii) Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was
energy in his body used? State one way.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2
May/June 2004
1 hour 15 minutes



provided.

SPA (NH/BI) S61205/2
PMT
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot
see the clock can know what hour of the day it is.
At precisely 6 o’clock, the clock starts to strike. It strikes 6 times.
At the first strike of the bell, a man’s wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.1
When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.
time interval = ……………… s [1]
(b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.
time interval = ………………s [2]
(c) At precisely 11 o’clock, the clock starts to strike.

Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 11th strike.
time interval = ………………s [2]

© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. The rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people
through.
hinge rail
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that
would be needed to begin to raise the rail. [3]
(b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force?
Tick one box.
force
work
moment
movement [1]
(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift
the rail.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04 [Turn over

PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist.
25
speed P Q
20
m/s
15
10
5
R
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) Calculate the distance travelled during the first 50 s.
distance travelled = …………………... m
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.
distance travelled = …………………... m
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Calculate the total distance travelled.
total distance travelled = …………………... m
(iv) Calculate the average speed during the 100 s.
average speed = …………………... m/s

[8]

PMT
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from A to B at a steady
speed.
A B
Fig. 4.1
State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done
by the person.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls
much harder than the person in (a).
Describe what happens to the second person’s barrow.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) State which person has the greater power between A and B.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give two reasons for your answer to (c)(i).
reason 1 ....................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. The bulb of a
thermometer is held in the liquid. A jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that the
liquid evaporates rapidly.
thermometer
jet of air
liquid
shallow dish
Fig. 5.1
(a) State what happens to the reading shown on the thermometer.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment
occurs.
......................................................................................................................................[1]

PMT
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) When a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature
of the aluminium rises by 1 °C.
1 kg aluminium inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to aluminium
Fig. 6.1
In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
1 kg copper inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to copper
Fig. 6.2
The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the
1 kg aluminium block in (a).
Explain, in terms of thermal capacity, why this is so.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Boy A throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
B
A
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) Girl B hears the ‘plop’ sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she
sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the
pond where she is sitting.
Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest.
Write ‘fastest’ in one box and ‘slowest’ in another box. Leave one box empty.
sound wave
light wave
water wave [2]
(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal
wave.
sound wave
light wave
water wave [3]
(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a
substance in which to travel.
sound wave
light wave
water wave [1]

PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A, B, C and D are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. Tests
are performed to find out which bar is which.
Each row of Fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end.
A B repel
A C attract
B D no effect
Fig. 8.1
Which bar is which? Complete the lines below.
Bar A is ........................................................................
Bar B is ........................................................................
Bar C is ........................................................................
Bar D is ........................................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 Some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste.
The radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks.
The results are shown in the table below.
time/weeks 0 1 2 3 4 5
activity
800 440 240 130 70 40
count/s
(a) Plot these values on Fig. 9.1. [3]
activity 800
count/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time/weeks
Fig. 9.1
(b) Draw the best curve through your points. [1]
(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly
on the graph how you obtained your answer.
half-life of radioactive material = ………………… weeks [2]
(d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this
would have affected, if at all,
(i) the activity readings, .................................................................................................
(ii) the value of the half-life. ............................................................................................

[2]

PMT
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) One coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. The other coil is connected to a
240 V a.c. mains supply, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V

to
train
set
Fig. 10.1
(i) How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the voltage at which the toy train operates.
toy train operates at ………………… V [3]
(iii) 1. The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage
supplied to the train set? Tick one box.
increases
decreases
stays the same
2. An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is
110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train
operates.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor.
pivoted iron
armature power supply
for motor
M motor
switch
contacts
relay core
Fig. 10.2
Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works.
A The armature pivots and the contacts close.

B The core of the relay is magnetised.
C The switch is closed and the current flows through the coil.
D A current flows through the motor, making it work.
E The core attracts the top part of the armature.
Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters
in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example.
Stage 1 is sentence C
Stage 2 is sentence
Stage 3 is sentence
Stage 4 is sentence
Stage 5 is sentence [3]

PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) The list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an
electric circuit.
capacitor light-dependent resistor resistor thermistor variable resistor
Which of these has
(i) a resistance that falls rapidly when the temperature rises,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) a resistance that changes when a sliding contact is moved,
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) a high resistance in the dark but a low resistance in daylight?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.
12 V
0.50 A
lamp
Fig. 11.1
(i) 1. Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.
2. The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance of lamp = …………………

[4]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) A resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
12 V
lamp
Fig. 11.2
1. State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
3. Suggest what change might be seen in the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................
[3]

PMT
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. This is shown from the side in Fig. 12.1.
mirror
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip
A of the man’s beard will be.
(ii) On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the man’s beard that reflects from
the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish.
Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(iii) The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is
given to this type of image?
...................................................................................................................................
(iv) Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the
ray makes with the mirror.
[7]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) A girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. Fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in
the mirror.
reflection seen
in mirror
Fig. 12.2
(i) In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box.
left hand
right hand
(ii) She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye.
Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection.
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04

PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
Copyright Acknowledgements:
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly
infringed.
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT

MARK SCHEME for the June 2005 question paper
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory), maximum mark 80
demonstrated.
Examination.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
PMT
Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the June 2005 examination.
maximum minimum mark required for grade:

mark
A C E F
available
Component 2 80 N/A 51 38 26
The threshold (minimum mark) for B is set halfway between those for Grades A and C.
The threshold (minimum mark) for D is set halfway between those for Grades C and E.
The threshold (minimum mark) for G is set as many marks below the F threshold as the
E threshold is above it.
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
PMT
June 2005
IGCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/02
PHYSICS
Theory
PMT

IGCSE – JUNE 2005 0625 2
Question Scheme Target

Mark
Grade
1 (a) 100 – 20 F C1
level shown at 80 (ignore meniscus) ± 1mm (need
F A1
not actually draw surface)
(b) (i) 16 (cm) F B1
(ii) sub of (i) into formula F C1
sub of 100 into formula F C1
6.25 e.c.f. from (i) F A1
2
cm C B1
Accept working from any two correct values 7
2 (a) 2100 – 900 F C1
12 OR 10.06 (i.e. travel time) F A1
(b) 1500 (ignore unit) OR 15.00 OR ‘1500 to 1800’ F B1
(c) 1 F B1
(d) (i) find area of first trapezium (or equivalent) bold
C B1
area under graph
(ii) find total area C M1
divide by total time OR divide by 12 OR divide
C A1
by travel time
7
3 (a) it turns F M1
clockwise C A1
(b) (i) stationary OR nothing F B1
(ii) horizontal arrow (intention of from OR to pivot -
F M1
condone gap, if clear)
to left F A1
10 (N) C B1
6
4 (a) gravitational F B1
(b) kinetic F B1
(c) kinetic C B1
(d) electrical F B1
(e) internal ACCEPT heat condone valid extras C B1
5

PMT

IGCSE – JUNE 2005 0625 2
5 (a) (i) increased

F B1
(ii) molecules move faster/have more energy C B1

OR collisions more energetic
more frequent collisions (condone with each
C B1
other)/harder collisions
collisions with walls C B1
idea of collisions causing a force C B1
(b) (i) evaporation F B1
(ii) energy of molecules increases/molecules move
C B1
faster
molecules escape/break bonds F C1
faster/higher energy molecules escape C A1
9
6 (a) resistance = voltage/current in any form, letters,
F C1
words, figures, mix
330 6.3 2F A1+A1
(b) candidate’s 4 points correctly plotted ± ½ small
2F B2
square -1 e.e.o.o.
(c) (i) reasonable curve, smooth, not too thick F B1
(ii) resistance/temperature changes smoothly C B1
(d) (i) 1500 - 1700 OR candidates lowest point on
C B1
graph, quoted correctly
(ii) idea of lowest resistance C B1
9
7 (a) (from L to R) infra red (OR µwave)/ ultra violet/
4F B1 x 4
x rays/gamma rays
sound ticked F B1
5
8 (a) one 90° deviation at 1st mirror, by eye F C1
two 90° deviations at 1st mirror, by eye F A1
emerging rays parallel to incident rays, by eye F B1
(b) upside down OR inverted OR same size OR real C B1
4

PMT

IGCSE – JUNE 2005 0625 2
9 (a) speed = distance/time )

) in any form F C1
OR speed = 2 x distance/time )
2 x 249/332 F C1
1.5 F A1
(b) 0.75 and 2.25 ticked e.c.f. use + x = 0 for
2C B1 + B1
extras
Mark (b) independent of (a) 5
10 (a) (i) conductor OR metal F B1
(ii) metal (but not if answer to (i)) OR any named
F B1
metal OR any named liquid conductor
(ii) apply an e.m.f. OR apply a p.d. OR equivalent C B1
(b) (i) insulator NOT non-conductor (but condone as
F B1
extra)
(ii) any suitable example F B1
(c) insulator OR ‘(b)(i)’ e.c.f. from (b)(i) NOT just
F B1
the name of a type of insulator
6
11 (a) same ticked F B1
(b) 2 C B1
(c) R1 + R2 in any form, letters or numbers F C1
4 e.c.f. from (b) C A1
(d) (i) 1Ω ticked F B1
(ii) more than 0.3A ticked C B1
(e) (i) increases/stretches F B1
(ii) increases c.a.o. C B1
8
12 (a) 1 (unit) / neutral / zero / in nucleus
1/1800 (unit) OR tiny / -1 (unit) / in orbit
OR outside nucleus
1 4F,2C B1 x6
OR OR negligible NOT just negative OR
2000
in shell NOT zero
(b) (i) proton and neutron F B1
(ii) 1. 4 (units) C B1
2. (+)2 (units) NOT -2 C B1
9

PMT

IGCSE – JUNE 2005 0625 2
NOTES ABOUT THE MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS
B marks are independent markS, which do not depend on any other marks. For
a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be
seen in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend.
For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in
a candidate’s answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark,
then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does
not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or
allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means ‘correct answer only’
e.c.f. means ‘error carried forward’. This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried the incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, the candidate may be given marks
indicated by e.c.f. provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing
in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised
more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated ‘e.c.f.’
e.e.o.o means ‘each error or omission’
brackets () Around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend
on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
underlining Indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means ‘unit penalty’. An otherwise correct answer will have one mark
deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where
specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing
units are condoned.
OR/or Indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for
scoring the marks.

PMT

PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2
May/June 2005
1 hour 15 minutes



provided.

SPA (MML 8112 3/04) S80361/3
PMT
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 (a) A measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3 of water. 20 cm3 of the water is poured into a
beaker.
On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder. [2]
cm3
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
100
15
10
50
Fig. 1.2
(i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation
volume = cross-sectional area × length.
Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.
cross-sectional area = .................................

[5]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05
PMT
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 A boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. Fig. 2.1 shows how the
speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its final
destination at 2100 hrs.
speed
0
0900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
time of day (24 -hour clock)
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate how long the whole journey takes.
time taken = ....................... hours [2]
(b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed.
time of day = ................................. [1]
(c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place.
longest time = ....................... hours [1]
(d) If the speed axis had values marked on it, state

(i) how the graph could be used to find the distance travelled between 0900 hrs and
1130 hrs,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
PMT
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 (a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P.
A horizontal 5 N force acts at Q, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Q
5N
pivot
Fig. 3.1
Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
Q
5N
pivot
5N
R
Fig. 3.2
(i) Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the
direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force
next to the arrow. [4]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity.
reservoir
power
station water flows down
water flows out
Fig. 4.1
Answer the following questions, using words from this list.
chemical electrical gravitational internal (heat)
kinetic light nuclear sound strain
(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of
energy for this system?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess
because of this movement?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the
turbines possess because of their rotation?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What sort of energy does the power station generate?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted
energy released?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) On a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. She then screws the cap
back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air.
cap screwed on tightly
air
Fig. 5.1
She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it.
After a while in the Sun’s rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before.
(i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
7 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) Also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as
shown in Fig. 5.2.
water
Fig. 5.2
As the Sun shines on it, the volume of water slowly decreases.

(i) State the name of the process causing this decrease.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the effect of the Sun’s rays on the water molecules, explain your answer
to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]

PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
6 The table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day
to cause a current of 0.03 A in a particular thermistor.
time of day (24-hour clock) 0900 1200 1500 1800
p.d. / V 15.0 9.9 7.5
resistance / 500 210 250
(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your
working. Write your answers in the table.
[3]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, plot the four resistance values.
600
resistance /
400
200
0
0600 0900 1200 1500 1800 2100
time of day
Fig. 6.1
[2]
(c) (i) Draw a smooth curve through your points.
(ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the
points?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(d) The thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature
increases.
(i) From your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest.
time of day = .............................

(ii) State the reason for your answer to (d)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

PMT
10 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio visible
Fig. 7.1
Two of the regions have been labelled.
(a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions. [4]
(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave.
Tick one box to show which type of wave is not electromagnetic.
microwave
radar
sound [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
11 For
Examiner's
Use
8 An inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. He cuts a
square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box.
A side view of the arrangement is shown in Fig. 8.1.
mirror
box cut
in half
mirror
Fig. 8.1
Fig. 8.2 shows the arrangement, drawn larger.
ray 1 from object
ray 2 from object

45°
90°
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.
(a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventor’s head will
be. [3]
(b) Look at what has happened to the two rays.
What can be said about the image the inventor sees?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
PMT
12 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in
Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.
woman man
249 m 249 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time
when he hears the echo from the wall.
time interval = ........................... s [3]
(b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the
clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall.
How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes.
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
13 For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) (i) What name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical
charges to pass through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and
charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

PMT
14 For
Examiner's
Use
11 The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is connected up.
2Ω
resistance wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2
resistor? Tick one box.
smaller same greater [1]
(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a
voltmeter connected across the 2 resistor.
State the value of the resistance of the resistance wire.
........................................ [1]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.
combined resistance = ........................................ [2]
(d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in
Fig. 11.2.
A
resistance wire
2Ω
Fig. 11.2
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

PMT
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) What is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in Fig.11.2? Tick one box.
zero
1
2
3
(ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in
Fig. 11.2? Tick one box.
zero
less than 0.3 A
0.3 A
more than 0.3 A

[2]
(e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by
measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on
either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.
thin wire
fixing pin
fixing pin
crack
Fig. 11.3
The wall moves and the crack widens slightly.
(i) the length of the wire, ...............................................................................................
(ii) the resistance of the wire. ........................................................................................

[2]

PMT
16 For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) Complete the following table about the particles in an atom. The first row has been filled
in as an example.
particle mass charge location
proton 1 unit +1 unit in the nucleus
neutron
electron
[6]
(b) (i) Which of the particles in the table make up an -particle?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state
1. the mass of an -particle, .................................................................................
2. the charge of an -particle. ...............................................................................

[3]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05

Paper 2

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Paper 2

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

PMT

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2006 question paper

0625/02 Paper 2, maximum raw mark 80

Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

(b) (i) get larger OR get firmer F B1

(ii) molecules move faster )

(c) (i) increases F B1

(ii) smaller volume F B1

2 (a) 6.0 ± 0.1 )

(b) AB x BC x CD OR l x b x h OR his figures shown multiplied F B1

(c) cm3 OR cu.cm OR cubic cm F B1

(c) (i) D = M/V in any form, including our figures F B1

4 (a) chemical, gravitational, internal, kinetic 2F,2C B1 x 4

(b) kinetic NOT internal F B1

5 (a) idea of greater speed F B1

(b) (i) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

(ii) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006

Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

6 (a) (i) wavelength labelled clearly ± 3mm F C1

(ii) horizontal line F M1

(b) (measure time for) (count number of) (measure time)

7 (a) ray bent down at first surface F M1

(b) (i) dispersion ticked F B1

8 (a) end/point on magnet C B1

(c) (i) S at top and N at bottom F B1

(ii) reasonable curve F B1

(iii) 8 (days) ± 0.5 OR his correct value ± 0.5 C B1

10 (a) (i) A and B (both) OR A and C (both) C B1

(iii) electrons ticked F B1

(v) light or glow indicated somehow F B1

(b) beam deflection shown F C1

(c) idea of no obstruction for cathode rays/electrons C B1

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006

Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

11 (a) (i) 10 x 2.5 F C1

(ii) speed = distance/time in any form F C1

(d) total distance = 3000 (m) F C1

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006

Centre Number Candidate Number Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Answer all questions.

For Examiner’s Use

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

direction of motion of piston

© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06 [Turn over

length of CD = ........................ cm [2]

unit of volume = ........................... [1]

© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06

reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]

reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]

(c) In a certain experiment,

mass of stone = 57.5 g,

volume of stone = 25 cm3.

density of stone = ........................ [3]

© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06 [Turn over

(b) Which form of energy increases as the fruit falls?

(c) Which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls?

(b) Most substances expand when they are heated.

6 Fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water.